* ^gc  0000 0&  
^VENTIST  
HEWTAGE CENTEfT  
j.me* White  
ANDREWS UHlVe«fi(tt  
cmnoKS  
1. Esra-Kehamiah Period* OBSERVATION, supported ly-CALCUUII^^  
(manuratenta,—papyrua, tablet, stone, and eclipses* j'  
2. Crucifixion Full Moon of 1st Century. OBSiaVAIIOI, and CALuUUnOK  
blended (sinoe l.aooabean time® in 2nd oentury*)e'  
J* I8I4J4. Kew Moons* CALCUUTIO&, supported by QB3LHVAXIOK of moon*s  
position, available in standard alnanaos~of modern  
timet*  
X Modern Jewish Calendar of Little Use to Problem  
(!) Months out of Acroement with Moaalo Feast a  
Et8tS  •"For those feasts widoh }loses ooamanded to be celebrated in the  
first, third,  and seventh month, do not agree with Marsh, May,  
and September, in the climate of Falestlne.tt»»iiiohaeUs, Joanne  
Davide, "Commentationes De irensibus Hebraeonsa," p*  17* Bremae,  rm  
(2) Rabbinical Calculation Bxaludea Friday Passovers  
"Therefore paasover frequently falla two complete days later than 
thte real opposition — one day in consequence of the Equations,  
another day in sonsequenoe of their  postponing paasover fro;. "  
* Dies lllloita [Monday, Wedneaday or Friday] to a Dies llolta**  
--Albiruni, "the Chronology of Ancient Kationa," p. 11&* Tr*  
b^l^u, London, j&fi. *  
(3) Rabbinical "Postponementa" Lot Used in First Century  
"From numerous passages of the &ishna, tte Babylonian jalmud,  
and Jerusalem Talmud, it is evident that prior to the destruc- 
tion of Jerusalem in 70 A*P*, no day of the week was excluded  
frosa the oalendar for the fixation of the lat of 'fisri**1—Sidersky,  
David, "fttude sur l'ori{;ino aatrononl.que de la chronologic Juivoy1" 
in "Kemoires preaentes par divers  savants a 1*Academic ass In- 
fi'qr:iptione et belles-lettres de lUns'titut de France," p. 660*  
Taris* 1913*  
(U) kodem Jewish Year ha3 Greater Variations in length than 1st  
~ — • - jentury Years  
"In the modern Jewish oalendar greater variations are found in  
the lengths of the ordinary and ecibolismic years, respectively,  
especially the ordinary short year of 353 days, and the abundant  
emboli ami0 year of 385 days, isauea of the aystern of postponements  
[dehiyoth], inaugurated later by the Jewish doctors of Babylon,  
but which did not yst exist in the first century**—Sid er sky, Idem,  
P* 6??»  
jaatheaati o-kulo,' 'therefore, computed for them [the Jews] the cyoles,  
and taught them how to find, by calculation, the conjunctions and  the appearance  
of new moon. • • This refora was brought about nearly 200 years after Alexander  
(c. 112 B.C.). Before that time they uaed to obeerve the Tekufoth ( )  
i*e. the year-quarters."--Alblrunl, "Chronology cf Anelent Hatiins," p. 68*


-2- 
II True Mosaic First Month  
(1) Moses Gave Israel ft snored "Agricultural" Year in Flaoc of Egyptian  
"frow ihls Is precisely what MoSes lid. He had li not in kis ***  
power to adopt a strictly astronomical solar  year, and thereby to  
oorreot the irregularities of the lunar yearj but he ami led him- 
self of the aid of an eoonouioal solar year, which never admitted  
an error of a whole month without correcting it, and which every  
husbandman could easily comgrehend»w--kiohaeli8, "commentaries on  
the laws of 0ses," p. 206, Tr. by frii'th. " London, itti?. ~  
(2) Acrcor:>ent of Lunar arid Solar Year Secured by Barley mve Sheaf  
Hl40w, while the Israelites continued in the land of Canaan, the  
agreement of the lunar and solar years was thus secured t—On the  
second day of the Passover, which was the 16th of the first month,  
(Abib or Eisan) an cmer of the first fruits of the ripe grain was  
required to be offered to the Lord (Lev. 23*10,11). 1&sa the last  
month of the ecclesiastical year, i.e., Adar, had arrived, there- 
fore, and it was discovered  from the backwardness of the season,  
dependent upon the revolution of time,  that the grain was not  
sufficiently ripened for the offering, an extra month called Adar  
Sh«il or Veadar, 1. e., the second Adar, was introduced, and the  
Passover thus observed »in its proper season.• This intercalary  
month would be required to be employed sometimes every second,  
and sometimes every third year. There were other causes besides  
the one already stated for the irfcercalation at the Passover  
periodi—thus, the lambs must have grown sufficiently for the 
Passover saorificeci and it became necessary to allow time for the  
ripening of the wheat, so that the  two loaves offered as the first  
fruits of their wheat-harvest could be brought on the feast of  
Weeks| again, that the produce of the field might be gathered  
la, as required, before the arrival of the featt of Tabernacles.  
The 15th of Kiean, thencould not be observed as the first day of 
the Passover, if it occurred before the vernal equinox, but an  
intercalation was made by which its observance, and, consequently,  
that of the other festivals, would be deferred. Such was the sys- 
tem observed during the Israelites stay in Canaan." Wa agues Lyons  
and Abraham De Sola, "A Jewish Calendar," p. 16. Monl  
(3) Mosaic First Konth Known as Ear-Moon  
"The first moon, which nearly corresponds to our April, Moses  
does not denominate B'iean, the name which it bears among other  
Oriental nations, and even in Hebrew, but he gives it a name which  
lnoludes a definition, oalling it Abib ( ), or the Lar-noon,  
declaring it to be the first month"oF*the y*ar.w~-S&ohaeli7;  
"Commentaries on the Laws of Moses/ pp. 206,20?.  
"The words hodesoh ha-ablb usually are translated by *month of the  
new grain' or •month or tho ears,1 because  the Hebrew word abib  
is synonymous with •maturity of the corn.*"—Side  
r<tky*"  p. 61I+.  
Etude sur  
Vorigins aetroncmique de la ohroftologlc julve," p  
(U) Sickle the Sign of the First Eonth  
"For not iii tho twelfth month, when the time of winter  still hangs  
on, as I have before said, Is the month of new fruits located, since


-3- 
the new fruits are not yet ripe, and sines indeed they cannot  
put the tickles to the harvest* For especially has the divine 
Lav constituted this as the sign of the first month•"•-Buoherii,  
Aecidli, 'Coireuantftrius De Dootrina Te;;,porum," p. h72, l\ntVerffae,  5- •••'ME^'fy,'-' ..: ••Tvnrrr .q.r• 'nr  j.yr"r; r , • W •'••-'  
($) Passover . onth Follows March Hains  
•The first of these festivals, the Passover, the feast of un- 
leavened bread, occurred in Abib, the first month of the Jewish  
year, corresponding to the last of March and the beginning of  
April* The sold of winter was past, the latter rain had ended,  
and all nature rejoiced in the freshness and beauty of the spring*  
time* The grass was green  on the hills and valleys, and wild- 
flowers everywhere brightened the fie Ids • The moon, now approach- 
ing the full, made the evenings delightful*"«—Vthito, Ellen 0», 
"Patriarchs and Prophets, p* 537»  
(6) Prayer and Fasting Appointed if Latter aain is Insufficient  
"In like manner if, in th~ ti e of oke Passover, or near that tirae  
in the land of Israel (for in this time the trees are in flower  
in Judea), the rains have not issued forth, a fast is appointed,  
and ories are sent forth until either the showers benefioial to  
the trees have vallen, or the time of rain has ceased * * -«8ainonl dae,  
Kosis, *De Jejunlo," pp* 31*32* Ex Bebraeo latine conversl a  
Ludovioo De CompTepne, Parisils, 1667*  
(7) Ho Fasting qftor March ~ Haln Should Then Be Laded  
M''hen the Utroh period is over, indaedfwheu the sun enters that  
sign whioh is oalled Taurus, then no fast is appointed) for rain  
at this time is for an evil omen, since it would not rain straight  
forward [continuously] froa the beginning of the year*"—»Iden, p. 1+3*  
(8) Barley Quickly Hipens After gains Are Over  
"The harvest falls out entirely according to the rainy season*  
After the rains cease, the corn soon arrives at fi*turityi but it  
usually remains in the fields a long time after it is ripe*  
Barley is ripe in the beginning of April, in the plain of Jerioho,  
according to Lariti l*c* In all other parts of  Palestine, it is  
the ear at this time, and the <sars turn yellow about the middle  
of this month*"—Buhle, Johan Gotlieb, "Koonomioal Calendar," p*  
Brunsrjiok, 178g* . f •  
Passover  
(9) fets All Subsequent Feasts  
^If this feast of unleavened bread is not celebrated in its season,  
every successive festival is dislocated from its appropriate period,  
einoe the month Abib is laid down in the law of God, as the epoch  
from whioh every other is to follow*»--Caiman, -^torloan Biblical 
Repository,  April, !&;£).  
(10) Karnes of Maoedonian Calendar I'ontha in Josephus Identio&l with Jewish  
a* "That the Macedonian lunar months corresponded v/ith the I.ebrew  
is proved by Josephus, who almost constantly designates the Jewish


months by the M&oedonian names our rent among the Syrian Greeks for  
whom ha wrote. The month Xanthicus for ins^anao, in Joeephua, la  
absolutely commensurate with Mean, Loua with Ab, Eyperberetaeua  
with Tiari,"--Browoe, Henry, "Ordo Saeolorum," p. l&U London, IGiA*  
b ."Concerning  the Months of the Greeks* But by them March la called  
Diatrua* April, Xanthiousj May, Artemisiua, cto.H~Vcnerabllis 1 edae,  
"Opera quae auperaunt omnia," p. 117* Edldlt J, A* Gilaa, Vol,"  W 1  V'^JjiV,.*' ' ift'l'y ' """"-' ""  1 "' ""  VI, Lo nai&l , loLtf«  
o.nKow let ua haar Joaephua, »But God oononanded Moaea to say to  
the people that they should have ready at hand a su. orifice, pre-
paring it from the 10th day of Xanthious on the li+th day of the  
month, which month among the Egyptians is indeed called Pharauthi,  
and a»on£ the Hebrews, Kiaan, but the Macedonians call lanthioua*  
(Joaephua, 1, III, o. X, par, 5), Therefore in the month Xanthicua,  
that is April, etc/—iiohaelia, John Qavid, "De ^enaibus I'.cbrao- 
oraa," ft, ft.  
d, Sealiger gives table making the Laoedorxian moatha identical with  
the Jewish (See 11 fle Bmendatloae Tempo rum," p, 579. Franoofurt, im*)  
e, "We give here the nanes of the months as they were current after  
the exile and during the age of Jesus, to which we add the Mace- 
donian names employed by Joaephus as the equivalents of the Jew!eh 
onea. , ."—[fable follows]—O.apari, Sh, Ed., "Introduction to the  
Life of Christ," p. g, Tr. lay Evans, Edinburgh, l87C>,  >» ...... ;. _ ,m ^ mm .,. • . ^ v. ^ • v .. ^ • . ^- w.i


111 Qrder l>Qr:th8  
(X) Tine fron Jonjunction to Conjunction • l/2 days (29 >550566)»  
"The month of the Jews was, as we have said, a lunar month, and  
extended from one appearing of the new moon  to another. The time  
elapsing between one astronomical new moon and another consist*  
of 29 1/2 [Always has 29 full days, but the hours and minutes  
vary.—G. Amadon.] But since the month consisted of entire days,  
they oounted It with pretty regular alternation as 29 or 30 day*  
• • * The Jewish month oould never have more than 30 days, and  
never fewer than 29•"--Caspar!, Oh. id., "Introduction to the  
Life of Christ," p. 5»  
(2) Two Lunations Count 59 Pays  
"On widoh account they reckon a lunar month tobe 29 l/2 days* but  
the tice of two moons, 59 daysi whence they alternately keep a  
deficient and full month, for the reason that a two-moon period  
is 59 days. Therefore, in a year there happen six full and six  
deficient months, and they amount to 35b dayst so month after  
month, they keep full and deficient."— Gemini, "Slsaenta ..3>.ronordao,"  
p. 35. Interpretc I:,done Bllderloo. In "Uranologlon," oura & studio  '  
plonysll Petavil. Paris, 1630.  
(3) Calendar Months Alternate 30 and 29 Days  
"Her revolutions* too, will oooupy thirty days one month, and twenty- 
nine the next, and so on alternately»*-*Plinyj>_"Batural history/  
p. 112. Tr. by Bostook and Rllsy. London,  
(it) Summer Months an Alternate 30 and £9, Vays  
"As the six surfer months have JO and 29 days alternately. * ."  
Sid er sky, David, "Etude aurl«orl;;lne astrpnonique de la chronologic,•  
ju 6oi. • / ^ • ^yn-T' •,;. ^ 4 v  
(5) In Actual Practice 29- &nd 30-^y oaths Alternate  
HSince the astronomical "length of a month is equivalent to 29  
days, 12 hours, Ut minutes, 3 seconds, (ideXer, Kaadbuch der  
Jl^onolo^ie, X*l<3), then it must follow that la actual practice  
months of 29 and months of 30 days must pretty regularly alternate 
with one another."—Sharer, Etui I, "History of the Jowlah People,"  
First Division, VoirIX, p. 365.  
Hotei Sharer also gives quotation from Uishna [Arachin 11. 2], which he  
sessss dates In second oentury, A.D., and from it concludes that Xumr year  
might vary "from 352 to 356 days*" This irregular length of the Jewish  
year might have been possible during second-century period of Horaan  
persecution against Jews, living in oaves and desolate places, and  
not allowed to announce feast days, ^e have records of those times  
during which three successive InteroaXary years were ordered by Kabbi  
Adda ("Hastings Lncyolcpedia o- Religion and £thlcs," Vol. XII, art.  
Jewish Calendar. p. I17;. Iheae instances are recorded In Talanud  
(Sanhedrin, 12a)/and plainly show under what difficulties Jewish 
caXendatlon had to operate In period after fall of second temple.  
Albiruni also hands down information that Jews of  this time told the  
Christians lies in order to Xead them astray in regard to their calendar


methods* "Chronology of /anient ftatlons/ p. 3Qg. Xhyhad two  
systems of reckoning fchs tokufoth, one searet/and one oomaonly  
known. (§1dersky, "tude * . * ohronolgle juive," p. 621+.) But  
theee methodo oi abnonrial timei could not agree with an ancient  
Hebrew system whioh had been established for 1500 years*  
(6) Always aftFixed Interval" Between Kisan and fisri  
"From iUsan to Tlsri ere 177 days* But not always from fisrl  
to Kisan are 177 daya in a common year, and neither in an embolis~  
mic year are there always 207 days [in this latter half }«—So alitor,  
Joseph, "De Emendations lep.poruru/ p. Uj.  
(7) gsquenoe of Months Controlled by l otion of Sun and lloon not Caprice  
^ihros months whiok are perfect fccoordin*: to the appearance of the  
new moon, can follow eaoh other [in 2nd half  of year], whilat of  
the imperfect months not more than two oan follow eaoh other* And 
their following eaoh other ie possible only in oonsequenoe of the  
variationa of the motions of the two great luminaries (sun and  
moon), and of the variation of the setting of tie sodiaoal signs  
(i*e* the varying velocity with whioh the sun moves through the  
various signs of the F. ol i ptio). M —A lb iruni, "Chronology of An dent  „ . , fa , __ I mil 1 •• 1 «• II m III III n 1 mmmmmmmmmmmf 3*tlons,» p.  
"But not always on days of the same name does the moon make the  
same configurations [phases],fe^ on  different days, according  
to the inequality of motion*w~G«ai,Ri, "Elements Astronomiae/ p. I4O.


*  

mf*  
Vf Passover FoXXowed Da^r of FuXX Moon In Jewry  
(X) gytniag of PassahMust Coincide with Full Moan  
''Tudood, we knew, that the evening of the Jewish Fassah must 
coincide with the full moon (aooording to the text® quoted above  
from Josephus and from Philo). • . Sometis** it oar* happen that,  
due to oertain circumstances, the new moon is fixed on the day  
after the next day of the conjunction, and that the Passover is  
celebrated 2h hours after the full moon, but the contrary Is  
impog8ibXe»H~«>31deraky, David," Etude sur 1'origins astronomlque  
de la chronologic julve," p. 6^6. 1  
(2) Caspar 1 Cites Aristobulus in Ancient Cor, c ,tary on Pentateuch (AnatoXlus)  
"Uristobulus,* it is there said, »mintaine<J that at the paschal  
festival the sun as weXl as the moon must necessarily have passed 
the equinoctial point} that the day of the pasohal festival began  
on the ^ith of Hisan after the evening, -when the moon stands'  
jtlay.ietrioally opposed to the sun, as any one oan see at tl~ti:  io  
(^TuITmo^. •'"-Innanarl. 'rik. V.ri . " ' T^l^-M^ T ^  
Christ,"  

r If 11 >y*iiiVii r - niia i n nTin II Wiif • •• , r^Jf, , - * , "f. ~ , - VMM* 
on.•^CasparF, Oh. "Introdu^i^T"uT^lIr^^  
. S* Edinburgh, 1676 •  £•321  
(3) NanoeX Cites Same Reference froi> Aaatoliue in loll.  
hAnd indeed we say that they err not a little who think that the  
Passover must be eeXebrated before this beginning, of the new year,  
which he [Anatoliua l*th oentury A. D.} adds by the authority of  
PhiXo and Josephua, and even of AgathobuXus aaS AristobuXus, one 
of the 72 interpreters of the Bible, and from whom this noted  
statement Is produoedi <Sinoe there are two equinoxes,in spring and  
autumn, separated by equal distances, and since the passover was  
appointed on the lith day of the first month after the evening 
when the moon is oaught in the region  opposite to the sun, as  
also the eyes may prove, surely the sun is found holding a part  
of the vernal equinox, but the moon, on the contrary, of the &u- 
ttemX,»w^aaoclii, HiooXal, "AnaXogla Uiorooosmi ad aaeroaaon,w  
See on da Pars, Ad Ulios PratresT oolt« 1203, 12JJU hutetiae  
, arial arum, Xol'l.  
(M Buoherlus Quotes janon of AnatoXlus in X63ij.  
"AristobuXus also adds thisi' In the day of the Passover not only  
must It be observed that the sun crosses the vemaX equinox,  but  
aXso even the moon. For sines there are two equinoxas, spring 
and aututan, separated by equal distances, asd since the Passover  
was appointed on the lJjfch day of the first month, aooording to  
the evening, when the moon is caught in the region opposite to  
the sun, just as even it is permitted the eyes to see, the Sun  
is found holding a part of the vernal equinox, but the moon, on 
the contrary, of the autumnal. Buoherli Aenidii, *De Doctrine  
Tovporum," p. I4Ig.  
(3) Scot Heresy (7th Century) Recalls AnatoXlus re Pasohal Moon on 13th  
reproves the Soots beoause, although they oeX'e- 
brate Easter on the Xl*th, yet they do not have the plan of the  
pasohal Xl±th which Anatoliua commanded. For he maintained the  
pasohal Xj+th to be only that which the full moon would overtake  
in the evening, that is, before sunset, and would moreover be oalled  
the 13th, not the l^th.w»Petavii, Dlonysli, "Anlmadverslonee"


LENT TO ADVENT SOURCE MATERIAL  
BY MARY E. LAMSON


ii •  
wmm  
M '  
i'iiiiiiii-i!  !!;; ifjljj  
gijljpslfl  
S "I!.'!!""::!!!!  
IPsi&llsS


oooool  
L.I  
I  
AOVFHT SOURCE WCTfOH  
Sensra!  b«v m,; j . ivefH;i-i)ay Adtii.:^  
»v ASHINGTO.M, O. C.  
No..  
AOVEKTIST  
HERITAGE CENTIH  
James White U&MW  
ANDREWS UNiVE^1


^evmYlmngs are called a! sanctuary in the 
it The Lord, fea. tiii. 14. >  
2. Heaven, Ps. cii. 19. Neither of these can ue  
meant in the verses before us. •  
3. Judah,  Ps. cxiv. 2. But Judah is utterly cut off.  
See Isa. lxv. 15 : " The Lord God shall SLAY THEE, r 
and call his servants by another name." Literal  
Judah, then, is not to be cleansed, but is slain.  
4. The Temple is called a sanctuary, 1 Chran. xxii'.*  
19. But that is destroyed, and hence cannot be  
cleansed.  
The Holy of Holies,  Lev. iv. 6. That also is  
f destroyed; and besides, it is superseded. See Heb  
ix. 1—12.  
There are only two things more, in relation to God's I  
people, that are called a sanctuary, in the Bible. The ' 
sanctuary to be cleansed, spoken of in this chapter, is'  
the one "trodden under foot" with "the host." If  
the "Prince of the host," v. 11, is the'Lord Jesus  
Christ, then, there can be no doubt, his true church is 
" the  host.'" By whom, or what, was the host to be  
I trodden under foot? Two desolating powers, called  
"the daily and the transgression of DESOLATION.  
The word " sacrifice " is not in the text, and has no 
warrant for its insertion, except the mere opinion of  
the translators. The whole period of these desolating  
abominations, as noticed in this vision, from the Ram  
pushing, [for there the vision commences,] is 2300  
days; then was to terminate the treading under foot. 
In the detailed explanation of the vision, in chapters 
xi. andxii., we have the time from the taking away of j 
the first of these abominations to the removing of the ? 
second, viz. 1290 days/; Dan. xii. 11 • then we are as-1 
sured that 45 days KIO>V a$e to bring tis io the ""end \  
of the days;" then Daniel was to have his resurrection. * 
If the sanctuary means here, as some suppose, the;;  
church, then it is to be cleansed, or, as the margin has I  
it, justified, at the resurrection, of Daniel,:$vith all the  
saints. imh  
thief in the night: in which the heavens ahal pass  
away with a great noise, and the elements shall melt  
with^fervent heat; the earth also and the works ha  
u • , . , , are therein, shall be burned up. Seeing, then that all  
eant by its being cleansed, or H^e v. ^ dissolved,  what manner ot persons  
' - ' ' ' oSt ye iW in all holy conversation and godliness,  
Sngy for, and hasting unto the coining o ef,  
God wherein the heavens being on fire shall he dis- 
solved!^ the elements shall rfwith fervent heat  
Nevertheless we, according to his pTonnse, ook f  
i e " on',1 n npw earth, wherein dwelleth  

The church, is sometimes called a sanctuary, oi  
temple of God. See 1 Cor. iii. 16, 17. and Eph. ii. i  
["'21, 22. If, then, by " Sanctuary" the church is to be 
j  understood, whal  
[justified?  
Let us now see if we can find any other sanctuar  
j to he cleansed. The earth or land is called a sanctu  
ary. See Ex. xv. 17: if;Thou shalt bring them in  
! and plant them in the mountain of thine inheritance, in  
| the place, 0 Lord, which thou hast made for thee  
|l  to dwell in; in the sanctuary, O Lord, which thy hands  
1 have established." See, also, Psa. lxxviii. 54 : " He  
j brought them to the border of his sanctuai-y, even to  
this mountain which his right hand had purchased."  
[Compare these with Eph. i. 14 " Which is the ear-
liest of our inheritance, until the redemption of the  
our chased possession.'' See, also, Rom. iv. 13 : " For  
jtho promise that he should be HEIR OF THE  
I WORLD, was not to Abraham, or his seed, through  
jthe law, but through the righteousness of faith." 
I Thus, we see, the earth is the inheritance, the sanctuary  
Iof Christ and his saints. Has it been defiled? and  
does it need cleansing?  See Isa. xxiv. 5: "The  
earth is defiled under the inhabitants thereof, because  
they have transgressed the laws,. changed the ordi- 
nances, broken the everlasting covenant. God crea-
ted the world to be a mountain ofliolincss : but the  
wicked have corrupted it, so that .the Lord is' tfojniril'y  
it by destroying " those who destroy [corrupts the 
margin reads] the earth." See Rev.  
xi. 18. The  
I very ground is now under the curse,  in consequence of  
| sin. See Gen. iii. 17 : "Cursed is the ground for thy 
\sakc." This world has been trodden under foot by  
vvicked  men and wicked  governments  unto this day.  
?oe Dan. vii. 23: "The fourth beast shall be  the  
urth kingdom upon earth—which shall devour the  
We earth, and shall TREAD IT DOWN and break it  
icces." Such is emphatically the character of all  
ly governments ; they .are a usurpation ofj'the  
and have corrupted the earth  

.. #..m> muiTh'W&! (itiikd'? I f-nrwer-—.%.  
See 2 Pet. ilH 7: " The heavens and the earth which  
are now, by the same word are kept in store, reserved  
Unto FIRE, against the day of judgment and perdition  
of ungodly men." £  
When will this earth be clcansed ? We have already  
seen it is to be at the day of judgment; but before 1 %  
give a direct answer to "the question, I wish to callj|  
attention to the following texts : Titus ii. 13 : " Look-, 
ing for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing j-
of the great God and our Saviout Jesus Christ." Ps.|  
3 : " Our God shall come, and shall not keep silence ; |'  
a fire shall -devour before him, and it shall be very | 
tempestuous round about him." Also, Ps. xlvi. 6—.  
9: "The heathen raged, the kingdoms were moved: 
he uttered his voice, and the earth melted. The Lord|  
of hosts is with us; the God of Jacob is our refuge^  
Selah. Come, behold the works of the Lord, what" 
desolations he hath made in the earth. He rnaketh  
wars to cease unto the end of the earth; he breaketh|®  
the bow, and cutteth the spear in sunder ; he burnetii 
the chariot in the fire:' See, also, Ps. xcvii. 3—5 :  
" The fire goeth before him, and burneth up his ene-SB 
mies round afrout. His lightnings enlightened the 
world ; the earth saw and trembled. The hills melteo 
like wax at the presence of the Lord, at the presence- 
of the Lord of the whole earth.". See Nahurn i. 5, 6 :  
" The mountains-quake at him, and the hills melt, and  
the earth is burned at his presence, yea, the world,  and*  
all that dwell therein. Who can stand  before his in- 
dignation? and who can abide his anger? his fury is 
poured out like fire, and the rocks are thrown down by  
him." See Matt. xiii. 40—43 :" As therefore the? 
tares are gathered and burned in the fire, so shall it beg j  
at the end of this world. The Son of man shall send* 
forth his angels, and they shall gather out of his king-||  
dom all things that offend, and them which do iniquity,  
Tnd shall c-'.:-- ffiftrr^nit, - &  
be wailing arid gnashing of teeth." Lastly, see- 
iii 10-13 : " But the day of the Lord will come as a- 

I  
-;  tj  •  
|new heavens and a new  
righteousness "  
I 0 0 f)  

Having now decided what the sanctuary is,-hat- 
• is to bo cleansed at the end of this world ; anS that it  
l is to be done by fire,-the way is now prepared to show  
the END of this world will conic.  
Wf And hesaid uutol  
Unto "two "tHousand 'three hundred days: then  
j shall the sanctuary be cleansed." ^B  
The inquiry, " How longthevisim," clearly related 1 !  
1 to tilt; " Ram" and " Goat," as will as " little horn" jgj  
i —and, the 2300 days are given in answer to the  
question,—" How long the vision ?*'  
It was the meaning of the vision Daniel so^  
verse 15: "It eame to pass, when I had 
vision, and sought for the meaning, ' &c.  
It was to make Daniel understand 11  
Gabriel was sent—verse 16 : "I heard a i  
between the banks of Ulai, which caller1 
Gabriel, make this man to understand the uf  
It was to make Daniel understand the,  
came—verse 17 : "So he came near J  
and said unto me, Understand, O son !  
The first thing Gabriel would  
stand, was, that the vision was lt  
17 : " At for unto1 the tir  

reset i i  
ai.J


8 K  

He \yefcM havelframelunderstand that the^  
cud intended was the last end of indignation,''—verse  
19 : " Behold, I will make thee know what shall be in  
the last end of the indignationand he would have /g  
Daniel know that, " at the ki-Mi tfppoiuled, the eud shall I'  
-be * w  
The 2300 days,is the only time appointed That v  
'nn,- cannot be. allied to a particular agent or event, ft  
without vioier.ee to the whole subject.  
Now, let us inquire, what Daniel did understand, and  
jvhat not. The angel explained everything to him re- 
' speeding the Ram, He-Goat, and Little Horn. But  
^Daniel telk us in the last verse, " I Was astonished at 's  
the vision, but none understood it.'*. What did not 
Daniel understand? There were, evidently, three  
tilings he did not understand: 1st. What "sanctu- 
ary" wag intended in verse 13; 2d. He did not un- 
derstand how to reckon the days; and, 3d. Where to  
gnmence his reckoning. 
'hjGrt r ft^  
ength of the prophetic numbers.  
3n this, little proof need be offered, as there  
JJS 'probably no point on which Protestant  
commentators have been so well agreed, 
as that the days in Daniel and John are 
representatives of so many years. Faber. 
Prideaux, Mode, Clarke,' Scott, the two  
Newtons, Wesley, and almost every exposi- 
tor of note, have considered this "a settled  
question. InM; so universal has been tins  
interpretation of these periods, that Professor 
fctuart says, in his Hints, p. 74 "IT IS A  
SINGULAR FACT THAT THE GREAT MASS OF INTER- 
PRETERS in the English and American world  
nave tor many years, been wont to under- 
stand the days designated in Daniel and the  
Apocalypse as the representatives or symbols  
of years. I have found it difficult to trace 
the origin of this GENERAL,  I  

ALMOST UNIVERSAL CUSTOM."  might say  
• ') c t j i- 

m  
G  
/  
LA^'  

M  
f 
w  
dim- 
„ : /  
A \i- 1,1  
. ( (ji  

who are living on  
when Christ comes will be destroyed b v  
2 Thess. 1: 7—9. "And to you who are trout!  
rest with us when the Lord Jesus shall be reveS  
from heaven with his mighty angels, in flaming; 
taking vengeance on  them that know not God, and  
obey not the gospel of our Lord Jesus Christ; 
shall be punished with everlasting destruction from 
presence of the Lord, and from the glory of his powd  
2 Peter 3 : 7, 10. " But the heavens and the eai  
which are now, by the same word are kept in stc  
reserved unto fire against the day of judgment and  
dition of ungodly men. . . . But the day of the LR,  
will come as a thief in the night; in the which  
heavens shall pass away with a great noise, and i  
elements shall melt with fervent heat, the earth a|  
and the works that are therein shall be burned up.' ;  
Rev. 11:18. 18: 8. " Therefore shall her plagi  
come in one day, death, and mourning, and famin  
and she shall be utterly, burned with fire ; for strong  
the Lord who judgeth her-"  
Deut. 32: 22. "For a fire is kindled in mineang  
and shall burn unto the lowest hell, and shall consu:;  
the earth with her increase, and set on fire the fount,  
tions of the mountains."  
Isa. 66:  15,16, 24. " For by fire and by sword  
the Lord plead with all flesh ; and the slain of the L<i  
shall be many. .  . . And they shall go forth, and lc  
upon the carcasses of the men that have transgress!  
against me ; for their worm shall not die, neither sh  
their fire be quenched; and they shall be an abhorrij  
unto all flesh."  
Ps. 37 : 10, 20, 38. " For yet a little while,  
the wicked shall not be; yea, thou shalt diligently ct:  
sider his place, and it shall not be. . . . But the wick/  
shall perish, and the enemies of the Lord shall be 
the fat of lambs—they shall consume ; into smoke sh 
they consume away. . . . But the transgressors sh;  
be destroyed together; the end of the wicked shall ffi  
cut off."  
Ps. 11: 6. " Upon the wicked he shall rain snares.;",;  
fire and brimstone, and an horrible tempest; this sh4  
be the portion of their cup."  
Prov. 2: 22. " But the wicked shall be cut off fro  
the earth, and the transgressors shall be rooted out of it  
Nahum 1:5. " The mountains quake at him, ar'  
the hills melt, and the earth is burned at his presenc  
yea, the world, and all that dwell therein."  
Zeph. 1:3. "I will consume man and beast; I w  
I consume the fowls of the heaven, and the fishes oft  
! sea, and the stumbling-blocks with the wicked; and  
will cut off man from off the land saith the Lord."  
Malachi 4; 1—3. " For behold, the day corneal  
• that shall burn as an oven ; and all the proud, yea, and aj  
that do wickedly, shall be stubble—and the day th;J  
! eometh shall burn them up, saith the Lord of hosts, th:  
it shall leave them neither root nor branch."  
Matt. 3: 12. "Whose fan is in his hand, and  
will thoroughly purge his floor, and gather his whes  
into the garner; but he will burn up the chaff with ur  
quenchable fire."  
ji 13: 30, 40—42. " Let both grow together until  th]  
harvest; and in the time of harvest, I will say to thj  
H reapers, Gather ye together firstthe tares,and bind ther  
in bundles to burn them; but gather the wheat into m>j 
barn. ... As therefore the tares are gathered ant] 
burned in the fire ; so shall it be in the end of the world 
The Son of man shall send forth his angels, and theV  
grjshalljgather out of his kingdom all things that offend, anc,  
them which do iniquity; and shall cast them into a furj  
nace of fire,there shall be wailing and gnash'  

Trouble £?ij:hev Last Day.  
BROTHER HIMES :—-Much has been written  
>n the text found in the xii. ofDaqiel: " And 
here shall be a time , of trouble, &c;" yet I  
iiave seen nothing ans wering to my understand- 
ing of that prediction. Many are looking for 
fits accomplishment previous to the advent of  
Christ: but I do not so understand it. For  
hough it stands in order, on prophetic record,  
eforethe deliverance'of the people of God, 
nd the resurrection of the just, yet this is not 
vident in proof of that position, inasmuch as  
jhe object of the angel was not to show a suc-
cession of events; but to show that these sever- 
al events would take place at a certain time,  
without ^giving their successive order. He  
lerely asserts what will be found true; that  
when this trouble comes, "all whose names  
.re written in the Bti^c of Life, will be deliv- 
red," or " caught u|> to meet the Lord in the  
iir." It is evident, However, to my mind, that  
|he resurrection of the just, and the deliver- 
lee of all the righteous, will take place mine-1  
Wiatthj previous, or at the iime this trouble | 
Yommenccs. . —»* '  
!i But in what will tIris trouble consist ? Prob- 
ably no inconsiderable source will be disap-f  
^pointed hope. Thosfe on whom it will come, ;  
{have heard the Midhight Cry, "Behold the  
[Bridegroom eometh;" but like the inhabitants. 
Lf the old world, when warped by Noah, are full.  
V ' unbelief—th .y hope it will not be so. How  
f. it then must" be their disappointment and  
jewhen they : ee the real ly of all they,  
j^eard, and they unprepared.. Nor will it 
^ trifling source of trouble, to see their]  
rpious friends separated from them, and taken!  
| up to meet the Lord, while they are left to !  
consume away in a 'burning world. For  
we are told, " one shalL be taken and  
the other left'." Husbands from wives ;  
parents frcM^children ; brothers from sis- 
ters; and  iBids" from friends, then will  
|part, no more to meet. "One will be  
taken and the other left." And how will it  
wring the very soul of that husband who finds  
himself left, as his much-loved wife assends the  
clouds of heaven. Or that youth, standing be- 
, side his affectionate mother, sees her arise on 
j angel's wings, and pass beyond his vision to 
jjneet the Lord in glory. She perhaps stands  
weep ng over him, and entreating him to fly to  
Christ; when,in a moment she is gone. . And 
0 what bitter anguish and KEEN remorse, will fill  
his soul as he thinks of her last words, and  
flowing fears. He calls, but 4here is none to  
answer—hope is gone, forever gone; and "the  
wrath of God abideth upon him." Who will 
not say, " My punishment is greater than I can  
bear !" Again, the thought of slighted mer cy j  
in Jesus Christ, will prove a more than scorpion j  
1 sting. 
I But to come more to the sense of the text:  
all will be wild, and mad confusion. The  
world will be on fire. Not, 'however, like the  
fires of a burning city before a mighty wind;  
ut, in slower progress—volcano-like. TheJ  

earth rocks—she reels to andjro; and trom  
very boivels, heaves up on every side her bur  
ing flames;—she throws her fires of melte  
lava up to the cloud-top height  , and pours  
Ithem forth, in furious madness, on cities, vil- 
lages, and the affrighted people, too, who flee 
in frantic wildness.  
i Thus, progressively the work goes on, until 
ithe earth is pure;—perhaps for forty days;  
roytd ^^^d^^^^^^i^^^i^^rii^r- 
meni and  torture those they hate, ijta predicted,  
Zechar^h, xiv. 13. And will ministers be  
? Some,, I fear, who lead their flocks in  there  
unbelief, who sHy "the Lord delays  his com- 
ing," or in any way give their influence against ^  
his Advent near. I fear for such, yet many?  
such there are. And will their people love  
them, SVhen they find themselves deceived— 
when hope is gone forever ? Ah no; I seefri 
to see them rise in demon madness, and hunt ||  
with fury those who taught them, even unto 
death. Thus, "there shall be a time of trouble,  
such as never was since there was a na- 
tion, even to that same time." Who, then,  
" among us shall dwell with the devouring  
fire ? who among us shall dwell with everlast- 
ing burnings ?" Sinners, flee to4he mercy seat. |  
Ministers and people, "trim your lamps and? 
have them burning;" for "Behold the Bride-
groom eometh;" lie is even at the door. Your  
brother  in hfipe of the speedy Advent.  
B. BROWN.  
Fori Jinn, New York, Feb. I6lh, 1343. '  
- ?  
•  
Bap


"••M v  
fey'S.  

-their work  
M LETTEK FROM E. C. CLEMONS. I  
WORCESTER, NOV. 27, 1844. I  
DEAR BRO. MARSH,-Although Israel is not yet |  
I •» redeemed" we cannot distrust the Lord. We  
I k; o»Thai He will " peritatn the mercy promised to  
OgT^ and renVember his holy covenant-. H  
"f® While we acknowledge our fallibility we do nod  
•I S away our confidence, which hath great tecoin- 
<m\i,ease t>f reward." For we have need of patience ,  
: h r^ after we have done the will ot God we might  
; Hi ^i^omise For yet a litrie w^ 
BW llial siiall come will come and will no t,.rry. How  
| (at this tinie) the just shall live by fa.th : but if any  
• m , draw back, my soul shall have no pleasure in  
I m " \s we are led in a measure to relmqu.sh  
I ' unesand seasons" tor the Lord to  come, we are  H admonished that we Aus. watch lest  he come on  
II w a thief. The signs, or iiid.cations ol his ap- 
M oach ave been gi«u. whereby we know that " he  
1 I at the door"—momentarily to be expected and  
h\rl • we ar. exhorted to " hit up the head lor our redemp- 
tion drawet.li nigh." " The afllicted and poor peo^- 
pie that irust in the name of .he Lord" are to be  
rlori'iusly delivered. Tlierelo.e  it is written, bins  
3Tugb?e. of Zio.i: shout, O Israel: be glad an  
leioice with all the heart, U daughter ot Jerusalem.  
n,e Lord ihv God in the midst ol thee is mighty.  
i,e will save il.ee, he wiltfrejoice over  thee with joy.  
plieo comes the promise, I wid gamer .hem that are  
sorrowful for <he solemn a-semi. y who are olI il.ee  
whom the reproach of ii was a burden. Z.^t  
Asit is wriueii. "fora little moment have I lor  
,iken the.-, but ... great mercies will I gather.bee  
lespectins ttm* it seems m Hie tliat we are brought  
' , ,!,lt i),Miit-in the parable of .he 1 en Virgin  
V,licit immediately  precedes .he foolish asking oil  
^ .fine wise. lit ih'e parable of.l.e .mpor..u.at« w,l  
,w. we have arrived at the piiM just preceding th  
,ve..Kin« of the a iveisaries-wh.re lauh . ru,...*- 
| ,,hough the avt ugn'g .s to be done speedily when  
11im elect cry night and day.  
Now the Lord is verifying his promise, " I will  
feed the flock of slaughter, even you, 0 poor of 
the flock." Now he is saying by Peter, the end of 
all things is at hand: be ye therefore sober and  
watch unto prayer. Beloved, think it not strange  
concerning .he fiery trial which is to try you, &c.  
Again he says by John, and now little children abide  
in him: that when he shall appear ye may have  
• confidence and not be ashamed before him at his 
'coining." Now the Lord speaks to us by James,  
I Be patient therefore, brethren, unto the comingjof  
j the Lord—grudge uot one against another, brethren,  
lest ye be condemned: behold the Judge slandeth  
| before the door. Again by Paul the words of the  
; Lord are that the Bufferings of this present lime are 
I not worihy to be compared with ilie glory which  
shall he revealed in us. Finally, my brethren be  

ffflrt&peniieut-ihe world at large- 
seem* to be confined to the household ot taith.—  
Again our position is in the toes of the image, which 
sy mbolizes the dominions of time described in Dan.  
2 • In Dan 7 : we lead that the horn which is the  
symbol of the Papal power speaks great words even  
till the beast was slain and his body destroyed, and  
I given to the burning flame. The "great words 
I are sounding-we are in the toe, of the image where- 
by we know that "sudden destine ion is| nigh—- 
whereby we know that AW-Chnsf is speedily to be  
destroyed by the brightness of the Lord's coming.  
In Zech 11: 9—11 we have given the breaking  
of God's covenant with all "the people." This  
seems to be the finishing of the mystery of God m  
the days of the voice of the seventh ange when he  
shall begin to sound. Rev. 10: 7, parallel with the  
scattering of the power of the holy pe .pie.  
Ezekiel 12: 2"2—28. When as mw could the  
proverb be used in the land of Israel, «the days  
are prolonged and every vision faileth Never  
Now then is the time to w hich it apphes. I ell  
hem therefore thus saith the Lord God I will make  
this proverb to cease, and they shall no more use it  
as a o-overb in Israel, but say unto them Ike days  
ureal hand and the effect of even,  
am the Lord: I will speak and the word that I shall  
speak shall come to pass,  
lonsed." See Isa. 14: 24-27; 59: 10, 11, in  
connexion with Is. 5: 7, 8. This then is the pa- 
tience time. The husbandman, the Lor wane  
bavin" " long patience." '1 he sower, Math. 13, hath 
sTed it appears, the last see 1 in Ins held, i.e. words  
of the kingdom in the world-and now he is waiting  
for the ripening of the " precious fruit of the earth,  
.  
in us. Finally, my brethren be  
ruitg in me ijuui, and in the power of his might,  
ut on the whole armor of (*od. Eph. 6 : 10—1ft.  
Thess. 5: 1—8.  
Aside from the prophetic periods, the prophets  
if. no light respecting the position we occiipyiin  
e stream of time. We read, when lie shall have  
SI accomplished toseatler the power of the holy peo- 
! ide, all these tilings shall be finished. Dan. 12: 7.  
j What things] Manifestly tin* •»  

! irive  
•• , i vvnat tnings .' Manifestly the "wonders'' men- 
S; tioned in the preceding verses—the staudiug up', of  
Mich; rI (coming of Christ) and the resurrection.  
great scattering oi the power of the holy  e see a  
' people—they have com  
power of the holy  
miparHtivelylitife influencn 'aMjflB&q&rwimni nisi  

mm  
m&m  
•  
t; . Ml 8  • i - 
TM  •  
WtM •  
tl . I ^  

THE BOOK OF DANIEL.  
Daniel is the fourth of what are commonly  
called, the greater prophets. If he were not 
of royal blood, (which the Jews affirm,) he was  
of noble descent, of distinguished personal beau- 
ty and intellectual power, and of a remarkably  
lovely natural disposition. He was removed to  
Babylon at a very early age, in the fourth year  
of Jehoiachin, king of Judah, in the 606th year 
before the Christian era, and seven before the  
removal of Ezekiel into the land of captivity.  
Having been instructed in the language and  
literature of the Chaldeans, he afterwards held  
a distinguished office under the government.  
An honorable testimony is borne to his wisdom  
and piety by the prophet Ezekiel; (Ezek. xiv.  
19. 20.) and the former, even at that time (and  
Ezekiel was his contemporary,) had become, it 
would appear proverbial. Daniel was in high  
esteem with the kings of Babylon, and especially i,Hlger  flatter themselves that a long temporal millennium  
with Nebuchadnezzar; and after the conquest wij, interveue between the present time and the coming of  
of the royal city by the Persian arms, he ap- Chrjst? And why wi]j not a], who are stationed as  
pears to have enjoyed the same distinction in the watchmen on the walls of Zl0I1 exa:ni[ie the Bible for 
courts of Darius and Cyrus. He lived through- ^^ in reference  t0 this question, that they may  
out the captivity; but he does not appear to have y ^ trulh whereoMhey teach, and no-depend on 
returned to his own country when the return Those wh() refuselhu3 t0 exa  
of the Jews was permitted by the decree ot Ly- . „• „ ,  
rus: and the time of his death is not known. or bes,tate ,n Procla!m,| honest con™tlons  
Although the name of Daniel is not prefixed  
to this book, there is abundant evidence that he  
was the author of it:—he often speaks of him- 
self in the first person, and records addresses  
made to him by name  
His writings may be comprised in two parts,  
> | the historical and the prophetical.  
I. The Historical portion of his writings;  

A Quandary.—We are informed, froui.an#^>  
tic source, that the four congregational elergymi?  
Hartford, Ct, met a short time since, arid appointed o .S 
of their nunrter, the Rev. Mr. Sprague, to collect the evi-I 
dence contained in theSible in favor of a temporal miitenjl  
nium, and deliver the result in the form' of a lecture. 4J-1 
ter examining th question for a week, he acknowledged|  
that lie could not find satisfactory evidence in the Bible to 
prove a temporal millennium; and Dr. Bushnell acknow-|  
ledged that he came to the same conclusion a year ago. |  
The quest ion wafe then abandoned, and no lecture preach-1  
ed upon the subject.  
It is thus that this fnblc is abandoned upon investiga- j  
tion by Jhose who have long given implicit confidence to]  
tin, theory. But. when it is thus found not to be con- j  
tained in the word of God, why do not our ministers be |  
honest with those who are relying upon their teachings* ] 
and undeceive them in that respect, that they mfty no  

Bi  
of what they find to be the truth, incur a fearful responsi- 
bility ; and souls are hanging upon their faithfulness in! 
these respects.  
; • '•. " U ' • ij,/. A & • '-;• <. • :  
Result of Candid Inqna-y — A company or^j  
Ministers in New Hampshire met to investigate th* '  
,, , Scriptures on the subject of Christ's coming. They  
containing a record of the circumstances which  published t]tQ result as follow9.  
led to his elevation, and the various schemes  
of his enemies to effect his destruction, (chs. i.  
t0 3: The prophetical portion of his writings;  ; h Second Advent of our Lord Jesu.  
X ultimate conversion of the Jews and' Gentiles  
' to the faith of the gospel, (chs. vii. to xii.)  
This is a most amazing series of prophecy,  
extending through many successive ages, from 
the first establishment of the Persian empire, up- 
Sfiii! wards of 530 years before Christ, to the general  
resurrection, and consummation of all things.  
His predictions relative to the four great Mon-
archies, have been most remarkably and circum- 
stantially fulfilled; and so also have those rela-
tive to the time of the Saviour's appearance, the  
duration of his ministry, and the beneficial con-
sequences of his death. We might safely take  
our stand on the writings of Daniel, and prove  
the Inspiration of the Scriptures, against the 
world. ' He has declared the things which (now)  
have been; and declared them hundreds of  
years before they came to pass; and this is a  
pledge to us, of the truth of the declarations 
which he has made, relative to things which, 
yet, are to be hereafter.  
•  

Agreeably to the call of elder P. Clark and;|  
Others, published in the Morning Star of the,.  
14th ultimo for the purpose of investigating the- 
1®!*. - 
f^ir1  

VVJ i  m  

House, at Pittsfield, N. H. on September 21 si.  
viz: P. Clark, J. E. Davis, D. P. Cilley, J  
Meader, T. Sanborn, J. Knowles, M. Clark  
Wm. Swain, J. Morrell, S. P. Fernald, A,Simp  
son, J. McTrickey, J. Harvey, M. R. Hopkins,  
W. D. Johnson, J. Kimball.  
After a careful and thorough investigation^, j  
j according to the best of our ability, of the 2i;|  
7th, 8th, 9th, 11th, and 12th chapters of t.h$j  
prophecy of Daniel, and the 2d chapter of ^  
i Tliessalonians, iu connection with the work^  
- of  Mr. Folsom and Professor Stuart, which  
; vestigation continued three days, iu the great-. J  
est harmony, the following resolutions weu\  
adopted by the confefence, as the opinion of t!  
conference, viz:  
1. That the four parts of the iraa«e seen 1.;  
Nebuchadnezzar in his dream, and the I'o1. 
beasts seen by Daniel in hit vision, r, prese-1 
tho Babylonian, Med^persUn, Grecian T. 
Roman kingdoms.  
2. That the k.ngdom of Qof<: is to be set |  
during the divided^state of the  ]>•• nan^ingdn .  
in which date it was not, when Chri: t eommen. 
hi? ministry.  • •ill  
3. That trie term " man ffsr-i" ^ed bv '  
2 Thess. ii 4. and the terr»" liU  

I


„ in the 7th chapter of  his pop}  
refer to one and the same thing ; and that as  
that man of sin had not been revealed A. D. 54,  
when Paul wrote his epistle to the Thessalo- 
mans, and that as Antiochus  Eptphanes died B. C.  
164, .218 years before Paul wrote the above evislle,  
the terms " man of sin and little horn" CANNOT  
refer to Antiochus Epiphanes.  
4. That the term " 2300 days," in Dan. viii.  
14, is used to designate 2300 years in the ae- ||  
complishrnent of the events referred to, that the  
70 weeks of Dan. ix. 24, are the first part of the  
same, that the entire vision terminates A. D.  
1843.  
4. That the sanctuary to be cleansed, Dan.  
viii. 14, means Palestine, or "the land of pro- 
mise."  
6. That the 7th chapter of Daniel teaches  
plainly, that the little horn there spoken of, will  
make war with the saints and prevail against  
them, until Jesus Christ appear personally at 
the judgment of the great day : consequently 
that th'eretcan be no millennium prior !o that 
day. And that the parable of the wheat and  

Watchman;? What ofjhejiight ?  
i--hla '8 a question made by theTreveiierl 
when he meets a watchman, andhT^p&tsT&finitel  
answer. And why, because it is a part of the watch- 
man's duty to know the hour; and should he meet with I  
a dozen, or more, he would expect they all would agree I  
in time, especially if they had one common standard I  
i accessible equally to all. ' I  
The enquiry has gone out through the world, "What is ]  
the hour V and the answer by a few- has been that the 3  
morning dawns; but .he greater part are saying, " Not J  
so. Some have not looked at the hour, and others tell I  
the benighted wanderer he « cannot ascertain it for him 1  
—that when the morning breaks he will know it" i  
Are these watchmen all the Lord's sentinels, and 1  
faithfully doing their Master's work. Has he set them  
upon his watchtowere, and confounded their language, 1  
| so that they can neither understand each other, nor others'  
understand them? Has he told one it is midnight, ano- ]  
ther it is cock-crowing, and a third it is morning J  
i W hence these contradictions ? >7  
The Spirit of God is one, and can it tfocE such contra- j  
t rieties! Can it teach one ambassador to declare that 1  
the tares in Matt. 13th  chapter, teaches us 1 * 'S ready for the eickIe' ^d another, that the  
plainly the sentiment that there cm be no mil- ^T 18 ?°W only puttinS forth? It cannot be so, and  
lennium prior to the end of this world I . 13 the state of thin«s» many a sinner and  
6. That we recommend to our brethren a ;nxi0us traveller  n,ayhis way, and be lost fo.ever.  
; candid and prayerful examination of the subject ! °W 'vhal 18 the Amative? The watchmen must be  
of the Second Advent of Jesus Christ, A. D, pa ' and left t0 decide their labored controversies by  
1843. their far-fetched, opposing theologies, as best they can,  
Si 7. That  it is safe and right, for all Christian While.ths unlettered shepherd must follow his star, which  
; ministers who believe that the Second Advent' certainly Wl11 >ead him to the place where he will find  
I of Christ will take place A. D. 1843, to preach ! hl8faviour- 
or lecture upon the subject of the Second Ad- j . Chnst did tel1 the disc>Ples that His Spirit shouldlead  
vent at such times and places as they deem m mt0 a11 truth' and when by that, they would not  
" • provided, nevertheless, that such dis- "eed lhe teachings of;man-andthough the true ambassa- »proper  
:| courses do not interfere with their regular pas~  
| toral duties, arid conformity to the vows under  
I which they  are placed to the several denomi- 
i nations with which they stand connected.  
I After the adoption of the above, the confer- 
ence voted to have these proceedings signed by  

dor of God is to be honored for his works' sake, yet the  
" dumb d°g that wi» not bark," or the snarling one, that  
barks only because his bone is in danger, must both be 
left unheeded, to reap each his own reward, when the 
Master shall come to reckon with them.  
The time is short-and though 1843 should not close  
the drama, yet be assured it will soon be said, " Let him  
that is filthy be filthy still." Then it will be unavailing  
wthe chairman and secretary of this conference,  
land that these proceedings, thus signed, be for- 
| warded to the Morning Star and Signs of the 10 piead the learned Caching we may have had-the 
I Times for publication. ° hlSh or the low church, to which we are attached—but  
PETER CLARK, Chairman. have lve been fai,hful stewards in our Lord's heritage'  
G JES-SE  MEABER, Secretary. •»-»--*•-•  
W Pittsfield, Sept. 23, 1842.  

has the poor disciple had as high a seat at our table, and  
been as welcome a guest as the one of costly equipage'  
w^x " Be "0t deceived>  God not mocked," and people and  
: mti priest will reap what they have sowed.  
« ^Hi I The responsibility of the watchmen is truly an awftil  
H T. . , ® h0,e CreaUon Groaned one; peculiarly so at the present day. If they now cry  
soonVK * TH 13 C°Ttravail and a new age will  peace'il wou]d seem that the last trump alone can awa- ' ^Ze^J^SZ Z^'^Tb^ : ken thT" ^"enotnowawakeJthe^ofThe  
parchments, the lei&^d^^^fiJSt^ I ZV^ T T* 3 dreadful ^ -hich  
-pTn 'V ,eirr S0C,ial and unswiaI compacts "re mot , T bUm Up°D them' and wtat ™ they  
I 1 1 s arelrumSZ Hn?S;)fJhe ^ «ains a„a Id° in the end the'eof'™hat will they-what can  
1 JKuman DoSf tn ; and the ""'^Hities  of I they say when the flock which thev have lulled to sleen  1 ssa fiTOsvsr ^biasfs^ rw; I rbe gathered before them' ^a is  
BK/^rS S; storm about to burst upon their defenceless  
R^great change, the sure prelude of a mighty system of ?e I  
volutions IS marked in the pensive countenances of 2  
who think and believe that the Lord AW? S ^ ""  
American Millenarian.  
ja,  

Then shall the scoffer, the hypocrite and hireling lie  
down together under the scalding drops of that God  
who said,« Cursed is he that doeth the work of the Lord  
deceitfully."  
3 PKMMU.  

<« Behold, I make all things new.'* * """"fT ^^i^^nmsic^mgs with pious, delightful  
What, all things new] Yes, all things. Glory to yeah, " rapt with seraphic fire," looked through  
God, for the » exceeding great and precious promises" ev<f dark ages to come to the Land oi promise,  
contained in His word. But Khat are the "ail thing," I pir( sombre and mournlul stumsofJ eremian,  
I which are to be made new] There is to be a | ^^ ^ Sr ^ST  
heaven and a new earth," for, the first heaven and the fslay iouthsome sores, forsaken for a time 
first earth will pass away. There is to be no more SOT- 
row, nor pain, nor crying, for these are present things, 
and have existed since the day of Adam's transgression, 
and are, therefore, old things, destined to pass away and 
be forgotten with the old earth, and never again " come  
j into mind." There will be no more tears, for '• God him- 
self will wipe all tears from off all faces." This will be 
something new truly. The earth full of inhabitants, but 
no one among all the vast population will ever be known  
to shed a tear! But, again, no inhabitant of that land 
will ever say, " I am sick." How unlike the present day !  
Drugs and medicines, all and singular, and in all their  
multiplied combinations, with all the countless host of  
specifics for " every ill that flesh is heir to," and all the  
vain pretenders to medical science who administer  
them, will be utterly unknown. The three great profes-
sions which now feed and fatten upon the calamities,  
physical and mental, of the human race, will be super- 
seded by the one GREAT PHYSICIAN, who is the  
saving health of his people—whose favor is life, and 
whose loving kindness is better than life. But, there 
will be no more death ! That unrelenting tyrant has held 
universal and triumphant sway over all mankind for  
nearly six thousand years. Every man that hath been  
born of woman, and come into this world of sorrow, after  
struggling a brief period amidst its trials and troubles,  
has been pressed down by the heavy hand of death into 
the grave ! The grave, the grave hath swallowed up all  
flesh ! None have been exempt from it. It has opened 
wide its mouth to devour greedily the victims which  
death has furnished it, and these have been all the liv 'ng!  
But in the day when all things shall be made new, death  
itself shall die ! Death will be swallowed up of life ! 
The voice of mourning will no more be heard, and aor  
row and sighing shall flee away  

beej was not bereft of the hope inspired by tins  
Thi Through the thick darkness that surrounded 
waso caught a dazzling gjimpseof his Lord and  
ten-, the Son of Abraham. All the Prophets of  
Westament, delighted to follow the leading ot  
L Spirit, and break away from the utter and  
7 lations of the natural descendants ot Abra- 
dec!the "glorious light and liberty" of his spiritual  
E And when, under a better dispensation, the 
b0f our Lord preached the speedy fulfilment  
srreat and precious promise, they took particu- 
B' to show that it involved at once all the hopes  
.rood and all the fears of the bad. And lest the  
Rhapsodies of many of the Old Testament wn- 
mld be misapprehended, they furnished plain,  
0 and ample comments, to make assurance  
"sure, that the gracious covenant of God with  
cia reached down to the end of time, the resur- 
,f the dead, the coming of Christ, and the res- 
Is >f all things to more than their pristine glory  
Kedof Abraham, who are they—or rather, who  
reaVhy, JESUS CHRIST. Eighteen hundred  
tha0, this Son of Abraham came to this his estate  
yearsion) and most graciously and benevolently  
k, that all who would believe on him, should be  
\rs with him to his great and glorious mherit- 
He told the Jews, his kindred according to the  
< latthey were the real children, not of Abraham, 
1 >he Devil. He sent his disciples, (for a ievv £JA,  
1 on Him) with this good news to all parts oi* . •  
xld; namely, that he had come unto his own  
|tl  kindred, but they had received him not, and that  
Ire he would extend the blessings of this heir- 
c all men, Jews and Gentiles, who would believe 
„i. But first, said He, I must suffer and die, and  
in the grave. You also must suffer in this, the  
world, and also die and be buried. Many other  
"lions of believers on me shall also suffer perse- 
H • But mark!  

K ft  0s- %  \ \  
i  
«!i  
.. <J v • 1.. • . I. V—» I', and be laid in the house of death  
I ber!—watch ! I shall rise from the dead-I  
. , . . . tidespoil death and him that hath the power ot  
Bat the saints will have new bodtes, incorruptible bo-  ^ I,-_X shall ascend to my Father and your Father.  
ashall surely come again to my inheritance at the  
I cited time, and I will not tarry. I have given  
God is eternal life.  

dies, spiritual bodies. These vile bodies which we now  
have will be changed and fashioned like Christ' S glorioilS --iieu uuic, iiuu jl ».— ——- ® L ^ 
body. Then " we shall bs like him, for we shall see him If t0f y0U> (Peter, James and John,) an exhibition  
as he is !" " Behold, what manner of love hath the If; <r power and coming on the holy mount ot 1 rans-
Father bestowed upon us, that we should be called the jfiLUion. Be net dismayed when you see me dieion 
sons of God !" « O the depth of the.riches, both of the ft  W demand c^again to  
wisdom and knowledge of God ! how unsearchable are § ^ ha've spoken  of  me, and of my glory as a  
his judgments, and his ways past finding out!" "Thanks i r ^ C0nqnerOr. Read, mark, "reflect, and watch! ^  
be unto God for his unspeakable gift." " The gift of • ^ come speedily and suddenly, and bring my saints /  
me to eternal glory!  
ome thou and behold the kingdom of God. bee in  
promise, the rest that rertmineth to the people ot  
ft If you are a meek and righteous believer, you —  
1 inherit the earth for an everlasting possession, as  
heir with Christ. Let nobody cheat you out ot this  
rnal inheritance. Be not satisfied with a thousand  
irs1 possession. Let the dead bury the dead Let  
v , . . m - i-«»»u uH^lsi come to > jewS o-et back to Palestine if they can. But do J  
Hand, id a volume entitled, "An Introduction to Chris- du  hope oCnly in the resurrection of the dead. Let a f  
Jtiamty, by Josiah Sutciiffe. It was published in this-ithless church convert the world if they can, but do  
country" by J. Soule, [now Bishop] and T. Mason for <>u arise and follow Christ, and look lor Iim, who is  
the Methodist Episcopal Church in the FnitPH <jta,L .t )ur life, to appear from heaven. \ou shall not be dis- 
We copy from tL edition of 1817 "Hope on hope everj" It He come not  
from the second (improved) English Edition." pTfiT n is ^ l0°k fOT Him ^  
had, therefore, been exposed to rigid examination,'and  
may be implicitly relied on.  

fas the Pope's Dominion ^  
An emphatic answer to this question has just  
anrl in A rnlnmn <> i t- 
'-K- 

If He come hot  
- is year, IOOK lor aim — thousure, that  
11 hrist will surely come, and will not tarry, lie will con- 
|d md the vain calculations of those who rashly trust in  
,thschild, and dare to narrow down the infinite pro- tf  
•ruses of God to the insignificant  compass ot a MUten- 
nium of doubtful triumph. u '


if.  •  
mm 

by Daniel in ihe 7th chapter of his pre  
refer to one and the same thing ; andl  
that man of siu had not been revealed A|- 
when Paul wrote his epistle to the T1  
nians, and that as Antiodms Epiphanes di  
IG4, 218 years before Paul wrote the abm  
the terms " mart of sin and little horn"|  
refer to Antiochus Epiphanes.  
4. That the term " 2300 days," in Dj  
14, is used to designate 2300 years in  
complishment of the events referred to,  
70 weeks of Dan. ix. 24, are the first paj  
same, that the entire vision terminal  
1843.  
4. That ihe sanctuary to'be cleanse:  
viii. 14, means Palestine, or "the land  
mise."  
6. That the 7th chapter of Daniel t(  
plainly, that the little horn there spoken 
make war with the saints and prevail  
them, until Jesus Christ appear persoi  
the judgment of the great day : consef  
j that there* can be no millennium prior  
day. And that the parable of the wh<  
lithe tares in Matt. 13th chapter, teacj  
1 plainly ihe sentiment that there can bef  
J lennium prior to the end of this world.  
6. That we recommend to our brel  
candid and prayerful examination of the! 
of the Second Advent of Jesus Christ]  
184?..  
7. That it is safe and right, for all CI  
ministers who believe that the Second  
of Christ will take place A. D. 1843, to! 
or lecture upon the subject of the Secoi  
vent at such limes and places as they 
proper : provided, nevertheless, that su< 
courses do not interfere with their regul 
toral duties, and conformity to the vow:  
which they are placed to the several <  
nations with which they stand connects*  
After the adoption of the above, the  
ence voted to have these proceedings si<[ 
the chairman and secretary of this cor>f 
and that these proceedings, thus signed,  
warded to the Morning Star and Signs!  
Times for publication.  
PETER CLARK, Chain]  
JES-SE MENDER, Secretary.  
Pittsfield, Sept. 23, 1842.  
" The Whole Creation Groan^  
The whole world is now in travail, and a new am  
soon be born. The great regeneration, so Ion* a  
earnestly waited for by the sons of God, is at hrnd  
parchments, the leagues and covenants that bind th  
Hons m their social and unsocial compacts, are ni  
: eaten. The foundations of the political mountains  
hills are crumbling down to dust; and the imbecilitie  
>fSag allMHnan policies to give to man the knowledge of  
| r.ghts and the enjoyment of them, are becoming manii  
C to all. A solemn expectation, an eager longing for so 
K great change, the sure prelude of a mighty system of  
volutions, is marked in the pensive countenances of  
who think and believe that the Lord A!mi„v,<„  

THE TWO WITNESSES.—"And after three days |  
and an half, the Spirit of life from God entered in- |  
lothetn, and they stood upon their feet; and great * 
fear fell upon them which saw them. And they;  
heard a great voice from heaven, saying unto them,  
Come up hither. And they ascended up to heaven  
in a cloud; and their enemies beheld them."  
According to the report of the Mass. Bible Socie- 
ty 20,000,000 Bibles have been distributed by the 
British and Foreign Bible Society since its com- 
mencement in 1804. And the American Bible  
S Society, since its existence in 1816, have distribu- 
ted 3,000,000. It has also been translated into 150  
different languages.  

m  
•  
THE SEVENTY WEEKS.  In 1656, a dispute oc- 
curred in Poland between some distinguished Jew- 
ish Rabbins and the Catholics, respecting the 70 
weeks. The Rabbins were so hard pushed by this  
argument that proved Jesus to be the Messiah, the 
time of his sufferings being at the end of the seventy  
weeks, that they broke up the discussion. The 
Rabbins then held a meeting and pronounced a  
curse upon any Jew who should attempt to ascer- 
tain the chronology of this prophetic period. Their 
anathema was this. " May his bones and his mem-
ory rot who shall attempt to number the  seventy  
weeks."  
•HBIHHBBHHHHwBMiBwni  
IMITATE CHRIST.—Let christians, whenever they are  
tempted to be proud, or to act contrary to the example 
of the Lord Jesus, suppose him once more addressing  
them individually, in such terms as these: "How ill  
does pride or haughtiness become thee, O my disciple !  
when thy Master is meek and lowly, and so much deba- 
sed himself! Was he so poor? Blush, then  to think  
that thou art ashamed of poverty, or so anxious to avoid  
it. Did I condescend to wash the feet of my apostles •  
and can you reckon the meanest office of charity, self-de 
nial, or condescension, beneath you? When you heat  
me, in my word, ascribing all the glory to God, will you  
seek and delight in the applause of mortals? It 1 please  
not myself, do you deserve the name of my disciple, when  
seeking to please yourself? Did I drink off my cup of. •  
untflingled bitterness without repining ; and shall a small 
drop of gall, in affliction and disappointment, cause thee® 
to murmur or complain ? Why, O why, has the example y.  
of your Master so little influence upon your  temper and  
conduct? Remember me, and be humble, patient, and  
mortified to self and the world."—H. Hunter.  
MMMIttlHiH  
M  

believe that the Lord Almighty reigrys  
American Mitlenarianl  

' Srfr6 dr?amVDanip| ^ meaning,  thou, O king, art a king of kings. The God  
I heaven hath given thee a kingdom, powerand stren  
7: rfi WSeueSOeVe,r  the children of men dw  
H I • I li!° fieId or the fowls of heaven hath  
I given into thy hand." Thus, by Divine anSiX  
or gift, not by conquest, Neb'uinemr Z T  
I verbal monarch,n the fullest sense of that tc  Thou art tins head of gold.- All which  
him were to be universal in th* «m„ ''  succeed- 
for the time of hei .r ^L bvXl?"80 5 • 'I"1 hti to° caught a dazzling gli  
they were constitutedThe £ Redeemer, the Son of Abraham,  
all human anthnrit» , " representatives * th„ ni(i Testament, delighted to .111 wuBuiuiea tne flesd and representatives I  
all human authority and government. P | 
thee/' 6' Sha!1 aris° an0thor kingd™ inferior  
This inferior kingdom, and successor of Chaldea  
Babylon, was the Modes and Persians. Dan f ? 253  
tl,hird ki"£dom °f ^ass, which'sh  bear rule over all the earth."  
The third kingdom, and successor of Media and P(  
sia was Greece. Dan. 8:21. The history will 
found in the Apocrypha. 1 Macc 1 • 1  
"The fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron."  
J&J^jaoce** Greece and its diyisiol  
was univers 

fetes of SfflylBSSsWpou ^  
hope. Isaiah, " rapt with serapluc lire," looked[through 
the vista of dark ages to come to the Land of Promise.  
The more sombre and mournful strains of Jeremiah,  
are ever and anon lightened up withgorgeousvisions  
If the glory promised to his ptous Father Abraham  
Job, covered with loathsome sores, forsaken for a tune  
of his God, was not bereft of the hope inspired by tins  
»romise. Through the thick darkness that smrounded 
lim, be too caught a dazzling  
- — — UUVvi.ooui ui vireece a  and at the time of our Saviour's birth, 
Luke 2:1.  
a/SZT"*?3,T b^aketh in Pieces- and bruise 
all these, shall it break m pieces and bruise. Rot 
conquered and bruised the known and civilized world  
And whereas thou sawest the feet and toes part1  
ootter a clay and part of iron, the kingdom shall  
divided, but there shall be in it the strength of the ir,  
forasmuch as thou sawest th« i™  lav."  

— oncugu! ur lne  as thou sawest the iron mixed with  
Rome was divided among the barbarians who co  
Zlffe^ kingdoms on tl|  -r-- —— iciicu iiieir Kin  
uins of the empire. But still the imperial power, whd  
: expired in the west, in 476, was by a vote of tl  
ate transferred to the east; and it existed there  
he pope gained supremacy in Rome. So that the pur  
ron of Romanism existed with the clay of the barbs  
mns. And when tho mn^U ."_ .  ,,1U1 llJC  
And when the consular imperial power ceased  
it was to make way for the papal Roman  
flltn (Kn : v r» •  ,wmmj papai lvuuiau power. Thit  
vas also the pure iron of Romanism, in connection wit  
he barbarian kingdoms of clay  
"And as the toes of the feet were part of iron and  
artly broken." ^ be Part]^trong and  
First, the great united Romanempjre, then tbeeo^  
THE TRUE SEED AND TRUE KINGDOM.  
With unequalled and most absorbing interest, I have  
been engaged for two years past in investigating for  
myself the proph etic Scriptures. One by one, my old 
prejudices have melted away, and now, with most un- 
doubting assurance, I am waiting for the coming of our  
Lord. jp  
How such an unscriptural and fanatical notion ever  
entered the mind of any good man as that of the con- 
version of the world by preaching, has been a matter of  
iutense curiosity to me. I myself believed it, not be-
cause I had satisfactory evidence, but because it was  
instilled into my young mind with my eailiest catecheti-
cal instruction, and because it grew with mv growth,  
and strengthened with my strength. Why I was thus 
taught,—why such an opinion had crept into the church 
—why it now sways the best and purest minds, con- 
trols our theological seminaries, gives the tone to al- 
most all preaching, and in fine, directs the entire be-
nevolent action of the day—this to me is a worse locus  
vexatissimus, than that which so harasses Prof. Stuart.  
The root of the evil is undoubtedly to be traced to  
the insme love of power and fame, which is the be  

l^S^SSkig^d^ofolbw the leading of  
•the Holy Spirit, and break away from the utter and  
final desolations of the natural descendants ot Abra- 
ham, into the "glorious light and liberty" of htsspiritual  
•children. And when, under a better dispensation, the  
japostles of our Lord preached the speedy. Mfilment  
of this great and precious promise they to, k particu- 
lar pains to show that it involved at once all the hopes  
of the good and all the fears of the bad And lest the  
poetic rhapsodies of many of  the Old Testament wrr- 
ters should be misapprehended, they furnished plain,  
prosaic, and ample comments, to make assurance  
doubly sure, that the gracious covenant of God with  
Abraham reached down to tW end of time, the re ur- 
rection of the dead, the coming of Christ, and the res-
titution of all things to more than their pristine glory  
before the fall. , ,  
The seed of Abraham, who are they—or rather, who  
is it * Why, JESUS CHRIST. Eighteen hundred ,  
years ago, this Son of Abraham came to this his estate |  
(in reversion) and most graciously and benevolently  
promised, that all who would believe on him, should fee  
H joint heirs with him to his great and glorious inherit- 
ance. He told the Jews, his kindred according to the  
flesh, that they were the real children, not of Abraham, 
but of the Devil. He sent his disciples, ( or a few  
believed on Him) with this good news to all parts 01  
the world; namely, that he had come unto his own  
! natural kindred, but they had received him not and that  
therefore he would extend the blessings of this heir- fl  
ship to all men, Jews and Gentiles, who would believe  
on Him. But first, said He, I must suffer and die, and ; 
be laid in the grave. You also must suffer in this, tlie  
Devil's world, and also die and be buried. Many other  
generations of believers on me shall also suffer perse- 
cution, and be laid in the house of death. But mar^  
remember!—watch! I shall rise from the dead—1  
shall despoil death and him that hath the power ot 
death—I shall ascend to my Father and your  i ather.  
But I shall surely comc again to my inheritance at the  
appointed time, and I will not tarry. I have given  
three of vou, (Peter, James and John,) an exhibition  
of my power and coming on the holy mount ot 1 rans- 
fomratioii. Bo net dismayed when you see me die on  
the cross. I shall conquer death, and come again to  
this world. Watch! watch! watch!! Daniel and all  
the Prophets have spoken of me, and of my glory as a  
Kin* and conqueror. Read, mark,"reflect, and watch! v 
I shall come speedily and suddenly, and bring my saints J 
with me to eternal glory!  
Come thou and behold the kingdom of God. bee in  
, this promise, the rest that remaineth to the people ot ^  
God If you are a meek and righteous believer, you  
shall inherit the earth for an everlasting possession, as 
co-heir with Christ. Let nobody cheat you out ot this  
eternal inheritance. Be not satisfied with a thousand 
years' possession. Let the dead bury the dead. Let .  
the Jews get back to Palestine if they can But do ..  
thou hope only in the resurrection ot the dead. Let a  
, faithless church convert the world if they can, but do M  
thou arise and follow Christ, and look for Hmi, who is 

i //  
II i  
setting sin of human nature. But so far as scriptural — Uf. ^ ftom heaVen  
interpretation is concerned, it seems to me. that th?. " ,,VT  
doctrine of the  conversion of the world, and the resto- 
ration of the Jews, is to be imputed specially to a radi- 
cal misapprehension of the Abrahamic covenant, lie  
it ever remembered that this Promise made to the 
spiritual Father of all believers, is the leading text of  
the Scriptures. U£on this the Psalmist, in sweetest  

thai.  

You shall not be dis- 
appointed. "Hope on, hope ever." If He come not 
this year, look for Him still. Be thou sure,  
Christ will surely come, and will not tarry, lie will con- 
found the vain calculations of those who rashly trust 111 
Rothschild, and dare to narrow down the infinite pro- 
mises of God to the insignificant compass ot a  
niuin of doubtful triumph.  V  m


ii*"^Deat.  
he Jews as a nation will not return to Pal- 1 Pla£u.e *  
5ne, because they are not the rightful heirs  
the promised land.  
r Matt. 3: 9. "And think not to say within your- 
elves, We have Abraham to our father: for I say unto  
you, that God is able of these stones to raise up chil- 
dren unto Abraham."  
John 8: 39, 44. " They answered and said unto  
him, Abraham is our  father. Jesus saith unto them,  
if ye were Abraham's children, ye would do the works 
of Abraham. . . . Ye are of your father the devil, and 
the lusts of your father ye will do: he was a murderer  
from the beginning, and abode not in the truth ; be- 
, cause there is no truth in him. When he speaketh a  
lie, he speaketh of his own : for he is a liar and the 
father of it."  
Rev. 2 : 9.. " I know thy works, and tribulation,  
* and poverty, (but thou art rich) and I know the blas- 
phemy of them which say they are Jews, and are not,  
but of are the  synagogue of Satan."  
3:9. " Behold, I will make them of the synagogue  
of Satan, which say they are Jews, and are not, but do 
lie; behold, I will make them to come and worship be- 
fore thy feet, and to know that I have loved thee."  
Isa. 65: 11—15. " But ye are they that forsake  
- the Lord, that forget my holy mountain, that prepare a  
table for that troop, and that furnish the drink-offering 
unto that number. Therefore will I number you to the  
sword, and ye shall all bow down to the slaughter,—  
because when I called, ye did not answer; when I  
spake, ye did not hear; but did evil before mine eyes,  
fj and did choose that wherein I delighted not. There- 
fore thus saith the Lord God, Behold, my servants  
shall eat, but ye shall be hungry; behold, my servants  
shall drink, but ye shall be thirsty; behold, my servants 
shall rejoice, but ye shall be ashamed ; behold, my ser- 
vants shall sing for joy of heart, but ye shall cry for  
sorrow of heart, and shall howl for vexation of spirit. 
And ye shall leave your name for a curse unto my 
chosen; for the Lord God shall slay thee, and call his  
servants by another name."  

FFIEVO WITNESSES.—"And after three days  
And it shalf, ihe Spirit of life from God entered in-
todoyouand they stood upon their feet; and great I  
joice ove,Upoa t|iem which saw them. And they [I  
_ and ye a voice from heaven, saying unto them, !l  eoest to-1® , , , , ~ ,  Jer. a? hither. And they ascended up to heaven J®  
. utterly fad; and their enemies beheld them."  
j that I gjing to the report of the Mass. Bible Socie-
Vmy Pr-\) ooo Bibles have been distributed by the__  upon vo 
forgotteand F°rt,'gn Bible' Society since its coin-1™"  
In the16111 tlie American Bible  
are to bt since its existence in 1816, have distribu- 
land be --0,000. It has also been translated into 150  
stead of - languages.  
ever—tc f  
shame. ^^B'  
BEL? SEVENTY WEEKS. In 1656, a dispute oc- 
real Ifjn Poland between some distinguished Jew- 
ful heu ins and the Catholics, respecting the 70  
Roir,| The Rabbins were so hard pushed by this  
one out>nt that proved Jesus to be the Messiah, the  
wTdl11 h'S bufferin?s being at the end of the seventy  
spirit, a'l'iat l^ey broke up ihe discussion. The  
but of (s then held a meeting and pronounced a  
Thos,pon any Jew who should attempt to ascer- 
Rom? chronology of this prophetic period. Their  
hath tjjma was this. " May his bones and his mem- 
which w|10 gjia|i attempt t0 number the seventy 
RPPH t.. ' 1  

^Tfinntanfthe dr?am',Daniel told its meaning.  
„:T'.,° km»'.frt a kings. The God of  
Could the title of the carnal Jews to the land  of  
promise,, be denied in stronger language 1  
Acts 13 : 45, 46. " But when the Jews saw the  
multitudes, they were filled with envy, and spake  
against those things which were spoken by Paul, con- 
tradicting and blaspheming. Then Paul and Barnabas  
waxed bold, and said, It was necessary that the word  
of God should have been first spoken to you ; but see-
ing ye put it from you, and judge yourselves unworthy  
of everlasting life, lo, we turn to the Gentiles."  
Rom. 9 : 25—28,31,32. "As he saith also in Osee,  
I will call them My people, which were not my people ;  
and her beloved, which was not beioved. And it shall  
come to pass,that in the place where it was said unto them, 
Ye are not my people ; there shall they be called, The  
children of the living God. Esaias also crieth concern-
ing Israel, though  the number of the children of Israel  
be as the sand of the ^sea, a remnant shall be saved :  
for he will finish the work, and cut it short in righteous- 
ness—because a short work will the Lord make upon 
the earth. • . . Byt Israel, which followed after the 
law of righteousness, hath not attained to the law of  
righteousness. Wherefore 1 Because they sought it  
not by faith, but as it were by the works of the law.  
i For they stumbled at that stumbling stone." _ „  
/ / . - " ' , . • 1 /~1 - J Anil «lii  

seed o. „  
shall tt. 
childrc >  
God, b-^*  
seed "'ATB  
// I f>. ql_"n "'"'And he said, Go, and tell this peo  
i TW vp. indeed, but understand not; and see y< I  
Ple' perceive not. Make the heart of this peo- 
£ and SeTeir ears heavy, and shut their eyes  
S?let™ thpir eves.and hear with their ears,ano  

indeed, but perceive not.  
tple fat, and make their ea  fpst thev see with their eyt_,  

CHRIST.—Let christians, whenever they are  
. ed to be proud, or to act contrary to the example  
, , Lord. Jesus, suppose him once more addressing  
wheth individually, in such terms as these: " How ill  
°f Pr0Jpride or haughtiness become thee, O my disciple  
Wt thy Master is meek and lowly, and so much deba- 
te At&!?seir! Was he so poor? Blush, then to think  
Gen. 13 : 14, 15. "And the Lord said unto Abram,  
after that Lot was separated from him, Lift up now thine  
eyes, and look from the place where thou art, northward, 
and southward, and eastward, and westward; for all the 
land which thou seest, to thee will I give it, and to thy  
seed forever."  
Gen. 17 : 7, 8. " And I will establish my covenant  
between me and thee, and thy seed after thee, in- their  
generations, for an everlasting covenant; to be a God 
unto thee, and to thy seed after thee. And I will give  
unto thee, and to thy seed after thee, the land wherein  
thou art a stranger, all the land of Canaan, for an ever-
lasting  possession ; and I will be their God."  
The following show that the promise was not of  
literal Canaan.  
Acts 7 : 4, 5. " Then came he out of the land of.  
the Chaldeans, and dwelt in Charran, and from thence, A  
when his father was dead, he removed him into this  
land wherein ye new dwell. And he gave him none in- |  
heritance in it, no, not so much as to set his foot on; 
yet he promised that he would give it to him for a pos- 
session, and to his seed after him, when as yet he had  
po child."  
Heb. 11 : 8—10. " By faith Abraham, when he  
was called to go out into a place which he should after 
receive tor an inheritance, obeyed: and he went out  
-Then said I, Lord, how long 1 And he answered, not knowing whither he went. By faith he sojourned  
TT til the cities be wasted without inhabitant, and the jn the land of promise as in a strange country, dwelling  
J- without man, and the land be utterly desolate. Un tabernacles with Isaac and Jacob, the heirs with him  
hous P Vthe same promise. For he looked for a city  which  
m with foundations, whose builder and maker is God."  

a^TIrvatAfiKVheeak,Ti0m' P™er and strength and glory. And wheresoever the children of men dwell  
^ftM? [-Is of heaven h.tht  
or gift, not by conquest, Nebucladn^ 'ar 17  
verbal monarch in the fullest sense of that tern  
him It rl S head °/.goW' A11 whicl> succeeded  
him were to be universal in the same sense- that is  
for the time of their supremacy, by Divine appoin men '  
hey were constituted the heij and representatives of  
all human authority and government.  
thee/' ' Shal1 a"Se an0thcr kinedom inferior to  
This inferior kingdom, and successor of Chaldea or  
Babylon, was the Medes and Persians. Dan 5 25 31  
"And another third kingdom of brass, which'shall  
bear rule over all the earth."  
The third kingdom, and successor of Media and Per- 
IVr^T"- Dan- 8:2L The history will be found in the Apocrypha. 1 Macc. 11  "The fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron "  
the successor of Greece and its divisions,  
Luke 2 fl. Uf Ur'S birth' was universal  
brketh in pieces>and ^^h  
all these, shall it break in pieces and bruise. Rome  
conquered and bruised the known and civilized world  
. T ^ th0U SaWC8t the feet toes part of  
notters clay and part of iron, the kingdom shall be  
.ivided, but there shall be in it the strength of the iron  
forasmuch as thou sawest the iron mixed w.th JJiry  
Rome was divided among the barbarians who con- 
uered Europe, and established their kingdoms on the  
urns of the empire. But still the imperial power, when  
: expired in the west, in 470, was by a vote of he se- 
ate transferred to the east; and it existed there until  
ne pope gained supremacy in Rome. So that the pure  
ron of Romanism existed with the clay of the barba- 
mns. And when the consular imperial power ceased,  
•t was to make way for the papal Roman power. This  
vas also the pure iron of Romanism, in connection with  
he barbarian kingdoms of clay.  
" And as the toes of the feet were part of iron and  
artjy broken. ^ ** Partly Etr°^ and  
First, the great united Roman empire, then the em- 
lre and the kingdoms, and afterwards the papal Roman  
ovver and the European kingdoms.  
"And whereas thou sawest the iron mixed with miry  
.ty, they shall mingle themselves with the seed of  
m; but they shall not cleave one to another, even as  
>n is not mixed with clay."  
Romanism, in its papal form, in our own age does  
lis. 1 here is no land or nation, civilized or savage,  
nown, where Romanism-is not found. And yet find  
t where you will, it is iron still; it may mix with the  
a eed of men, the nations of the earth, but it will not  
'end. Wherever it is found, it is the iron of Rome  
ill. It is the last feature of the image. The next is  
.8 destruction.  
" And in the days of these kings." 
In the days of the iron and clay, brass, silver and  
gold, which are to be broken to pieces together and 
carried away.  
" The God of heaven shall set up a kingdom which  
shall never be destroyed; and the kingdom shall not be  
left toother people, but it shall break in pieces and 
consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for-
ever."  
These four kingdoms are now distinct, either from  
the other, for the first time since Nebuchadnezzar.  
Chaldea is a part of the Turkish dominion, separate  
from Persia. Persia is separate from Greece, and is 
an independent kingdom among the nations. Greece  
is independent of either of the four, and has been since  
the Greek revolution of the present century. Rome is  
j^now the popedom, independent of either of the other  
•j Ithree. The European kingdoms also stand forth dis- 
^Jhnei and independent.from the etbzr ^aniwtioijp.  

The God of heaven shall set up his "kingdom, by  
gathering his saints, in the resurrection of the just. 
" For flesh and blood cannot inherit" it. None can  
enter it until possessed of immortal, spiritual, incor-
ruptible bodies. 1 Cor. 15. But in a moment, in the  
twinkling of an eye, at the last trump, the trumpet 
shall sound, the dead shall be raised incorruptible, and  
we shall be changed. Then,  not before, the kingdom  
of God will be organized. "They shall see the Son  
of man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and  
great glory; and he shall send forth his angels with a  
great sound of a .trumpet, and gather together his elect 
from the four winds, from the one end oY heaven to the  
other."  
One will be taken and the other,left. The kingdoms  
of this world will be left as they arc. And after Christ  
comes in mid-heaven, and takes his people home, the  
vision of ENOCH the seventh from Adam will be realiz- 
ed. »Behold, the Lord comelh with left thousand of  
his saints, to execute judgment upon all," &c. Jude.  
The office of Christ and his saints will be to execute  
judgment on the ungodly, until they are destroyed.  
Ps. 2. Joel 3. Zach. 14. Rev. 19.  
They, like Joshua and the people of Israel, must, be- 
fore they possess ' heritance, dispossess their ene-
mies. The process of destroying the image is the same  
as that by which Christ is to take the uttermost parts  
of the earth for his possession, as described Ps. 2: 8, 9.  
Lvery feature of the image has appeared, and fulfilled 
what is foretold; and the next thing to come is the ,  
establishment of God's everlasting kingdom; a kin^  
dom which shall consume all these four kingdoms; or, 
in other words, all human governments, and " stand  
forever," to eternity.  
This historical prophecy is conclusive evidence that  
the end is near, and God's kingdom at the door. This  
image, beginning with Babylon, properly begins with 
the captivity of Manasseh in Babylon, and covers the 
whole seven times of the Gentiles, and bondage of the  
church. It expires, as we have seen, in 1843.  
" THJ IMPATIENT  HOI"3 already swift  are hasting,  
And the last sands of measured time are \vastin» 
And few and dark the hours that intervene, 
Uetween this vision and the closing scene."  

PI  
7fl  
DANIEL'S VISION OF FOUR BEASTS. \ f  
Daniel, 1th Chapter.  
Another historical prophecy, combined with a pro- 
phetic period, is given in the 7th chapter of Daniel 
going over nearly the same ground as the dream of 
Nebuchadnezzar, with more minute  detail of time and  
events. This vision appeared to Daniel in the first ^  
year of Belshazzer, King of Babylon.  
Daniel saw four great beasts; the first like a lion  
(see the diagrams); the second like a bear ; the third  
like a leopard. The fourth beast was dreadful and  
terrible, with ten horns: and another little horn comintr  
up after them, before whom three of the first horns  
were plucked up by the roots. The  Ancient of days  
came with power and majesty, and myriads of attend-
ants; the judgment was set and the books opened.  
Ihe son of man came with the clouds of heaven to  
the Ancient of days, and there was given him an ever- 
lasting universal kingdom and glory.  
This vision Daniel wished to understand; and was  
told, verses 17, 18, "These great beasts which are  
tour, are four kings which shall arise out of the earth. 
But the saints of the Most High (not the Jews) shall  
take the kingdom and possess the kingdom, for ever,  
even for ever and ever."  
Thus, he is again carried through the four great  
monarchies, to God's eternal kingdom, which th» slint*  
inherit.


no name or attribute of Deity which it has not professed  
to possess and exercise, even to the power of forgiving  
sins; and has made'merchandize of indulgences for  
the commission of sin.  
2. The papal government has assumed supreme legis- 
lative power, and the authority to set up and put down  
kingdoms at will.—The following from Pope Gregory  
VIL, will illustrate this point:  
"The Roman Pontiff alone is by right universal.  
In him alone is the right of making laws. Let all 
kings kiss the feet of the Pope. His name alone shall 
be heard in the churches. It is the ONLY NAME  IN THE  
WORLD. It is his right to depose kings. His word is  
not to be repealed by any one. It is to be repealed by  
himself alone. He is to be judged by none. The  
church of Rome has never erred ; and the Scriptures  
testify, it never shall err."—Croley, p. 154.  
Again, the bull of Pope Pius against Queen Eliza- 
beth, reads, " This one he hath constituted PRINCE 
over all nations, and all kingdoms, that he might pluck  
up, destroy, dissipate, overturn, plant, and build."—lb.  
3. The saints have been given into the hand of the pope.  
—In A. D. 533, Justinian, the Greek emperor, in his 
efforts to put down the Arian heresy, wrote to the pope 
of Rome, the following letter:  
"Justinian, pious, fortunate, renowned, triumphant,  
Emperor, consul, &c., to John the most holy Arch- 
bishop of our city of Rome, and patriarch.  
" Rendering honour to the apostolic chair, and to  
your holiness, as has been always and is our wish, and  
honouring your  blessedness as a father; we have has- 
tened to bring to the knowledge of your holiness all  
matters relating to the state of "the churches. It hav- 
ing been at all times our great desire to preserve the 
unity of your apostolic chair, and the constitution of 
the holy churches of God which has obtained hitherto,  
and still obtains. ,  
" Therefore we have made no delay in subjecting  
and uniting to your holiness all the priests of the whole 
east. 1  
" For this reason we have thought fit to bring to your  
notice the present matters of disturbance; though they 
are manifest and unquestionable, and always firmly 
held and declared by the whole priesthood, according 
to the doctrine of your apostolic chair. For we cannot  
suffer that anything which relates to the state of the  
church, however manifest and unquestionable, should  
be moved without the knowledge of your holiness,  
who are TIIE HEAD OF ALL THE HOLY CHURCHES, for  
in all things, as we have already declared, we are 
anxious to increase the honour and authority of your  
apostolic chair."  
March 25th, the same year, the emperor wrote to the  
Archbishop of Constantinople, acknowledging the let- 
ter to the pope to be his, and maintaining that " he is 
the true and effective corrector of heretics." In his No- 
velle, published 534, Justinian decreed as follows:  
" We therefore decree that the most holy pope of the  
elder Rome, is the first of all the priesthood, and the  
most blessed archbishop of Constantinople., the New  
Home, shall hold the second rank, after the holy apos-
tolic chair of the elder Rome."—131si on Eccl. titles  
aud privileges.—Croley.  
By these letters and decrees, the saints were given  
over into the hands of the pope.  
4. Three of the first horns or  kingdoms were plucked  up by the roots before him.  
1. According to Gibbon (Decline and Fall of Rome),  
the kingdom of the Heruli, who conquered Rome and 
ended the imperial government in 476, were conquered 
by the Ostrogoths in 493.  
2. In534, Justinian, the Greek Emperor, to establish  
the supremacy of the Orthodox over the Arian faith,  
conquered the Vandal kingdom, and made it an  
appendage to the Greek empire.  
o 3. The same emperor, and for similar purposes,  
, made wir on the Ostrogoths of Rome in 536, and drove  
them  from the city. They turned around and besieged  
I the city for the purpose of retraining: it, until March  

538, when they raised the siege of the city and retired, 
leaving it in possession of the power who had already  
given the saints to the pope. Thus the way was open 
to carry the pope's power into effect. It could not be  
done while the Ostrogothic Arians had Rome in pos- 
session.  
From 538, therefore, we date the Pope's supremacy.  
In 538, the Pope began to exercise his law-making  
authority, without the intervention of a council. The 
use of holy water had been observed before, but in 538  
Pope Yigilius, by law, enjoined the use of holy water  
on entering and retiring from the churches. Rutter's  
Ch. Hist. Thus the mark of the beast, as enjoined by  
law, began 538.  
The consular power of Rome, which was a perpetu- 
ation of the old Roman power in connexion with the  
Ostrogoths, was recognized by Justinian, in his laws  
of 533; but in 540, he made a rescript of those laws,  
in which no recognition of the consular power exists.  
So that between 533 and 540 the consular power of  
Rome ceased, and the Pope succeeded. Rutter's Hist.  
In 533, the dragon, imperial Rome, gave to the beast,  
papal Rome, his power. In 538, he gave him his seat 
and great authority. Rev. 13:2.  
Pope Vigilius was elected A. D. 537, by an ecclesi- 
astical council, called for the purpose by the emperor.  
The next and all succeeding popes have been elected  
without the authority of the emperors. So that since 
538, the church of Rome has acted independently of 
the emperor.  
THE TIME, TIMES AND  A HALF—WHAT IT IS.  
The period is given in Rev. 12: 14. " And to the  
woman were given two wings of a great eagle, that  
she might fly into the wilderness, into her place, where 
she is nourished for a time, times and half a time, from 
the face of the serpent."  
And in verse 6th of the same chapter, .the period is  
reduced to days. " And the woman fled into the wil-
derness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that  
they should feed her there, a thousand, two hundred  
and threescore days." The period being thus reduced  
to days, we have only to ask whether they are literal 
or symbolical 1 Were they fulfilled in 1260 literal 
days ] Clearly not. Then they must be symbolical,  
and mean years.  
Rome given to the Pope A. D. 538  
1260 added,  
Papal dominion taken away in 1798  
What was to take place at the end of the 1260  
years ?  
Dan. 7: 26. " But the judgment shall sit AND THEY  
SHALL TAKE AWAY HIS DOMINION, to consume and de- 
stroy unto the end." - 
Dr. A. Clarke says, on the passage—" In 1798, the  
French Republican army, under General Berthier, en- 
tered Rome and entirely superseded the whole papal  
power."  
The Revelator says, Rev. 13: 10. " He that leadeth  
into captivity shall be led into captivity; he that kill- 
eth with the sword must be killed with the sword."  
On the 15th of Feb. 1798, the papal government  
was abolished. Rome declared a republic, 5 consuls,  
a senate and tribunate, composed the government of  
Rome. The Pope signed lire abdication in reference  
to his temporal power; and was then carried to France,  
where he died a prisoner, on  August 29th, 1799. Rot- 
tech's Hist, of the World.  
It is said in objection to this view, that popery still  
exists. True ; and so the word of God said it would; 
and that all the world would wonder after the beast.  
Rev. 13:3.  
It said also, that they should "consume and destroy  
him unto the end." It has been done. Buonaparte'  
restored popery. He healed the wound. But, as Dr.  
Clarke expresses it, it is only skinned over, a dreadful  
cicatrice remains. The inquisition is ineffectual—the  
pope has no power over kings—the bible is printed  
and published in nearly all languages—protestant wor- 

v. 13—16. "These all died in faith, not having re- 
ceived the promises, but having seen them afar off, and ,  
were persuaded of them, and embraced them, and con- 
fessed that they were strangers and pilgrims on the 
earth. For they that say such things declare plainly  
that they seek a country. And truly, if they had been  
mindful of that country from whence they came out, they  
! might have had opportunity to have returned. But now  
they desire a better country, that is, a heavenly; where- 
fore God is not ashamed to be called their God; for he 
hath prepared for them a city:"  
y. 39, 40. And these all having obtained a good re- 
port through faith, received not the promise : God hav-
ing provided some better thing for us, that they without 
us should not be made perfect."  
Original promises to Isaac and Jacob. 
Gen. 26 ; 3, 4. " Sojourn in this land, and I will be  
with thee, and will bless thee ; for unto thee and unto  
thv seed I will give all these countries, and I will per-
form the oath which I sware unto Abraham thy father. 
And I will make thy seed to multiply as the stars of 
heaven, and  will give unto thy seed all these countries :  
and in thy seed shall all the nations of the earth be  
blessed."  
Gen. 28: 13, 14. "And behold, the Lord stood  
above it and said, I am the Lord God of Abraham thy 
father, and the God of Isaac; the land whereon thou  
lies?, to thee will I give  it, and to thy seed. And thy  
seed shall be as the dust of the earth ; and thou shalt  
spread abroad to the west, and to the east, and to the 
north,  and to the south ; and in thee and in thy seed  
shall all the families of the earth be blessed."  
Now who are THE SEED  7  
Gal. 3 ; 7—9. " Know ye, therefore, that they  
which are of faith, the same are the children of Abra- 
ham. And the scripture, foreseeing that God would  
justify the heathen through faith, preached before the  
gospel unto Abraham, saying, In thee shall all nations 
be blessed. So then they which are of faith are blessed  
with faithful Abraham."  
*v. 16-19,26-29. "Now to Abraham and his seed were  
the promises made. He saith not, And to seeds, as of  
many, but as of one, And to thy seed, which is Christ.  
And this I say, That the covenant that was confirmed  
before of God in Christ, the law, which was four hun-
dred and thirty years after, cannot disannul, that it 
should make the promise of none effect. For if the in-
heritance be of the law, it is no more of promise ; but ^ 
God gave it to Abraham by promise. Wherefore, then, f  
serveth the law 1 It was added because of trangres-
sions, till the seed should come to whom the promise 
was made ; and it was ordained by angels in the hand*"  
of a mediator. . . For ye are all the children of God by 
faith in Christ Jesus. For as many of you as have  
been baptized into Christ have put on Christ. There  
is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither bond nor 
free, there is neither male nor female, for ye are all one 
in Christ Jesus. And if ye be Christ's, then are ye  
Abraham's seed, and heirs according to the promise."  
The above shovyto whom the promises belong. The  

DR. CAPADOSE.  
From flic " CorfVersion of Dr. Capadose, a Jewish physician  
i ot Amsterdam," written by himself,—published  by the Amer- 
ican Tract Society.  
And jiow, MY BRETHREN  IN CHRIST, it is to you I • .  
, address myself in Conclusion. If you have view* W<  
x with christian joy, how the Lord has, in his unspeak- ! •  
J aMe goodness, graciously taken some little broken  
twigs to engraft them anew upon 'the  " cultivated  
olive," forget not that in the whole world there are 
many of these scattered branches, now with neither  
form nor comeliness, neither fruit nor verdure, but pos- 
sessing still the sap of the most glorious promises.  
Forget not, that if they are still "enemies as touching  
the gospel, for your sakes," they are also " dearly 
beloved, as touching election, for tlje father's sakes;  
for the gifts and calling of God are without re-
pentance."—Rom. 11 : 28 29. Remember, that" as  
ye, in times past, have not believed God, vet have  
now obtained mercy through their unbelief; even so  
have these also now not believed, that through your  
mercy they also may obtain mercy." Rom. 11: 30, 31. 
—Above all, forget not the immense privilege to 
which you are called, that you may be, by your pray-
ers for Israel, and your charity towards them, co-opera- - _  
/ \ tors with God, who desires to save Israel for his §  
"^J. glory, yes, for his glory : " for if the casting away of 'A  
| them be the reconciling of the world, what shall the |  
receiving of them be, but life from the dead V' Rom.  
11 HI  
The day is not far distant, the happy day which the (  
apostle hails from afar with rapture and adoration, ^pM),''  
when he exclaims, " 0 the depth of the riches both of  
the wisdom and knowledge of God ! How unsearcha- 
ble are his judgments, and his ways p&st finding out!"  
Rom. 11 : 33. And it shall come to pass when all  
these things are come upon thee, the blessing and the 
curse which I have set before thee, and thou shalt  
call them to mind among all the nations whither the 
Lord thy God hath driven thee, and shalt return  
unto the Lord thy God, and shalt obey bis voice 
according to all that I command thee this day :  
thee and thy children, with all thy heart and with all 
thy soul, that then the Lord thy God, will turn thy  
captivity, and will ha.ve compassion, upon thee, and  
will return and gather thee from among all the nations  
whither the Lord thy God bath scattered thee. If any  
of thine be driven out to the outermost parts of heaven, 
from thence will the Lord thy God gather thee, and  
rrom theijoo win he -fctch. thee-—And the Lord thy 
God will bring thee into the Jand which thy fathers  
possessed, and thou shalt possess it, and he will do to  
thee good, and multiply thee above thy fathers."  
Deut. 30: 1—5. Yes, the Lord is faithfuL it  
is by an oath he promised Abraham that his pos- 
terity should one day possess Canaan "from the river of  
Evgpt to the great river, the river Euphrates," Gen.  
15; 18: Exod. 23 : 31 ; Gen. 26 : 3 ; Ps. 105 : 9 ,  
and that this possession should be "forever;" Gen  
13: 15, an everlasting possession; Gen, 17: 7, 8 ; '  
"forever" 2 Chron. 20: 7. Behold the great prom- j*) '  

n  
-|  
A- ,  fS I  
J*  
\  
t:  
following allegory presents the subject in a clear light, /oA 'se' lha't, until now, has not been accomplished  
' - — — •• • - ° " \ [As the promise is not yet accomplished, and ..««  
: Abraham personally, and his seed, which is Christ,  Gal.4: 21-26,28, 30,31. "Tell me, ye that desire to  
be under the law, do ye not hear the law ? For it is writ-
ten that Abraham had two sons, the one by a fcon l- 
Lmaid, the other by a free woman. But he who was of  
The bond woman, was born after the flesh ; but he of the  
^ree woman was by promise. Which things are anal- i > b"1 never vvit1' an extent of territory, nor for a period 
I 'gory; for these are the two covenants: the one from \ / I ?TF !LME PROP°.rt'oned to the grandeur of the promise. 
I rt r r.' . . . , . . - . . . ' / I 1 nnpr t-h A rornn  e\f C/.lA^nn  ~ 1 ~ _ ~ AI i  

[As the promise is not yet accomplished, and was to ! / /-*  
braham personally, and his seed, which is Christ, i  
Abraham must be raised from the aead to receive  
it.—Ed.]  
Israel, it is true, has possessed the land of Canaan,  
but never with an extent of territory, nor for a period  
'gory; for these are the two covenants: the one from  
[ee Mount Sinai, which gendereth to bondage, which 
^ Agar. For this Agar is Mount Sinai in Arabia, and  
a!swereth to Jerusalem which now is, and is in bond- 1  
Wkwith her children. But Jerusalem which is above ' / , "v,——fi""""*"'" *» tuumoiaies  
Kee, which is the mother of us all. . . . Now we, jHvr'eSSlng! Almighty, and the numberless de- 
>d hren, as Isaac was, are the children of promise, j /^.rances of which Israel had already been the object,  
'^...Nevertheless, what saith the scripture .« t0milnd this jirormse^of the inheritance of  
er" out the bond woman and  her son ; for the son of  

Under the reign of Solomon alone have the limits of 
Israel's kingdom extended to the Euphrates; and this  
toiumph was brief, for we find that the prophet Isaiah,  
in a^touching supplication, in which he enumerates  
>ond woman shall not be heir with the son of the  
3ts woman. So then, brethren, we are not children of  
°uAnid woman, but of the free/'  

ICanaan, exclaims," Return, for thy servant's sake,  
the tribe3 of thine inheritance. The people of thy  
holiness have possessed it (the country) but a little  
L-'hile." Isaiah 63: 17, 18-


nisli the king of Eabylon, and that nation,  

f,en fully accoP^l^t^  
as not ye  
Yes, it will  
run^T^rieignoahe trueSolo^or. ofthe promis-
•A Messiah, of the lord of Glory, of the King ot  
sraef ^ be it is who shall rule ''from sea o sea,  
Tom the river to the ends of the earth. Fs. i2 . »• 
fe? it w ffl be when the Almighty shall  RETURN UNTO  
L ON and shall dwell in the mid.t of JerusaE.,; when  
I" Jerusalem shall be called a city of truth, and we  
UuSa of the Lord of Hosts the 
•Then the Lord shall say, " Behold, I  will save my  
people trom the cast country, and from the west  coun- |  
tr v. and \ will brmg them, and they shall dwell in the  
midst of Jerusalem; and they shall be my people, and  
11 will be their God in truth and in righteousness.  
Zeph. 8 : 3, 7, 8. _ , ,  
" There is hope in thine end, saith the Lord, that  
I thy children shall come again to their own border.  
! Behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that I wi I 
i sow the house of Israel and the house of Judah with  
1 the seed of man, and with the seed ot beast. And it  
shall come to  pass, that like as I have watched over  
them, to pluck up, and to break down, and to throw  
down, and to destroy, and to afflict; so  will I watch  
over them to build and to plant, saith the Lord. Be- 
1 hold, the days come, that the city shall be built to we  
Lord, from the tower of Hananeel unto the gate ot  
the corner. And the measuring line shall yet go 
forth over against it upon the hill Gareb, and shall  
compass about Goath. And the whole valley of the  
dead bodies, and of the ashes, and all the fields un o 
the brook of Kidron, unto the corner ot the horse-gate  
! towards the east, shall be holy unto the Lord ; it shall  
i not be plucked up, nor thrown down, any more tor- 
i ever." Jer. 31: 17, 28, 38, 30 40.  
Ah ' if, by divine direction, these lines should tall  
! into the hands of any of the children of Abraham, but  
! who have not Abraham's faith-of those Israelites, my  
dearly beloved brethren according to the flesh, who  
are now poor, but with the riches of the divine word  
I in their hands ; miserable, but having the blood of the  
prophets in their veins; despised and wandering over 
the whole earth, but with the promisa of eternal glory,  
if they should be converted ; may these lines remind 
them that this word, these promises, this blood of the  
prophets, urge them to  examine attentively what these  
prophets have spoken, and by whom their promises  
must have their accomplishment for them of whom  
this word is full. .  
Yes, may they speedily, by God's grace, acknow- 
ledge that this precious Bible, which they preserve,  
' and upon which their faith as well as our own is  
founded, contains prophetically the entire history ot 
the Messiah : his origin, his nature, his birth, his lite 
his death, his resurrection and ascension to the right  
hand of God his heavenly Father; his spiritual reign;  
his return to glory; finally his reign as King of Israel,  
priest and prophet.  
Behold what I have been taught  bf my researches  
ia the word of God: May these lines excite in them 
also the desire to seek after the truth !  
After bringing forward an array of prophetic testimony- and  
applying it to the circumstances connected with tlic nrst AD- 
vent, he proceeds as follows:  
When you have thus united all these features of the  
promised Messiah, which the Almighty has traced so  
r-le irly and so distinctly to the very minutest details, that  
Israel shohld not be deceived by any false Messiah; when  
vou have placed before you, as it were, lace to face, 
the image of him upon whom your salvation rests;  
open, 0 my dear brethren in the flesh, open the iNew  
Testament, praving God to enable you to examine its  
contents with a'sincere desire to know the truth ! and 
the glorious light of the God of truth will lead you to  
acknowledge, with adoration, that all these charac-
terizing features of the true Messiah are to be iound, 
with the most scrupulous exactness, in the person, the  
life and death of Jesus Christ, that Saviour blessed  

for evermore who will soon come in glory with hlsl  
tor JERUSALEM shall be to him a -name ot  
^ I bui d'them as at first. And I will cleanse them  
iS all their imquity whereby they - 
XSvXyhl1 ie&h?ty the? have 
^Sr^tSan/Se^Jponth^  
lodgment was given - and I saw the souls of them  
1 & were beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and fo  
the word of God, and which had not worshipped the  
beast^ neither his image, neither, had received his  
mark upon their foreheads or in their hands; and they  
Hved and reigned with Christ a thousand years. But  
he res? of the dead lived not again until the thousand  
years were finished. This is the first resurrection. 
Sessed and holy is he that hath par in the first  
MwrMCtion; on'such the second death hath no pow- 
ferTbut they shall be priests of God and of Christ, and 
I shall reign with him a thousand years. Apocal.  
2°': A^the Spirit and the bride say, Come. And let  
I him that heareth say, Come. And let bun that is  
* athirst come. And whosoever will, let turn take the  
water of life freely." Apocalypse, 22: 1 -. Amen  
The foregoing pages contain the doctrine of Aa- 
ventisls,"—"the faith once delivered to the saints. —  
— This is what the world (Jails " MUlerism.  
This pamphlet is issued by the " American Iract  
Society," an institution, under the auspices and super- 
intendence of the different evangelical denominations %  
of our country. See, the inconsistency of our  
churches !! They denounce that from their pulpits,  
which by their presses, they endorse—pronounce or- 
thodox—declare to be the teachings pf the Bible.  
Here, the restoration of the Jews, ^ the Millen- 
nium, anterior to Christ's second and final coming, is 
inferentially pronounced HERESY. (( ,  
I And, that coming, we are told is near, -wno  
I will soon come in glory with his holy angels 1 HEN  
- JERUSALEM shall be to him a name of rejoicing, of  
praise and .glory among all the nations of the earth,  
who shall hear the good that he will oo to Israel.  
03= Mark! all this is to be AFTER Christ comes in  
alory with his holy angels-by their own admission.- 
i W. Mid. Cry.  

I gn^- 
8 AndCush begat Nimrod: he becan to be  
a mighty one in the earth. • 
I „9"e \as mighty hunter before the 
LORD: wherefore ft is said, Even as Nimrod  
the mighty heater before the LORD.  
Rahi/^lu beginning of his kingdom was  
fn thl'i^ j^.^ and Accad> an3 Caine)i,  m theland of Shinar..  

2 ''KUS sujth the L"',.B to a..o.rted,  to  
AJ/A/> H i CyrusJ whose right hat "v ' "'  i 

. v.,,hand 1 have hoiden,  
to subdue nations be-ore him; and I will 
loose the loins of kings, to open before Mm  
the two-lcaved gates;'and tiie gates shall not  
lie shut: . siiJla.i,'"  
W _ . •.. j  
/^k '7 TN the third year of the  
'i JL kim king of Judah c;  
: reign of Jehoia  
_ a „. came Nebuchad  
nezzar king of Babylon unto Jerusalem,  
and besieged it.  
2 And tne LORD gave Jehciakim king of  
Judah into his hand, with part ofthe ves- 
sels of the house of  God: which he car- 
ried into the land of Shi nar Jp *Jje fcatss^of  
and he brought tfife vessels into  

/ IV0^ in yearof Cyrus king of  
ti z' / the,:  
[hisgod; and he brought tne A  
i the treasure-house of his god.  
18 0 thou king, the most high God gave  
Nebuchadnezzar thy father a kingdom,  
and majesty, and glory, and honour:  
19 And for the majesty that he gave him,  
all people, nations, and languages, trem- 
bled and feared before him: whom he  
would he slew; and whom he would he  
kept alive; and whom he would he set up; 
ana whom he would he put down.  
~ '  . 1M> .. *  
5 1 have made the earth, the man and the  
HSKtmST  
FFFTTAGE CENTER  
Jamas VO»H« library  

beast that are upon the ground, bv my grot  
power, and bv my outstretched arm, and  
have given it unto whom it seemedmee.un- 
t06And now have I given ^ltheselandsinto 
the hand of Nebuchadnezzar the kmg of Ba- 
by ton my sen-ant; and the beasts of the field  
have 1 given him also to serve him.  
7 Ana all nations shall serve him, and^ i»Mi\/rp4iTV  
son, and his son's son, until the very time ofAHDKMS UNIVERSITY 
his land come; ar.d then many nations and .  
great kings shall serve themseivos of hum  
8 And it shall come to pass, that the na- 
• tion and kingdom which will not serve the  
. same Nebuchadnezzar the tag of Babylon  
and that will not put their neck under the  
. voke of the king of Babylon, that nation  
will I punish, saith the LORD, with.the  
sword, and with the fanune, and with the  
pestilence, until I have consumed them by  
ITilMirT' if1"*™^^ ..  

. ... v-.o^jva! ui ^lUSKlUgO  
^ - Persia, that the word of the LORD by  
the mouth ot Jeremiah might be fulfilled,  
the LORD stirred up the spirit of Cyrus  
king of Persia, that he made a proclama-
tion throughout all his kingdom, and put it 
also in writing, saying,  
2 Thus saith Cyrus king of Persia, The  
LORD God of heaven hath given me all the  
kingdoms of the earth; and he hath charg- 
ed me to build him an house at Jerusalem  
which is in Judah.  
5 And as 1 was considering,  behold, an  
he-goat came from the west on the face of 
the whole earth, and touched not the  
ground: and the goat had a notable horn  
between his eyes.  
6 And he came to the ram that had two  
horns, which 1 had seen standing before  
the river, and ran unto him in the fuiy of  
his power.  
7 And I saw him come close unto the  
ram, and he was moved with choler against  
him, and smote the ram, and brake his two 
horns: and there was no power in the ram  
to stand before him, but he cast him down .  
to the ground, and stamped upon him: and 
there was none that could deliver the ram  
out of his hand.  
20 The ram which thou sawest having  
too horns are the kings of Media and Persia.  
21 And the rough goat is the king of  
Grecia: and the great horn that is between 
his eyes is the first kins:.  
* Here is the 1000 yean Millennium,-after  Christ comcs  
rain glory with his holy angels. . - ,  
^-jAMr 3 And ye shall make no league with the  
y Qf inhabitants of this land; ye shall throw dowa  
w j their altars; but ye have not obeyed my  
voice: why have ye done this f  

37 Thou, O king, art a king of kings:  
for the God of heaven hath given thee a JY^ A  
kingdom, power, and strength, and gloiy.  y u  
38 And wheresoever the children ot men  
dwell, the beasts ofthe field and the fowls 
of the heaven hath he given into thine  
hand, and hath made thee ruler over them  
all. Thou art this head of gold^fl  

! 40 And the fourth kingdom shall be  
{strong as iron : forasmuch as iron breaketh 
: in pieces and' subdueth all things: and as  
• |ron that breaketh all these, shall it break  
| ill pieces and bruise.  
ND it came to pass in those days, that  
there went out a decree from Cesar  
v yy^ i i.i And after the league maJe with him he  
/ J shall work deceitfully: for he shall come up,  
and shall becoine strong with a small fcople.  
1 MerfiaV enOT ^natt-aiiiy even tiioli the  
" fattest jlaces of the province; and he shall  
1 » v do that which his fathers have not done, nor  
V his fathers' fathers; he shall scatter among, ;  
them the prey, and spoil, and riches; yea,  
1$ y 1 and he shall forecast his devices against the >, ,  
j strong holds, even, ff>* a time. f-y*  
C'hfotefa ac t; fij fit tfL fa^  
/T\ / , .fr" 49  The LORD shsll bring a nation against \  
thee from far, from the end of the e..rth.  . - ps swift as the eagle flieth; a nation whose  
0 CU tongue thou shalt not understand;  
^ * 50 A nation of tierce countenance, which *  
shall not regard the person of the Ud, nor ' 
«K»>v f.iv.nur tn the I'nucf :  

12 T And it shall come to pass, when se- 
... iniquity,  
laud of the Chaldeans, and will make it per- 
petual deviations.  
An Al 28 PERESThy kingdom is divided,  
fJ/PVZL'0 [and given to the Medes and Persians.  
m  

) tlif I'OHOC ;  
Jfi |  
9*  

30 IF In that night was Belshazzar the  
king of the Chaldeans slain.  
31 And Darius the Median took the  king- 
dom, being about threescore and two years  
•old. •  

C Augustus, that all the worldshouldbe taxed.  
2 (And this taxing was first made when  
Cyrenius was governor of Syria.)  
3 And all went to be taxed, every one  
into his own city. _  
j 41" And whereas thou sawest the,-.  
;and toes, part of potters' clay, and fz&J "  
iron, the kingdom shall be divided; £  
there shall be in it of the strength of the  
I iron, forasmuch as thou sawest the iron  
^mised^ithjniry clay. 'fy--.  
T.—TheseTre^e moderrf names: France  
Britain, Spain, Portugal, Naples, Tuscany Aus- 
tria, Lombardy, Ravena, and Rome; the three 1 
last are at present embraced in the Roman '/  
States. So you see they not only exH [>vv ^ 
many of them u;. Jer th^ir original names


9NR*  
wynji  
§) Ctms t.  
•jl*  
fad I  

4'4 And in the days of these kings shall  
the God of heaven set up a kingdom, which  
shall neverbe destroyed: and the kingdom 
shall not be left to other people, but it shall  
break in pieces and consume all these  
kingdoms, and it shall stand fn* J®  
35 Then was the iron, the clav, the  
brass, the silver, and the gold, broken lo  
pieces together, and became like the chatt  
of the summer threshing-floors; and the  
wind carried them away, that no place  
was found for them: and the stone that  
smote the image became a great mountain,  
and filled the whole earth. $ '.  
mmgm-^  
A r'  
3 Therefore they shall be as the morning  
cloud, and as the early  dew that passeth  
away, as the cliaff that is driven with the 
whirlwind out of the floor, and as the  
smoke out of the chimney. |  
35 I have seen the wicked in great  
power, and spreading himself like a green  
bay tree.  
36 Yet he passed away, and lo, he was  
not: y§a, 1 sought him, but he could not  
be found.  

/  
6 When they therefore A  
eether, they asked of him, saying,  
wilt thou at this time restore again th  
dom to Israel?  

come to*  
Lord|  
e king-ji  
* th,s 1 sa?> brethren, mat flesh  
A. ana blood cannot inherit the kingdom of  
/ j neither doth corruption inherit incor- 
ruption.  
51 Behold, I shew you a mystery; We  
shall not all sleep, but we shall all be 
changed,  
52 In a moment, in the twinkling of an  
eye, at the last trump: for the trumpet shall  
sound, and the dead shall be raised incor- 
ruptible, and we shall be changed.  
/ 9 Know ye not that the unrighteous  
/ shall not inherit the kingdom of God ? Be  
A not^ deceived; neither fornicators, nor  
shall not inherit the kingdom of God ? Bel 
not deceived; neither fornicators, nor  
idolaters, nor adulterers, nor effeminate,  
nor abusers of themselves with mankind,  
10 Nor thieves, nor covetous, nor drunk- 
ards, nor revilers, nor extortioners, shall  
inherit the kingdom of God.  
sm,\.£':d t,,cre *Mt in no wise enter intn if  
the-/ whiriZ t' ^maketh alio; but  
of fife!3re Wntten m the Lamb's book  
V  
I.  

4 The  ungodly are not so: but are like  
the chaff which the wind drive th away.  
Alii he sliaiiraie thrn with a rod of Iron;  
attive vessels of a pottwsMfthey bsbro«n  to ,-hiwr-:; cvea-as I rssaved tfjTX, .  
8 Ask of me, and I shall give thee file  
heathen for thine inheritance, and' the  
uttermost parts of the earth for thy pos- rdp£f  
session. * VI ^  
9 Thou shalt break them with a rod of  
iron ; thou shalt dash them in pieces like 
a potter's vessel.  
in t> . ' 1  
15 And the seventh \agel' sounded; and  
there were great voice* in heaven, sayjne| 
The kingdoms of thU: world are become tie  
Mntfoms of OUT Lord, and of his Christ; and  
he 'liall rei^n f.ir ever and ever.  

I 
CHARGE thee therefore before God,  
and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall  
judge the quick and the dead at his appear  
ing and his kingdom ;  
" » i •» —j. L. '* •  
^Hl H SQHte nMAr.  ...yr.w ,,  
* lSVAud. tlie nations were angry, ard thy  
wrath is come, and the time of the deacL  
that they should be judged, and that thou  
MHWldost give reward unto thy servants the  
propheu, and to tlis saints, ami tliem that 
t^-it tiiy name,small and great; and should' 
est destroy them which destroy th  

!{L 21 And when they had preached the  
/ / gospel to that city, and had taught many,  
' ' they returned again to Lystra, and to Ico- 
nium, and lo Antioch,  
22 Confirming the souls of the disci- 
f 
tles, and exhorting them to continue in the 
aith, and that we must through much tri- 
bulation enter into the kingdom of God.  
fu- 

i destroy the earth.  
w-t- 

Q * |Y fircthren, Ufcvs net ti e feiih o£- ' i> 4 l*ord Jesv.-i CT.rist, the Lvrd of ^  
CT.Uh-resj.ect c-f pcrsousv  
.. K For if .there come, ur.to yror asaem?,  
' a man -Aith a gold rSj-g, in gpiiity t^iaf,  
and thira come in also a poor man in vtff  
i ra-'inenji; •  
3 A id vg have respect to Mm thst wear- 
etii the gay clothing, and say unto him, sit  
,:hon here in a good place: and' say to the  
poor, Stand then there', or sit here under my 
foot-,tool:  
iA^6^ g io Thy kingdom come. Thy will be!  
done in earth as it is in heaven. ^ i  
Iv  
18 lor I say unto you, I will trot drink of  
the fruit of the vine, until the kingdom of  
God shall come.  
>Hr  
42 Andhe said'unto Jesus, Lord, remem- 
ber me.when thou comest into thykingdom.  

in ta;*.h, and heirs of Hie it'i.gdom whj» ^ ^  
. <1 '' ihc.ti that i' \f hiin?  
. 31 T[ When the Son of man shall co  
m his glory, and all the holy angels wfl  
him, then shaH he sit upon the throne ot  
his glory:  
32 And before him shall be gathered all  
nations: and he sjjall separate them one 
from another, as a shepherd divideth k&  
sheep from the goats:  
33 And he shall set the sheep on his  
right hand, but the goats on the left.  
S4 Then shall the King say unto them  
on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of mj'  
Father, inherit the kingdom prepared ft}  
you from Ibe foundation nf world: /  isassf. — -* ' L  

life shall have ceased and a new state of things, New  
heavens and a new earth, shall dawn upon us.  
•'From the preceding caleuty, ons, it is demonstrable  
that  prosperity, if human, life be included among the items,  
can never be the  lot of nations, nor of individuals, in the  
present organization of society. Earthquakes, wars, pes- 
tilence, and nearly every other evil is entailed on man, 
till Jesus Christ shall appear to restore both men and the  
world to their pristine beauty and glory, abolish death  
and bring in everlasting righteousness, everlasting life,  
an everlasting kingdom of God come, and his will be done 
in earth as it is in heaven.  

THE 24th OF MATTHEW.  0  
THE CAUSE IN ENGLAND.  
We have received another communication from our  
brother, R. Winter, of England, and who was convert- 
ed to our views at the East Kingston camp-meetuig. j  
He writes that he is preaching, and printing, and  
scattering abroad light upon this subject, and God has  
greatly blessed his labors. \ He has found many pre-
cious souls ready  to receive the truth. Many who  
Were living in their sins, have turned to the Lord, and 
are waiting with joyful anticipations for his glorious ap- 
pearing.\He has a  press in London, in operation, which  
supplies different booksellers. He has  printed 2000  
of Miller's Lectures, 2000 Fleming's Midnight Cry,  
6000 Clue to the Time, 2000 Fitch's Reasons, 3000  
Evidences of Christ's Second Coming ; and many  
others which they have extracted from the "Signs of  
the Times." )  
He says, " We are at work, all the time, and many  
preachers have received the truth by reading these  
works. I preach about the streets with my chart  
hoisted up on a pole. Another preacher and myself  
are  passing all through the country. Others are pro- 
claiming the cry. Methodists, Baptists, and Indepen- 
dent preachers have embraced the doctrine, and are at  
work. We intend to hold a Second Advent Camp- 
Meeting in May, if time continues ; but if the Lord 
comes, we will- hold it in the new earth. {The way  
is now prepared for any of you to come over if the  
time is not too short. They will more readily receive 
this doctrine in England, than in America. I have  
preached about the streets of London, our books are  
j flying about, and are making quite a stir in this great  
city. , Some have written against us, but have found  
themselves not competent to refute Mr. Miller's argu- 
ments ; and their writings "against him, have caused 
many to look into it, embrace it, and then proclaim it.  
"I have written to Mr. Pratt, of Lowell, but received  
no answer; if you can, please tell him to write me a  
letter immediately. I have written to others, but had  
no answer. One man who has embraced this truth, has  
expended £45, in circulating publications. We  
are now raising a fund that we may circulate them free- 
ly all over England. Pray for us, and give my love to  
all the friends of the cause in America. I thank you  
• for your goodness in conferring so many favors upon  
me • I also thank all my other friends, for the help they  
gave me to come over here. The Lord will reward  
Them. I believe I shall soon see you again, in the new  
Jerusalem. { Our friends want to see Mr. Miller here ;  
they aay he shall want for nothing if he will come. He  
would be a great blessing to England. Do send us a 
flood lecturer, although the time is short, yet the field  
is white for the harvest."  

THE 24th CHAPTER OF MATTHEW, is at the present i  
time eliciting  great attention; but not more than its!  
importance demands.  
" When shall these things be, and what shall be the  
sign of thy coming and of the end of the world."  
" These things," refers to the events of the second.  
verse, the destruction of Jerusalem. " What shall be  
the sign of thy coming," refers to his remark in the  
•close of the 23d chapter; "ye shall not see me hence- 
forth until ye shall say blessed is he that cometh in the  
name of the Lord." Thus intimating that when a 
race should be there, who should say thus, he would  
come again; but that time has not yet come; hence  
his coming is yet future. " Md of the end of the  
world," refers to the 13th chapter, the explanation of  
the parable of the tares of the field. "The harvest is 
the end of the world." " So shall it be at the end of  
THIS (aionos) WORLO ; the son of man shall send forth  
his angels," &c., and "cast them into a furnace of  
fire." "Then shall the righteous shine forth as the i  
sun in the kingdom of their father."  
Jesus said, "Take heed that no man deceive you.  
For many shall come in my name saying, I am Christ,  
and shall deceive many." This is not a sign, either  
of Jerusalem's overthrow, nor of his coming, but a  
o-eneral characteristic of every age. For there has  
been no age since Christ, .but what has had its false  
Christs or°false prophets. "Wars and rumors of  
wars," were to come, " but the-end is not yet." These  
were not signs of the end but common incidents.  
" Famines," "pestilence," " earthquakes," &c., were  
to come as a matter of course, but they signified nei-
ther the destruction of Jerusalem nor the end of the  
world, .  
"Then shall they deliver you (Christians) up to be  
afflicted, and shall kill you, and ye shall be hated of  
all nations for my name's sake." This foretells the  
persecutions of the church, both under imperial and 
papal Rome, through her whole history, but are no  
sign of the end.  
He that endureth to the end [of his probation] the  
same shall be saved." " This gospel of the kingdom  
must be preached in all the world for a witness to all  
nations, then shall the end come." This is the only  
sign he gives in the first 14 verses, either of Jerusa-
lem's overthrow or the end of the world.  
The gospel is now preached in all the world for a,  
witness; or at least, there is no known nation which  
has not heard it. Hence, we look for the end soon'.  
Then, in verse 15th, he begins to answer the first  
question. " When ye, therefore, shall see the abomi- 
nation of desolation spoken of by Daniel the prophet,  
; stand in the holy place, (or holy land,) whoso reudetii  
let him understand." This sign was the only one 
given, By which the disciples were to know when the 
city was to be destroyed. This abomination of deso-
lation is foretold, Dan. 9: 20, 27. "Then let them that  
be in Judea flee to the mountains." These verses con-
tain a series of instructions to the disciplcs, by thr ob- 
servance of which they were all saved—not one per- 
, ishing in the siege.—They saw the Roman army come  
up, and again retire. When they saw it tiiey nil fled  
to Pella,*a city in the mountains, and were saved.  
Verses 21,22. " For then," after your flight from  
Jerusalem, and dispersion over the earth, "shall be  
great tribulation," on the church, not on the Jews.  
" Such as was not since there was a nation to that  
same time, no, nor ever shall be." During the siege,  
1,100,000 Jews perished in various ways. But under  
papal persecution in the dark ages, more than 50,000,- 
000 of Christians perished, beside the millions under  
Pagan Rome. They, the Jews, some of them per- 
ished by famine, so have multitudes of others. They  
ate their own children. Others niigfet have done it  
had they not chosen rather to starve. It proves their  
extreme wickedness, rather than greater sufferings than  
others have endured.


1 he church was safe during the sie<rp ,  
tumty to spread th« i. „"flId bc no °PPor- 
Id"" 3n deCt pe°P16' "those days Slhe  
tbn ui;tSrLbtrti,to  dtide in the  
until the days of WesLv anH Wh'fi  a mea^e  
there has been no verv ffpnpral ' SmCC which,  
and ajoosfo/tc revivals began to nr3r T^ thech"ch  
bers were gathered i f £' ButT*' rT  
was done durinp- thP dLr„ / 'But how little 
What could Ime been don^had El ^!  
persecution continued ? "No flesh Shlf?™5" ?d  
said the Saviour. Should be saved,"  
Verses 23—28 " Thpn " «ffQ, j , .  
possible, they shall deceiv'e the ve^ elect B L7w  
have told you before ; wherefnrp if tif . „iJehoId' 1  
you, he is in the  
certainly as the eagle by instim t'fin U 866 hlnrK As  
all the saints find l^CiT^* ^ S° WiU  

oppor- tice.  

" A similar phenomenon was witnessed on the 12K  
of Nov. 1799, and at the same season of the year  
1830, 1831, and 1832. The meteoric shower was re,  
peated on the morning of Nov. 13th or Mth, for sevei  
ral years, but on a scale constantly diminishing until  
1833, since which period the exhibitions have been/  
too little remarkable to be worthy of particular m  
tic.p.  
The Signs of Christ's coming. "  
those'Tayt'^pSst^S T* tri(buIali- of 
shall be darkened and tip he tClV?rch' "the sun  
light, the stars 3l M fi^^ ^ 
of heaven shall be shaken™ ' and the poWers  
tates^S^t^of rdark  
Wn *  
The signs have also passed by. In 1780  
" The moon shall not give ],„ /• /. „ . u.  
there was a full moon at*/,; —Although  
1780, yet the ntlTtwL0lrk™efl° ^ da*,<% of  
paper, held within Tfew inch of tl^ °f W'lite  
eq^y invisible with tKctst vle*^' WS»  
meteors, on SaW Sh°Wer »f '  
On that pyfrar ' 1 1833' cannot doubt.  
•tad" ota.  
"The extent of RhoSr rf:  
«"" m inconsiderable 111 f f, " s»<-h " '«  
U the middle „f .ho Sf''  
and .KrfcaST*- l"eMnle'1 nea,lj  
jiSf^^jsrr-  "'p"!* •" FeaiKt  
•^HREKSW*  

"I feel assured that this is no atmospheric or terres  
trial phenomenon, but  that these fiery meteors come u  
us from the regions of space, and reveal to us the exis- 
tence of worlds of a nebulous or cometary nature, ex-
isting in the solar system, and forming constituent) 
parts of that system. Nor are these conclusions built  
on mere hypothesis, but are necessary inferences from  
certain facts.  
" The present generation may consider itself privi- 
leged in having witnessed grander displays of fiery me-1 
teors,^ than are to be found recorded on the pages of his-
tory." «In displays of the Aurora Borcalis, also, we  
have been similarly favored. Such visitations of this f. 
spectacle, as we have enjoyed since Aug. 1837, to theH  
present time, are by no means of constant occur- 
rence."  
" Those who were so fortunate as to witness the ex- 
hthiUon of shooting stars on the morning of Nov. 13th,  
1833, probably saw the GREATEST DISPLAY of celestial  
Jirc-works thai has ever been seen since the creation of the  
world, or at least within the annals covered by the  
pages of history."  
" This is no longer to be regarded as a terrestrial,  
but as a celestial phenomenon; and shooting stars are  
now to be no more viewed as casual productions of the  
upper regions of the atmosphere, but as visitants from  
OTHER WORLDS, or from the planetary voids."  
''Subsequent inquiries have led me to the belief,  
lhe body was so distant as hardly to exhibit any  
apparent parallax, but was projected on very nearly the 
same part of the sky by all observers. This fact at  
once shows that the source of the meteors was far be- 
yond the atmosphere, and confirms the preceding  
earth1"1011  that il was wholly independent of the  
" The powers of heaven shall be shaken." This sign  
is yet to take place, and will come in. immediate con- 
nexion with "the sign of the Son of Man in Heaven,"  
when " all the tribes of the earth shall mourn, and  
they shall see the Son of Man coming in the clouds of  
I1?! Powe[ and. great glory. Ar,d he shall  
send forth his angels with a great sound of a trumpet,  
and they shall gather together his elect from the Ll  
. winds, from one end of heaven to the other "  
fhe parable of the fig-tree is then given to illustrate  
how definite this sign is to be. When it puts forth  
leaves, ye know that summer is near. So likewise ye  
when ye see these things come to pass, know that it is 
near, even at the door. Verily I say unto you this  
I generation (who see these things begin) shall not'pass  
away unt 1 all be fulfilled. A "generation is threescore  
years and ten, 70 years. The signs began 1780, 
nearly G3 years ago. The generation will soon be  
passed, but not before the events transpire.  
" But of that day and hour KNOWETII no man," &c,  
Ihey were to know, by the signs, when it is near,  
even at the door, but not the exact day or hour; fo  
that they must watch.  
The signs having come to pass, what have we to  
look for but the coming of the Saviour in power and  
great glory. 1  
Christian, are you ready? Do you look for and  
hasten to the glorious day ! Are you doino- your ut- 
most to bring your friends to  Christ, and prepare for  
the great event! ' r  
Reader, are you among those who say, my Lord de- 
layeth his coming, and are smiting their fellow ser-
vants, and eating and drinking with the drunken* If I  
so. beware!  

25Bi  
intober P^ce, where she is nour- 
sfied for a time, and times, and half a time from  
the face of the serpent." '  
,J'2e te-xts/efer t0 the same Portion of history  
and the period assigned to it is expressed in a  
manner t0 lain the period  nQw ^ZsidSa  
here arP o^T' ^ and a half a time" then,  uiere are 1260 days ; but will that period under  
stood literally, cover the long history of papal ^u  
pation, blasphemy and blood? Why^ evervbodv  
i is that !?r\r of  
LL of'itp 11 W°Uld n0t be ,ime e»ou?h for even [one of the wars against the saints, whom Popery  has always called "heretics." How then h  
we understand it ? The old Bible rufe s when a  
rimes wL^ 118 dayS aie USed %«ativel/somi  
he neSd We should understand  the period to signify 1260 years. Where will that  Let us see—f"~ '  bring us to?  , — - —- occ—538 4- 1260 — 1798  
tit 2Jnd ihat the, ?rCat Cha^e Predicted to 
take place in the condition of the "little horn" 
»«] i " uuans: 
take place in the condition of the  
occurred in that year. « THEV SHALL TAKE AWAY  
HIS DOMINION." In 1798 Rome was conquered by  
made nriCh ^' }h? PoP* and cardinals were  
ZlLPp? T' andthe PaPal independence was 
abolished. See Allison, Theirs, Croly.  
An extract from a work written by Edward  
don fn F- \ r- A" S" and P-blishL in  12- 
monhecv Th6 ^ the true idea of the prophecy. The author cannot of course be suspect- ed of any partiality to '' MOIerism.'' P  
is not the Papal power, at Rome, which was  
once so terrible, and so domineering, at an end?  
But let us pause a little. Was not the end in  
au&S:/,tnHoly  P/0pbecies- foretold to be  
at the END of 1260 years ? and was it not foretold  
bv Daniel, to be at the END of a times> Tnd  
ha,/ a time] which computation amounts to the  
same period.  
TmsnTd<?TwJeVKe; hear; understand.  PHIS IS THE YEAR 1798.-And just 1260  
years ago, m the very beginning of the' vear 538  
j^MfjsstrjLt?  
X EmPer,or °f the East, and had soon  
after made it tributary to him; leaving thence- 
coSh ^ A" V- 538' N0 in Rome, that 
FPnTP^i0™16 over the earth—excepting the  
ECCLESIASTICAL PONTIFICAL POWER "  
p .1 18 true> that after this entry of Belisarius, 
Rome was twice re-taken by Totila and the Goths.  
Z t Settm? Up any emPire  there' he,  the first time, carried away all the Senate, and  
drove out all the inhabitants; and, the second time, 
he was himself soon defeated and killed, and Rome  
was recovered for Justinian, by Narses.  
S»tiU, however, NO DOMINION,  ' NO POWER RUL- 
A?VTR THE W0RLD' E^ER HAD ANY SEAT THERE,  
AN V MORE, EXCEPT THE PAPAL.' For the Duke 0F  
aPP01"ted by Longinus, in 568, was no more  
than a subordinate civil officer; and even under the  
Exarch. Whilst the Exarch of Ravenna (at the  
same time that he was, in reality, no residing power  
at Rome) was at most, himself only a subordinate  
officer under the Emperor of the East. And the  
^m,°"and P<wer of the Emperor of the East was  
quite different and distinct from what could at all  
properly be called the Roman Power. For nothing  

Zlti J ?y meLans' fair]y corae under such a 
desertion, but either the dominion of the Wes- 
tern Emperor, or the dominion of the Kings of  
<< w or the PaPal dominion- 
1260 vLlaVe reaS°n t0 aPPrehend> then, that the  
lenLl f  A  16 u°W completed, and that we may  
venture to date the commencement of that period^  
efthW froTpCOm-mentat0rS haVe hitherto done,  
from pk f Pepm s the Pope Ravenna,, or 
from Charlemagne's determining and adjudging the  
e^PV°th» Vicar °n earth' hut fronf the  
those othM- ?;°thlC P°Wer at Rome' B^ause both 
auental  CUmStanCes  Were on]y (Iike subse- quent gifts, or acquisitions  of territory  and revenue  ^  
SST 0f S.Ple"d-. -d confirmations  
THE PAI PLECCLESLASTLCAL SUPREMACY, IN WHICH  
iTJZ,/ HAD BEEN LEFT AT Rojie by  
BELISARIUS, ON HIS DRIVING OUT THE GoTHS A wn 
RUINING THEIR KINGDOM."  °  
'it hi h Very COmmo1n error''  says Mr. Croly  
years was to hCp°"flved.that the close of the 1260  
thp n™ I • 6 the extlnction of the Papacy, but  
no mor,e than that ^ £ 2  ena oj its p0wer over the saints. Its end is pre- 
dicted to be subsequent, and cotemporaneous with  
ment the Pon d °f ^ Almi^hty At ^ mo- 
WAS sbakln? «ff the sackcloth and  
just of the French Revolution, is rising into a  
and 8trf^th' the pa*  it is yet to perform, and in the midst of which it  
«boef hregnu'ished by the iast ^  
wSen r\are,in that section of the vision which is to be closed up by the "CASTING DOWN  
MKNT"E TTr "S"-the  SITTIN° -E TO- 
MENT —THE "COMING OF THE SON OF MAM TV  
THE CLOUDS OF HEAVEN," AND THE GIVING O^  
EVERLASTING KINGDOM TO CHRIST AND THE  
SAINTS OF THE MOST HLGH "  
marifs6 ESI011"11 °f thC VOya^e' and aI1 ^e land- 
S SUS We are "ear its end. Friend, if you are on the wrong course put the ship about, while  there is time to clear the breakers, and secure a safe  
harbor before the storm shall break upon us.  

w remo\ ed  
res are fixed  
ibably no  
himself,  
4 told  
VISION OF THE JUDGMENT.  
Dark brood the heavens o'er thee»  
Black clouds are gath'ring fast;  
In awful power thy God has come,  
lhy days of mirth are past.  
Dark brood the heavens o'er thee!  
Red flames are bursting round ;  
Bright lightnings flash, loud thunders roar.  
How shakes the trembling ground.'  
Dark brood the heavens o'er thee!  
Behold, the Judge appears •  
Unnumber'd millions throng around,  
Kais d from the dust of years.  
Dark brood the heavens o'er thee!  
"inner, behold thy doom;  
destruction opens wide for thee  
lhy chosen, final home.  
Yet stay—the vision lingers;  
Why, sinner, wilt thou die*  
Dark brood the heav'ns, but mercy waits,  
1 ins hour to Jesus fly.  

1  
if  
m  
i i •  
i  
A


SJ  
Do you love  His Appearing.  
St. Paul says, 2 Tim. iv. 7—S. " I have fought  
a good fight, I have finished my course, I have kept 
the faith: Henceforth there is laid up for me a  
crown of righteousness, which th» Lord, the righte- 
ous Judge, shall give me at that day: and not to 
me only, but unto all them also that love his appear- 
ing." As much as if he had said none will receive 
that crown unless they love the appearing of Christ. 
The coming of Christ is such a joyful event, and so  
congenial to the Christian heart, and fraught with 
so many glorious consequences to the Christian, that  
I cannot conceive of the humble child of God who  
can reflect upon it without delight.  
I am aware that there are almost countless num- 
bers who have made good professions, and who  
doubtless esteem themselves the true lovers of Jesus,  
who do but regard the appearing of Christ with hor- 
ror and contempt, and who cannot for a moment  
endure to hear mention made of his glorious appear- 
ing quickly.  
Some professed ministers of the gospel, too, who  
ought, agreeable to Christ's plain command, to 
be watching for his appearing in the clouds of heav- 
en, alas evince to an ungodly world, that they neith*  
er love, nor are watching for his appearing. I an  
of an opinion that if such professors and minister!  
would examiue their,own hearts, they would fine .  
sufficient there to suspect they love not th< 
Savior.  
It is lamentable indeed to witness the apathy tha  
e*ists in the professedly religious community upoj  
this subject. One would hardly credit it, did no  
melancholy experience make it too plain to be de  
nied that the church which professes so much lovjl  
for the Redeemer, and which expects a day of  
ment, should be so slothful and so indifferent 
most glorious of all subjects. But so it is.  
Churches are asleep, having been so long lulled  
the syren song of peace, peace, universal peace  
fore Christ  can come. Would to God that  
mighty sound like a rushing wind would break this 
spell which binds the Church in the arms of repose- 
before Gabriel's trump shall do it.  
1 have thought, and do now, that the beautiful  
rule laid down in one of brother Miller's books  
perfectly correct, viz " If a man love Chris*' h  
will love his appearing, if he hate him, he wifl fW ,  
to have hira come." I think with him that this isul  
- —- .. i „/'  

Exposition of Daniel 7lh Chapter;  
OR, VISION OF THE KOL'R BEASTS.—BY G. STORRS.  
In communicating instruction to the children of men,  
God is pleased to give " line upon line, precept upon 
precept—here a little, and there a little." The baviour  
saith, John xvi. 12, " I have yet many things to say  
unto you, but ye cannot bear them now.'" Revelation  
has been not only progressive, but the same truths have 
been repeated again and again, under different figures,  
emblems, and forms of speech. As a kind parent en- 
forces important truths upon the minds of his offspring, 
illustrating and repeating to make tlifc deeper impres-
sion, so our Heavenly Father labors to impress our  
minds with truths connected with, and having a bear-
ing on our eternal destiny, and necessary to establish 
the faith of his people, and inspire in them confidence  
in his word. He has given them waymarks to deter- 
mine the truth of his word, and to mark the period of  
the world in which they are living, and to show them 
that their Heavenly Father was perfectly acquainted  
with all the road his church would have to travel to the 
end of the world, and the termination of all their labors  
and sufferings.  
To illustrate. Suppose you were travelling a road  
with which you were unacquainted. You inquire of  a  
stranger—he tells you, that road leads to a glorious  
city, filled with every good thing, governed by the most  
lovely, mild, and benevolent Prince that the world ever 
saw; that in that city there was neither sickness, sor- 
row, pain, nor death. He then proceeds to tell you  
what you may expect to pass on the road, by which  
you may know he has told you the truth, and which 
will mark the progress you have made. First, then,  
he tells you, after leaving him, and travelling awhile, 
you will come to a monument, that can be seen at a  
great distance; on the top of it you will, see " a lion " 
having " eagle's wings;"—at a distance beyond that, 
you will come to another monument, having on it " a 
bear" with " three ribs in his mouth :"•—passing on  
still, you will at length arrive at a third monument, on 
the top of which you Will behold a " leopard" having  
"four wings of a fowl" and "four heads :"—after that.,  
vou will come to a fourth, on which is a beast " dread- 
ful and terrible," with " great iron teeth " and " ten  
horns :"—and lastly, you will come to another place,  
where you will see the same beast, with this difference  
—" three" of its " first horns " have been " plucked  
up," and in the place of them has come up a peculiar  
horn, having ''eyes like the eyes  of a man, and a  
mouth." The next thing you will look for, after pass- 
ing the last-mentioned sign, is the city of which I have 
told you.  
With these directions you commence your journey.  
What do you look for fitst ] The lion. At length you  
see it. That inspires in you some faith in the person's  
knowledge and truth who had directed you. Having  
passed that sign, the next thing you expect to see, as  
marked in the directions, 16 the bear. At length you  
come in sight of that. "There," say you, "is the 
second sign he gave me. He must have been perfectly  
acquainted with this road, and has told me the truth."  
Your faith increases as you travel on. What next do  
you look for? Not the city, certainly. " No," say 
you, " Ilook for the leopard." Well, by and by you  
behold that, in the distance. " There it is," you cry;  
« now I know he has told me the truth, and it will 
come out just as he said." Is the next thing you look 
for now, the oity? No—you look for that "terrible  
beast" with " ten'horns." You pass that, and say as  
you pass, "How exactfy the man  who directed me  
described everything." Now your faith is so confirm-
ed that you almost see the city; but," say you, " I 
have got one more sign to pass, viz., the ' horn ' with  
-then the city comes next." Now hope is high,  
last sign. That comes in view, and you ^exclaim in  

raptures, " There it is!" All doubt is now removed— 
you look for no more signs—your longing eyes are fixed 
to gaze on the " glorious city " next—and probably no 
man now, however wise he might profess himself,  
could make you discredit what your director had told 
you. " The city—the city," is now fixed in your eye, 
and onward you go, hasting to your rest.  
Now, if we find, on examination, that all the events  
or signs that God has given us, which were to precede  
the judgment day and the setting up of his everlasting  
kingdom, have actually transpired, or come to view, 
what are we to look for next! Most clearly, the  judg- 
ment of the great day! Let us, then, examine the 
chapter before us.  
Verse 1. "In the first year of Belshazzar, king of  
Babylon, Daniel had a dream, and visions of his head, 
upon his bed : then he wrote the dream, [thus it became  
a part of the Scriptures] and told the sum of the mat-
ters."  
F. 2 and 3. " Daniel spake and said, I saw in my  
vision by night, and behold the four winds [denoting  
commotions] of the heaven strove upon the great sea,  
(waters, denoting "people." See Rev. xvii. 15,) and  
four great beasts came up from the sea, diverse one i  
from another." The angel explains these four beasts < 
to be " four kings, ver$e l7, or four kingdoms, as you1  
j will see verse 23.  "The fourth beast is the fourth  
f. kingdom," &c.; which shows that the term king, in  
these visions, signifies kingdom.  
F. 4. " The first was like a lion, and had eagle's  
wings:" Babylon, as described in this vision. We have 
already seen, chapter ii. 38, that Babylon was the first 
universal "kingdom upon earth;" aptly represented 
here by a lion—" the king of beasts,"—denoting the  
glory of that kingdom, aud corresponding with the |  
" head of gold " in the second chapter—the " eagle's 
w4ngs" denoting the rapidity of its conquests, and the  
soaring pride of its monarchs. It is described by  
Habakkuk, chapter i. 6—8, " For, lo ! I raise up the  
Chaldeans [Babylon]—they shall fly as the eagle that  
hasteth to eat." See Isa". T. 26, 29, and Jer. iv. 7;  
also, Ezek. xvii. 3, 4. Daniel goes on to say—" I be- 
held til! the wings thereof were pluchd, wherewith* it  
was lifted from the earth, [its glory departed,] and it  
was made to stand upon its feet as a man, and a man's  
heart was given to it." This may refer to the humili-
ation of the proud monarch of Babylon, chapter iv. 31  
—37, or to the cowardice of Belshazzar, who, instead  
of driving away his foes like a lion, shut himself up in 
the city, feasting and drinking with his lords, till he 
was killed, and the kingdom was given to the Medes 
and Persians.  
V. 5. " And behold, another beast, a second, like  
to a bear, and it raised up itself on one side, [represent- 
ing two lines of kings, one much longer than the  
other,] and it had three ribs in the mouth of it, between  
the teeth of it; and they said unto it, Arise, devour  
much flesh."  
We have already seen that the Medo-Persian king- 
dom succeeded Babylon, and is clearly the kingdom  
here described. It was noted for cruelty and thirst of  
blood, and the nation is emphatically called " the spoil- 
er." See Jer. li. 48—56.  The " three ribs" in its  
mouth may denote the union of Media, Persia, and 
Chaldea. It subdued many and populous kingdoms. 
Ahasuerus, or Artaxerxes, reigned over 127 provinces. 
See Esther i. 1.  
V. G. " After this I beheld, and lo, another, like a  
leopard, which had upon the back of it four wings of a  
fowl; the beast had also four heads, and dominion was  
i'iven to it." There can be no dispute with respect to  
;iis being Grecia ; " four wings " denoting the rapid- 
ly of its conquest under Alexander; the " four heads"  
division into four parts after Alexander died, and  
posterity were murdered.  
I F. -7 and 8. " After this I saw in the night visions,  
nd behold a fourth beast, dreadful and terrible, and  
/jtrong exceedingly; and it had great iron teeth: it  

J  
1  
' eys8' « ••••PHHJ! p^HHipHI •••••••••••••IIQHHMHPPPQP  
and your anxious eyes gaze with intense interest for the , tevoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the residue  
with 'the feet of it: and it was diverse from all the  
2~


'bens!.-5  that were before If;  and it had ten horns. I  
considered the horns, and behold, there came up among  
them another little horn, before whom there were three  
of the first horns plucked up by the roots : and behold,  
this horn were eyes like the eye of a man, and a  
mouth speaking great things." On these veTses I shall 
remark when I come to the angel's explanation.  
V. 9 and 10. "I beheld till the thrones were cast  
down, and the Ancient of days did sit, whose garment  
was white as snow, and the hair of his head like the  
pure wool: his throne was like the fiery flame', and his  
wheels as burning fire. A fiery stream issued and came  
forth from before him; thousand thousands ministered  
unto him, and ten thousand times ten thousand stood 
before him: the  judgment was set, and the books were  
opened." If we have not here a description of the  
final judgment, we may despair of findipg any such 
description hi the book of God. There is nothing  
i V. 11. " I beheld then [When ? Ans. When < the  
judgment set-'] because of the voice of the great words  
which the horn spake, I beheld, till the beast was slain  
[What beast? Ans. The fourth beast, on which the  
horn had stood,] and his body destroyed, and given tp  
the burning flame." That is the punishment of the  
beast for having sustained and carried the little horn.  
Nothing is said of" the dominion" of this beast being 
" taken away," as is said of the others. The others  
lost their dominion after a time, but their subjects sur- 
vived and were transferred to the succeeding govern-
ments, but the very body [subjects] of this fourth king-
dom is destroyed, and given to the burning flame; as  
; Isaiah saith (xxxiii. 12,) " The people shall be as the  
burnings of lime ; as thorns cut up shall they be burned  
in the fire." No transferring of its subjects to another  
kingdom. Then " The wicked shall be cut off from  
the earth, and the transgressors shall be rooted out of  
it." Prov. ii. 22. Then God will "destroy them  
-'which destroy [corrupt] the earth." Revel, xi. 18.  
But—  
V. 12 " As concerning the rest of the beasts,/foy  
i had their dominion taken away; yet their lives were  
prolonged for a season and a time." [Babylon ruled  
about 1700 years—Media and Persia about 200—Grecia 
about 175.] These kingdoms successively lost the do-
minion, but the lives of the respective nations were  
prolonged, being merged in the succeeding govern- 
ments.  
| V. 13 and 14. "I saw in the night visions, and  
behold, one like the Son of man came with the clouds  
of heaven, and came to the Ancient of days, and they 
brought him near before, him. And there was given  
him dominion, and glory, and a kingdom, that all peo- 
ple, nations, and languages, should serve him; his 
dominion is an everlasting dominion, which shall not  
ss away, and his kingdom that which shall not be  
stroyed."—Thus we see the kingdom of God, or of  
rist, is not set up till the "judgment sits;" hence  
room for a temporal millennium before the judgment,  
1 before the kingdoms of this world are destroyed,  
ill people, nations, and languages," that  shall "serve  
n," are described by the Revelator, chapter v. 9, 10,  
"redeemed OUT OF every kindred, and tongue,  
•find people, and nation," &c.  
V. 15—18. " I Daniel was grieved in my spirit in  
the midst of my body, and the visions of my head  
troubled me. I came near unto one of them that stood  
by, and asked him the truth of all this. So he told  
me, and made me know the interpretation of the things.  
These great beasts, which are Your, are four kings,  
which shall arise out of the  earth. But the saints°of  
the Most High shall take the kingdom, and possess  
the kingdom forever, even forever and ever." Not  
"thousand years," but forever, even FOREVER and  
',VER." If any lafiguage can express unending  
duration, this must do so. Some think the language 
too strong to be applied to a thousand years, and so  
I make it mean "three hundred and sixty thousand  
years." But that, is infinitely short of " forever, even  
v forever and ever." ~ —i.  
ML:". .7 - 

Wb[  1 1  t  )J1L  i  
jf 19 25. " Tffen I would know the truth of the  
fourth beast, which was diverse from all the others,  
sxceeding dreadful, whose teeth were of iron, and his  
nails of brass ; which devoured, brake in pieces, and  
stamped the residue with his feet: and of the ten 
horns that Were in his head, and of the other which  
same up, and before whom three fell; even of that  
horn that had eyes, and a mouth that  spake very great  
things, whose look was more stout than his fellows.  
I beheld, and the same horn made war with the saints, 
and prevailed against them ; until the Ancient of days \ 
came, and judgment was given to the saints of the  
Most High; and the time came that the saints pos-
sessed the kingdom. Thus he said, The fourth beast  
shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be 
diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the whole 
earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces.  
And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings  
That shall arise; and another shall rise after them ;  
and he shall he diverse from the first, and he shall  
subdue three kings. And he shall speak great words 
againgt the Most High, and shall wear out the saints  
of the Most High, and think to change times and laws;  
and they shall be given into his hand until a time and  
tunes and the dividing of time,"-.— ——  
There is but little dispute about what is here meant  
by the " fourth kingdom." No kingdom that ever has  
existed on earth will answer to it, except the Roman  
kingdom. That has b^en, truly, " diverse from all  
kingdoms," especially in its forms of government., 
which were not lees than seven—being, at different 
times, Republican, Consular, Tribune, Decemvirate,  
Dictatorial, Imperial, and Kingly. It was at length  
divided into the Eastern and Western, empires ; Rome  
proper being in the  Western empire. Between the  
years A. D. 356 and 483, it was divided into ten king- 
doms, as I have noticed in my remarks on chapter n.; 
thus-the "ten horns are ten kings" [kingdoms] that  
arose out of this empire, and are the same that John 
saw^Rev. xii. 3, "a great red dragon having seven  
heads and ten horns;" and, chapter xvu. 12, he is 
told—"The ten horns which thou sawest, are^ ten 
kings, which have received no kingdom as yet—it__  
was something still future, in John's time.  
We are now prepared for the inquiry—who, or what  
is the little horn here spoken of] We will inquire,  
1st. What is the charcnetcr of this horn ? 1. It makes  
'' war with the saints." 2. It speaks great words  
against the Most High. .  
j Let us see if we can find a description of the same  
character elsewhere in the Bible. See Rev. xiii. 6, 7:'  
" And he opened his mouth-in blasphemy against God, 
to blaspheme his name and his tabernacle, and them  
that dwell in heaven. And it was given uuto him to  
make tear with the saints and to overcome them: '—  
Daniel savs, he "prevailed against them." Now see  
2 Thess. ii. 3, 4 : "That man of sin be revealed, who  
opposeth and exalteth himself above all that  is called  
God," &c. Can there be anv doubt of the identity ot  
the character« Daniel's " little horn"—Paul's " man 
of sin"—and John's " blasphemous beast'' are clearly  
identified. . .  
2d. Let us inquire, has a power of this description  
arisen 1 It must be admitted that there has ; and that 
that power is Papacy. The titles the Popes have as- 
sumed, of "MOST"HOLY  LORD," and their preten- 
sions to pardon sin, even before its commission, it we  
had nothing else, sufficiently establishes the blasphe- 
mous character of that power. Pope Innocent III:  
writes—" He [Christ] hath set one man over the icorld, 
him whom he hath appointed his vicar on earth; and  
as to Christ is bent every knee in heaven, in earth and  
• under the earth, so shall obcdience and service be pnid to  
'his vicar by all, that there may be oiie fold and one  
shepherd." Again, Pope Gregory VII. says, "  The  
Roman Pontiff alone is by right univmal. In him  
.alone is the right of making laws. Let all kings kiss  
j the feet of the Pope. His name alone shall be heard  

1 Ii  

ill the Phurches. "It is the ONLY NAIIK ISTHHVOS?  
, It is his right to depose kings. His ifrd is not to be  
repealed by any one. It is to be regaled by himself  
alone. He is to be judged by none. The church of  
Kome has never erred; and the Scriptures testify it  
never shall err." Surely here is a power " diverse 
trom': all others, and proud and blasphemous enough  
to answer the character of theIjttla horn."  
L 3d- Lst us now inquire, When-this little horn arose?  
Or, which is the same thing, When did Papacy arise1  
I here has been a difference of opinion on that question.  
But it appears to me the question is not one so difficult  
to settle now as in former years. First, then—it did  
not arise before the ten horns. Hence it did not arise  
before A. D. 483, when the tenth horn came up. It 
did not arise, until "three of the first horns''/i//,  or  
were "plucked up." It did not come up after that, 
because it "came up ammg? the "ten horns," and  
three, of those horns fell "before" it. It must then  
have come up or been established at the identical point  
where the third horn fell'. If that point can  be settled,  
it seems to me there can be nr reasonable doubt as to  
Jhe tm? Papacy arose./ In the year of our Lord 493,  
• the lleruli m Rome and Italy were conquered by the •  
Ostrogoths. In 534, the Vandals, who were ui^ar - 
Arian influence, were conquered bv the Greeks, for the 
purpose of establishing the supremacy of the Catholics. 
The Ostrogoths, who held possession of Rome, were  
under an.Ariau monarch, who was an enemy to the 
supremacy of the Bishop of Rome; hence, before the! 
decree of Justinian, (a Greek emperor at Constanti-
nople,) could be carried into affect, by which he had;'  
constituted the Bishop of Roma "head of ail the} 
churches," the Ostrogoths must be plucked up. This 
conquest was effected by Justinian', the month  
of March, 538; at which time, t)ie Ostrogoths, who had  
retired without tho city, and besieged it in their tutu,  
raised the siege and retired, leaving the Greeks in pos- 
session of the city: thus the thml fiofn was plucked 
before Papacy, and for the express purpose too. of 
establishing that power. [See Gibbon's Decline and 
Fall of Roman Empire.]  
How exactly do >the facts answer to the prophecy ?' I  
f will here introduce the ietter  0f Justinian to the Bishop  
of Rome, ofA. D. 533: _ 1 ;  
" Justinian,  V'IOUS, FURTAJFETE, reno\vncd, triumphant,,  
",. emperor, consul, &c., to John, the most holy Arch-j  
bishop of our city of Rome, aud patriarch:  
% " Rendering honor to the apostolic see, and to your1  
-i. holiness, (as always was and is our desire,) and, as it  
becomes us, honoring your blessedness as a fa'.her, we 
have laid without delay before the notice of your holi- 
ness all things pertaining to the st^te of the chucchi  
Since it has always been our earnest study to preserve thi  
u/uty of your holy see, aud the state of the holy churches  
of God, which has hitherto obtained, and will remain,  
* without any interfering opposition; therefore we hasj  
ten to SUBJECT, and to unite to yjur holiness, all the  
pnests (f the whole Eist. As to the matters which are  
picsently\agitated, although clear and undoubted, and;'  
,y.f according to the doctrine of your apostolic see, held  
v! 4 assuredly resolved and decided by all priests, we havq  
J yet deemed it neccssary to lay them before your holi- 
jjlness. Nor do we suffer anything which belongs to the  
"state of the church, however manifest and undoubted,  
that is agitated, to pass without the knowledge of 
your holiness, who are the head of all the holy churches.  
For in all things (as had been said or resolved) 
we are prompt to increase the honor and authority of  
your see."  
" The authenticity of the title," says Mr. Croley,  
receives unanswerable proof from the edicts of "the  
Novellas' of the Justinian code. The preamble of  
he 9th states, 1 that as the  elder Rome was the  
founder of the laws; so was it not to be questioned.  
Jhat in her was the supremacy of the pontificate.'  
The 131st, on the Ecclesiastical Titles and Privileges,  
chapter ii., states : ' We therefore decree that the most  
holy Pope of the eldar Rome is the first of all the 
priesthood, and that the most blessed archbishop of  
'Constantinople, the new Rome, shall hold the second  
rank, after the holy apostolic chair of the elder Rome.'''  

<  
I"  

Some suppose that  Phocas, A. D. 606, by applying  
the title " universal Bishop" to the  Pope, first gave  
1113 supremacy : but this cannot be, for it does not f  
agree wi th the prophecy that three of the first horns''  
. were to be plucked up before it, as it came up, and this  
happened more than half a century before. Again,  
Mr. Croley, a writer of the Church of England, says—  
' lhe highest authorities among the civilians * and  
anna lists of Rome spurn the idea that Phocas was the  
founder of the supremacy of Rome; they ascend to  
Justinian, as the only legitimate source, and rightly 
date the title from the memorable year 533." 1- 
Imperial Rome fell about A. D. 475, and was in the  
hands ot the barbarians. Thus it continued till the  
conquest of Rome by Belisarius, Justinian's general, 
j3b to 538, when the Ostrogoths left  it in possession  
of the Greek emperor, March, 538. Thus the way  
was open for the " dragon" to give the " beast his  
power, and lus seat, and great authority.'J. Rev. xiii. 
2C r,hlsT(act' from R«velation, also, settles the point  
that the Pope did not receive his power from Clovis, t-
king of France. It was the " Dragon" that gave him  
•<his seat"—Rome, " his power," as head of the [  
cfwrehes. The Roman emperors had stood at the  
head of the churches with "power" to make important  
; decisions lor the church—it is now transferred to the  
1 ope: and he has given him, also, " great authority," 1  
under the Justinian code of laws, to judge and punish  
lltilcUCS.  
4th. The next point we want to settle is, the length  
of hme this power was to continue. Daniel says, " a  
time, times, and the 'dividing of time." The Revela- 
tor says, chap. xiii. 5, " Power was given unto him 
to continue 42 months." JIc was to make war upon  
tho saints—-the church; and in Rev. xii. 6, we are told,  
" the woman," the church. " fled into the wilderness "' 
1260 days ; and at tho 11th verse, that it was for " a  
time, and times, and a half time." Here then we have  
the period of the continuancc of this power given us  
in three forms of expression, which settles the point'  
that the tame, times and dividing of time is 42 months, j  
or 1200 prophetic, days or years.  
5th. Did the continuance of papal dominion, as a |  
horn of the beast, cease at the end of that period 1 i  
1260 years from 538 would extend to 1798. Did any- f  
thing transpire that year to justify the belief that the I  
dominion of papacy was taken away that year ? It is j  
a historical fact that, on F§b. 10th, 1798, Berthier, a :  
Frcnch general, entered the city of Rome anil took it.  
On the 15th  of the same  month the Pope was taken  
prisoner and shut up in the Vatican. The papal gov-1 
crnnunt, which had continued from the time of Justin-j  
ian, was abolished, and a repnbliean form of govern-! 
ment given to Rome. The Pope was carried captive ' 
to France, whore he died in 1799. Thus, " he that '' ' 
led others "into captivity," went "into captivity;"! »"  
and he who killed "with the sword" those lie wasj 
pleased to call heretics, was himself " killed [subdued] j 
with the sword;" i. e., his " dominion was taken' 
away " by war. See Rev. xiii. 10. Verse 20 : " But: 
the judgment shall sit, and they [the kings that' hate  
the whor3,' Rev, xvii. 16] shall take away  his domin- 
ion, [he is cut off from beiug a horn on the bsa-st, or 
deprived of his cim power, so that he can no longer  
wield the sword against dissenters] to consume and de- 
jstroy it unto the end." See 2 Thess. if. 8"f" Whom  
the Lord shall consume with the spirit of his riiouth  
[the "Reformation"] and shall destroy with the  
brightness of his ccming " to  judge the world in the  
great burning day, when the " beast and false proph- 
et " will be " cast alive into the lake of fire, burning  
with brimstone ;" then the " little horn " will be de- 
stroyed.  
Some tell us- the civil power of Papacy is not taken  
away. That the Pope was restored, or a new one 
chosen, is admitted, and that he may have some civil  
power in Italy is not denied. But that he has power  
to depose kings aud put to death the saints now, is  

3  \  
1  •  
1  
I  
I;  
m  
if  I •


denied. When he was a, horn on the beast, he deposed  
kings at pleasure, for centuries, and silenced " here-
tics" by the llame, the rack, prison, and the sword. 
Can he do it now? No. Nor has he been able to do  
it since 1798—since that time the church is out of the  
" wildernessand  Papacy is compelled  to tolerate  
1 Protestantism. Hear the Pope himself on that subject.  
' Here is his letter, dated Sept., 1840, at Rome. Rend  
lit, and see if you think Papacy is now a horn on the  
beast, or is possessed of power to war against the  
| paints unto death, as formerly.  
"ENCVLLICAL LETTKR of Our MOST HOLY LORD  
GREGORY XVI. by Divine Providence Pope, to all 
Patriarchs, Primates, Archbishops, and Bishops.  
\ GREGORY XVI. POPE.  
" Venerable Brethren,—Health and the apostolic  
'Benediction.  
! " You will know, Venerable Brothers, how great  
are the calamities with which the Catholic Church is  
beset on all sides in this most sorrowful age, and how  
pitifully she is afflicted. You know by what a deluge  
of errors of every kind, and with what unbridled au-
dacity of the erronconp, our Holy Religion is attacked, 
and hojv cunningly and by what frauds heretics and  
infidels are endeavoring to prevert the hearts and minds 
of th- faithful. In a word, you know there is almost 
no kind of effort or machination which is not employed,  
to overthrow, from its deepest foundations, if it were  
possible, the immovable edifice of the Holy City.  
R " Indeed, are we not, (Oh, how shameful!) com- 
pelled to see the most crafty enemies of the truth  
[ranging far and wide with impunity; not only attack-
ling religion with ridicule, tli§ church with contumely,  
land Catholics with insults and slander, but even enter- 
ing into cities and towns, establishing schools of error  
and impiety, publishing in print the poison of their 
doctrines, skilfully concealed under the deceitful veil 
of the natural sciences and new discoveries, and even 
penetrating into the cottages of the poor, travelling 
through rural districts, and insinuating themselves inlo 
familiar  acquaintance with the lowest of the people  
;and with the farmers! Thus they leave no means  
'unattemptcd, whether by corrupt Bibles in tlie lan- 
guage of the people, or pestiferous newspapers and  
•other little publications, or caviling conversation, or  
:pretended charity, or, finally, by the gift of money, to  
allure ignorant people, and especially youth, into "their  
nets, and induce thrm td deSfert the Catholic faith.  
" We refer to facts. Venerable Brethren, which  
'not only are known to you, but of which yon are wit- 
nesses; even ytjp,- who, though you mourn, and, as  
your pastoral duty requires, are by no means silent, 
are yet cornp ellsd'. to tolerate in your diocess these  
;iforesaid propagator* of heresy and infidelity; these 
shameless preaeher?/who, while they walk in sheep's  
clothing, but wRaiply are ravening wolves, cease not  
to lay in wait for the flock and tear it in pieces. Why  
\ should we say more ? There is now scarcely a barba- 
rous region in the universal world, to which the well  
known Central Boards of the heretics and unbelievers  
have not, regardless of expense, sent out their explor- 
ers and emissaries, who either iiisidiouslv, or openly  
land in concert, making war upon the Catholic religion,  
its pastors and its ministers, tear the faithful out of the  
•bosom of the church, and intercept her approach to the  
infidels.  
" Hence it is easy to conceive the state of anguish  
vito which our soul is plunged day and night, as we,  
being charged with the superintendence of the whole 
fold of Jesus Christ, and the care of all the churches,  
must, give account for his sheep to the Divine Prince  
'if Pastors. And we have thought fit, Venerable  
brethren, to recall to your minds by our present letter  
causes of those troubles which are common to us  

and you, that you may more attentively consider how 
important it is to  the church, that all holy priests  
should endeavor, with redoubled zeal, and with united 
labors, and with every kind of efforts, to repel the  
attacks of the raging foes of religion, to turn back 
their weapons, and to forewarn and fortify the subtle  
blandishments which they often U3e. This, as you  
know, we have been careful to do at every opportunity; 
nor shall we cease to do it; as we also, are not igno- 
rant that you have always done it hitheTto, and confi- 
dently trust that you will do hereafter with still more 
earnest zeal.  
# # * * *  
" Given  at Rome, at St. Mary the Greater, on the  
18th of the Kalends of September, of the year 1840,  
the tenth of our pontificate.  
GREGORY XVI. POPE."  
You see what is to come next after the fall of the  
"little horn." .  
Now let us see whereabouts we are in the prophetic  
chain. Have we passed the  "Lion ! '—Babylon ? Yes.  
Have we gone by the "Bear with three ribs in his 
mouth?" Yes. Has the sign of the "Leopard with four  
wings of a fowl and four heads " been passed ? It has. 
The"" dreadful and terrible beast, with fen horns,"—  
has he been seen? Yes. Have we got past the " little  
horn" having " eyes like the eyes of a man ?" That is  
among the things numbered with the past. How- 
far beyond it are we ? Forty-five years, nearly. What 
comes next? The Judgment, followed by the ever- 
lasting kingdom of God. How far off is that? That  
question I shall answer, hereafter, DEFINITELY. But  
one thing is certain; it cannot be at a great distance.  
It is the NEXT prophctic event. Awake, ye slum- 
bering virgins! " Behold the Bridegroom cometh,  
go ye out to meet him." No time to sleep now. 
The seventh angel is preparing to sound. "AWAKE,  
VE DEAD!" will soon thunder through the skies,  
: Happy day to those that are waiting. Awful day to  
those who are saving—" My Lord delayeth his com- 
in?." AWAKE—AWAKE !!!  

1  ^ Exposition of Daniel, 8th Chapter;  
<  5  
'vl!  
liE  

THE VISION OF THE RAM, HE-GOAT, AND EX- I  
CEEDING GREAT HORN.  
BY GEO. STORRS.  
I have already remarked, elsewhere, that our Hea- 
venly Father employs various figures and represen-
tations, to enforce the same truths, to make the deeper  
impression on our minds. Thus the dream of Pharaoh,  
Genesis xli. 1—7, was doubled to him, thereby making 
the stronger impression on his spirit. In the vision of 
Peter, Acts x. 9—16, the " sheet was let down to the 
earth," and the voice three times calls upon him to  
\ "rise, kill and eat;" and as many times tells him,  
" What God has cleansed, that call not thou common."  
Thu3 God enforces important truths by a repetition.  
i This was the case in the visions of Daniel. We have  
' already seen  that the vision of the seventy chapter was  
like that of the second, with, however, additional cir- 
cumstances, viz., the sitting of the judgment, and the  
" little horn." In the last chapter, then, while the  
same truths are brought to light as in the second, we  
have some additional information : so, we may see the  
same principle carried forward in the chapter before us.  
Verses 2—1. " Aud 1 saw in a vision ; (and it came  
to pass, when 1 saw, that I was at Shushan, in the  
palace, which is in the province of Elam ;) and I saw  
in a vision, and I was by the. river Ulai. Then I lifted 
up mine eyes, and saw, and behold, there stood before  
the river a ram which had two horns; and the two  
horns were high ; but one was higher than the other, 
and the higher came up  last. I saw the ram pushing  
westward,"and northward, and southward; so that no 
beasts might stand before him, neither was there any  
that could deliver out of his hand  ; but he did according  
to his will, and became great."  
The angel informs Daniel, at the 20th verse, 1 he  
ram which thou sawest, having two horns, are the kings  
[kingdoms] of Media and Persia." Thus it exactly  
f agrees with, or is like the "  breast and arms ot  the  
image, chapterii., and the "bear" in the seventh  
chapter. Daniel sees hothing of Babylon in this vision :  
that was now passing away;  and his attention was  
particularly called to the " ram pushing." It would 
seem that that circumstance was to mark the commence-
mmtoithe vision.  
Verses 5—8. ''And as I was considering, behold, a  
he-goat came from the west, on the face of the whole  
earth, and touched not the ground: and the goat had 
a notable horn between his eyes. And he came to the  
ram that had two horns, which I had seen standing  be- 
fore the river, and ran unto him in the fury  of his power.  
And I saw him come close unto the ram, and he was 
moved with choler against him, and smote the ram, and  
brakts his two horns; and there was no power in the  
ram to stand before him, but he cast him down to the  
ground, and stamped upon  him ; and there was none  
that could deliver the ram out of his hand. Therefore,  
the he-goat waxed very great; and when he was strong 
the great horn was broken; and for it, came up four 
notable ones toward the four winds of heaven."  
The angel explains this, verses 21 and 22. "And  
the rough goat is the king [kingdom] of Grecia ; and  
the great horn that is between his eyes is the first  
king;" not Alexander merely, as some suppose, for  
Alexander was not  strictly the first king; but he be- 
longed to the kingdom in its undivided state,  or to the  
first part of the kingdom of Grecia. The great horn, 
then, I consider as a representation of Grecia while it  
was united in one, which union continued some years 
after Alexander's death, say fifteen or twenty, when 
his brother and two sons, who succeeded him, at least  
nominally, were murdered, and the kingdom was divid-
ed, as indicated at verse 22.—" Now  that being broken,  
whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms [not kings,  
as some try to make us think] shall stand up out of tin  
nation, but not in his power," [not in the power 0  
Grecia united.] _ _ _ ..  

Alexander conquered a part of Europe an  
in the short space of about twelve  years ; and the king- 
dom under him may well be represented as running in 
the "fury* of its power, and "touching not the ground.'',  
With an army of not more than thirty thousand, he  
overthrew Darius, king of Persia, who had sir hundred  
thousand, and thus " brake his two horns," or over- 
threw the Medo-Persian kingdom: then Grecia became  
a kingdom of universal empire. Alexander dies, and  
within twenty years after, four kingdoms come up in  
Grecia, viz., Macedonia, Thrace, Syria, and Egypt.  
n„c wo cop thn vision  is like the " leopard " of t  

y  
M  

Thus we see, the vision is like the'" leopard " of the  
previous vision, and the " brass " division ofthe image.  
The evidence thus far is so clear that tbife. vision is  
like the two previous ones, that some of our opponents  
have admitted that the angel has clearly shown us so ;  
but one of our opponents, vyhen he has arrived at this  
point, says—" Here the heavenly messenger leaves 1is."  
I do not wonder he thought so ; for he then goes 011 to 
apply the horn that " waxed exceeding great" to Utile  
Antiochus. It would seem that author recorded one 
truth. It appears clear, to my mind, that the heavenly 
messenger left him, but he did not leave Daniel till he  
made him understand the vision. Let us now proceed 
to, and examine this point.  
Verses 9—12. " And out of one of them came forth  
a little horn, which waxed exceeding great toward the 
south, and toward the east, and toward the pleasant  
land. And it waxed great, even to the. host of heaven  
and it cast down some of the host and of the stars to 
the ground, and stamped upon them. Yea, he magni- 
fied himself even to the prince ofthe host, and by him  
the daily sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his 
sanctuary was cast down. And a host was given him  
ao-ainst the daily sacrifice by reason of transgression,  
and it cast down the truth to the ground; and it prac- 
tised, and prospered."  
The angel explains these verses thus—  
Verses 23—25. "And in the latter time of their king- 
dom, when the transgressors are come to the full, a  
kincr of fierce countenance, and understanding dark sen-
tences, shall stand up. And his power shall be mighty,  
but not by his own power ; and he shall destroy won-
derfully, and shall prosper, and practise, and shall de- 
stroy the mighty and the holy people. And through his  
policy also he shall cause craft to prosper in his hand ;  
and he shall magnify himself in his heart, and by peace  
shall destroy many : he shall also stand up against the  
Prince of princes; but he shall be broken without  
hand." , . t  
Now, the question arises, who, or what power is t | 4  
here brought to view ? . . _  
So far as I know, there are but three opinions. 1 he j  
first is, that it is Antiochus Epiphanes, one ofthe kings  
of Syria. The second is, that it is Mahomedanism;  
and the third, that it is Rome, Pagan and Papal. Each  
of these I shall examine. <4  
I. Mahomedanism. This is the opinion of IHaber,  
followed by some others-. I conceive it cannot be Ma- 
homedanism ; first—because the " little horn stood "  
up against the' Prince of princes, v. 25, and Mahomed- 
anism itself did not stand up till about 600 years after 
Christ. If it be said, it stood up against the church, and  
therefore may be said to stand np against the Prince 
of princes, because our Lord considers that done against  
himself which is done unto his people—I reply, that 
interpretation, in this case, would make the prophecy  
use a vain repetition; for, it expressly says, it " shall 
destroy the mighty and holy people." Now, Mahom-
edanism neither stood up against Christ, in person, nor  
did it destroy the holy people. For this assertion I  
have something more than the word of man. " Let  
God be true " though every man should be proved a  
" liar." All admit that Rev. 9th chapter is a descrip- 
tion of Mahomedanism. Read the fourth verse of that  
chapter,- and see if Mahomedanism stood up against the 
true church of God. " It was commanded them [Ma- 
j hemedans] lhat they should not hurt the grass of the  
' earth, neither any green thing, neither any tree; but  
„ L i.


[mark it] only those men WHO HAVE NOT the seal  
of God in their foreheads." Here then is evidence, 
strong-as the truth of God, that Mahomedanism was 
not to hurt the trite church; and, of course, did not  
" stand up against the Prince of princes " in any sense  
to answer the application of the text in Daniel to that  
power.  
II. *rhe next opinion I shall examine is, that it is  
Antiochus Epiphanes, one of the kings that ruled, for  
a time, over one of the " four horns," viz.,'over Syria.  
To this interpretation I urge the following objec- 
tions— *  
1. Such an interpretation SOPS violencp to the whole  
subject. How is this vision hke the previous, if An- 
tiochus is the "little horn1" We have seen that it  
exactly agrees with" the previous visions hitherto ; and  
we see also that lite little horn extends down to the 
end of this Vision. If, then, Antiochus is the little horn, 
it is not like the other vision by more than two thousand  
years; for, Antiochus died 164 years before Christ was  
,-born.  
* 2. This " little horn^' as I have said, ends the vis- 
ion, v. 17: " For at [urilo] the time of the  end sha.ll be  
the vision." What end! Evidently the end spoken 
of in the vision it is like, chap. vii. 26—" They shall  
take away his dominion, to consume and destroy unto  
the end." 2Thess. ii.: " That wicked, whom the Lord 
shall destroy with the brightness of his coming." The  
end, when the Lord Jesus will be revealed from hea- 
ven.  
3. Again—This little horn was to extend to " the  
last end of the indignation." Surely, none will pretend  
the death of Antiochus was the last end of indignation,  
even to the Jews. If they do, let them cease to talk 
of the great tribulation at the destruction of Jerusalem  
by the Romans.  
"4. The attempt to apply the 2300 days of this vis- 
fj ion to Antiochus, has been a total failure. Those who  
I make this attempt cannot agree  among ihemsclves how  
i to reckon the time ; some of them maintaining that the  
jdays are entire days, and others, that they are to be  
'reckoned half days, or 1150 days, because the expres- 
sion in the original is 2300 "evening-mornings."  
! But let them count as they will, they cannot match it 
! with Antiochus. Professor Stuart admits that the time 
| is 2360 entire days ; but after attempting to match them  
with Antiochus he has totally failed. He reckons hack  
[from the cleansing of the sanctuary by Judas Macca- 
Ijbeus, after it had been polkted by Antiochus, and he  
finds what? Why, he finds the f&Sth of August,  
UI171 B.C.!! liU Yes, reader, he finds that marvel- 
,| lous day, hut he finds no event to mark that as the be- 
| ginning of the 2300 days. Perhaps he thought it would  
be taken for granted that it must begin then. Now if  
| "Millerites," as they are called by their opponents  
should attempt to make their iheories pass by sueh an  
! argument, we should scarcely get the people to hear 
: us more than onec, and they would justly accuse us of 
| an attempt to impose upon them. Show us facts, from  
history, that the 2300 days begun when you " guess "  
j they did ; till then we deny that there is a particle of  
'proof that the 5th of August, 171 B. C., is marked  
with anything that could show that to be the beginning  
of those days.  
Mr. Dowling,  the mouth-piece of most  of our oppo- 
nents, makes 1150 days of the 2300; and when he 
has attempted to match that number with the history  
of Antiochus, he comes out within about 55 days of  
making a ft. He admits he wants 55 days; and that 
he cannot make them out for want of not being " in- 
formed by any historian exactly how many days elapsed  
between the time Athenaeus stopped the daily sacrifices 
and the 25th of the month Casleu, when Jupiter was  
worshipped in the temple." But Mr. D. supplies this 
defect in history, by a "guess;" for he adds, "Had  
we been thus informed, [DCP] I have no doubt, [<£11]  
that we should find that  time to be [ID3] exactly fcdl]  

fifty-five days." " If and if;" that is a fatal affair "for  
Mr. D ; the naughty historian should have been more  
particular. But, seriously, Mr. D. admits two facts  
that prove fatal to his argument. 1st. That he has no  
history to warrant his application of the days to Anti- 
ochus ; and 2d, that his argument is spoiled, unless he 
can be allowed to supply the defect by his " no doubt," 
i. e., his " guess."  
The fact is, the " little horn," and 2300 days, never  
have been, and never can be made to agree with the  
history of Antiochus. The attempt may delude the  
uninformed, but cannot endure the light. I will here  
oppose a great name to great names. As my words, 
who am but an obscure individual, will not weigh 
much against such men as Prof. Stuart, &c., I will 
introduce Sir Isaac Newton. On Dan. viii. 9—12, 23  
—25, he says— # "  
" A. horn of a beast is never taken for a single per- 
son : it always signifies a new kingdom; and the king- 
dom of Antiochus was an old one. Antiochus reigned  
over one of the four horns; and the little horn was a  
fifth, under its proper kings. This horn was at first a  
little one, and waxed exceeding great; but so did NOT  
Antiochus. His kingdom, on the contrary, was weak, 
and tributary to the Romans; and he did NOT enlarge 
it. The horn was ' a king of fierce countenance, and  
destroyed wonderfully,  and prospered and practised  
but Antiochus was frightened out of Egypt by a mere 
message of the Romans, and afterwards routed and 
baffled by the Jews. The horn was mighty by ano- 
ther's power; Antiochus acted by his own. The horn  
cast down the sanctuary to the ground, and so did  
NOT Antiochus; he left it standing. The sanctuary 
and host were trampled under foot 2300 days, (verse  
14) and in Daniel's prophecies days are put for years;  
but the profanation of the temple, in the reign of Anti- 
ochus, did NOT last so many natural days. These 
were to last to ' the end of the indignation' against the  
Jews.; and this indignation is NOl YET at an end.—  
They were to last till the sanctuary which has been 
cast down should be cleansed; and the sanctuary is  
NOT YET cleansed."  
5. Another fact fatal to the application of the 2300  
days to Antiochus, is, that Daniel was to stand in his  
" lot" at the end of the days, i. e., at the end of the  
1335 days, chap. xii. 12, 13, which are admitted to be  
a part of the 2300. Did Daniel stand in his lot at the 
death of Antiochus, 164 years B. C. ? That is, did 
Daniel rise from the dead then ? For that, and nothing 
less, I conceive to be the meaning of the expression.  
But one other consideration, it seems to me, must  
settle this whole question, that the polluting the temple 
by Antiochus was not intended by placing " the 
abomination that maketh desolate." Our Saviour,  
Matt. xxiv. 15, speaks of that abomination as some- 
thing still future, 200 years after Antiochus was dead.  
He says, " When ye therefore shall see the abomination  
of desolation spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in  
the holy place." Now, unless it can be proved that  
Antiochus' desolations were after Christ, instead of  
200 years before, the attempt^ our opponents, to make 
Antiochus the scape-goat, to bear away all the sins of 
Papal Rome, and their modern apologists, will be  
.in.  
The Junior EditoT of the " Midnight Cry," in the  
24th number of that paper, thus notices the absurdity  
' of applying the little horn to Antiochus:  
11 First Absurdity.—The four dynasties, dominions,  
or sovereignties, which succeeded Alexander's do- 
minion,—of Grecia,—are represented each by its ap-
propriate horn, one for Egypt, one for Syria, one for  
Macedonia, and one for Thrace and Bythinia. Now,  
Antiochus Epiphanes was but one of twenty-five indi- 
viduals, who constituted the Syrian horn. Could he  
at the same time, be another remarkable horn?  
^/Let us give the degrees of comparison, according  
' -he angel's rules, and thus compare truth with  

Great.  
PERSIA,  

error; How easy and natural is the following gra- 
Very Great. Exceeding Great  
GREECE, ROME.  
" How absurd and ludicrous is the following!  
Great. Very Great. Exceeding Great.  
PERSIA, GREECE, ANTIOCHUS.  
" Third Absurdity.—The Medo-Persian power is  
^mply called 'GREAT,' (verse 4.) This power, the  
Bible tells us, ' reigned from India to Ethiopia, over a  
hundred and seven and twenty provinces.' This was  
succeeded by the Grecian power, which is called 
; VERY GREAT,' (verse 8.) Then comes the power  
in question, which is 'EXCEEDING GREAT.' 
Was Antiochus exceedingly (or abundantly) great, when  
compared with the conqueror of the world ? Let an  
item from the Encyclopedia of Religious Knowledge 
answer: 'Finding his resources exhausted, he re- 
solved to go into Persia, to levy tributes, and to collect 
LARGE SUMS, which lie had AGREED TO PAY 
TO THE ROMANS.' Surely, we need not ques- 
tion, which power was exceeding great, that which 
exacted tribute, or that which was COMPELLED to  
pay it.  
" Fourth Absurdity.—'The power in question was  
•little' at first, but it waxed or grew'' exceeding 
great, toward the SOUTH, and toward the EAST, and  
toward the pleasant land.' What can this describe but  
the conquering marches of a mighty power? Rome  
was almost directly northwest from Jerusalem, and  its  
conquests in Asia and Africa were of course towards 
the east and south: but where were Antiochus' con- 
quests? He came into possession of a kingdom  
already established, and Sir Isaac Newton says, ' He 
did NOT enlarge it.' He did not fulfil this prophecy,  
and therefore teas not the object predicted in it. Rome  
did fulfil it, and therefore is the object predicted. 
Rollin says, ' He assumed the title of Epiphanes, that  
is, illustrious, which title was never WORSE applied. 
The whole series of his life will show that he deserved  
much more that of Epimanes, (mad or furious,) which 
some people gave him.' Rollin then records a cata- 
logue of his foolish actions, to show ' how justly the 
epithet vile is bestowed upon him;' then gives a de- 
tailed account of his life, and records the success he  
met with in attempting to take the city of Elymais, and 
plunder the temple of Diana. It seems that Antiochus  
had grown so weak, (instead of waxing exceeding  
great,) that the people, who had formerly paid tribute" 
were not afraid to withhold it. When he came  
against them, they 'took up arms to defend their  
temple, and gave him a shameful REPULSE.'  
" Fifth Absurdity.—The crowning absurdity of all  
is, to suppose that Rome is left out of a vision which 
extends to 'the LAST end of the indignation.'  
Daniel had a view through the dark clouds which con-
ceal the wonderful landscape of futurity from unin-
spired eyes. His  vision is expressly directed to the  
things which shall befall his people in the LATTER  
DAYS. His eye pierces even to the resurrection of the  
dead, and the glorious kingdom beyond it. Now what 
are some of the objects in this wondrous prospect * 
The great object is his Saviour on the cross, dying  
under a Roman governor, and pierced by a Roman  
spear. Will he not see this object, on which all  
heaven gazes?  
" There the ' latter days' commence. Daniel's  
people, after that, are still Abraham's seed, Christ's 
true Israel, and will he see nothing relating to them?  
Will he not see that ' exceeding great' power, under  
which the Jews ' fell by the edge of the sword, and 
were led away captive into all nations,'—under which  
Jerusalem was desolated, and the temple burned,—  
under which 3,OOQ,000 of Christians were killed, cruci- 
fied, burnt, tortured, torn, or devoured, while it denied 
Christ,—and under which FIFTY MILLIONS have 
fallen, ' by flame, sword, captivity, and spoil,' during  
'many days' since?"  

III. The way is now prepared to inquire, distinctly  
what power is represented by the little hern * Can  
there be any doubt of its being Rome ?-Rome Pagan 
and Papal! Let us first look at its origin, verse 9;  
and let us remember, that in the Old Testament^  
nations are not brought into prophecy till somehow con- 
nected with the  people of God. Rome had been in  
existence years before it is noticed in prophecy ; and  
Rome had made Macedonia, one of the four horns of  
the Grecian goat, a part, of herself 168 years B. C.; so  
that Rome could as truly be said to be " out of one of  
diem," as the ten horns of the fourth beast, in the 7th 
chapter, could be said to come out of that beast, when  
they were ten kingdoms set up by the conquerors of 
Rome.  
Having noticed the origin of the little horn, let us,  
now inquire for the time it comes up. I|  
23d verse: " When the transgressors are come to  
the full." It is clear that God designed that his  
people should trust in him alone ;—hence he prohibited 
their making any " league " with other nations. See  
Judges n. 2: "Ye shall make no league with the 
inhabitants of this land," &c. The Jews broke cove- 
nant with God, and about the year 158, B. C., they  
entered into a league with the Romans. See 1 Mac 
8th and 9th chapters. See Dan. xi. 23. It was at 
this point the " king [kingdom] of fierce countenance  
should stand up ;" i. e., come to rule, as first noticed  
m the prophecy, because now they are first connected  
with the people of God. This, it will be seen, is after  
Macedonia, one of the four horns, has become a paru/  
of Rome.  
Let us now look at the character and acts of the  
little horn. It is of "fierce countenance.", See Deut. 
xxviii. 49, 50 : " The Lord shall bring a nation against  
thee from far, from the end of the earth, as swift as  
the eagle tlieth, a nation whose tongue thou shalt not  
understand; a nation of fierce countenance, which  
shall not regard the person of the old, nor show favor  
to the young."  
All admit the nation here spoken of is the Roman  
lhe "little horn " has " understanding " of " dark- 
sentences." In the iext just quoted, from Deut., we  
are told the Romans are " a nation whose tongue thou  
shalt not understand." Dr. Clarke savs, " The learn- 
ing of Rome is proverbial." The "power" of the  
"little horn" was to be "mighty." How wnhke  
AuUochus! How like Rome! The little horn was 
to wax " exceeding great." How ridiculous to apply  
tins to Antiochus; but how appropriately applied to 
Rome, which added to herself all the four "horns of the  
iGrecian goat, and subdued many other provinces. It  
stands up against the Prince of princes. Our Lord  
was crucified under the reign of Rome. If it be said, 
" the Romans did not put the Saviour to death, but  
that it was done by a Jewish mob ;" I reply, let the  
objector read Acts iv. 26, 27—" The kings of the  
earth stood up, and the rulers were gathered together 
against the Lord, and against his Christ. For of a  
truth, against thy holy child Jesus, whom thou hast  
anointed, both Herod and Pontius Pilate, with the  
Gentiles," &c., "were gathered together." This  
settles that point.  
The " little horn "  cast down some of the host ancfl  
of the stars to the ground, &c., v. 10. Compare this  
with Rev. xii. 3,4: "A great red dragon," &c.  
" and his tail drew the third part of the stars of heaven  
and did cast them to the earth." All admit that this  
dragon is Rome ; but who can fail of seeing its perfect 
agreement with the little horn ?  
"He shall destroy wonderfully." Do any say, " this /<L%  
is applicable to Antiochus?" I reply: If Antio- 
chus destroyed wonderfully, Rome, pagan and papal  
destroyed "SEVENTY AND SEVEN FOID " more so! 
For, while Antiochus destroyed a few of the Jewsj  
Rome has  destroyed millions of them, and more than  
fifty millions of Christians besides." Rome truly has 
" destroyed wonderfully." Mark another fact •—" By  
peace shall "he " destroy manv." Antiochus did no A


f such thing: but papal Rome, under pretence ot ™  
inrr the vicegerent of the Princc of Peace, did destroy  
mfilions. thus the little horn is distinctly marked to 
be Rome, pagan and papal. Once more,-mark its  
end.: "broken without hand." How clear the refer-
ence to the stone that smites the image " cut out 
without hands." Rome  is not only designated by its  
origin, time of its standing up, character and acts, but 
by its end. " Whom the Lord shall consume with the  
spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the bright- 
ness of his coming," 2 Thess. ii. 8. " Broken with- 
out hand." . . . ,  
This construction makes the vision in truth like  
the first. The application of it to Antiochus originated  
with a Jew, who wished to magnify his own nation,  
and has been backed up by Papacy, to keep its own  
prophetic portrait out of sight; and Protestants have put  
on the "Babylonish garment.;'1 and wear it as though  
it was the spotless robe of salvation ; for, if that robe  
fails them, the  end of the world is upon them in an  
; hour they think not. .  
" I Verses 13,14. "Then I heard one saint speaking, and  
another saint said unto that certain saint which spake,  
How long shall be the vision concerning the daily  sacri- 
I ficc, and the trangression of desolation, to give both the  
| sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot ? And  
he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred  
days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed." ^  
M I Let us now decide, if we can, what " sanctuary " it  
! 

is that is to be " cleansed," or " justified," as the mar- 
gin has it. .  
Several things are called a sanctuary in the Bible.  
1. The Lord, Isa. viii. 14.  
2. Heaven, Ps. cii. 19. Neither of these can be  
meant in the verses before us.  
| 3. Judah, Ps. cxiv. 2. But Judah is utterly cut off.  
See Isa. lxv. 15 : " The Lord God shall SLAY THEE,  
( and call his servants by another name." Literal  
Judah, then, is not to be cleansed, but is slain.  
4. The Temple is called a  sanctuary, 1 Chron. xxii.  
19. Bat that is destroyed, and hence cannot be  \ cleansed.  
5. The Holy of Holies, Lev. iv. 6. That also is  
destroyed; and besides, it is superseded. See Heb.  
' \\ffl There are only two things more, in relation to God's  
people, that are called a sanctuary, in the Bible. The  
17 sanctuary to be cleansed, spoken of in this chapter, is  
,[j the one " trodden under foot" with " the host." If  
the " Prince of the host," v. 11, is the Lord Jesus  
,i Christ, then, there can be no doubt, his true church is  
/] " the host." By whom, or what, was the host to be  
trodden under foot? Two desolating powers, called  
I " the daily and the transgression of DESOLATION."  
The word 11 sacrifice" is not in the text, and has no  
if] warrant for its'Insertion, except the mere opinion of  
i the translators. The whole period of these desolating  
abominations, as noticed in this vision, from the Ram  
pushing, [for there the vision commences,] is 2300  
1 days; then was to terminate the treading under foot,  
jl In the detailed explanation of the vision, in chapters  
| xi. and xii., we have the time from the taking away of  
the first of these abominations to the removing of the  
I second, viz. 1290 days; Dan. xii. 11; then we are as- 
\ sured that 45 days more are to bring us to the " end  
'of the days;" then Daniel was to have his resurrection.  
N If the sanctuary means here, as some suppose, the  
/!/ church, then it is to he cleansed, or, as the margin has  
I j ) it, justified, at the resurrection of Daniel, with all the  
j r saints.  
I.( / The church is sometimes called a sanctuary, or  
i f ; temple of God. See 1 Cor. iii. 16, 17, and Eph. ii.  
II.1; 21, 22. If, then, by " sanctuary" the church is to be  
HI. understood, what is meant by its being cleansed, or  
justified? To justify, signifies "to absolve or declare  
R one  innocent." To justify an individual is to acquit  
w. jiun_ The term is applied to the acquittal of a sinner  
through faith in Christ "ubut the/u/i.discharge from all  

the consequences of sin does not take place till the res- 
urrection of the just. See Rom. iv. 25 : " Who was  
delivered for our offences, and was raised again for our  
justification." Compare this with 1 Cor. xv, 17, 18 :  
" If Christ be not raised, your faith is vain; ye are yet 
in your sins. Then they also which are fallen asleep 
in Christ are perished." See, also, Isa. xlv. 25: " In  
'the Lord shall all the seed of Israel be justified, and  
shall glory:"—till then, the church groans, being bur- 
dened __for that event she waits. See Rom. viii. 18  
—23 : " For I reckon that the sufferings of this pres- 
ent time are not worthy to be compared with the glory 
which shall be revealed in us. For the earnest ex- 
pectation of the creature waiteth for the manifestation  
of the sons of God. For the creature was made sub- 
ject to vanity, not willingly, but by reason of him who  
hath subjected the same in hope. Because the creature 
itself also  shall be delivered from the bondage of cor- 
ruption into the glorious liberty of the children of  
God. For we know that the whole creation groaneth 
and travaileth in pain together until now : and not  
only they, but ourselves also, which have the first  
fruits of the Spirit; even we ourselves groan within  
ourselves, udaiting for the adoption, lo wit, the redemp- 
tion of our body."  
When will this justification of the church take place ?  
See Phil. iii. 20, 21: " Our conversation is in heaven,  
from whence also we look for the Saviour, the Lord  
Jesus Christ; who shall change our vile body, that it 
may be fashioned like unto his glorious body," &c.  
See, also, 1 John iii. 2 : " It doth not yet appear what  
we shall be : but we know that, when he shall appear,  
We shall be like him," &c.  
We mav expect the church to be completely, fully,  
and eternally justified from all the consequences of sin,  
when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from heaven with  
his mighty angels. So that if the church is the sanc- 
tuary to be cleansed, or justified, it is at the end of  
this world.  
I Let us now see if we can find any other sanctuary  
to be cleansed. The earth or land is called a sanctu- 
ary. See Ex. xv. 17 : " Thou shalt bring them in,  
and plant them in the mountain of thine inheritance, in 
the place, 0 Lord, which thou hast made for thee  
to dwell in ; in the sanctuary, 0 Lord, which thy hands .  
have established." See, also, Psa. lxxvui. 54 : " He  
i brought them to the border of his sanctuary, even to  
this mountain which his right hand had purchased."  
Compare these with Eph. i. 14 : " Which is the ear- 
nest of our inheritance, until the redemption of the  
purchased possession." See, also, Rom. iv. 13 : " * or  
the promise that he should be HEIR OF 1HL  
WORLD, was not to Abraham, or his seed, through 
the law, but through the righteousness of faith."  
Thus, we see, the earth is the inheritance, the sanctuary  
of Christ and his saints. Has it been defiled? and  
does it need cleansing? See Isa. xxiv. 5: "The  
earth is defiled under the inhabitants thereof, because  
they have transgressed the laws, changed the ordi- 
nances, broken the everlasting covenant." God crea- 
ted the world to be a mountain of holiness : but the  
wicked have corrupted it, so that the Lord is to purify 
it by destroying " those who destroy [corrupt, as the  
margin reads] the earth." See Rev. xi. 18. The  
very ground is now under the curse, in consequence of 
sin. See Gen. iii. 17 : " Cursed is the ground for thy 
sake." This world has been trodden under foot by  
wicked men and wicked governments unto this day.  
See Dan. vii. 23: "The fourth beast shall be the  
fourth kingdom upon earth—which shall devour the  
whole earth, and shall TREAD IT DOWN and break it 
in pieces." Such is emphatically the character of all  
worldly governments ; they  are a usurpation of the  
territory of God, and have corrupted the earth.  
How will the earth be cleansed ? I answer—By fire.  
See 2 Pet. iii. 7 : " The heavens and the earth which  
are now, by the same word are kept in store, reserved  
unto FIRE, against the day of judgment and perdition  
of ungodly men." • •K-A -/-.tL. . r» ]  

%  
7*i  

When ivill this earth be cleansed? We have already  
seen it is to be at the day of judgment; but before I 
|ive a direct answer to the question, I wish to call 
attention to the following texts : Titus ii. 13 : " Look- 
ing for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing  
of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ." Ps.  
I. 3 : " Our God shall come, and shall not keep silence ; 
a fire shall devour before him, and it shall be very  
tempestuous round about him." Also, Ps. xlvi.'G— 
9 : " The heathen raged, the kingdoms were moved : 
he uttered his voice, and the earth melted. The Lord  
of hosts is with us; the God of Jacob is our refuge.  
Selah. Come, behold the works of the Lord, what  
desolations he hath made in the earth. He maketli  
wars to cease unto the end of the earth; he breaketh  
the bow, and cutteth the spear in sunder ; he burnetii 
the chariot in the fire." See, also, Ps. xcvii. 3—5 :  
" The fire goeth before him, and burneth up his ene- 
mies round about. His lightnings enlightened the 
world ; the earth saw and trembled. The hills melted 
like wax at the presence of the Lo*d, at the presence 
of the Lord of the whole earth."" See Nahurn. i. 5, 6 :  
" The mountains quake at him, and the hills melt, and  
the earth is burned at his presence, yea, the world, and 
all that dwell therein. Who can stand before his in- 
dignation?  and who can abide his anger? his fury is  
poured out like fire, and the rocks are thrown down by 
him." See Matt. xiii. 40—13: "As therefore the 
tares are gathered and burned in the fire, so shall, it be  
at the end of this world. The Son of niau shall send  
forth his angels, and they shall gather out of his king-
dom all things that offend, and them which do iniquity,  
and shall cast them into a furnace of fire; there shall  
be wailing and gnashing of teeth.*' Lastly, see 2 Pet.  
iii. 10—13 : " But the day of the Lord will come as a  
thief in the night: in which the heavens shall pass  
away with a great noise, and the elements shall melt 
with fervent heat; the earth also, and the'works that  
are therein, shall be burned up. Seeing, then, that all  
these things shall be dissolved, what manner of persons 
ought ye to be in all holy conversation and godliness,  
linking for, and hasting unto the coming of the day of  
God, wherein the heavens being on fire shall be dis- 
solved, and the elements shall melt with fervent heat.  
Nevertheless we, according to his promise, look for 
new heavens and a ne\y earth, wherein.' dwelleth 
righteousness."  
r Having now decided what the sanctuary is,—that it  
is to be cleansed at the end of this world; and that it  
is to be done by^re,—the way is now prepared to show 
when the END of this world will come.  
We will now give you the 13th and 14th verses of  
the eighth chapter of Daniel, leaving out what our trans- 
lators have supplied :—" Then I heard one saint speak- 
ing, and another saint said unto that certain which  
spake, How long the visioa, the daily and^the trans- 
gression of desolation, to give both the sanctuary and 
the host to be trodden under foot ? And he said unto  
me, Uato two thousand three  hundred days: then'  
shall the sanctuary be cleansed."  
The inquiry, " How Iong the vision," clearlv related  
to the " Ram" and " Goat," as well as " little horn"  
—and, the 2360 days are given in answer to the 
question,—" How long the vision ?"  
It was the meaning of the vision Daniel sought—  
verse 15: "It came to pass, when I had seen the  
vision, and sought for the meaning," &c.  
It was to make Daniel understand the vision  
Gabriel was sent—verse 16: "I heard a man's voice  
between the banks of Ulai, which called and said,  
Gabriel, make this man to understand the vision."  
It was to make Daniel understand the vision Gabriel  
ranic verse 17 : " So he came near where I stood, 
and said unto me, Understand, O son of man."  
The first thing Gabriel would have Daniel under- 
i stand, was, that, the vision was down to the end,—verse  
i 17: "At for ujtfo] the time of the end shall be the.  
[vision." He would have Daniel understand that the  

end intended was'the last end of indignation,"'—versa*  
19 : "Behold, I will flake thee know what shall be in  
the last end of the indignation;" and he would have *  
Daniel know that, " at the lime appointed, the end shall 0  
be." :  
The 2300 days is the only time appointed. That  
time cannot be applied to a particular agent or event,  
without violence to the whole subject.  
Now, let us inquire what Daniel, did understand, and  
what not. The angel explained everything to him re- 
specting the Ram, He-Goat, and Little Horn. But  
Daniel tells us in the last verse, " I was astonished at 
the vision, but none understood it." What did not 
Daniel understand? There were, evidently, three  
things he did not understand: 1st. What "sanctu-
ary" was intended in verse 13; 2d. He did not un-
derstand how to reckon the days; and, 3d. Where to  
commence his reckoning. As Gabriel is not to be  
charged with disobedience to the command  to make  
Daniel understand the vision, and as he has not  
fulfilled that command in this .chapter, we must  
look elsewhere to see if he ever did what he was  
directed to do, and what he promised Daniel he would 
do.  
| Let us now hook into the 9th chapter. Daniel there  
informs us that he found out " by books, the number 
of years, whereof the word of the Lord came to Jere-
miah the prophet, that he would accomplish seventy 
years in the desolations of Jerusalem." We might  
here inquire, Why did not Daniel " find that out be- 
fore?" It was written in the boik, but he did not dis-
cover it till now. Our opponents seem to think it is a 
conclusive argument that we are wrong, because the  
time of the end of the world has not been found out 
before now. But is ii $jy more marvellous than that 
Daniel did not learn that the captivity of the Jews in  
Babylon was to be  seventy years, till those years were  
accomplished ?  
When Daniel discovered this fact, fifteen years had  
passed since the vision of the eighth chapter, and he  
had all that time been in uncertainty about the points 
that were not explained/o him in that vision. He now  
seems to catch at  the thought, that it must be the  
" sanctuary" at Jerusalem, to which the vision re- 
lated, and he at once commences praying accordingly.  
He, at the 17th verse, prays especially about the 
sanctuary. " Now, therefore, O our God, hear the 
prayer of thy servant, and his supplications, and cause  
thy face to shine upon thy sanctuary that is desolate, 
for the Lord's sake." Daniel's mind is evidently on 
the vision, and he seems to suppose he has got the 
clue to the sanctuary that is to be " cleansed;" but  
Gabriel comes flying " swiftly," to stop Daniel in the 
midst of his prayer. See verse 21: "Yea, while I  
was speaking in prayer, even the man Gabriel, whom  
I had seen in  the vision at the beginning, being caused  
to fly swiftly, touched me about the time of the even- 
ing oblation."  
Gabriel, why this haste? Why, I see Daniel is  
wrong—he don't understand the matter—lie thinks the 
vision related to the sanctuary at Jerusalem, and I must  
stop him, for he is going astray.  
" Gabriel, whom I had seen in  the vision," says  
Daniel. What vision? Where had Daniel seen Ga-
briel in vision ? Evidently nowhere but in the vision of  
2300 days. " Well," says Gabriel, " I am now come  
forth to give thee skill and understanding—therefore  
understand the matter, and consider the vision."  
How is it possible that anything can be plainer than  
that both Daniel and Gabriel have the vision in mind,  
that "none understood," at the close of the eighth 
chapter? "Now," says Gabriel, "understand the 
matter, as by your prayer I see you did not, and con- 
sider the vision—direct your attention to what I have  
now to say of it. Seventy weeks are determined [cut 
off, so the word signifies] upon thy people." " Cut off  
from what?" Surely not from indefinite space; but  
from some time previously given. What time had  
Daniel given him before? Nofte. except the 2300


days. I'he natural inference, then, is that the 70  
weeks were cut off from those days : there is nothing 
else to cut them off from.  For what are they cut off?  
Several objects are specified; but one especially, viz., 
" to seal up [or, as th? word signifies, see Dan. vi. 17,  
make sure] the vision." That is, to confirm and es- 
tablish the vision: so that, as certain as 70 weeks are  
accomplished at the death of Messiah, so shall all the 
vision be accomplished in 2300 days. Now if these  
70 weeks are weeks of years, so are all the 2300 days, 
years. Can the things to be accomplished in those 70  
weeks, transpire in so many literal weeks, i. e., in one  
year and 18 weeks] Certainly not. Then they must  
be reckoned in some other way. How else can they be  
reckoned? Is there any Scripture rule for reckon- 
ing days for years? See Ezekiel iv. 4—6: "Lie thou  
also upon thy .left side, and lay the iniquity of the 
house of Israel upon it: according to the number of  
the days that thou shalt  lie upon it thou shalt bear  
their iniquity. For I have laid upon thee the years of 
their iniquity, according to the number of the days,  
three hundred and ninety days, so shalt thou bear the  
i iniquity of the house of Israel. And when thou hast 
1 accomplished them, lie again on thy right side, and  
thou shalt bear the iniquity of the house of Judah forty  
days; I have appointed thee each day for a year." 
Here, then,'we have an example of days being put for  
years. The 70 weeks, then, may be reckoned a day  
for a year, or 490 Jrears. "But," say some, "the  
expression is seventy sevens, and means seventy sev- 
ens of years, or 490 years." Thank the objector;  
for he only strengthens my argument; for they are 
cutoff from the 2300, and as you cannot cut off 490 
years from 2300 days, it establishes the fact that those  
2300 day3 are years, and that that was what the angel 
intended' to teach Daniel.  
The next point on which the angel would inform  
Daniel, is, where to commence his reckoning. This  
he does at  the 25th verse: " Know therefore and un- 
derstand, that from the going forth of the command  
ment to restore and to build Jerusalem, unto the Mes- 
siah the Prinee, shall he seven weeks, and threescore  
land two weeks: the street shall be built again, and  
the wall, even in troublous times. And after three- 
score and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not 
for himself: and the people of the prince that shall  
come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary ; and the 
end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of 
tne war desolations are determined. And he shall  
confirm the covenant with many for one week : and in 
the midst of the week he shall cause the  sacrifice and  ;  
the oblation to cease, and for the overspreading of 
abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the 
consummation and that determined shall be poured  
upon the desolate."  
Here we observe, that the point of beginning is at  
•the commandment to restore and build Jerusalem, and  
the termination of the 70 weeks is at the cutting off of  
Messiah: the angel then briefly states, that " the people  
of the prince that shall come," i. e., the same power  
denoted by the " exceeding great horn," " shall destroy 
the city and the sanctuary;" thus giving Daniel to un-
derstand that so far from the sanctuary at Jerusalem  
being cleansed, it was to be utterly destroyed. The  
angel, also, runs down in his explanation to'the " con- 
summation" ofthe whole 2300 years.  
Let us now inquire when the " commandment to  
restore and to build Jerusalem" went forth. It is true,  
there were several decrees relating to that subject. It  
cannot be either of the first two; because, neither of  
them can be made to harmonize with the history of  
Christ's death. There is but one of the four decrees  
relating to this matter that can agree with the event; 
and the commencement of the vision is clearly at the  
height ofthe Persian empire, as Daniel sees the " last  
horn" of the ram at its highest point when the vision  

Daniel in the eleventh chapter, second verse, he points  
lirectly to the king of Persia, who " by his strength  
hrough his riches " should " stir up all against the  
•ealm of Grecia." The Persian empire was at its  
leight under Artaxerxes, In that period, therefore,  
»ve should expect to find the decree referred to. A ccord- 
ngly we find it, in Ezra vii. 21—26, given i>j Arm- 
cerxes; and Ezra tells us, 8th chap. 31st verse," Then  
,ve departed from the river Ahava, on the twelfth ot 
,he first month, to go unto Jerusalem." The Jews 
reckoned their year from the spring equinox ; hence,  
ihe 12th ofthe first month would be the fore part of our 
April. This, according to the chronology of our Bibles,  
was in the year before the birth of Christ, by the com- 
mon reckoning, 457. Now from 2 3 0 0, the whole 
length of the vision, take 45 7  
and 18 43 remains.  
But., for the sake of the argument, suppose we are  
mistaken in respect to the precise year in which the  
commandment went forth; all commentators, I believe,  
agree in the fact, that our Lord was crucified just 490  
years from that period. This admission is necessary 
in any argument with a Jew in proof that Jesus is the  
promised Messiah, and hence all Christians have used  
it. Dr. Adam Clarke says, that 490 years, to a day,  
transpired from the going forth ofthe commandment to  
the time that our Lord hung upon the cross. I hus,  
then, we have settled, by common consent, that 490  
years terminated at the cross. But it will be seen  
that these 490 years, or 70 weeks, are divided into three  
very unequal parts, as follows:  
7 weeks; 7 times 7 are 4 9 years.  
6 2 weeks; 7 times G2 are 4 3 4 years.  
1 week; 7 times 1 are 7 years.  
7 0 weeks, 49 0 years.  
The 49 years were employed under Ezra and Nehe- 
miah in restoring and building Jerusalem; then 434  
years more to Messiah, making 69 weeks. The term  
Messiah, signifies " anointed." When was Jesus 
anointed? At his baptism, when the Holy Spirit  
descended upon him, and the voice from heaven pro- 
claimed, "This is my beloved Son, in whom 1 am  
well pleased." Then when our Lord came preaching,  
Markri. 15, he says, "the time fulfilled." What  
time f Clearly, the 69 weeks : no other time had been  
given for his manifestation. One week more remains  
to be filled up before he is cut off; and the chronology  
of nearly all our Bibles shows that his ministry lasted  
seven years. Turn to your Polyglott Bibles, and you  
will see, Ityatt. ii. 1: " Now when Jesus was born'  
—the note, by the translators, in the margin, saying,  
"4th year before the account called Anno Domini." 
Then turn to the 27th chapter, and you will find 33 as  
the year of his crucifixion;  making his ministry 7 years.  
You will also find by an examination of the other Evan- 
gelists, that the chronology of our Lord's baptism is the  
year 26, and his death 33". The 70 weeks, or 490 years, 
then, extend to the year of our Lord which we call 33 ;  
it nas been made certain, by astronomical calcula- 
j Hons, that that was the year of our Lord's death  
Some tell us, " Messiah was cut off in the midst of  
thew&> The text  says no such thing. It simply  
says-" In tf.e midst of the week he shall cause the 
sacrifice and oblation to cease." The first inquiry here  
is, what are we to  understand by " the midst ?" It does  
not necessarily mean, in the middle of a thing Absa- 
lom was "in the midst ofthe oak;» 2 Sam. xviii. 15.  
David would praise God " in the- midst of the congre- 
ga ion ;" Psalm xxii. 22. " God is working salvatior  
n the midst of the earth ;" Psalm lxxiv. 12* God let  
flesh fall in the midst of" the Israelites' "camp-"  
Psalm lxxvm 28. Christ is to « rule in the midst of 
his enemies;" Psalm ex. 2. Some men lie " down in  
the midst ofthe sea Prov. xxiii. 34. " Thou O T mvl 
art i„ the midst ofus;" Jer. xiv. 9. ChriS-.n t e  
xviii ^20 °r j'reo -et in his name; Mat- 
X U£ 20• Jesus "stood m the midst of" his  

' aclpiersFvhen'iTiey^rere  gathered togeltiS  
-jresurrection. All these expressions show, that the  
(phrase " in the midst of," denotes no more than, some- 
where within the thing spoken of. It may signify  
^ throughout the entire period, or placg, spoken of.  
Thus, in the text under consideration, I understand it 
to signify that the Messiah was to cause the sacrifice  
/ and oblation of the Mosaic law to cease during the en- 
tire period of his ministry. That is-«-He never sent a  
' soul to offer those offerings, under the law, as a con- 
dition of any benefit he bestowed upon them. It was 
simply—"According to thy faith be it unto thee."  
1 And this was the case through the entire period of his  
, ministry. He showed, from the very commencement of  
his preaching, that the great principle of faith was now 
to take the place of the sacrifices offered under the law.  
'There is but one instance of our Saviour sending any one  
to offer the sacrifices of the law ; and that, not as a con- 
dition of healing, but as  a " testimony to the priests "  
that he teas healed.  
! Now, as we have settled the point that the 70 weeks,  
or 490 years, are cut off from the 2300, we have only  
to subtract, thus:  
2 3 0 0 years, the wjjole length of the vision.  
4 9 0 years to the death of Christ, or the year 33.  
18 10 remain from the cross. 1810 years, from  
the year 33, will terminate in 1843.  
But some say " Our Lord was crucified in the year  
29, and not 33." They argue this from the fact that  
he was born four years before 1he commencement of  
' ' the vulgar, or common era of his birth. This, it is true,  
would alter the calculation, if it could not be demon- 
strated that our Lord was crucified in the year that we  
call 33. But this has been demonstrated by the best  
of all evidence, aside from revelation, viz., by astro- 
nomical calculations. The crucifixion took place at  
a passover full moon, or the first full moon after the  
spring equinox; and it took place on Friday. On  
this point Ferguson, the astronomer, says:—"The 
dispute among chronologers about the year of Christ's 
death is limited to four or five years at most. I find  
by calculation the only passover full moon that fell on 
a Friday for several years before  or after the disputed  
year of the crucifixion,  was on the 3d of April, in the  
4746th year of the Julian period." The Julian period  
is a period used by astronomers. The year 1843 is  
the 6556th year of that period. Now  
r* Subtract from G 5 5 0, the present year of the Julian  
period, 4 7 4 G, the year of the crucifixion,  
•and we have 18 10 remaining.  
Thus it is demonstrated that the year 1843 is 1810  
years from the crucifixion;  and I have before shown,  
that only that number of years remain ofthe vision after 
the death of Christ; and as we have proved that his  
death occurred in the year we call 33, we have only to 
add thus— 
3 3 the year of the crucifixion.  
18 10 since the crucifixion.  
18 4 3 " the end of the vision.'"  
But, says the objector, " our Lord, then, was in his  
37th year at the crucifixion, and that will make an al- 
teration in the calculation." It is admitted he was in 
his 37th year : and this is proved by  astronomical cal- 
culation also, and is as follows : Josephus, in giving a  
history ofthe last sickness of Herod, who commanded 
the children to be slain at onr Lord's birth, records an  
FcTIpse of the moon to have taken place during that  
f sickness. From Christ's death to that eclipse is 36  
years. One year more added for  the age of our Lord,  
| at that time, would make liim in his 37th year at his 
il death. He was baptized and commenced his public  
j ministry at 30. See Luke iii. 33. His age at his death  
cannot alter the calculation, so long as it is demon-
strated that he was actually put to death in our year  
33. The CROSS is the SEAL ofthe vision, and not 
the birth. Let me illustrate this point. Here is a 
rail-road 2300 miles long.  

Here i9 the great depot, 
|from which to start. +  1810 miles, the remainder.  
1490 mi lei to an inter |  mediate depot.  
We have travelled over 490 miles of this road to the 1  
intermediate depot; then a dispute arises in reference  
to a passenger who took his seat in the car some dis- j  
tance back. One says, he took his seat 29 milesj 
back—no, says another, if was 33—not so, cries a,  
third, he got'into the cars 37 miles back. Now, I  
ask, can it make the distance one mile longer or short- 
er, from the starting depot to the intermediate one,  
whether the passenger took his seat 29, 33, 37 or 50  
miles back? It is just 490 between the two depots, 
let the passenger take his seat at what point he would.  
So, let our Lord's age be what it might, so long as  
it is settled that he died in our year 33, and that that  
terminated the 70 weeks, or 490 years, it cannot at all  
alter the calculation with regard to the termination of 
the vision.  
Let me illustrate the subject before us. You are trav- 
elling a road with which you are unacquainted : night  
overtakes you: you inquire of a stranger, who tells you  
the road is a dangerous one, and you must not travel 
it in the dark: you tell him you must proceed; but,  
says the stranger, you will have to pass a river, the 
banks of which are perpendicular, and there is only a  
narrow bridge to pass that river—a single misstep will 
plunge you in irrecoverable ruin. You ask, how far  
it is3to that river. He tells you, it is 2300 rods.  
You desire to know how you can determine the stran- 
ger has told you the truth. He informs you that just 
490 rods from his door you will come to a high pillar, 
on the top of which is a flaming torch that can be seen  
at a great distance. You now take a measuring line  
and go forward, measuring as you go,—you see the 
torch and find, on measuring to the foot ofthe pillar,  
it is just 490 rods. What now? Why, you reason  
thus—I find the stranger has told the truth thus far.  
What is the inference? Why, I shall find all he has  
told me is true. How far did he tell me it was to the  
river? 2300 rods. How far to this pillar ? 490. How  
much farther then have I to go, to arrive at the river?  
From 2300 
Take 490  
1810 left. You proceed, measuring as you  
go. I ask you if when you have measured off 1809 
rods, you would not walk carefully the next rod, feel-
ing every inch ? Undoubtedly you would; and if you 
did not take heed you would be likely to perish.  
Thus God has'measured off 2300 years: that we  
mi^ht know that he had told us the truth, he gave us  
the° death of Christ to seal, or make sure the  vision,  
just 490 years from the commencement of the long pe- 
' riod. Then the sum stands thus—As 490 years reach  
exactly to the Cross of Christ , so 1810 more will reach 
to the "end ->f the vision.  
We came to the cross, and found it just 490 years ;  
we have passed that cross, and are closing up the last  
weeks of the 1810th year since that period. Ought  
we not to walk carefully—we stand on the verge ol  
the termination of a period of solemn importance.  
This year the vision of 2300 years will end: every  
hour, now, we are to look for the revelation of the  
Son of Man in the clouds of heaven. This year, Dan- 
iel will stand in his " lot," or have his " inheritance,"  
and all the saints with him. This year, the elements  
will melt with fervent heat, and the earth also : and 
the works that'are therein shall be burned up. This  
year, " the wicked shall be cut off  from the earth, and  
the transgressors shall be rootc(jfcnt of it." Prov. ii.  
22. This year—" the day of jfcment and perdition 
of ungodly men " will come. 2 Tet. iii. 7.  
Are we ready for the solemn, the tremendous  
events ? Have we repented of and forsaken our sins ?  
Have we fled for refuge to lay hold on the hope set  
before us, in Jesus Christ ? Have we made our Judge  
onr friend ?—Not a moment is to be lost. When once  
the Lord Jesus has left his Mediatorial seat, the door  
jpfgaercy is closed, and closed FORE VER j  

t V  
I  M  
f!  i  
1  
• I  
I  
m


f* Let us see it wc can ae.enmne wnat we are to understand  
by the " daily sacrifice," spoken of in Daniel Sth, 11th, and  
! 12th. It will  be seen by a reference to those chapters, that  
the word " sacrifice," connected with" daily," is in italics, and 
therefore is not in the original text, but has been supplied by 
our translators. The expression in those texts is perfect with- 
out the supplied word, and the sense much clearer. The text. '  
Jan. Viii. 13, is simply " the daily, and the transgression of  
Jesofcuion:" and in tne 11th cnap.. 31st verse, it is: " They  
s'iiall take away the daily, and they shall place the abomination  
that ifiaketh desojate." This language shows that " the daily"  
is a (Vrily, or continual abomination, or desolating power, that  
should desolate the people and church of God till it was taken  
" array," and, that then should come up another abomination  
to take its place, still more desolating: then, in the 12thchap.  
11th verse, the time is given us from the taking away of the  
daily " to set up Tas the margin has it] the abomination that  
maketh desolate." and that time carries us to the taking "away  
the dominion" [Dan. vii.26] of this last abomination.  
That these things do not relate to anything done bv Antio- 
clrns Epiphanes, is certain from the fact that Antioehus died  
164 years before our Lord's birth, and Christ directed his loi- 
lowers to look for the " abomination of desolation, spoken of  
by Daniel," as still future.  
Some teU us the " daily" is the daily sacrifice of the Jews,  
which was taken away at the destruction of Jerusalem. If so, 
can they tell what event took place answering to the 1290 
days, which, if understood as literal days, can be made to agree 
with no event ? Then it is added, " Blessed is he that waiteth  
and cometh to the 133.5 days." What took place then ' Nothing  
that marks that as a peculiar period. It was at the end of those  
days that Daniel was to sttmd in his lot, or have his resurrection.  
Did he have it 1335 days after the destruction of Jerusalem?  
If the days stand for years, what event, answering to the pro- 
phecy, took place 1290 years from the cessation of the Jewish 
sacrifices? ft was in the darkness of Papal Rome. Did Daniel 
have his resurrection under the dark reign of Papacy ? We 
have nothing in history to show that anything took place at  
the end of those days, if reckoned from Jerusalem's destruc-
U°We are now led to inquire what " daily" it was that was  
" taken away." I answer, it appears to me, clearly, it was  
the daily or continual abomination of paganism, which o£  
pressed the people and church of God till it was " taken out ot  
the way ;" which event, it seems, from Gibbon's History or  
Rome, took place about A. D. 508, when « Vitalian, a Gothic 
chieftain, with an army of Huns and Bulgarians, declared them- • 
selves the champions of the Catholic faith." Thus an end came  
to pagan sacrifices at Rome, or paganism was " taken out of 
the way" and no longer " hindered" the revelation of the " man  
of sin,''or "  abomination that maketh desolate," i. «., Papacy.  
What event transpired 1290 days from the taking away ot pa- 
ganism, or the " daily," in 5081 1290 years from that time,  
viz., in 1798, Berthier, a French General, entered Rome, de- 
posed the Pope, abolished the Justinian code of laws, under  
; which the Pope had carried on his " war with the saints" for  
1260 yeaTs, and gave to Italy a republican form of government,  
carried the Pope captive to France, where he died in 1799 :—  
' thus was the " dominion" of Papacy taken " away, to consume  
and destroy unto the end." See Dan. vii. 26. The 133o days, 
or years, from the taking away of " the daily" in 508. carry us  
down to 1S43, when Daniel, with all the saints, will  stand in  
their lot, i. e., will be raised from the dead.  
! "The daily," then, and "the abomination of desolation, 
: are two desolating powers acting against the people and church  
of God. An end comes to one, and then the other comes upl  
i in its place. _ _ _ _ . ^  

1  

1><1N !'.  
U. C. 570.  
GREAT IMAGE.  
Cold,{had, Babylon.  
Silver Breast, Media and Persia.  
Brazen Belly, <fcc., Grecia,  
Iron Legs, Rome.  
Character.  
The fourth kingdom shall be  
STRUNG as IRON-verse 40.  
Conquests.  
As iron that breaketh all these,  
shail it break in pieces and bruise,  
v. 40.  
Acts.  
Not mentioned in this brief vis- 
ion.  

H. C. 541.  
. FOUR BEASTS.  
Lion, Babylon.  
Division.  
Whereas thou sawest the feet  
and TOES, part of potter's clav  
and part of iron, the kingdom shall 
be divided ; but there shall be iu it,  
of the strength of the iipn. . . •] 
And as the TOES of the feet were1  
part of iron and part of clay, so the  
kingdom shall be partly strong and 
partly broken, v. 41,42.  
Papacy.  
Not mentioned to Nebuchadnez- 
zar, who hud no interest in hear- 
ing of it.  

Bear, Media and Persia.  
Leopard., Grecja.  
Four heads, 4 divisions,  i  
Terrible Beast, Rome.;  
Character.  
A fourth beast, dreadful and ter- 
nble, and STRONG exceedingly ;  
tnd it had great IRON teeth, v. 7.  
Conquests•  
The fourth beast shall lte the  
fourth kingdom upon earth, which  
shall be diverse from all kingdoms, 
and shall devour the whole earth, 
and shall tread it down, and break 
it in pieues. v. 23.  
Acts.  
It devoured, and brake in pieces  
and STAMPED the residue with 
the feet of it. v 7  
Division.  
It had ten horns . . I would  
know the truth of ihe fourth betst,  
and ot the ten horns that  

iHN.vm.  
B. O. 530  
RAM AND HE-GOAT.  
Babylon foil the samo year this  
vision was seen, and became a sub- 
ject of history, not of prophecy.  
Ram, Mediaand Persia.  
He-gnat. Grecia. 
Four horns, 4 divisions.  
Exceeding great horn, Rome.  
Character.  
And his power shall be MIGH- 
TY' v 24  

| DAN- xT xPsn^ "  
DETAILED  EXPLANATION,  given  
oy the Lord J«us Christ auu the 
Angel GabrieL  
Character.  
And the king shall ao according  
to lus Will, xi 36  
Conquests.  
Waxed EXCEEDING "GREAT  
toward the south and toward the  
east, and toward the pleasant land,  
v. 9. [itome was N. W. of Jeru- 
salem.] He shall destroy wonder-
fully. v. 24.  
Acts.  
It cast down some of the host and  
of the stars to the ground, and  
STAMPED upon them, v 10  
Division.  
Having no connection with the  
length of the vision, or with the  
doings of Paganism and Popery,  
Xehinchmhund'  desolating abomiS  winch came_up, and before whom whjch trcad undersfout the 8an(> 
three fell. The ten horns out of  
this kingdom are ten kings that  
shall arise, and another shall rise 
after them.  
Papacy.  
1 considered the horns, and be- 
hold there came up among them  

tuary and the host.) the division 
into ten kingdoms is uut here no- 
ticed.  
Papacy.  
And through his policy, also he  
shall cause craft to prosper in his  

Conquests.  
See Dan. xi. 21—28.  
Acts.  
They that understand among the  
people shall instruct many, yet 
they shall fall by the sword and by 
flame, and by captivity, and by  
spoil, many days. xi. 33.  
another little horn; . . . and be- h(! 'sha!1 • -njf him.  
hold, in this horn were eyes like|?elf in his heart, and by peace shall  

Papacy.  
And he shall exalt himself, and  
magnify himself above every god.  
| I 
Jfl  
<.2 3 O « O ~ H d  
M I OS §  Blo'a - S 2 ii  
•a "> X — -e c  
1 a o — JS u " ° £  
W^So'aJi-Sso  
3 Js  < £ 3 •» a s  « S2 - S-° ** » <£Us « a;= o-S  
; K-5-fi 2J>  

he destroy many. [Antioehus de- 
stroyed a few by war. Did he  
destroy MANY by peace 71  
Papal Acts.  
It cast down the truth to the  
ground. It waxed great even 
against the host of heaven, and  
cast down some of the host and of 
the stars to the ground, and stamp- 
ed upon them, v. 12, 10.  

the eyes of a man, and a mouth  
that spake very g reat things, whose 
look was more stout than his fel-
lows. v, 8 <fe 20.  
QUERY.—How can these fel- lows represent successive kings, no  
two of which existed together, as  
Mr. Hatfield and other theological  
opponents suppose ?  
-'apal Acts.  
Tho same horn made war with  
the saints, and prevailed against  
them, until tho Ancient of days 
came, and judgment was given to  
the saints of the Most High. And  
he shall speak great words against 
the Most High, and shall wear om [Stars represent faithful minis- 
the saints of tho Most High, v.21,'ters, and other ornaments of the  

Papal Acts.  
And shall speak marvellous things  
against the God of gods. And they 
that understand among the people  
shall instruct many: yet they 
shall fall by the sword and by  
flame, and by captivity, and by 
spoil, many days, 11: 36,33.  
22, 25.  
End.  
A stone was cut out without  
hands, which smote the image up- 
on his FEET, that wore of iron 
and clay, and broke them to pieces 
Then was the iron and the clay, 
the brass, the silver, and the gold,  
broken to pieces together, and  be- 
came like thechatf of the summer  
threshing-floors, and the wind car-
ried them uway that no place was 
found for them, v. 24 , 25.  

S s"3 gMH 2  -!= o 3 .Ki'S  rs tugSSZ £  
«! «  
s - Ps a  
ft, go" SlSM  
i^ootb  
t)U nCCjKiica  

Church. "The 7 stars are the an-J  
gels ofthe 7 churches."J  
Additional Facts.  
He magnified himself even a- 
against the PRINCE ofthe host,  
and from him the daily was taken 
away, and the place of his sanctua- 
! ry was cast down,— and shall 1)E- 
iSTROY the mighty and the holy  
j people. He shall also stand up  
against the PRINCE of Princes, v.  
11,24, 25.  
1  

Christ's Kingdom.  
One like the Son of mancamc  
with the o'ouds, &c. See v. 13, 14.  
The saints of the Most High  
shall take the kingdom, and pos- 
sess the kingdom forever, even  
forever and ever  
—Judstmeut was given to the  
saints of tho Most High, and the  
time came that the saints pos  
aessed tha kingdom, r. 22 and 27  

End.  
The Ancient of Days did sit,  
whose garment waa white as snow, 
and the hair of his head like 
the pure wool, his throne was  
like the fiery flame, and his wheels  
as burning fire.  
A fiery stream issued and came  
forth from before him : thousand  
thousands ministeied unto him,  
and ten thousand times ten thou- 
sand stood before him: the judg- 
ment was set, and the books were  
opened.  
The beast was s!aiti, and his bo.  
dv DESTROYED, and given to the  
BURNING FLAME. v. 9, 10, 11.  
Christ's Kingdom.  
And the stone that smote the  
image became a gre^t mountain, 
and filled the whole earth. IN  
TEBPRETATION—The  God of hea- 
ven shall set. up a kingdom which  
-•hall never b? destroyed ; and the  
kingdom shall not be left to other  
people, but it shal I break in pieces  
and consume all thene kingdoms, 
Md IT shall stand r«REVJBK.  

End.  
He shall be broken 'without  
hand, v. 24.  
The consummation, and thatde- 
termined, shall lie poured upon the  
j^esolutor, 9: 27.  

Additional Facts.  
They shall take away the daily,  
and they shall placo the abomina- 
tion that maketh desolate.—With  
the arms of a flood, shall; they be  
overflown from before him, and  
shall I e broken . vea, also the  
PRINOR OF THE COVENANT, 
11: 31,22.  
Christ's Kingdom.  
Then shall the sanctuary be  
cleansed [or justified.]  
"Sanctuary," says Cruden, "sig- 
nifies a holy, or sanctified place of  
(ho MoA High. ,Heaven is called  
by the name of Sanctuary. Ps.  
102: 19, "For he hath looked  
down from the heights of his sanc- 
tuary : from heaven did the Lord  
K^MLP'*. farth/' It  

End,  
There shall be atime of trouble,  
such as there never was since 
theie was a nation, even to that  
same time: and at that time, thy  
people shall be delivered, every  
one that shall he found written in  
the book. And many [the multi- 
tude] of them that sleep in  the dust  
of the earth shall awake, some to  
everlasting life, and some to shame  
and everlasting contempt, 12 : 1,2.  
Christ's Kingdom.  
And they that be w>e, shall shine  
as the brightness of the firmament: 
and they that turn many to righ- 
teousness, as the stars for over  
and ever, Dan. 12: 3.  
But go thou thy way till the end  
be, for thou shalt rest, and STANI)  
IN THY LOT, at the end of thy  
days.  

i j i:|  
I  
fil  
.) y


BY GEO. STORRS.  
IT is said, " The world cannot come to an end yet,  
for the Jews are to be brought in first:" it is added,  
" God must have some great design in having kept the  
Jews a distinct people lor the last 1800 years;" and,  
it is asked, " What can that design be but their con- 
version to Christianity?"  
In reply, I remark, God has not " kept the Jews a  
distinct people." Here is the root of the error of our  
opponents, in regard to the Jews. I will not deny but 
that they are a distinct people; but, the question is,  
who has kept them so ? Our opponents say God has ;  
but I deny it. God has no more kept the Jews a dis- 
tinct people than he has kept drunkards " a distinct 
people;" or than he has kept Mormons, or Mahomed- 
ans, or Papists, or liars, or any other class of wicked  
or delilded men, " a distinct people." The fact is, God 
broke down the " partition wall " between Jews and  
Gentiles by the death of his Son ; and never intended  
that any distinction should exist afler " the seed should  
come to whom the promise was made." That " seed  
is Christ." See Gal. chap. iii. Christ, says Paul to 
the Ephesians, (ii. 14,) " is our peace, who hath made 
both one, [Jews and Gentiles] and hath broken down the 
middle wall of partition."  
To talk about God's keeping "the Jews a distinct  
people," in the face of such positive declarations of the  
Bible to the contrary, it seems to me, shows a strong  
disposition to maintain a theoi-y at all hazards. The ' 
truth is, God has abolished all distinction, under the  
gospel dispensation, between Jews, as the natural de-
scendants of Abraham, and  Gentiles. That very cir- 
cumstance was what enraged the proud Jews, and they  
united in rebellion against God's purpose, and blas- 
phemously said they would not be put on a kvel with 
the Gentiles; and they have labored for 1800 .years to 
keep up a " wall" of distinction, which, in the purpose 
of God, was to exist no more after his Son broke it 
down by his death upon the cross.  
The Jews, then, have kept themselves " a distinct  
people," and have done it in opposition to the will of  
God unto this day, as really and an criminally as drunk- 
ards have kept themselves " a distinct people ;" and it 
may just as well be claimed that God has kept the 
drunkards a distinct people with the design to convert  
them, as to set up such a claim for the Jews. I repeat  
it, the Jews are a distinct people by their own fault,  
and as criminally as drunkards, or any other class of  
I shall now call attention to a few texts of Scripture  
which show that the natural descendants of Abraham,  
under the gospel, have no peculiar privileges or pro-
mises. See Matt. iii. 9: " And think not to say within 
yourselves, We have Abraham to our father: for I say 
unto you, that God is able of these stones to raise up  
children unto Abraham." Thus John the Baptist lays 
the " axe unto the root of the trees " of Jewish preju-
dice and pride, and gives them to understand that a 
dispensation is now opening in which the being a literal  
descendant of Abraham would avail nothing.. This was  
a dreadful blow to Judaism, and it made the " diytree"  
shake to its very roots. Now let us see if our Saviour 
did not cut it entirely down. See John viii. 39: "They 
answered and said unto him, Abraham is our father.  
Jesus saith unto them, IY ye were Abraham's children,  
ye would do the tvorks of Abraham. " Here is a plain,  
positive denial that the Jews, as such, were the children 
of Abraham; and a clear statement of what constitutes 
a real child of Abraham, viz., doing " the works of 
Abraham." Our Lord tells the Jews in the 44th verse, 
" Ye are of your father the devil." This gives us a  
clue to the inquiry, who has kept them a distinct peo- 
ple ? It is their father, the devil. Let none attribute  
such a devilish work to God any more. Tti«v aro ^  
" distinct people " because they  
devil rather than God; and to  
version is to be the result of t  
(suppose that God gives to men a  

v.  
Besides, whenever a Jew is converted, his distinctive 
character as a Jew ceases at once. 'This shows that  
their being a distinct people is a work of the devil and  
not of God, as God abolishes that distinction when they  
obey him. Now let us look at Rev. ii. 9 : "I know  
the blasphemy of them which say they are Jews, and  
are not, but are of the synagogue of Satan." Again,  
Rev. iii. 9: " Them of the synagogue of Satan, which 
say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie." Can any 
doubt who are meant by real Jsivs in these verses ? Are 
they not real Christians 1 While the natural descend- 
ants of Abraham, as such, or Christians, who are so 
only in pretence, " are of the synagogue of Satan." 
In "connection with these texts, see Rom. ii. 28, 29:  
"For he is NOT a Jew which is one outwardly;  
neither is that circumcision which is outward in the flesh.  
But he is a Jew which is one inwardly; and circum- 
cision is that of the heart, in the spiiit, and not in  the  
letter; whose praise is not of men, but of God."  
Here inspiration settles the question, that those  
whom we call Jews are not Jews; and God no more 
regards them as Jews than he regards drunkards as  
sober men; or, than he regards wicked apostates as  
real Christians. We are here also given to understand  
distinctly,' who are Jews under the gospel dispensation  
—they are real Christians.  
That the literal descendants of Abraham, as such,  
are utterly rejected, except on the same conditions of  
other sinners, see Isa. lxv. 11—15: " But ye are they 
that forsake the Lord, that forget my holy mountain,  
that prepare a table for,that tfoop, and that furnish the 
drink-offering unto that number. Therefore will I  
number you to the sword, and ye shall all bow down  
to the slaughter : because when I called ye did not  
answer; when I spake, ye did not hear; but did evil 
before mine eyes, and did choose that wherein I delight- 
ed not. Therefore thus saith the Lord God, Behold,  
my servants shall, eat, but ye shall be hungry:, behold, 
my servants shall drink, but ye shall be thirsty: behold,  
my servants shall rejoice, but ye shall be ashamed: 
behold, my servants shall sing for joy of heart, but ye 
shall cry for sorrow of heart, and shall howl for vexa-
tion of spirit. And ye shall leave your name for a curse 
unto my chosen, for the Lord God shall SLAY THEE,  
and call his servants by another name."  
What language could more forcibly express an utter  
rejection from the very name of being God's people  
than that here employed? Read over these verses 
again, and see how carefully and clearly God distin-
guishes between tltaJews, as such, and his people.  
That this rejection 'of them from being his people was  
to last till the end of this world, see the following  
verses, where we are carried down to the new heavens  
and the new earth ; and then  God tells his people,  
whom he shall call." by'another name," " Be ye glad 
and rejoice for ever in that which I create : for behold,  
I create Jerusalem a rejoicing, and her people a joy."  
What Jerusalem ? See Rev. xxi. 1,2: " And I saw a  
new heaven and a  new earth: for the first heaven and  
the first earth were passed away; and there was no 
more sea. And 1 John saw the holy city, new Jeru-
salem, coming down from God out of heaven, prepared  
as a bride adorned for her husband."  
Here is a perfect parallel, and when compared to- 
gether, give us a clear idea of the language of God by 
Isaiah, in the verses under consideration. The Lord  
adds, 19th verse, " And I will rejoice in Jerusalem,  
and joy in my people; and the voice of weeping shall 
be no more heard in her, nor the voice of crying." 
This exactly corresponds with Rev. xxi. 4: " And God 
shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; and there 
shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, 
neither shall there be any more pain: for the former  
things are passed away."*  
Now sec Rom. ix. 6—8: " Not as though the  
word of God hath taken none effect. For they are  
all Israel, which are of Israel; neither, because  
are the  seed of Abraham, are they all children;  
in Isaac shall thy seed be called. That is, they  

The  Return of the Jews,  •e the children of the flesh, these are not the  
of God ; but the childrenof the promise are  
for the seed." Compare this with Gal. iv. 
ow we, brethren, [We. Who? Believers—  
from among the Jews or Gentiles] as Isaac  
the children of promise." 
lie apostle settles the question who are chfl- 
y exposition of 65th chapter of Isaiah, page 11,  
promise; and settles it to be those wlid hate  
Christ, without regai'd to their previous nation- 
hese are the persons to whom the promises  
e, and not the natural descendants of Abra- 
ha3 become of old Jerusalem and her children ?  
stle tells you iu the 25th verse of this chapter  
this Agar is mount Sinai in Arabia, and  
th to Jerusalem which now is, and is in bond- 
hsr children." Is this old bond-woman and  
ren to inherit the promises of God with real  
s? See 30 and 31st verses of this chapter—  
heless, what saith the Scripture? Cast out  
-woman and her son : for the son of the bond- 
hall not be heir with the son of the free woman.  
, brethren, we are not children of the bond- 
but of the free." 
here is the Jerusalem to which the promises  
t See 25th verse : " But Jerusalem which  
is free, which is the mother of us all."  
we learn, that old Jerusalem, or the Jews,  
are rejected from the promises of God; and  
he promises pass over to the " servants" of  
io are called "by another name," viz., to true  
s, who arc the only true Jews and children 
lem ; so that there are no promises of restora- 
"onversion, to the literal descendants of Abra- 
re than to any other class of sinners.  
," says the objector, "the Jews must be  
in with the fulness of the Gentiles;" and he  
that '.<? Bible language.'' Thus spake a Doctor  
ity of this city. Well, Doctor, where in the  
you find such language? Please tell us.  
owhere! It's not there ! It's only in the Doc- 
ed! That 'a all! But is there nothing that  
ike it in the Bible? Perhaps there is; but  
- D.'s tell us such words are "Bible lan- 
they should be careful that they quote cor- 
The portion ot Scripture, doubtless, referred i  
m. xi. 25 : " For I would not, brethren, that I  
be ignorant of this mystery, (lest ye should  
your own conceits.) that blindness in part is  
to Israel, until the fulness of the Gentiles be  
f this verse proves the return-or conversion  
ws, it proves also that it will not take place  
*  the fulness of the Gentile's be come in." Of  
ere is to be no more of the Gentiles convert- 
he bringing in of the Jews commences; and  
rstand the aforesaid Doctor thinks the return  
ws is to commence this year, his doctrine is  
the Gentiles as ours. Let all then who are  
, be aroused to seek salvation immediately.  
r, remember, " our enemies themselves being  
probation is to cease to the Gentiles,  
strength  of the whole argument, so far as  
Testament is concerned, lies in the 11th  
f Romans, I will give that chapter a full ex- 
Who was the apostle addressing in that  
The 13th verse will tell you: " For I  
you Gentiles, inasmuch as I am the apostle  
ntiles, I magnify mine office." What was 
versy with the Gentile converts? It is evi- 
out the nature of that rejection, of which the  
6 the subjects. It seems, the Gentiles had  
he notion that God had utterly rejected the  
that they were placed beyond the reach of  
Paul undertakes to refut^hat idea. How  
do it? Let us begin the chapter. "1 say  

then, hath God cast away his people? [That is-has  
P J7T?» thT,em that there is no Ovation for them ?] 
God forbid." But, how do you provethat, Paul? "I  
will tell you," says the apostle. First —" For I also  
am an Israelite of the seed of Abraham,  of the tribe of  
Benjamin and/have obtained salvation. This is my  
first proof that God has not cast away the Jews  mo  but  
that they may have salvation." But, Paul, you are a 
lavored character-have you any other proof that God 
has not put the Jews beyond the reach of his mercy i  
i es, says the apostle--God hath not castaway his  
people which he foreknew. Wot ye not what the 
Scripture saith of Elias? how he maketh intercession  
tw T!nSt H^?1' sayin^' Lord> they have killed thy prophets and digged down thine altars ; and I am  
• Z j}°rnnf C A  they f ek,myT Iife- But what sa"h the  answer of God unto him ?  I have reserved to myself  seven thousand men, who have not bowed the knee to  
the image of Baal." The apostle adds—" Even so  
then, at this present time, also, there is a REMNANT 
according to the election of grace; this is my second  
argument that salvation to the Jews is possible, wicked 
as they are ; I am saved, and a remnant besides are 
saved . " Paul then proceeds to say—" And if by  
grace, then is it no more of works ; otherwise grace 
is no more grace. But if it be of works, then it is no 
more grace ; otherwise work is no more work. What 
then ? Israel hath not obtained that which he seeketh 
for; but the election hatli obtained it, and the rest were 
blinded, (according as it is written, God hath given  
them the spirit of slumber, eyes that they should not 
see, ears that they should not hear;) unto this day."  
Who were the " election Ar.s. Paul, and "that  
part of the Jews who embraced the gospel: because 
they "were obedient to the faith," (see Acts vi. 7,)  
the Lord elected, or chose them to the enjoyment of his  
favor, as his spiritual Israel. Those Who did not obey  
[seechap. x. 16and21stverses,] "wereblinded." The  
apostle then goes on to say, verses 9 and 10, that David  
prophesied of this thing—" And David saith, Let their  
table be made a snare, and a trap, and a stumbling block,  
and a recompense unto them : let their eyes be darkened, 
that they may not see, and bow their back always."  
Why were their eyes darkened? Because thev re- 
jected "the true light,the Lord Jesus Christ. 
But the apostle adds, 11th verse, " I say, then, Have  
they stumbled that they should fall," beyond the pos- 
sibility of salvation ? " God forbid ;" or by no means, 
as the phrase signifies ; " but through their fall salva-
tion is come unto the Gentiles, for to provoke them to  
jealousy:"—that is, the Jews were provoked to jeal- 
ousy by the salvation of the gospel being preached to  
the Gentiles. See Acts xiii. 45, 46 : "But when the  
Jews saw-,the multitudes, they were filled with envy,  
and spake against those things which were spoken by  
Paul, contradicting and blaspheming. Then Paul and 
Barnabas waxed bold, and said, It\vas necessary that  
the word of God should first have been spoken to you ;  
but seeing ye put it from you, and judge yourselves un-
worthy of everlasting life, lo, we turn to the Gentiles."  
The middle wall was now broken down—the Jews  
fell from the peculiarity they had enjoyed, and through, 
or by means of that fall, salvation came to the Gentiles 
on the same terms that it flowed to a Jew ; viz., by  
faith in Jesus Christ. "Now," says the apostle, 12th  
verse, "if the fall of them, be the riches of the world,"  
[or be the means of enriching the world, by salvation  
flowing to all men with equal freedom,] and the dimin- 
ishing of them [or, as the margin reads, " loss " of 
them, or their " /oss,"] the riches of the Gentiles, [or,  
has been the means of riches to the Gentiles,] " how 
much more their fulness." As though the apostle  
had said, " Salvation has richly flowed to you Gen- 
tiles through the loss to the Jews of their peculiarity, 
but if they could be induced, generally, to embrace  
the gospel, there would be a still greater blessing flow  
to the world." And surely the unbelief of the Jews 
has prevented thousands and millions, probabJy, from f  
1


m  

It is said, " The world cannot come to an end yet,  
for the Jews are to be brought in first:" it is added,  
j " God must have some great design in having kept the  
, Jews a distinct people lor the last 1800 yearsand, 
j it is asked, " What can that design be but their con- 
I version to Christianity 1"  
In reply, I remark, God has not " kept the Jews a  
distinct people." Here is the root of the error of our 
opponents, in Tegard to the Jews. I will not deny but  
that they are a distinct people; but, the question is,  
j who has kept them so ? Our opponents say God has;  
but I deny it. God has no more kept the Jews a dis-
tinct people than he has kept drunkards " a distinct  
people ;" or than he has kept Mormons, or Mahomed- 
ans, or Papists, or liars, or any other class of wicked 
or deluded men, " a distinct people." The fact is, God  
broke down the "partition wall" between Jews and 
Gentiles by the death of his Son ; and never intended  
that any distinction should exist after " the seed should  
! come to whom the promise was made." That " seed  
is Christ." See Gal. chap. ni. Christ, says Paul to  
the Ephesians, (ii. 14,) "is our peace, who hath made  
both one, [Jews and Gentiles] and hath  broken down the  
middle wall of partition."  
To talk about God's keeping "the Jews a distinct  
people," in the face of such positive declarations of the  
Bible to the contrary, it seems to me, shows a strong  
disposition to maintain a theoi-y at all hazards. The  
truth is, God has abolished all distinction, under the  
gospel dispensation, between Jews, as the natural de- 
scendants of Abraham, and Gentiles. That very cir-
cumstance was what enraged the proud Jews, and they  
united in rebellion against God's purpose, and blas-
phemously said they would not be put on a level with  
the Gentiles; and they have labored for 1800 years to  
keep up a " wall" of distinction, which, in the purpose  
of God, was to exist no more after his Son broke it  
down by his death upon the cross.  
The Jews, then, have kept themselves " a distinct  
people," and have done it in opposition to the will of  
God imto this day, as really and as criminally as drunk-
ards have kept themselves " a distinct people;" and it  
may just as well be claimed that God has kept the  
drunkards a distinct people with the design to convert  
them, as to set up such a claim for the Jews. I repeat  
it, the Jews are a distinct people by their own fault,  
and as criminally as drunkards, or any other class of  
sinners.  
I shall now call attention to a few texts of Scripture  
which show that the* natural descendants of Abraham,  
under the gospel, have no peculiar privileges or pro- 
mises. See Matt. iii. 9: " And think not to say within  
yourselves, We have Abraham to our father: for I say  
unto you, that God is able of these stones to raise up  
children unto Abraham." Thus John the Baptist lays 
the " axe unto the root ofthe trees" of Jewish preju-
dice and pride, and gives them to understand that a 
dispensation is now opening in which the being' a literal  
descendant of Abraham would avail nothing. This was 
a dreadful blow to Judaism, and itmadethe " dry tree"  
shake to its very roots. Now let us see if our Saviour 
did not cut it entirely down. See John viii. 39: "Thev 
answered and said unto him, Abraham is our father.  
Jesus saith unto them, IF ye were Abraham's children,  
ye tvould do the works of Abraham." Here is a plain,  
positive denial that the Jews, as such, were the children  
of Abraham ; and a clear statement of what constitutes 
a real child of Abraham, viz., doing " the works of 
Abraham." Our Lord tells the Jews in the 44th verse, 
" Ye are of your father the devil." This gives us a  
clue to the inquiry, who has kept them a distinct peo-
ple ? It is their father, the devil. Let none attribute  
such a devilish work to God any more. They are a  
"distinct people" because they choose to obey the  
devil rather than God; and to suppose that their con- 
version is to be the result of their serving devils is to 
suppose that God gives to men a reward for rebellion. 

Besides, whenever a Jew is converted, his  
character as a Jew ceases at once. 'This ehn 
their being a distinct people is a work ofthe d|  
not of God, as God abolishes that distinction w  
obey him. Now let us look at Rev. ii. 9  
the blasphemy of them which say they are Je  
are not, but are ofthe synagogue of Satan."!!  
Rev. iii. 9: " Them ofthe synagogue of Satani  
say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie.' 
doubt who are meant by real Jsivs in these vers* I If! 
they not real Christians ? While the natural c I they  
ants of Abraham, as such, or Christians, who 
only in pretence, " are of the synagogue of ! 
In connection with these texts, see Rom. ii.  
"For he is NOT a Jew which is one outv  
neither is that circumcision which is outward in t|  
But he is a Jew which is one inwardly; and  
cision is that of the heart, in the spirit, and n 
letter; whose praise is not of men, but of God!  
Here inspiration settles the question, th  
whom we call Jews are not Jews; and God  
regards them as Jews than he regards drun'  
sober men; or, than he regards wicked apo  
real Christians. We are here also given to un  
distinctly,' who are Jews under the gospel dis  
—they are real Christians  
That the literal descendants of Abraham,  
are utterly rejected, except on the same cond:  
other sinners, see Isa. Ixv. 11—15: " Buty 
that forsake the Lord, that forget my holy  
that prepare a table foc^that tfoop, and that fu  
drink-offering unto that number. Therefor  
number you to the sword, and ye shall all  
to the slaughter : because when I called yi 
answer ; when I  spake, ye did not hear; h  
before mine eyes, and did choose that wherein  
ed not. Therefore thus saith the Lord God, 
my servants shall_eat, but ye shall be hungry: 
my servants shall drink, but ye shall be thirsty:]  
my servants shall rejoice, but ye shall be 
behold, my servants shall sing for joy of heari  
shall cry for sorrow of heart, and shall howl 
tion of spirit. And ye shall leave your name 
unto my chosen, for the Lord God shall SLAY  
and call his servants by another name."  
What language could more forcibly express  
rejection from the very name of being God's  
than that here employed ? Read over thesi  
again, and see howqarefully and clearly G  
guishes between tlS^Jews, as such, and h  
That this rejection 'of them from being his pei  
to last till the end of this world, see the "  
verses, where we are earned down to the n< 
and the new earth; and then God tells 1  
whom he shall call ."by another name," " B  
and rejoice for ever in that which I create :  
I create Jerusalem a rejoicing, and her peopL  
What Jerusalem ? See Rev. xxi. 1, 2: " An  
new heaven and a new earth: for the first 
the first earth were passed away; and there 
more sea. And 1 John saw the holy city, n  
salem, coming down from God out of heaven  
as a bride adorned for her husband."  
Here is a perfect parallel, and when cor  
gether, give us a clear idea ofthe language 
Isaiah, in the verses under consideration.  
19 th verse, "And I will rejoice in J  
and joy in my people; and the voice of wee 
be no more heard in her, nor the voice of  
This exactly corresponds with Rev. xxi. 4: " 
shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; 
shall be no more death, neither sorrow, n 
neither shall there be any more pain: for 1 
things are passed away."*  
Now sec Rom. ix. 6—8: " Not as thc|  
word of God hath taken none effect. For 
not all Israel, which are of Israel; neither,  
they are the seed of Abraham, are they all  
but, in Isaac shall thy seed be called. That  

l-:.t ' - 
SBO  

which are the children of the flesh, these are not the  
children of God ; but the children of the promise are  
counted for the seed." Compare this with Gal. iv.  
28 : "Now ive, brethren, [We. Who? Believers—  
whether from among the Jews or Gentiles] as Isaac  
was, are the children of promise."  
Hiye the apostle settles the question who are chfl- 
* See my exposition of 65th chapter of Isaiah, page 11,  
diren of promise; and settles it to be those who hate 
faith in Christ, without regard to their previous nation-
ality. These are the persons to whom the promises  
are made, and not the natural descendants of Abra- 
ham.  
What has become of old Jerusalem and her children ?  
The apostle tells you in the 25th verse of this chapter  
—" For this Agar is mount Sinai in Arabia, and  
answereth to Jerusalem which now is, and is in bond' 
age with her children." Is this old bond-woman and  
her children to inherit the promises of God with real  
Christians ? See 30 and 31st verses of this chapter—  
" Nevertheless, what saith the Scripture? Cast out  
the bond-woman and her son : for the son ofthe bond-
woman shall not be heir with the son of the free woman.  
So then, brethren, we are not children of the bond- 
woman, but of the free."  
But where is the Jerusalem to which the promises  
are madet See 25th verse: "But Jerusalem which  
is above is free, which is the mother of us all."  
Thus we learn, that old Jerusalem, or the Jews,  
as such, a.re rejected from the promises of God; and 
that all the promises pass over to the " servants " of 
God, who are called "by another name," viz., to true 
Christians, who arc the only true Jews and children  
of Jerusalem ; so that there are no promises of restora- 
tion, or conversion, to the literal descendants of Abra-
ham, more than to any other class of sinners.  
"But," says the objector, "the Jews must be  
brought m with the fulness of the Gentiles;" and he 
adds—'' that's Bible language.'' Thus spake a Doctor  
of Divinity of this city. Well, Doctor, Where in the 
Bible do you find such language? Please tell us.  
Ans. Nowhere! It's not there / It's only in the Doc- 
tor's Creed! That 'a all! But is there nothing that  
sounds like it in the Bible ? Perhaps there is; but  
when D. D.'s tell us such words are " Bible lan- 
guage," they should be careful that they quote cor- 
rectly. The portion of Scripture, doubtless, referred  
to, is Rom. xi. 25: " For I would not, brethren, that 
ye should be ignorant of this mystery, (lest ye should  
be wise in your own conceits,) that blindness in part is 
happened to Israel, until the fulness ofthe Gentiles be 
come in."  
Now if this verse  proves the returner conversion  
Je\vs, it proves also that it will not take place  
UNTIL the fulness of the Gentiles be come in." Of  
course, there is to be no more of the Gentiles convert-
ed after the bringing in of the Jews commences; and  
as I understand the aforesaid Doctor thinks the return  
ofthe Jews is to commence this year, his doctrine is 
as fatal to the Gentiles as ours. Let all then who are  
not Jews, be aroused to seek salvation immediately.  
This year, remember, " our enemies themselves being  
judges," probation is to cease to the Gentiles.  
As the strength of the whole argument, so far as  
the New Testament is concerned, lies in the 11th  
chapter of Romans/1 will give that chapter a full ex- 
amination.  
First. Who was the apostle addressing in that  
•fcchapter? The 13th verse will tell you: "For I  
speak to you Gentiles, inasmuch as I am the apostle 
ofthe Gentiles, I magnify mine office." What was  
his controversy with the Gentile converts? It is evi- 
1 dently about the nature of that rejection, of which the  
Jews were the subjects. It seems, the Gentiles had  
imbibed the notion that God had utterly rejected the  
Jews, 30 that they were placed beyond the reach of  
salvation. Paul undertakes to refutfc**hat idea. How  
does he do it ? Let us begin the chapter. "1 say  

then, hath  God cast away his people? [That is-has  
God°forbkf" ^T ^ * Sa!vation  wrn Si ,, But' do y°u Prove that, Paul ? "i  will tell you," says the apostle. First -" For I also  
BenSmr't'^;116 ^ of the tf*of  
Slmnfihlfr^T °btamed Salvation- is my first proof that God has not  cast away the Jews so but  
that they may have salvation." But, Paul vou"re a  
hasnot JlV? 5KJ 
has not put the Jews beyond the reach of his mercy' 
Yes says the apostle-"God hath not castaway his  
people which he foreknew. Wot ye not what the 
Scripture saith of Elias ? how he maketh interefss on  
to God against Israel, saying, Lord, they have killed  
, hy Prophets and digged down thine altJs and I am  • S!f?! 7 Vlfe- But saith the  
0d, Unt° lum 1 have reserved to myself  
seven thousand men, who have not bowed the knee to]  
the image of Baal." The apostle adds—"Even so  
then, at this present time, also, there is a REMNANT  
according to the election of grace ; this is my second 
argument that salvation to the Jewsj's possible, wicked 
as they are; 1 am saved, and a remnant besides are  
saved;" Paul then proceeds to say—" And if by  
grace, then is it no more of works ; otherwise grace  
is no more grace. But if it be of works, then it is no  
more grace; otherwise work is no more work. What  
then ? Israel hath not obtained that which he seeketh  
for; but the election hath obtained it, and the rest were  
blinded, (according as it is written, God hath given  
them the spirit of slumber, eyes that they should not  
see, ears that they should not hear;) unto this day."  
Who were the " election/" Ani. Paul, and that  
part of the Jews who embraced the gospel: because 
tjiey "were obedient to the faith," (see Acts vi. 7,)  
the Lord elected, or chose them to the enjoyment of his  
favor, as his spiritual Israel. Those Who did not obey  
[see chap. x. 16 and 21st verses,] "wereblinded." The  
apostle then goes on to say, verses 9 and 10, that David  
prophesied of this thing—" And David saith, Let their 
table be made a snare, and a trap, and a stumbling block,  
and a recompense unto them : let their eyes be darkened, 
that they may not see, and bow their back always."  
were their eyes darkened? Because thev re- 
jected " (he true light,the Lord Jesus Christ.  
But the apostle adds, 11th verse, " I say, then, Have  
they stumbled that they should fall," beyond the pos- 
sibility of salvation ? " God forbid;" or by no means, 
as the phrase signifies ; " but through their fall salva- 
tion is come unto the Gentiles, for to provoke them to  
jealousy :"—that is, the Jews were provoked to jeal- 
ousy by the salvation of the gospel" being preached to 
the Gentiles. See Acts xiii. 45, 46 : "But whpn the  
Jews saw-,the multitudes, they were filled with envy,  
and spake against those things which were spoken by  
£aul, contradicting and blaspheming. Then Paul and  
Barnabas waxed bold, and said, It was necessary that  
the word of God should first have been spoken to you ;  
but seeing ye put it from you, and judge yourselves un- 
worthy of everlasting life, lo, we turn to the Gentiles."  
1 he middle wall was now broken down—the Jews  
fell from the peculiarity thev had enjoyed, and through  
or by means of that fall, salvation came to the Gentiles  
on the same terms that it flowed to a Jew ; viz by  
faith in Jesus Christ. "Now," says the apostle 12th  
verse, " if the fall of them be the riches ofthe world "  
[or be the means of enriching the world, by salvation  
flowing to all men with equal freedom,] and the dimin- 
ishing of them [or, as the margin reads, "loss" of 
them or their "loss,"} the riches ofthe Gentiles, Tor,  
has been the means of riches to the Gentiles,1 " how 
much more their fulness." As though the apostle  
had said, "Salvation has richly flowed to you Gen- 
tiles through the loss to the Jews of their peculiarity 
but if they could be induced, generally, to embrace  
the gospel, there would be a still greater blessing flow  
to the world " And surely the unbelief of the Jews 
has prevented thousands and millions, proteWy. from


embracing- Christianity ; and wnai a worK ot enriching 
the world they might have accomplished had they  
espoused the cause of Christ, instead of employing all  
their influence against it!  
/; The apostle now proceeds to say, verses 13 and 14 •  
fPeak to you Gentiles; inasmuch as I am the  
S7/™1168'1 m^nit'ymine  office; IF BY  AIM! MEANS I may provoke to emulation them  
THEM"6 MY AND MIGHT SAVE  S0ME 0F  
Surely this language does not look much as if the  
apostle thought that the Jews were all to be converted  
lie even expresses a doubt as to the salvation of any 
of them; but says, he labors, " if by any means" he  
might save some of them.'' He must have been pe- 
culiarly unfortunate in his expressions, if he intended to 
teach that the Jews were certainly to be converted  
But says the apostle, verse 15, "If the casting away  
of them [viz the unbelieving Jews] be the reconciling  
of the world, [i. e., the cause of the gospel of recon- 
ciliation being preached to the world; or, perhaps, 
more strictly, the means of destroying the cause of  
enmity between Jews and Gentiles, bringing all on to  
the same ground in relation to God and one another,  
thus destroymg ' the enmity' which had existed, <&/ 
his cross,' see Eph. ii. 15-18,-if this casting away  
of them resulted so gloriously for the world,] what  
shall the receiving of them be ['if by any means I  
might save some of them'] but life from the dead?"  
That is, if the Jews could "by any means" be brought  
to give up their unbelief, and embrace Christianity, it  
would give new life atid power to the gospel itself. 
But Paul is very far from teaching that they should 
actually do so. All the apostle's language shows a 
doubt about the Jews, many of them, ever embracing  
the religion of Jesus. But he says, ver3e 16th, "If  
the first fruit be holy, the lump also" [may be holy.] 
Is not that the sense? The verb " is," is not' in the  
original. What is the apostle's argument? Is it not  
this ? " Though I have my doubts whether many of  
the Jews Will be saved, yet their salvation is possible; 
for if the first fruit [viz., the apostle himself, and the  
remnant of whom he had spoken in the 5tlj verse] be  
holy, [or have been mads holy] the lump [or body of 
the Jews may be made holy] also : and if the root  
[Christ, see Isa. xi. 10,] be holy, so are the branches."  
That is—if those who are now unbelieving, would  
believe on Christ, the root, they would become holy, 
as well as we who are the "  first fruits," and so they  
might be saved. The whole argument goes to prove  
the possibility of the salvation of the Jews ; but, at the  
same time, shows that the apostle had doubts whether 
many of them would be saved, though he hoped to  
" save some of  them."  
He now proceeds to caution the Gentile converts  
against being puffed up because they had been brought 
into exalted privileges: and he  does this with tre- 
mendous effect, inverses 17—22. He says, "And  
if some of the branches be broken off, and thou, being  
a wild olive tree, wert graffed in among them, and  
with them partakest of the root and fatness of the olive  
tree; boast not against the branches. But if thou  

never designed to be understood as teaching the  
certainty of the Jews' conversion: if he had intended to  
teach it, he would not have set the unbendino- word 
"if" to stand sentinel to keep all carnal Jews and  
Gentiles out of the church of God.  
The apostle now proceeds to argue this case still  
further, and says, verse 24, " For if thou wert cut  
out of the olive tree which is wild by nature, and wert  
graffed contrary to nature into a good olive tree; how 
much more shall these, which be the natural branches, 
be graffed into their own olive tree?"—" if they abide  
,not still in unbelief." He then goes on to say, 25th  
verse, " For I would not have you to be ignorant of 
this mystery, lest you should be wise in your own con- 
ceits, that blindness hi part is happened to Israel, [or to  
apart of Israel, viz., those who believed not, and this  
blindness will continue] until the fulness of the Gen- 
tiles be come in ;" that is, till the end of the world;  
for, til} then, we have no reason to suppose the fulness  
of the Gentiles will be come in. The apostle saw that  
a part of the Jews would continue to reject Christ  
till the end of the world; but that was no evidence of  
the impossibility of their salvation, "if" they would  
give up their " unbelief." Paul then adds, verse 26,  
" And so all Israel shall be saved—[' if they abide not  
still in unbelief f—for, the apostle speaks constantly 
in reference to the trusty sentinel he has set to guard 
against intruders] as it is written, There shall come  
out of Sion the Deliverer, and shall turn away ungod- 
liness from Jacob : for this is my covenant unto them, 
when I shall take away their sins."  
Where is this written? See Isa. lix. 20, 21: 
" And the Redeemer shall come to Zion, anc^nto  
them that turn from transgression in Jacob, saitWhe 
Lord. As for me, this is my covenant with tUm,  
saith the Lord; my spirit that is upon thee, and my  
words which I have put in thy mouth, shall not depart  
out of thy mouth, nor out of the mouth of thy seed,  
nor out of the mouth of thy seed's seed, saith the Lord,  
from henceforth and forever," .  
Here the prophet helps us to understand tue apostle;  
and he teaches us that the promise is that the Re- 
deemer shall come unto them that turn from trans- 
gression in Jacob ; and that the covenant relates to an  
eternal inheritance, and not to a mere conversion of  
any class of wicked men.  
The apostle next proceeds to say, verse 28, that,  
"As concerning the gospel, they [the unbelieving  
Jews] are enemies for your sake-, [or, on your account,  
i. e., they were enemies because  the partition wall was  
broken down, and the Gentiles were admitted to the 
same favor of God as themselves, and on the same  
terms—see Acts xiii. 42—46;] hut, as touching the  
election, [that is, the believing Jews—see verse 7,] 
they are beloved for the fathers' sakes." God has a  
special love to a believing Jew for the fathers' sake, on  
the principle that he " keepeth covenant and -mercy 
with them that love him, to a thousand generations."  
See Deut. vii. 9. Thus, the Gentile converts were 
made to understand, that though God had rejected the  

litWh  
nreui  
wc , uut agaiuoc iuc uiaiiviico.  jjm Jl niuu  mauo lu uuuciouiiu,  t.iu..  
boast, thou bearest not the root, but the root thee, unbelieving Jews from his favor, yet, when they be- 
Thou wilt say, then, The branches were broken off, iieved, as°they all might if they would, they were 
that I might be graffed in. Well; because of unbelief regard'ed with special favor for the fathers' sake; for,  
they were broken off, and thou standest by faith. Be, (j^j jiaci not forgotten the faith of Abraham, Isaac and  
not high-minded, but fear : for if God spared not the JaCob ; and his " gifts and calling" to the " fathers," 
natural branches, take heed lest he also spare not thee. • • • • *  e —1 -1 l:  
Behold, therefore, the goodness and severity of God ;  
on them which fell, severity; but toward thee, good- 
ness, if thou continue in his goodness; otherwise thou 
also shalt be cut off.''  
The apostle then goes on to say, veTse 23, " They  
also, IF they abide not still in unbelief, shall be graffed  
in : for God is able to graff them in again," IF they  
abide not still in unbelief. Here the apostle carefully 
sets his sentinel. It is a small word, it is true, but it 
is of tremendous_ import, showing that the apostle ..  

he had never repented of, or changed his purpose of 
making them the chosen vessels through whom he 
would bless the world.  
Now let us examine the ORIGINAL PROMISES  
made to the fathers. See Gen. xm. 14, 15 : " And  
the Lord said unto Abram, after that Lot was sepa- 
rated from him, Lift up now thine eyes, and look from  
the place where thou art, northward, and southward,  
and eastward, and westward: for all the land which 
thou seest, to thee will I give it, and to thy seed ior- 

Novv see 17th chapter, 7th and 8th verses : " An  
I will establish my covenant between me and thee, and  
thy seed after thee, in thsir generations, for an ever- 
lasting covenant, to be a God unto thee, and to thy 
seed after thee. And I will give unto thee, and to thy 
seed after thee, the land wherein thou art a stranger, 
all the land of Canaan, for an everlasting possession;  
and I will be their God."  
Now compare these promises with Acts vii. 4, 5:  
" Then came he out of the land of the Chaldeans, and  
dwelt in Charran; and from thence, when his father 
was dead, he removed them into this land, wherein ye 
now dwell. And he gave him none inheritance in it,  
no, not so much as to set his foot on: yet he promised  
that he would give it to him for a possession, and to 
his seed after him, when as yet he had no child."  
Now, if the promise to Abraham related to literal  
Canaan, then the promise of God utterly failed. But  
it did not relate to that; and Abraham never so under- 
stood it. In proof of this, see Heb. xi. 8—10 : " By  
faith Abraham, when he was called to go out into a  
place which he should after receive for an inheritance,  
obeyed; and he went out, not knowing whither he 
went. By faith he sojourned in the land of promise,  
as in a strange country, dwelling in tabernacles with  
Isaac and Jacob, the heirs with him of the same 
promise  : for he looked for a city which hath founda- 
tions, whose builder and maker is God."  
The apostle goes on to say, verses 13 to 16: " These  
all died in faith, not having received, the promises, but 
having seen them afar off, and were persuaded of them,  
and embraced them, and confessed that they were 
strangers and pilgrims on the earth. For they that 
say such things declare plainly that they seek a country.  
And truly, if they had been mindful of that country  
from whence they came out, they might have had op-
portunity to have returned: but now they desire a bet-.  « 
r country, that is, a heavenly : wherefore God is not  
hamed to be called their God ; for he hath prepared  
for them a city."  
The apostle continues to discourse, and enumerates  
" David, Samuel and all the prophets," who dwelt in  
the literal Canaan, and yet he tells us, verses 39, 40 :  
" And these all, having obtained a good report through 
faith, received not the promise ; God having provided1  
some better thing for us, that they without us should  
not be made perfect."  
If/ the promise related to the possession of literal  
Canaan, they did receive it; but Paul declares they 
did not receive the promise; which shows that the pro-'  
raise related to a different inheritance; even an heaven-
ly, or the new earth; for "the meek shall inherit the 
earth."  
Let us now examine the original promises as made  
to Isaac and Jacob. See Gen. xxvi. 3,4: " Sojourn 
in this land; and I will be. with thee, and will bless  
thee : for unto thee and unto thy seed, I will give all  
these countries: and I will perform the oath which I  
sware unto Abraham  thy father: and I will make thy  
seed to multiply as the stars of heaven, and will give  
unto thy seed all these countries: and in thy seed shall  
all the nations of the earth be blessed." See, also, 
Gen. xxviii. 13, 14 : " And, behold, the Lord stood 
above it, and said, I am the Lord God of Abraham thy 
father, and the God of Isaac: the land whereon thou  
liest, to thee will I give it, and to thy seed. And thy 
seed shall be as the dust of the earth ; and thou shalt  
spread abroad to the west, and to the east, and to the  
north, and to the south : and in thee, and in thy seed,  
shall all the families of the earth be blessed."  
Now let us inquire, who " thy seed " is, to whom  
those promises are made. See  Gal. iii. 1G : " Now  
to Abraham and his seed were the promises made*  
He saith not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of one,  
And to thy seed, which is Christ."  
" Thy seed," then, " is Christ." Did Christ ever  
possess a foot of old Canaan? No. He had "not  
where to lay his head;" so he testifies himself. The  
promise, then, was not fulfilled to Abraham, Isaac,  
uor our blessed Loid; and hence remains to be ful- 
filled.  

Let us now see if we can determine! to what tne  
promise related, and who are the heirs of it. See 
Rom. iv. 13—16 : " For the promise, that he should 
be the HEIR OF THE WORLD, was not to Abra- 
ham, or to his seed, through the law, but through the 
righteousness of faith. For if they which are of the 
law be heirs, faith is made void, and the promise made  
of none effect. Because the law worketh wrath : for 
where no law is, there is no transgression. Therefore 
it is of faith, that it might be by grace ; to the end the  
promise might be sure to all the seed: not to that only 
which is of the law, but to that also which is of the  
faith of Abraham, who is the father of us all."  
Now we have found what the inheritance is—who  
the heirs are—and who the children are to whom the  
promises are made, not the literal descendants of Abra- 
ham, but all who are " of faith." The icorld belongs  
to Christ and his people : they have been persecuted 
and destroyed out of the earth; but our Lord is com-
ing to glorify his saints, and to destroy his and their 
enemies, and take possession of the inheritance,, after  
purifying it by fire, and renewing it in glory.  
But let us examine the subject still further as to who  
are the heirs, and to whom the promises belong. See 
Gal. iii. 6—9. " Even as Abraham believed God, 
and it was accounted to him for righteousness; know 
ye therefore that they which are of faith, the same are  
the children of Abraham. And the scripture, foreseeing 
that God would justify the heathen through faith, 
preached before the gospel unto Abraham, saying, In 
thee shall all nations be blessed. So then they which  
be of faith are blessed with faithful Abraham."  
Now see the 15th to 19th verse, same chapter: 
" Brethren, I speak after the manner of men;  
though it be but a man's covenant, yet if it be con-
firmed, no man disannulleth, or addeth thereto. Now  
to Abraham and his seed were the promises made. He 
saith not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of one, 
and to thy seed, which is Christ. And this I say, 
That the covenant, that was confirmed before of God  
! in Christ, the law, which was four hundred and thirty 
I years after, cannot disannul, that it should make the  
promise of none effect. For if the inheritance be of 
the law, it is no more of promise; but God gave it to  
Abraham by promise. Wherefore then serveth the  
law? It was added because of transgressions, till the 
seed should come to whom the promise was made ; and it 
was ordained by angels in the hand of a mediator."  
See also 26th to 29th verse, same chapter: " For  
ye are all the children of God by faith in Christ Jesus. 
For as many of you as have been baptized into Christ 
have put on Christ. There is neither Jew nor Greek, 
there is neither bond nor free, there is neither male 
nor female ; for ye are all one in Christ 'Jesus. And  
if ye be Christ's, then are ye Abraham's seed, and heirs  
according to the promise."  
If this does not settle the question, as to whom the  
promises belong, it seems to me impossible to settle  
any question.  
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, neither received nor  
looked for a temporal inheritance* They understood 
the promises in a higher sense. They will be 
"brought in," and all the true "seed" with them;  
but, it is into an eternal inheritance, in the "new-
heavens ami new earth."  
When God brought Israel into literal Canaan, he  
directed the wicked inhabitants to be destroyed out  
of it; so when he is about to bring his true Israel into  
the promised inheritance, and give them " the world"  
for their " everlasting possession," he will destroy all  
the wicked out of the earth. See Prov. ii. 22: " But 
the wicked shall be cut off from the earth, and the  
transgressors shall be rooted out of it."  
See, also, Malachi iv. 1—3 > « For behold, the day  
•cometh that shall burn as an oven ; and all the proud,  
yea, and all that do wickedly, shall be stubble : and  
the day that cometh shall burn them up, saith the  
Lord of hosts, that it shall leave them neither root nor  
branch. But unto you that fear my name shall the


Sun of righteousness arise with healing in his wings;  
and ye shall go forth, and grow up as calves of the 
stall. And ye shall tread down the wicked ; for they 
shall be ashes untier the soles of your feet, in the day  
that I shall do this, saith the Lord of hosts."  
Look at Rev. xi. 15—18: " And the seventh an- 
gel sounded: and there were great voices in heaven, 
saying, Therkrtigdoms of this world are become the  
kingdoms of our Lord, and of his Christ; Mid he shall  
reign forever and ever. And the four and t\\"nty elders,  
which sat before God on their seats, fell upon their  
faces and worshipped God, saying, "VVe give thee  
thanks, 0 Lord God Almighty, which art and wast,  
and art to come ; because thou hast taken to thee thy  
great power, and hast reigned. And the nations were  
angry, and thy wrath is come, and the time of the 
dead, that they should be judged, and that thou  
shouldest give reward unto thy servants the prophets,  
and to the saints, and them that fear thy name, small  
and  great: and shouldest destroy them which destroy  
the earth."  
, In view of the fact that the heirs of the promises  
are Abraham's children by faith, and not by natural  
descent, read the following Scriptures: Isa. xxxiii. 15  
—17, 20—22: "He that walketh righteously, and  
speaketh uprightly; he that despiseth the gain of op- 
pressions, that ehaketh his hands from holding of 
bribes, that stoppeth his cars from hearing of blood, and  
shutteth his eyes from seeing evil; he shall dwell on 
high ; his place of defence shall be the munitions of 
rocks : bread shall be given him; his waters sha'| be  
sure. Thine eyes shall see the King in his beauty: 
they shall behold the land that is very far off. Look  
upon Zion, the city of our solemnities: thine eyes  
shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation, a tabernacle 
that shall not be taken down: not one of the stakes  
thereof shall ever be removed, neither shall any ofthe 
cords thereof be broken. But there the glorious Lord 
will be unto us a place of broad rivers and streams;  
wherein shall go no galley with oars, neither shall gal- 
lant ship pass thereby. For the Lord is our Judge,  
the Lord is our Lawgiver, the Lord is our King; he  
will save us." Isa. xxxv. 3—G, 9, 10: "Strengthen  
ye the weak hands, and confirm the feeble knees.  
Say to them that are of a fearful heart, be strong, 
fear not: behold, your God will come with vengeance'  
even God with a recompense; he will come and save 
yon. Then the eyes of the blind shall be opened, 
and the ears of the deaf shall be unstopped. Then  
shall the lame man leap as a hart, and the tongue of  
the dumb sing; for in the wilderness shall waters  
break out, and streams in the desert. No lion shall  
be there, sor any ravenous beast shall go up thereon :  
it shall not be found there; but the redeemed shall  
walk there; and the ransomed of the Lord shall return,  
and come to Zion with songs and everlasting joy upon  
; their heads; they shall obtain joy and gladness, and  
sorrow and sighing shall flee away." Isaiah lv. 12,  
13 : "For ye shall go out with joy, and be led forth  
with peace; the mountains and the hills shall break 
forth before you into singing, and all the trees of the  
field shall clap their hands. Instead of the thorn shall 
come up the fir-tree, and instead ofthe brier shall  
come up the myrtle-tree ; and it shall be to the Lord 
for a name, for an everlasting sign that shall not be  
cut off." Isaiah lx. 18—22: "Violence shall no  
more be heard in thy land, Wasting nOr destruction 
within thy borders;"but thou shalt call thy walls sal-
vation, and thy gates praise. The sun shall be no  
more thy light by day ; neither for brightness shall the 
moon give light unto thee; but the Lord shall be unto 
jbde an everlasting light, and thy God thy glory. 
Thy son shall no more go down ; neither shall thy 
moon withdraw itself; for the Lord shall be thine 
everlasting li^ht, and the days of thy mourning shall 
be ended. Ihy people also shall be all righteous; 
they shall inherit the land forever, the branch of my  
anting, the work of my hands, that I may be glori"- 
jjj^^ A little One Bhall become a thousand, and a  

small one a strong nation—I the Lord will hasten it in  
his time."  
See also Ezekiel xxxiv. 23—28: "And I will set  
up one Shepherd over them, and he shall feed them, 
evert my servant David; he shall feed them, anflfr  
shall be their shepherd. And I the Lord will be their 
God, and my servant David a prince among them : I 
the Lord have spoken it. And I will make with them 
a covenant of peace, and will cause the evil beasts to 
cease out of the land—and they shall dwell safely in 
the wilderness, and sleep in the woods. And I will  
make them and the places round about my hill a bless-
ing ; and I will cause the shower to come down in his 
seasons—there shall be showers of blessing. And the  
tree of the field shall yield her fruit, and the earth 
shall yield her increase, and they shall be safe in their 
land, and shall know that I am the Lord, when I have 
broken the bands of their yoke, and delivered them  
out of the hand of those that served themselves of  
them. And they shall no more be a  prey to the hea- 
then, neither shall the beasts of the land devour them; 
but they shall dwell safely, and none shall make them  
afraid."  
Thus we have " given unto us exceeding great and  
precious promises.'" But take those  promises and give  
them to carnal Jews, and you "take the children's  
bread and cast it unto dogs." Such is the work, I  
think, those are doing who apply such promises to  
any but Abraham's children by faith: la them "the 
promises are made-," and to them alone. The true  
Israel shall all be gathered when Christ appears in the  
clouds of heaven—then " He shall send his angels 
with a great sound of a trumpet; and they shall gather  
together his elect from the four winds, from one end 
of the heaven to the other." Wherever'they have been  
scattered, they shall now all be gathered ; yea, into  
"their own land," and shall be "HEIRS OF THE  
WORLD ;" then will " the saints " have taken " the  
kingdom," and they shall " possess the  kingdom for- 
ever, even for EVER and EVER."  
That glorious day is now " nigh, even at the doors."  
Let the children of God " lift up " their " heads, for"  
their " redemption" is at hand ; now ready to be re-
vealed. Let us wait, watch, and keep ready for that  
day.  
In conclusion, I wish my readers to look at the fol- 
lowing texts. 2 Cor. i. 19, 20 : " For the Son of God,  
Jesus Christ, who was preached among you by us,  
even by me, and Sylvanus and Timotheus,  was not yea  
and nay, but in him was yea. For all the promises  
of God in him are yea, and in him Amen, unto the  
glory of God by us." Compare thi? with'l John v.  
12. "He that hath the Son hath life; and he that  
hath not the Son of God, hath not life."  
Can it be plainer, that ALL THE PROMISES of God  
are IN CHRIST? and therefore they are not to any soul 
OUT of him; whether carnal Jews or any other class 
of wicked men. May the Lord give us understanding  
in all things, and guide us unto his eternal kingdom.  

Exposition of Isaiah LIV. 17-25,  
BY GEORGE STORRS.  
THERE are many who think this portion of Scrip- 
ture relates to soqie regeneration in this world prior to 
the end, or a second coming of our Lord Jesus Christ;  
or else that it is to be understood as figurative. I ap-
prehend it is neither the one nor the  other, but that it  
is a plain literal description of the final abode of  the  
saints. The apostle Peter, after showing that the 
heavens and the earth which are now are to be dis- 
L^WK^PA^^8-'' Nevertheless, we, according  
" ,10 f ttUMlsa, look for new heavens and a new  
earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness."  
Where did Peter find that promise? Let us now  
proceed to an examination of Isa. lxv.  
\erse 17. " For behold, I create new heavens and a  
new earth : and the former shall not be remembered,  
nor come into mind;" or, as the margin has it,  
come upon the heart," or be desired. Such will  
be the glory of the new earth that there will be no de- 
sire^for the old which has passed away."  
Verse 18. " Be ye glad and rejoice forever in that  
which I create: for behold I create Jerusalem a re- 
joicing, and her people a joy." What Jerusalem?  
See Rev. xxi. 1,2: "And I saw a new heaven and  
a new earth : for the first heaven and the first earth 
were passed away; and there was no more sea. 
And I John saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming  
dow n from God out of heaven, prepared as a bride  
adorned for her husband."  
Here is a perfect parallel, and when compared to- 
gether, give us a clear idea of the language of God by  
' Isaiah, in the verses under consideration. The Lord  
adds, 19th verse : "And I will rejoice in Jerusalem,  
and joy in my people ; and the voice of weeping shall 
be no more heard in her, nor the voice of crying."  
This exactly corresponds with Rev. xxi. 4: " And 
God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; 
and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow,  
nor crying, neither shall there be any more pain: for 
the former things are passed away."  
But some will say, the 20th verse ofthe 65th chap- 
ter of Isaiah shows that it cannot be speaking of the 
immortal state. Let us see. " There shall be no 
more thence an infant of days, nor an old man that  
hath not filled his days : for the child shall die a hun- 
dred years old ; but the sinner being a hundred years 
old shall be accursed."  
Now, what is the instruction intended to be commu- 
nicated in this verse? Not that there is dying in that 
state, or in the new earth spoken of; for such an inter- 
pretation would contradict the 19th verse, which ex- 
pressly says, " The voice of weeping shall no more be  
heard in her, nor the voice of crying." Now, this 
cannot be true if there is death there. What then  
does the 20th verse mean ? Let us examine it. There  
is to be new heavens and a  new earth. The inhabi- 
tants are to correspond with such a regeneration ; then  
there must be no more helplessness, for, this would  
produce both sorrow and crying, which are not to exist  
in that state. But, will not the helpless infants enter 
that world, who leave this in all their helplessness ? 
Yes. But when they enter there thgy shall be as  
perfectly free from helplessness as though they had  
died a " hundred years old." " The child shall die a 
hundred years old ;" or, he shall at once attain to as 
great perfection as though he had been  at that age  
when he left this world ; and this is given as a reason 
why " there shall be no more thence an infant of days,"  
or helpless infants there. They will be at once as ca- 
pable of taking care of themselves as though they'had  
(left this world "a huhdred years old." there shall ' 
I not be there "an old man that hath not filled his  
days." As there shall be no sorrow from infancy, so 
there shall be none from age; for, old men who have 
"filled " their days, i. e., the righteous old men, shall  

have their "youth renewed like the eagle;'" Ps. ciii. |  
5; while "  the sinner an hundred years old shall be  
accursed;" that  is, he shall not enter that new earth  
at all;~4>or nothing that is cursed can come there.— 
This I believe to be the plain nse of this 20th verse.  
In this interpretation I am sustained by the reading and 
notes in some of the oldest Bibles. One copy, printed -
before 1580, reads thus: "There shall be no more 
there a child of years, nor an old man that hath not 
filled his year3; for he that shall be an hundred years 
old shall die as a young man." A note in the margin 
says, " Meaning, in this wonderful restoration of the 
church, there shall be no weakness of youth nor infirm-
ities of age, but all shall be fresh and flourishing : and 
this is accomplished in the heavenly Jerusalem when 
all sins shall cease and the tears shall be wiped away," 
On the last clause of the verse, "the sinner being an  
hundred years old shall be accursed," the same note  
says, " Whereby he showed that the infidels and un- 
repentant sinners have no part of this benediction."  
" But," continues the objector, " it cannot refer to  
the immortal state, for the 21st verse says—They  
shall build houses and inhabit them. Surely nothing of  
that can take place in heaven."  
Where is heaven? Most people suppose that  
heaven is somewhere in indefinite space,  but seem to  
have no definite idea what it is, nor where it is. Of 
course, their faith has no object to rest upon; the re- 
sult is, they have become reconciled to make the best  
of this world, and are striving to make themselves so  
comfortable in their fine houses, pleasant walks, and 
worldly joys, that you cannot give them greater trouble 
than to tell them Christ is coming to put his saints into 
their inheritance: they are well satisfied to live here  
forever, without Christ, in preference to going to a 
heaven of which they have no definite idea. ^  
But let us see what the Scriptures teach about the  
saints' inheritance. See ihe following texts Psa.  
xxxvii. 9 : "For evil doers shall be cut-off: but those  
that wait upon the LORD, they shall inherit the earth."  
Verse 11: " But the meek shall inherit the earth; and  
shall delight ihemselves in the abundance of peace."  
Vei-se 22 : " For such as be blessed of him shall inherit  
the earth ; and thev that be cursed of him shall be cut  
off." Verse 29: " The righteous shall inherit the land,  
and dwell therein forever." Verse 34 : " Wait on the 
LORD, and keep his way, and he shall exalt thee to  
inherit the land: when the  wicked are cut off, thou  
shalt see it." "See" what? See the land they are 
to inherit. When ? " When the wicked are cut off;" 
according to Proverbs ii. 22 : " But the wicked shall 
be cut off from the earth, and the transgressors shall  
be rooted out of it." Then " the upright shaty dwell 
in the land, and the perfect shall remain in it." And 
our Saviour saith—" Blessed are the meek: for they 
shall inherit the earth."  
Have these and similar promises ever been fulfilled  
to the saints ? No; their portion has been and will 
be, "in this world, TRIBULATION." But the 
promise is, that they shall inherit the earth—be  
" HEIRS OF THE WORLD." See Rom. iv. 13.  
The earth, then, renewed, regenerated by fire, and  
the power of God, is to be the eternal inheritance of 
the saints, and they shall "DWELL THEREIN 
FOREVER."  
Having now settled the place of the saints' abode,  
we may attend to what Isaiah saith. " They shall  
build houses and inhabit them." "Will they build 
houses in the new earth?" So Isaiah saith: and shall 
I.dispute it? God says they will, and I dare not say, 
nay. See the description of the Netf Jerusalem,  
Rev. 21st chapter. Here are " walls—gates," Sic.  
It looks very much like building; and I know of no  
right we have to make the language figurative. I 
agree with Isaiah, then; they will build houses and in- 
habit them. " Let God be true," if " every man "  
is proved a " liar."  
But says the objector—" The prophet tells us  
' They shall plant vineyards, and eat the fruit of them.'  
Do you think they will  eat there ?'' Why not ? Angels


Fsa. Ixxvm. 25: " Man did eat angels'  
~ j- Where? In the wilderness, when God gave  
/ g §"manna," "the corn of heaven." See also  
Gen. xviii., where the "Lord "and "two angels"  
appeared to Abraham. What was done on that occa- 
sion ? " And Abraham hastened into the tent unto  
•Sarak, and said, Make ready quickly three measures  
of fine meal, kneed it, and make cakes upon the  
hearth. And Abraham ran unto the herd, and fetched  
a calf tender and good, and gave it unto a young man ;  
and he hastened to dress it. And he took butter, and 
milk, and the calf which he had dressed, and set it 
before them : and he stood by them under the tree, and  
THEY DID EAT." Our Lord eat after his resurrec- 
tion. See Acts x. 40, 41: " Him God raised up the  
third day, and shewed him openly: not to all the peo-
ple, but unto witnesses chosen before of God, even to  
us who did eat and drink with him after he rose from  
the dead." Thus we see our Lord eat, and why may 
not his members after their resurrection ?  
Now look at the following texts. Luke xxii. 29 :  
"And I appoint unto you a kingdom, as my Father  
hath appointed unto me:" Verse 30: " That ye may 
eat and drink at my table in my kingdom, and sit on 
thrones, judging the twelve tribes of Israel." Rev.  
vii. 17 : " For the Lamb which is in the midst of  
the throne shall feed them, and shall lead them unto 
living fountains of waters : and God shall wipe away  
all tears from their eyes." I might multiply this tes- 
timony, but enough has been given to show what the  
Scriptures teach on the question; and that, in the  
immortal state, there is eating and drinking; not figura- 
tively, but really.  
"But that makes heaven very carnal!" I ask,—  
Does it make it any more carnal than the Bible makes 
it ? I think not: and I dare not alter it.  
Verse 22: "They shall not build and another in- 
habit;" [as men often do in this world ;] " they shall  
not plant and another eat;" [i. e., they shall not have 
the fruit of their efforts wrested from them, as is fre- 
quently done in this state of sin and covetousness ;] for  
as the days of a tree " [even " the tree of life which is 
in the midst of the Paradise of God "] " are the days'  
of my people, and mine elcct shall long enjoy the  
work of their hands," [even " forever and ever."]  
Verse 23 : " They shall not labor in vain, nor bring  
forth [the fruit of that labor] for trouble;" [because  
there is none to " hurt or destroy " in the new earth;]  
" for they are the seed of the blessed of the LOUD,  
and their offspring with them." [" Behold, I and the  
children which thou hast given me." Such will, no  
doubt, be the language of many who have been instru- 
mental in bringing their children into the new earth.]  
Verse pA: " And it shall come to pass, that before  
they call, I will answer; and Avhile they arc yet speak-
ing, I will hear."  
This denotes the special and constant attention that  
God will give to their "desires," all of which will  
there " be granted;" and that without delay.  
Verse 25: "The wolf and the lamb shall feed to- 
gether, and the lion shall eat straw like the bullock;  
and dust shall be the serpent's meat. They shall not  
hurt nor destroy in all my holy mountain, saith the  
LORD."  
"That shows," says the objector, "that it cannot  
be in the immortal state, or new earth." But I ask—  
Why not ? Can any man prove that there are to be  
no animals in that land? I think none can do it.  
When Adam was created there were animals on the  
earth ; and none, I apprehend, can show that  those  
animals would ever have died, had it not been for the 
introduction of sin. The animal creation have suf- 
fered by the sin of man, and not by  their own fault.  
God pronounced his work, at the close of creation,  
" very good;" and when the work of "restitution " is  
accomplished, let any man show, who can, that there  
are no animals in that regenerated state. It is true, 
their ferocious character will be changed, and will  

correspond with the •peaceable character of the inhabi- 
tants of the new earth. Can any man believe the  
earth, itself, would ever have been " cursed." [sec 
Gen iii. 17,] had it not been for sin? The animals  
felt the shock, and " the whole creation groaneth and 
travaileth in pain together until now ;" but when the  
"limes of restitution of all things, which God hath  
spoken by the mouth of all his holy prophets since the  
world began," comes, then, let him show, who can,  
that animals will not be restored to that which they  
lost by no fault of their own. The new earth will be 
no mere than "very good;" and when the earth was 
very good there were animals. See Gen i. 24, 25, 20 :  
"And God said, Let the earth bring forth the living 
creature after his kind, cattle, and creeping thing, and  
beasts of the earth after his kind : and it was so. And  
God made the beast of the earth after his kind, and 
cattle after their kind, and everything that creepeth  
upon the earth after his kind : and God saw that it was  
good. And God saio everything he had made, and  
'yfhold it was very good. And the evening and the  
morning were the sixth day."  
When "the redemption of the purchased posses- 
sion" is fully accomplished, and God says " IT IS  
DONE," th;n shall all things which are not cursed  
by their own fault, again be very good; nor can I see  
any reason why animals, which were included in the  
approbation God gave to his works, are to be excluded  
from that regeneration.  
This View presents to the mind a heaven, not  of  
imagination, but of reality: a heaven such as the  
ancient worthies looked for, and "took joyfully the 
spoiling" of their "goods, knowing" that they had  
"in heaven a better and an enduring SUB-
STANCE."  

Harmony of Zechariah XIV,  
BY GEO. STORRS.  
WE will now attempt a harmony of Zechariah xivth.  
Let us remember that the prophets see different events  
at the same glance, in the prophetic gla?s, and often 
record the events without noting the chronological or-
der. Apply this idea to the chapter under considera-
tion, and read it as follows:  
Verses 1—2 : " Behold, the day of the Lord Com- 
eth, and thy spoil shall be divided in the midst of thee. 
Fori will gather all nations against Jerusaletn to bat- 
tle ; and the city shall be taken, and the houses rifled, 
and the women ravished; and half of the city shall go 
forth into captivity, and the residue of the people shall 
not be cut off  from the city."  
Ferses 12—15: " And this shall be the plague  
wherewith the Lord will smite all the people that 
have fought against Jerusalem; their flesh shall con- 
sume away while they stand upon their feet, and their 
eyes shall consume away in their holes, and tlieir  
tongue shall consume away in their mouth. And it  
shall come to pass in that day, that a great tumult  
from the Lord shall be among them; and they shall 
lay hold every one on the hand Of his neighbor, and  
his hand shall rise up against the hand of his neighbor. 
And Judah also shall fight at Jerusalem, and the 
wealth of all the heathen round about shall be gathered  
together, gold, and silver, and apparel in great abun-
dance. And so shall be the plague of the horse, of  
the mule, of the camel, and of the ass, and of all the  
beasts that.5llall.be' in theSe tfe'ritS, 3s this plague."  
Verses 17—19: " And it shall be, that whoso will  
not come up of all the families of the earth unto Jeru-
salem, to worship the King, the Lord of hosts, even  
upon them shall be no rain. And if the family of  
Egypt go not up, and come not, that have no rain; 
there shall be the plague, wherewith the Lord will 
smite the heathen that come not up to keep the feast 
of tabernacles. This shall be the punishment of Egypt,  
and the punishment of all nations that come not up to  
keep the feast of tabernacles."  
Verses 3—11: " Then shall the Lord go forth and  
fight against those nations, as when he fought in the 
day of battle. And his feet shall stand in that day  
upon the Mount of Olives, which is before Jerusalem 
on the east, and the Mount of Olives shall cleave in the  
midst thereof toward the east and toward the west,  
and there shall be a very great valley; and half of the 
mountain shall remove toward the north, and half of  
it toward the south. And ye shall flee to the valley  
of the mountains; for the valley of the mountains shall  
reach unto Azal: yea, ye shall flee like as ye fled from 
before the earthquake in the days of Uzziah, king of 
Judah : and the Lord my (rod shall come, and all the  
saints with thee. And it shall come to pass in that 
day, that the light shall not be clcar nor dark : but it  
shall be one day which shall be known to the Lord,  
not day, nor night; but it shall come to pass, that at  
evening time it shall be light. And it shall be in that  
day that living waters shall go out from Jerusalem:  
half of them toward the former sea, and half of them  
toward the hinder sea: in summer and in winter shall 
it be. And the Lord shall be King over all the earth;  
in that day shall there be one Lord, and his name one. 
All the land shall be turned as a plain from Geba to  
Rimmon, south of Jerusalem : and it shall be lifted up,  
and inhabited in her place, from Benjamin's gate unto  
the place of the first gale, unto the corner gate, and  
from the tower of Ilanancel unto the king's wine- 
presses. And men shall dwell in it, and there shall  
be no more utter destruction; but Jerusalem shall be 
safely inhabited."  
Verse 16 : " And it shall come to pass that EVERY  
ONE that is left of all the nations which came against 
Jerusalem, shall even go up from year to year to wor- 
I ship the King, the Lord of hosts, and to keep the feast  
of tabernacles^"  

Harmony of Revelation 19th, 20lli, 21st,  
BY GEO. STORRS.  
THERE are many who suppose it is impossible to un- 
derstand the Book of Revelation. The reason of this 
mainly is, I apprehend, because they suppose that it 
must be interpreted in such a manner as to make the  
events transpire in the  same order, or succession, as  
they find them written. In this way it is utterly im- 
S 
ossible to give that book an interpretation. To un- 
erstartd the words of the prophets, we must, in out  
imagination, cany our minds back to the time when  
they lived. They look down through the prophetic 
glass and see future events passing before their eyes  
often without regard to the precise period or order in  
which they are to take place; and when they have  
seen these events they frequently record each topic, or  
subject of discourse, to its termination, before they 
take up another which transpired in the same period,  
or during some part of the same period, and was a  
parallel event, though, in the record made of*it, it fol- 
lows after. By not observing this fact, we are con-
stantly getting into confusion, in our attempts to ex- 
plain the prophecies; and becoming bewildered, we 
give up in despair, and conclude none can understand  
them. The principle to which I have called attention,  
is overlooked, though it is a principle which we find  
acted upon by historians. For example, see Mosheim's 
Church History. He first divides the history into  
periods of a hundred years each. Then he takes up a  
topic—perhaps " The prosperous events of a Church "  
—he traces that topic to the close of that century;  
then in the following chapter he takes up another topic  
—perhaps " The doctrine of the Church," which he  
traces to the termination of the same period : thus each 
succeeding chapter takes up a new topic, and yet 
travels on through the same century. Now, if, in read-
ing Mosheim, you were to suppose, when you came  
to the end of the first chapter, that the following one  
must begin a neiv century, or period, because it  
follows the first, which closed at the end of the period 
it treated of, you would commit just such an error as 
is committed in the usual attempts at explaining the  
prophecies, especially the book of Revelation. The  
fact is, in that book we are carried down to the end  
seven or eight times at least: and in the 20th, 21st,  
and 22d chapters several topics are introduced, viz.,  
the resurrection—the judgment—the neiv earth—the new 
J&usalcm, &c.; and yet all these topics belong to the 
same period, or thousand years, and are events pre-
sented to John's mind at one and the same time, 
though recorded as if they followed each other in suc- 
cession. That the " beloved city " was on earth when  
Satan was loosed out of his prison, is clear from the 
9th verse of the 20th chapter: and yet the descent of 
that city upon the earth is not recorded till the com-
mencement of the following chapter.  
I will now try to give what 1 conccive to be a har- 
mony of the last part of the 19th chapter, with the 20th  
and the first part of the 21st. That the reader may  
see the beauty and force of this part of the word of the  
Lord, I shall put down every word from the 11th verse 
of the 19th chapter to the" eighth verse of the 21st  
chapter; paying no attention to the present division  
into chapters and verses, giving you the whole in par- 
agraphs.  

I


"And I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white  
horse ; and he that sat upon him was called Faithful  
and True, and in righteousness he doth judge and  
make war. His eyes were as a flame of fire, and on 
his head were many crowns: and lie had a name writ- 
ten, that 110 man knew but he himself. And he was  
clothed with a venture dipped in blood : and his name  
is called The Word of God. And the armies which  
were in heaven followed him upon white horses,  
clothed in linen, white and .clean. And out of his 
mouth goeth a sharp sword, that with it he should  
smite the nations: and he shall rule them with a rod  

delivered up the dead which were in them. And  
when the thousand years are expired Satan shall be 
loosed out of his prison, and shall go out to deceive  
the nations which are in the four quarters of the earth, 
Gog and Magog, to gather them together to battle; 
the number of whom is as the sand of the sea; and  
they went up on the breadth of the earth, and com-
passed the camp of the saints about, and the beloved  
city; and they were judged, every man according to  
their works. And death and hell were cast into the 
lake of fire: this is the second death ; and whosoever 
was not found written in the book of life was cast into  
the lake of fire ; and fire came down from God oat of  
of iron: and ho treadeth the wine-press of the fierce- heaven and devoured thorn:" aodthe'devnTl^t 
ness and wrath of Almighty God. And he hath on Ce;ve(i  them „na~ • tn ,T <?evH 1 iat  
his vesture and on his thigh a name written, KING whereUrn b^ st and ft?,  ^  
OF KINGS AND LORD OF LORDS. A d I saw ffft^S ^ ^ ^ 
an angel standing in he sun : and he cried with a «And he th> s;u ^ ^ ™ I 
loud voice, saying to all the fowls that fly in the midst make all thi ne,v, Jnd he said unto me Write for 
of heaven, Come, and gather yourselves together unto these words *re true and faithful An™he s ^ unto  
the supper of the great God : that ye may eat the flesh m» Tf done T A int., .j n , 7 . 0 
of kings, and the flesh of captains, and the flesh of nin'/and the end , lhe hc3m'  
mighty men, and the flesh of horses, and of them that of the fountain of the water of life ftad J® athwst  
sit on them, and the flesh of all men, both free and overcometh shall inherit all [these] things; and I will 
bond both small and great, And I saw the beast be his God, and he shall be my son. But thefearful  
and he kings of the earth, and their armies, gathered and unbelieving, and the abominable, and murdere ' 
together to make war against lum that sat on the and whoremongers, and sorcerers, andidolaten and'all  
Jiorse and against fits army. And the beast was liars, shall have the,r part in theStoSSSCnetL 
taken and with him the false prophet that wrought with fire and brimstone; which [part] is the Jecond  
miracles before him, with which he deceived them that death,"  
had received the mark of the beast, and them that  
worshipped his image. These both were cast jjlive into 
i. lake of fire burning with brimstone. And the rem- j  
nant were slain with the sword of him that sat upon 
the horse, which sword proceeded out of his mouth : 
»nd all the fowls were filled with their flesh,  
f "And I saw an angel come down from heaven,  
,'laving the key of the bottomless pit and a great chain  
in his hand. And he laid hold on the dragon, that old  
serpent, which is the Devil, and Satan, and bound 
him a thousand years, and cast him into the bottomless  
4,it, and shut him up, and set a seal upon him, that he  
should deceive the nations no more, till the thousand  
years should be fulfilled; and after that he must be  
loosed a little season.  
I " And I saw thrones, and they sat upon them, and  
judgment was given unto them." And I saw a great  
white throne, and him that sat on it, from whose face  
the earth and heaven fled away; and there was no  
place found for them. And I saw a new heaven and  
a new earth : for the first heaven and first earth were  
passed away, and there was no more sea. And I John  
saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming down from  
God out of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned for her  
husband. And I heard a great voice out of heaven,  
saying, Behold, the tabernacle of God is vith men, and  
he will dwell with them, and they shall be his people, 
and God himself shall be with them, and be their God.  
And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes : and  
there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor cry- 
ing, neither shall there be any more pain ; for the for-
mer things are passed away.  
" And I saw the souls of them that were beheaded  
for the witness of Jesus, and for the word of God, and  
which had not worshipped the beast, neither had re- 
ceived his mark upon their forehead, or in their hands;  
and they lived and reigned with Christ a thousand  
years. This is the first resurrection : blessed and holv  
is he which hath part in the first resurrection; on such  
the second death hath no power, but they shall be  
priests of God and of Christ, and shall reign with him  
a thousand years. And I saw the dead, small and 
great, stand before God; and the books were opened ; 
and another book was opened, which is the BOOK OF  
LIFE ; and the dead were judged out of  those things  
which were written in the books, according to their 
works.  
1 " But the rest of the dead lived not AGAIN until  
the thousand years were finished; and [then] the sea 
gave up the dead which were in it; and death and hell  

This i3 what I conceive to be a harmony of this  
of Revelation. In this view all is plain.  
/  

/ - Exposition of Revelation II,  
BY GEO. STORRS.  
THE TWO WITNESSES. ~  
" AND there was given me a reed like unto a rod :  
and the angel stood, saying, Rise, and measure the  
j temple of God, and the altar, and them that worship  
therein. But the court which is without the temple, 
leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto 
the Gentiles ; and the holy city shall they tread under  
I foot forty and two months."  
"The angel." What ang%l1 Evidently the same  
that John had described in the tenth chapter. What 
angel was that? Read the first verse of that chapter.  
"And I saw another mighty angel come down from  
heaven, clothed with a cloud : and a rainbow was upon  
his head, and his faCe was as it were the sun, and his  
feet as pillars of fire." Compare this description with  
first chapter, 15th and 16th verses. " And his feet  
like unto fine brass, as if tKey burned in a furnace : and  
his voice as the sound of many waters. And he had  
in his right hand seven stars: and out of his mouth  
went a sharp two-edged sword : and his countenance  
was as the sun shineth in his strength."  
This person all admit to be the Lord Jesus Christ.  
Can there be any doubt as to the identity of the person  
in the first chapter and the angel in the tenth ? It 
seerhs to me there can be none. This same angel  
commands John to " measure the temple of God," &c.  
By the temple of God, though a reference is had to  
the literal temple at Jerusalem, I understand the  
church of God. See Ephesians ii. 19—22: "Now,  
therefore, ye are no more strangers ancTforeigners, 
but fellow-citizens with the saints, and of the house- 
hold of God ; and are built upon the foundation of the  
apostles and prophets, Jesus Christ himself being the  
chief corner stone; in whom all the building fitly fra-
med together, groweth unto a holy temple in the Lord ; 
in whom ye also are builded together, for a habitation 
of God through the Spirit."  
This temple was now to be measured. The idea of  
measuring, is jo take the dimensions of a thing. This  
must be done by some rule; The rule, by which to  
measure the church of God, is the word of God. In 
this measurement, therefore,,,that which does not  
comport w^ith that rule will not come within the temple  
—it is to be left out—it is the " putex court." The 
courts of the temple, at Jerusalem, were three: the  
first, called the court of the Gentiles, because the Gen- 
tiles were allowed to enter so far and no farther : they 
werfi not of the Jews, though they came to the same  
temple. They were properly representatives of nom-
inal professors of Christianity, as ihe Jews were of  
real Christians,  
j, John is not to meastire the nominal professors of  
religion, as they come not loilhin the true church, and  
will be the greatest persecutors of that, church—treading  
it " under foot" for a specified period. The phrase  
"holy city" is used by the Rejelator to denote the 
true church, or its habitation. See chap. xxi.j2, and 
xxii. 19. The real church of God was to he Trodden 
unc!er~loot, by these Gentiles, in a peculiar sense, " 42 
months." I have shown, in my exposition of Daniel 
7th chap., that " 42 mouths," in prophetic language,  
is 1200 years : and this treading under foot of the holy  
ciiy exactly corresponds with the time given to the  
" little horn " that " made war with the saints." By  
the Gentiles, then, treading the holy city under foot,  
we can understand nothing else than the terrible havoc 
the papal church has made of the true church of God ;  
which bloody work lasted from A. D. 538 to 1798, at  
which period the pope was deposed, by Bcrthier, a 
French general, and the Justinian code of laws, under 
which the popes had carried on their war against dis- 
senters for 1260 years, was abolished. Since that  
period, the true church has been free from the civil  
desnotism of Papacy.  

Verse 3 : "And I will give power unto my two wit- 
nesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hun- *  
dred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth."  
Here I would remark, first—The same period is  
occupied by the proplecy of these two witnesses in  
sacKCjOtn, that the holy city is trodden under foot, 
and this appears to mark the periods as identical.  
Let us now inquire—Whose witnesses are these ?  
"My two witnesses," says the speaker. Who is the  
speaker? " The angel"—the Lord Jesus Christ, as 
I have already shown.  
What is a witness? It is one who gives testimony.  
Testimony is oral—that is, a witness testifies to what  
he knows, by word of mouth—or it is written; this 
last kind of testimony, in some cases, is stronger than  
oral. For example: You may produce twenty per-
sons, in court, to prove my indebtedness to you, but  
if I can produce a receipt, in your hand-writing, that I  
have paid the alleged debt, your twenty witnesses fall 
before it, and their entire testimony is outweighed by  
this one witness.  
The witnesses spoken of in the verse under consid- 
eration, are Christ's. Let us then inquire who are his 
two witnesses. Observe, they are not two of his wit- 
nesses ; but emphatically, " my TWO witnesses." It  
would not, therefore, be proper to call them mm, 
though ifren are sometimes called the Lord's witness-
es. Let us now look at John v. 31—34, 36—39 : "If 
I bear witness of myself, my witnesses not true. 
There is another that beareth witness of me, and I 
know that She witness which he witnesselh of me is  
true. Ye sent unto John, and he bare witness unto  
the truth. But I receive not testimony from, man; but 
these things I say that ye might be saved. But I have 
a greater witness than that of John : for the works 
which the Father hath given me to finish, the same 
works that I do, bear witness of me,  that the Father  
hath sent me. And the Father himself, which hath 
sent me, hath borne witness of me. Ye have neither 
heard his voice at any time, nor seen his shape. And 
ye have not his word abiding in you; for whom he 
hath sent, him ye belifcve not., Search the Scriptures,  
for in them ye think ye have eternal life: and they  
are they which TESTIFY OF ME."  
Do we not here find one of Christ's witnesses?  
namely, the Old Testament Scriptures. Let us now  
see if we can find the other. See Matt, xpeiv. ^14 :  
" And this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in  
all the world, for a WITNESS unto all nations."  
Is not this the other witness of Christ? And if so,  
are not the Old and New Testaments the " two wit-
nesses" in question ? But again,  
Verse 4: ."These are the two olive-trees,,and the  
two candlesticks standing before the God of the  
earth."  
Where do we find these two olive trees? See Zech.  
iv. 2—6.: " And [the angel] said unto me, What seest  
thou ? And I said, I have looked, and behold, a can- 
dlestick, all of gold, with a bowl upon the top of it, and 
his seven lamps thereon, and seven pipes to the seven  
lamps, which are upon the top thereof: and two olive- 
trees by it, one upon the right side of the bowl, and  
the other upon the left side thereof. So I answered  
and spake to the angel that talked with me, saying,  
What are these things, my lord? Then the angel 
that talked With me answered and said unto me,  
Knowest thou not what these be? And I said, No, my 
lord. Then he answered and spake unto me, saying,  
THIS IS THE WORD OF THE LORD unto Zerub- 
babel, saying, Not by might, nor by power, but by my  
Spirit, saith the Lord of hosts."  
Here, then, we are told that the two olive-trees are  
the word of the Lord. The Revelator says, " My  
two witnesses are the two olive-trees." Let us now  
look at 1 Kings ^.23—^8 : "And within the oracle  
he made two cherubirns of olive-tree, each ten cubits  
high. And five cubits was the one wing of the 
cherub, and five cubits the other wing of the cherub.:  
[from the uttermost part of the one wing unto the ut-


Itermost part of the other were ten cubits. And the  
other cherub was ten cubits: both the cherubims were  
of one measure and one size. The height of the one  
cherub was ten cubita, and so was it of the other  
cherub. And he set the cherubims within the inner  
house; and they stretched  forth the wings of the cher- 
ubims, so that the wing of the one touched the one 
wall, and the wing of the other cherub touched Jhe  
other wall; and their wings touched one another in  
the midst of the house. And he overlaid the cheru-
bims with gold."  
Compare this with Exodus xxxvii. 6^3.: " And ha  
made the mercy-seat of pure gold ; two cubits and a  
half was the "length thereof, and one cubit and a  
half the breadth thereof. And he made two cherubims  
of gold, beaten out of one piece made he thens, on the 
two ends of the mercy-seat; one cherub on the end  
on this side, and another cherub on the other end on 
that side ; out of the mercy-seat made he the cheru-
bims on the two ends thereof. And the cherubims  
spread out their wings on high, and covered with their  
wings over the mercy-seat, with their faces one to  
another; even to the mercy-seat-ward were the faces  
of the cherubims."  
It would seem, then, that the "two olive-trees"  
and the " two cherubims " were the same, and repre-
sent " the word of the Lord." Their position is wor- 
thy of notice. They stand one on each side of the  
" mercy-seat," looking inwards and downwards upon 
that seat. Does that mercy-seat represent Christ !  
So all Christians seem to admit. The cherubjpis, one  
on the left hand, with his outer Aving touching the 
wall and his inner wing reaching to the mercy-seat  
while he is looking down upon that seat, denoting  
that the Old Testament begins at the beginning of the 
world, looking to Christ to come, and extending to  
that period, is a witness for Christ, testifying of him :  
the other cherub stands on the right side of the mercy- 
seat; its inner wing extending to the mercy-seat, and 
its outer wing reaching to the other wall, denoting that  
I the New Testament begins at Christ, or the mercv- 
seat, and extends down to the everlasting kingdom of  
> God, but is constantly looking to Christ. Thus the  
two cherubims are at perfect agreement, as indicated 
by their being of "one size and one measure." A  
beautiful harmony and agreement is found to exist  
throughout the Old and New Testaments; a beauty 
that can only be seen by a careful comparing of the  
one with the other. Hej therefore, that rejects either,  
or exalts one above the other, breaks the harmony and  
introduces confusion into the testimony of Christ 's two  
witnesses, and thereby " hurts " them. Let all who 
would be guided aright, examine these two witnesses  
1 together. There are too many who seem to think  
that the New Testament supersedes the Old : this is  
a most fatal error. Those who do this, act as foolishly 
as the mariner who should cast away his rudder be- 
cause he has a compass.  
But again ; these two witnesses are " the two candle- 
sticks standing before the God of the whole earth." 
For an account of the candlestick made by Moses see  
Exodus xxv. jjl, and onward. Our Saviour saith,  
Matt, v. 15 7" Neither do men light a candle, and put 
it upder a bushel, but on a candlestick : and it giveth 
liffht unto all that are in the house."  
The Psalmist says, Ps. cxi*. 1J0, "The en- 
trance of thy word giveth light." Again, in thej$5th 
verse, he says, "Thy word is a  lamp [margin, candle]  
unto my feet," &c. It seems, then, that the candle-
stick is" a representation of God's word. Zeclrariah 
sees onc—the Old Testament; John has two brought  
to his consideration, viz., the Old and New.  
Let us now look at the clothing of the two witnesses  
"sackcloth" for "42 months."—Sackcloth indi- 
cates a state of mourning. See Isa^ xxii._12: "And  
in that day did the Lord God of hosts call to weeping,  
and to mourning, and to baldness, and to girding with  
sackcloth."  

Did the two witnesses go into such a state f "lnev  
did. About the year A.I). 538, the Greek and Latin  
languages ceased to be spoken in Italy. rl he Scrip- 
tures were written in those languages, and the Romish  
ftfiesthood prohibited their translation for the use ol  
the people. Thud the witnesses were hid from the  
common people, and their testimony was corrupted by  
the pretended interpreters. In other words, the two  
witnesses went into their " sackcloth" state.  
Verse 5 : "And if any man will hurt them, fire pro- 
ceeded out of their mouth, and devoureth their ene- 
mies : and if any man hurt them, he must in this man- 
ner be killed."'  
i Compare this with Jer. v. 14: " Wherefore, thus  
saith the Lord God of hostsTBecause ye speak this  
word, behold, I will make my words in thy mouth fire,  
and this people wood, and it shall devour them." See  
Num. xvi. 35j "And there came out a fire from the  
Lord, and'consumed the two hundred aud fifty men 
that offered incense." They " hurt" the word of the  
Lord by acting contrary to its requirements.—See 
"Rev. xxii. 18,^12: "For I testify unto every man  
that heareth"the words of the  prophecy of this book,  
if any man shall add unto these things, God shall add  
junto him the plagues that are written in this book;  
and if any man shall take away from the words of the 
[book of this prophecy , God shall take away his part 
but of the book of life, and out of the holy city, and 
ifrom those things which are written in this book."  
Men hurt the word of the Lord by adding to it or  
raking from it; and those that do so, knowingly, or  
from love to sin, or opposition to its requirements, will  
be " killed" or "devoured" by  the word, or witness- 
es ; or, according to their testimony.  
Verse 6: " These have power to shut heaven, that  
it rain not in the days of their prophecy: and have  
power over waters to turn them to blood, and to smite  
the earth with all plagues, as often as they will."  
Here is an evident allusion to Elijah, 1 KingsxyiL  
1: " And  Elijah the Tislibite, who was of the inhabi- 
tants of Gilead, said unto Aliab, As the Lord God of  
Israel liveth, before whom I stand, there shall not be 
dew nor rain these years, but according to my word ;"  
and to Moses, Exodus "And the Lord spake  
unto Moses, Say unto Aaron, take thy rod and stretch  
out thy hand upon the waters of Egypt, upon their  
streams, upon their rivers, and upon all their pools  
of water, that they may become blood : and that there 
may be blood throughout all the land of Egypt, both  
in vessels of wood and in vessels of stone."  
The judgments threatened by the mouth of these  
two witnesses will as certainly come upon individuals  
and nations, as drought and blood followed the words 
of Elijah and Moses. It will be vain, therefore, for  
any man or body of men to think to escape those  
judgments by a war on the truths of the Bible; for  
what the witnesses have spoken, will surely come to  
pass.. The plagues written in God's word will b's in- 
flicted, let men scoff as they may.  
Verses 7 and 8 : " And when they shall have fin- 
ished their testimony, the beast that ascendeth out of  
the bottomless pit shall make war against them, and 
shall overcome them, and kill them. And their dead  
bodies shall lie in the street of the great city, which 
spiritually is called Sodom and Egypt, where also our  
Lord was crucified."  
" When they shall liave finished their testimony "  
—that is, " in sackcloth;" or, as  the original signifies,  
when they are "  finishing," &c., just as they are  
coming to the termination of their sackcloth state. A  
"beast," in prophecy, denotes a kingdom or power. 
See Dan.J'tji chap; 17th aud 23d verses. The ques- 
tion now "arises, when did the sackcloth state of the  
witnesses close ? and did such a kingdom as describ-
ed make war on them at the time spoken of? If we  
are correct in fixing upon A. D. 538 as the time of  
the cdinmencement of the sackcloth state ; <12 months  
being lgGO prophetic days, or years, would bring us  
down to A. D. 1798. About  this time, then, did  

teh a kingdom as described appear and make war on  
, | /iiern? &c. Mark,—this beast, or kingdom, is out  
of the bottomless pit—no foundation—an atheistical  
power—" spiritually Egypt." See Ex. v.J2J " And 
Pharaoh said, Who is the Lord, that fshould obey 
his voice to let Israel go ? I know not the Lord, nei- 
ther will I let Israel go."  
Here is atheism. Did any kingdom, about 1798.  
manifest the same spirit? Yes, France—she demed i  
the being of God, in her national capacity, and made  
war on the " Monarchy of Heaven." " Spiritually "  
this power " is called Sodom." What was the char- 
acteristic sin of Sodom ? Licentiousness. Did France  
have this character? She did,—-fornication was es- 
tablished by law during the period spoken of. " Spir- 
itually" the place was " where our Lord was cruci- 
fied." Was this true in France? It was, in more  
senses than one. First, in 1572. a plot was laid in  
France to destroy all the pious Huguenots; and in one  
night, fifty thousand of them were murdered "in cold  
blood, and the streets of Paris literally ran with blood.  
Thus our Lord was "spiritually crucified "in his  
members. Again; the watch-word and motto of the  
French Infidels was, " CRUSH THE WRETCH ;"  
I. meaning Christ. Thus it may be truly said, " where  
our Lord was crucified." The very spirit of the " bot- 
tomless pit" was poured out in that wicked nation.  
But did France " make war " on the Bible ? She  
did ; and in 1J93 a decree passed the French Assem- 
bly, forbidding the Bible, and under that decree, the  
Bibles were gathered and burned, and every possible j  
mark of contempt heaped upon them, and all the in- 
stitutions of the Bible abolished; the Sabbath was  
blotted out, and every tenth day substituted for mirth  
and profanity. Baptism and the communion were 
abolished. The being of God was denied; and death 
pronounced to be an eternal sleep. The Goddess of  
Reason was set up, in the person of a vile woman, 
and publicly worshipped. Surely here is a power  
that exactly answers the prophecy, But let us exam-
ine this point still further.  
Verse 9 : " And they of the people, and kindreds,  
and tongues, and nations', shall see their dead bodies  
three days and a half, and shall not suffer their dead  
bodies to be put in graves."  
The language of this verse denotes the feelings of  
other nations than the one committing the outrage on  
the witnesses. They would see what war infidel  
France had made on the Bible, but would not be led,  
nationally, to engage in the wicked work, nor suffer  
p', the murdered witnesses to be buried, or put out of  
J sight among themselves, though they lay dead three  
days and an half, that is, three years and an half, in 
France. No, this very attempt of France served to  
arouse Christians te very where to put forth a new exer- 
J tion in behalf of the Biblej as We shall presently see.  
i Verse 10: "And they that dwell upon the earth  
shall rejoice over them, and make merry, and shall 
send gifts one to another, because these two prophets 
tormented them that dwell on the earth."  
This denotes the joy those felt who hated the Bible,  
I or Were tormented by it. Great was the joy of infi- 
dels everywhere, for a while. But " the triumphing  
of the wicked is short;" so was it in France; for their  
war on the Bible and Christianity had well nigh swal-
lowed them all up. They set out to destroy Christ's 
" two witnesses," but they filled France with blood  
and hortor, so that they were horror-struck at the re- 
r j] suit of their wicked deeds, and were glad to remove  
their impious hands from the Bible.  
Verse 11: "And after three days and a half, the  
Spirit of life from God entered into them, and they  
| . stood upon their feet; and great fear fell upon them  
which saw them."  
In 1793, the decrec passed ihe French Assembly  
suppressing the Bible. Just three years after, a res-
olution was introduced into the Assembly going to su- 
persede the decree, and giving toleration to the Scrip- 

tures. That resolution lay on the table six months, 
when it was taken up, and passed without a dissenting K  
vote. Thus, in just three years and an half, the wit- Jr  
nesses " stood upon their feet, and great fear fell up-
on them that saw them." Nothing but the appalling 
results of the rejection of the Bible, could have in-
duced Franco to take its hands off these witnesses.  
Verse 12 : " And they heard a great voice from  
heaven, saying unto them, Come up hither."And they  
ascended up to heaven in a cloud, and their enemies  
beheld them."  
" Ascended up to heaven." To understand this  
expression, see Daniel iv. rg2 : " Thy greatness is  
grown, and reachelh unto Heaven." Here we see that  
the expression signifies great exaltation. Have the  
Scriptures attained to such a state of exaltation as 
here indicated, since France made war upon them?  
They r.ave. Shortly after, the British Bible Society  
was organized ; then followed the American Bible So- 
ciety, and these, with their almost innumerable auxili-
aries, scattering the Bible everywhere. The Bible  
has been translated into nearly 2C0 different langua-
ges, since thpt period, that it was never in before; and 
then the improvements in paper-making and printing, 
within the last forty years, have given a power in 
scattering Bibles unparalleled.  
The Bible has been sent to the destitute, literally,  
by ship-loads. One vessel carried out from England  
fifty-nine tons of Bibles for the emancipated slaves in  
the West Indies. The Bible has had almost all class- 
es in community engaged, either directly or indirectly, 
in sending it abroad. The Bible has risen to be re- 
spected by almost every one, whether saint or sinner. 
The infidel is ashamed to speak against that book in  
decent compsny : he must go to the grogshop, or  
some other place of infamy, if he expects to  have  
hearers to his mad frothings against the Bible. It is 
exalted as above all price, and as the most invaluable  
blessing of  God to man, next to his Son, and as the  
glorious testimony concerning that Son. Yes, the 
Scriptures may truly be said to be exalted " to heav- 
en in a cloud," a cloud being an emblem of heavenly  
dignity.  
Icrse 13 : And the same hour, [period or time,] f  
was there a great earthquake, [rei-olution,] and a tenth i 
part of the city fell. What city ? See chap. xyij.  
)JjL- And the woman which thou sawest, is that 
great city which reigneth over the kings [kingdoms] 
of the earth." That city is the Papal Roman power. ' 
France is one of the " ten horns" that gave " their  
power and strength unto the [papal] beast; or is one ;  
of the ten kingdoms that arose out of the western  
empire of Rome, as indicated by the ten toes of Neb-
uchadnezzar's image, Daniel's ten-horned feast, and  
John's ten-horned dragon. France, then, was a tenth >  
part of the city.;" and was one of the strongest min-1  
isters of Papal vengcance; but in this revolution it I 
"fell," and with it fell the last civil messenger of Pa- j  
pal fury. " And in the earthquake were slain of men !  
[margin, names of men, or TITLKS of men] seven thou- 
sand." France made war, in her revolution of 1798 
and onward, on all titles and nobilhy. It is saidj'v 
those who have examined the French records, that  
just seven thousand titles of men were abolished in  
that revolution. " And the remnant were affrighted,  
and gave glory to the God of heaven." Their God- 
dishonoring and heaven-defying work filled France 
with such scenes of blood, carnage, and horror, as  
made even the Infidels themselves to tremble and  
stand aghast, and the " remnant," that escaped the  
horrors of that hour, " gave glory to God," not wil- 
lingly, but the God of heaven caused this " wrath of  
man to praise him," by giving all the world to see, 
that those who make war on heaven, make graves for  
themselves : thus glory redounded to God by the verv  
means that wicked men employed to tarnish that 
glory.  
I will here introduce an extract, on the French  
Revolution from Dr. Croft, a minister of the Church  
,of England. He says f


I m u IB | Ml  
" Rut persecution hod still its work. All the church-1  
es of the republic were closed. All the rites of reli-1  
gion were forbidden. Baptism and the communion  
were to be administered no more. The seventh day  
was to be. no longer sacred, but a tenth was substituted,  
and on that day a public orator was appointed to read 
a discourse on the wisdom of Atheism. The reign  
of the demon was now resistless. While Voltaire  
and Marat (infidelity and massacre personified) were  
. raised to the honors of idolatry, the tombs of the  
—r;-o ••--;- edict, warr;orSj an,i statesmen of France were torn 
ol Nantes, in IP,33, the history of 1' ranee was written | * ^ ^ ^ of mcrij whose names were a na- 
on every page with the blood ot the Reformed, f re-. ^^ . tossed about iu the iicentious sport of the  
quentW contesting the personal claims of the popes to i jmmorta]ity was publicly pronounced a 
authority, but submissively bowing down to the doc- |jn»am . and on the gates of the cemeteries was writ- 
trines, ceremonial, and principles ot Rome, France. 1 t i>cath is an eternal sleep!' In this general  
was the most eager, restless, and ruthless ot all the Qn^wsX of frcnzVj all the forms and feelings of reli-
ininisters of Papal vengeance. j ^ tnie or faise were a]i]ce trodden under the feet  
" In a moment all this submission was chained into | ^ multitude. The Scriptures, the lamps of the  
the direst hostility. At the exact close ot the pro- j} , had jyieninthe general fall of the temple.  
Iphetio period, in 1793, the 1260th year trom the birth j -J j. were not witjl0ut their peculiar irtdignity.  
cf the Papal supremacy, a power new to all eyes!— , , . .i....  

,' France, from t^e commencement of the Papal su- 
premacy, had been the chief champion of the pope- 
dom ; so early as the ninth century, had given it tem- 
poral dominion ; and continued, through all ages, fully  
to merit the title of' Eldest  Son of the Churcfc.' But  
France had received in turn the fatal legacy of perse-
cution. From the time of the Albigenses, through  
the wars of the League, and the struggles of the  
Protestant Church during the seventeenth century,  
closing with its ruin, by the revocation of the edict  
suddenly started up among nations: an Infidel De- 
mocracy ! France, rending away her ancient robes 
of lovalty and laws, stood before mankind a spectacle 
of naked crime. And, as if to strike the lesson of  
ruin deeper into the minds of all, on the very eve of  
this overthrow, the French monarchy hail been the 
nios't flourishing of continental Europe—the acknowl-
edged leader in manners, arts, and arms—unrivalled  
in the brilliant frivolities which fill so large a space in  
the hearts of mankind—its language nniversal—its 
influence boundless—its polity the centre round which 
the European sovereignties perpetually revolved—its  
literature the fount from which all nations ' in their  
golden urns drew light.' Instantly, as by a single  
blow of the divine wrath, the land was covered with  
oivil slaughter. Every star of her glittering iirma- 
svjat was shaken from its. sphere ; her throne was  
, rushed into dust; her church of forty thousand  clcr- 
|gy was scattered, exiled, ruined ; all the bonds and  
appliances which once compacted her with the gener- 
al European commonwealth, were burst asunder, and 
cast aside for a conspiracy against mankind. Still  
there was to be a deeper celebration of the mystery  
of evil. The spirit which had filled and tortured 
every limb of France with rebellion to man, now put  
forth a fiercer malice, and blasphemed. Hostility was  
declared against all that bore the name of religion. 
By an act of which history, in all its depths and re- 
fcessss of national guilt, had never found an example  
—a crime too blind for the blindest ages of barbarism,  
and too atrocious for the hottest corruptions of the  
pagan world, France, the leader of civilized Europe,  
publicly pronounced that there Avas no God. The de- 
cree was rapidly followed by every measure which  ,— -V— j ; ••  
could make the blasphemy practical and national. 
The municipality of Paris, the virtual government, 
proclaimed, that as they had defied  earthly monarchy,  
• they would now dethrone ilie monarchy of heaven.'  
On the 7th of November, 1793, Gobet, the Bishop of  
Paris, attended by his vicars General, entered the hall 
of the legislature, tore oiT his ecclcsiastical robes,  
and abjured Christianity, declaring that ' the only re-
ligion thenceforth should be the religion of liberty, 
equality, and morality.' His language was echoed  
with acclamation. A still more consummate blasphe-
my was to follow. Within a few days after, the mu- 
nicipality presented a veiled female to the assembly  
as the Goddess of Reason, with the fearful words,  
' There is no God ; the worship of Reason shall exist  
in his stead.' The assembly bowed before her and 
worshipped. She was then borne in triumph to the 
cathedral of Paris, placed on the high altar, and wor- 
shipped by the public authorities and the people. The  
name of the cathedral was thenceforth the Temple of  
Reason. Atheism was enthroned. Treason to the  
majesty of God had reached its height. No more 
erisrauUc insult could be hurled agaipst heaven.  

The copies of the Bible were publicly insulted ; they  
were contemptuously burned in the havoc of the reli- 
gious libraries. In" Lyons, the capital of the south,  
where Protestanism had once erected her especial 
church, and where still a remnant worshipped in its 
ruins, 'an ass was actually made to drink the wine  
out of the communion cup, and was afterwards led in 
public procession through the streets, dragging the  
Bible at its heels. The example of these horrors 
stimulated the daring of infidelity in every part of the  
continent. France, always modelling the mind oi  
Europe, now still more powerfully impressed her lin-
age while every nation was beginning to glow with  
fires like her own. Recklessness, licentiousness, and  
blasphemy were the characters and credentials by  
which the leaders of overthrow,  in every land, os- 
tentatiously proceeded to make good their claims to  
French regeneration. T$e Scriptures, long lost to 
the people-in the whole extent of Romish Christen- 
dom were now still more decisively undone. iNo ef- 
fort was made to reinstate them, by the Romish  
Church. Thus spake the prophecy, 1 They shall he 
in the street of the great city.' " .  
Now let me ask my reader, Have we made a right  
application of this portion of the word ot the Lord < it  
so where are we now in prophetic history Marl..  
The tremendous scenes in France close up the second  
wo Verse 14: "The second we is past. that  
is the second wo trumpet, which was the sixth trum-
net«m  the series. If we are correct iu the interpreta- 
tion of this chapter we are Vf^XwZT"  
and second wo! What followsHT " BEHOLD.  
Mark it-be not deceived-0 hear-see-hsten, a  
1 ends ofthe earth-'.; Behold, the third wo [the last]  
cometh QUICKLY."  metn v^ui.v-'rvi-j x. ( .  
could mate' .he bla.pl.emy practical and nitionaffl Where are wc now! Lo<iking for a temporaljm- 
T,, municipality of Lis £ ™,»al j-j-» " f  "SZtffik US  tv " " o that the thunder of the midnight cry might  
wake up such souls. Once more let me utter the an- 
gel's cry, " Behold, the third too cometh quickly  
Verses 15 to 18: " And the seventh angel sounded ,  
and there were great voices in heaven, saying, The  
kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms ot  
our"Lord, and of his Christ; and he shall reign for-
ever and ever. And the four and twenty elders which  
sat before God on their seats, fell upon their faces 
and worshipped God, saying, We give thee thanks, U  
Lord God Almighty, which art, and wast, and art to  
come ; because thou hast taken to thee thy great  
power, and hast, reigned. And the nations were an- 
gry, and thy wrath is come, and the time t« the dead, 
that they should be judged, and that thou shouldest give  
reward unto thy servants the prophets, and to the  
saints, and them that fear thy name, small and great;  
and shouldest destroy them which destroy [margin—  
i wcnmCl the earth."  

The seventh angel, then, will " quickly " sound—  
then the wicked will be " destroyed,''' not " converted "  
—then the dead are to be "judged"—then the " saints'"  
are to be " reivarded "—then will the kingdoms of this  
world become the kingdom of our Lord, and his  
Christ, and he shall reign for ever and ever. Then  
will the stone have smitten the " image upon his feet,'1  
and all the kingdoms of this earth will be dashed in  
pieces. Then will the saints of the Most High take 
the kingdom and possess it forever, even FOREVER  
AND EVER.  
0 my fellow-men, I beseech you awake, AWAKE,  
AWAKE, before that glorious day to saints, but  
dreadful, awfully dreadful day to sinners overtake you. 
In the name ofthe Lord, I beseech you, awake. O ye  
ministers of Christ, aicake. Souls are looking up to 
you for direction at this hour. If you by a word, a 
look, or a gesture, seem but to say, " it is all moon- 
shine, humbuggery,-" or anything by which your  
hearers can infer that you think they have no cause cf 
alarm, you may peril their souls, and their blood may  
be required at your hands. You do not know that it  
will not come this year. Many of you say, yourselves  
" No man knoweth the day nor the hour." Then  
you do not know that it will not come this year. I pray  
you, then, don't strengthen the hands of the wicked. 
0 remember " the tlard wo cometh quickly."  
Sinner, fly to Christ—the storm will soon fall—a  
storm before which you will be as incapable of stand- 
ing as " stubble " before the devouring fire. May the  
Lord incline  
t ^^


TO THE READERS OF THE TRUMPET.  
When we consider that at the time appointed the  
end shall be, I understand by the Scriptures and the  
increasing signs in earth and sky and ocean, that the 
day of the Lord hasteth greatly, and is now even at the  
doors, we feel constrained to lift up our voice and cry  
aloud, that the inhabitants of the earth may take warn- 
ing and prepare to meet their Judge. Whether they j  
will be persuaded to believe it or not, it will come, and  
whether we realize it or not, it will soon overtake us."  
Then every eye shall see him and every heart shall  
bow. " Seeing these things are so, what manner of  
persons ought we to be in all holy conversation and 
godliness. Let the wicked forsake his ways and the  
unrighteous man his thoughts, and return unto the  
Lord, who will abundantly pardon." Now while yet 
his lingering judgments stay, while the door of mercy  
is open, and the angel of the covenant is sealing the 
last-recovered sinners of our race. that men  
would be wise and flee from the coming wrath. Soon,  
very soon, the world and the works that are therein,  
shall be burned up. These houses, and possessions, and 
treasures which now occupy the whole ambition of  
man, will become as the chaff of the summer threshing-
floor, and noplace be found for them. ^ Dear reader, who- 
ever you are, and wherever this warning sheet may 
find you, be entreated this moment to repent and be- 
lieve in Christ, the only name that can save in this  
day of trouble. Don't be induced to delay by the voice  
of the scoffing and unbelieving world about you!|  
Whether you have before had an opportunity or not of  
hearing the midnight cry, or whether you can enter  
minutely into the calculations of prophetic periods or 
no, yet you can receive it through faith in Him who  
long since said, behold I come quickly, and what I say 
unto you I say unto all, watch. Indeed no man can 
receive this doctrine except through faith in God's  
word; he has promised to fulfil that word, and heaven  
and earth shall pass away before one  jot or one tittle  
shall fall. ^Then brother, sister, be persuaded, and  
listen to this last call of mercy. Don't throw this  
appeal aside, and turn a deaf ear to the message it  
brings to your soul. Fall on your knees before God,  
and be reconciled to his Son. Ask and ye shall re- 
ceive, seek and ye shall find, knock and the kingdom  
of heaven shall be opened to you. But if you reject  
this friendly warning, which we send to you with the  
most kind and disinterested motives, we can do no  
more, but bid you an eternal farewell, and commit 
your cause to Him who will soon appear to decide  
between us. Your friend, C. S. M.  

the year closes. This scepticism of its being a comet,  
is confirmed by a letter in the London Times, from J.  
F. W. Herschell, the astronomer of Europe, in which  
he says, after supposing that it may be a comet—  
" As the portion of the tail actually visible 011 Friday  
evening was fully 30 degrees in length, and the head  
must have been beneath the horizon, which would add  
at least 25 degrees to the length, it is evident that, it  
really a comet, it is one of first-rate magnitude; and  
if it be not one, it is some phenomenon beyond the  
earth's atmosphere, of a nature even yet more remark- 
able." ,  
We admire his candour, and think his last con- 
clusion most probable. This phenomenon was also  
seen in France, where it extended over a space of 60 
degrees, but as here and elsewhere, no nucleus was  
discovered. We feel that the wise men of the present 
day, are much in the same state of perplexity as that 
of the first Chaldean astronomers of a certain king- of  
antiquity, who " could not read the writing, nor make  
known the interpretation thereof."  
Flagrans divinte glorite studium.  
FOR THE TRUMPET.  
MR. EDITOR,  
Some weeks since I was led like many others to ob- 
serve the magnificent phenomenon, which then illu- 
minated our evening sky. Our scientifics and philo- 
sophers first called it a zodiacal light, and afterwards,  
finding it truant to the laws that govern that rare and  
delicate reflection, named it a comet of peculiar ap- 
pearance and magnitude, but their learned conclusions  
never satisfied me that it was either. It seemed more  
like the inclined plane of some celestial railway of  
vhich the inhabitants of earth may know more before  

BUT! BUT!! BUT!!!  
v But you may be mistaken in your calculations; if  
so what will you do 1 inquires another jarful one It  
is unbelief that says God's word may fell. We have  
proved from ineont?overtible/«ctS, that the stupendous  
chain of prophetic events concerning our world, have  
all been telly fulfilled, excepting the last and mos  
glorious one of all. And shall we say that may fa 1?  
Never. Heaven and earth may pass away, but the  
1 word of God will not fail. 'Pur answer to his.query  
is fully expressed in the words, Habakkuk n l-4- I  
wi 1 stand upon my watch, and set me upon the towe  
and will watch to see what he will say unto me and  
what I shall answer when I am reproved. And the 
Lord answered me, and said, Write the v.s.on and  
L°™ upon the tables, that lie may run that  
readeth it! For the vision is yet for an appointed time  
but at the end it shall speak and not lie: though  
tnrrv wait for it; because it will  SURELY co„E, lt wil  
not tarry- Behold his soul which is lifted up* not  
upright in him; but the just shall live by faith."  
HISTORICAL PROPHECY.  
By historical prophecy is meant that part of the',  
scriptures which present in a connected view the great •  
leading events of time, beginning in ancient days and 
carrying us through all the dispensations of time, to an  
eternal state, and the establishment of God's universal  
and eternal kingdom in all the earth; or, in other words, 
carrying us through the subversion of the kingdom of  
Israel, to its restoration. Such is the DREAM OF NEBU- 
CHADNEZZAR. Dan. 2d chapter.  
The reader will turn to the passage and read the  
story as it is there given in detail. Nebuchadnezzar,  
it seems, had dreamed dreams, with which he was  
troubled, but when he awoke he had forgotten his  
dream. His wise men were called to tell him his dream  
and its import. None could do it, until Daniel came,  
who, after a season of prayer, was divinely instructed  
to tell the dream and its meaning. He informed the  
^ king that God had made known to the king " WHAT,  
SHOULD BE IN THE LATTER DAYS." The dream was  
prophetical. The substance of the dream was—The  
king saw a great image (see diagram) whose bright- 
ness was excellent, and the form terrible. 1. His head 
of gold. 2. His breast and arms of silver. 3. His belly'  
and thighs of brass. 4. His legs of iron; and his feet  
part of iron and part of ci&y.  
The king saw until a stone cut out without hands  
smote the image on his feet, brake them in pieces, and  
ground iron, clay, brass, silver, and gold to pieces.  
They became like the chaff of the  summer's threshing  
floor, and the wind carried them away, and no place  
was found for them. " And the stone which smote the 
image became a great mountain, and filled the whole  
earth." M  

^pis to era ed in all Catholic countries even in Rome  
itself^and the only power which gives vitality to  
popery, is the power of Jesuitism. It has been con- 
surned in its vital energies, since 1798; and yet the  
world is wondering after it. y  
All that is predicted in the 7th of Daniel, to precede  
the everlasting kingdom of the Most High aPnd his  
saints has taken place. That wicked his been e 
vealed, < whom the Lord" has "consumed bv the 
spirit of his mouth, and will destroy by brightness  
•of his coming." 2 Thess. 2. ^  
THE VJSION OF THE RAM AND HE GOAT.  
The Vision.  
1. Of the 8th chapter of Daniel, consists of a ram  
EE*?0 TS'the tW° homs were high, one was  
£gher than the other, and the higher came up last,  
rle pushed westward, northward and southward, so  
hat no beast might stand before him. He became  ;rcat, &c.  
2. Daniel's vision continued, and he saw a he goat  
some from the west on the face of the whole earth, . 
ind he touched not the ground. And the goat had a 
lotable horn between his eyes. He came To the ram, 
vas moved with choler against him, smote the ram  
roke lus two horns and there was no power in the  
" Sta"d bf°re ,hlm- He cast him down to the  rround. Therefore the ?oat waxed VERY GREAT.  
3. When he was strong the great horn was broken,  
and for it came up four notable ones toward the four 
winds of heaven. And out of one of them came forth  
a little horn which waxed EXCEEDING GREAT.  
4. He waxed great toward the south, Africa—toward  
the east, Asia—and toward the pleasant land, Palestine.  
Thus far his territorial conquests.  
5. His character which he gained:—He waxed  
great, even to the host of heaven,—The church of Christ.  
—He magnified himself even to the PRINCE of the  
host—Christ.  
6. By him, [or according to the margin] from him,  
the " daily" (paganism) was taken away, and the  
place of his (paganism's) sanctuary was cast down.  
7. "And an host, or army, was given him" (the  
little horn which waxed exceeding great) " against the 
daily," in opposition to "the daily," a Christian abo- 
mination ; and he cast down truth to the ground; cor- 
rupted the church and destroyed the simplicity of  
Christian truth; and practised and prospered.  
Thus far the vision. lis import follows. Verse 20.  
Gabriel said  
1. "The ram which thou sawest having two horns  
are the kings of Media and Peisia."  
2, Verse 21. » The rough goat is the king of Gre- 
cia. The great horn between his eyes is the first king. 
Tljat being broken, whereas four stood up for it, four  
kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation, but not in 
his power."  
Thus far all is plain and undisputed. The Grecian  
kingdom—Alexander the first king—and Syria, Thrace,  
.Greece or Macedon, and Egypt, the four divisions of  
his empire after his death.  
The disputed point is the little horn, which waxed  
EXCEEDING GREAT. Is it Antiochus Epiphanes, or Rome 1  
1. It was small and waxed EXCEEDING GREAT.  
1 llR ram was great; Medo Persia. The goat, Grecia,  
VERY GREAT. The little horn waxed EXCEEDING  
GREAT.  
The history of Antiochus is, that he lost a great  
Part of the possessions his father left him—was much 
less in his end than in the beginning of his reign.  
1 his is a notorious fact in his history. He was a poor  
weak contemptible king. 
. ROME, on the contrary, began small, until at length  
" became the strongest and most powerful government 
that ever existed; it extended its conquests over the 
northern coast  of Africa, over Asia to the Euphrates;  
0Ver the Holy Land; and finally, over the civilized 
world. Rome, therefore, did wax EXCEEDING  
aBlT. n rinn__ nj.. _  

2. Antiochus djd not magnify himself to the host of  
heaven, the churrh, or to the Prince of the host, Jesus  
Christ. But Rome did both. It became " THE CHURCH."  
And the head of that church, " GOD ON EARTH."  
3. Antiochus was not a little horn, or kingdom, out  
of one of the four kingdoms of the Grecian empire,  
but a king of one of those four kingdoms. Rome was  
another kingdom which came out of Greece, just as 
the ten horns of chapter 7th came out of Rome, lt  
conquered and set up its authority in Greece, as the  
Barbarian kings conquered and set up their authority  
and kingdoms in Rome.  
4. This little horn is the same power which Moses  
foretold would destroy the Jews in the final overthrow 
of Jerusalem.  
DANIEL, 8 : 23, 24. 
And in the latter time  
of their kingdom, when  
the transgressors are come 
to the full, a king of  
fierce countenance, and 
understanding dark sen- 
tences, shall stand up.  
And his power shall be 
mighty, but not by his 
own power: and he shall 
destroy wonderfully, and  
shall prosper, and prac- 
tise, and shall destroy 
the mighty and the holy  
people.  

DEUTERONOMY, 28 : 48—51.  
Therefore shalt thou serve  
thine enemies which the  
LORD shall send against thee, 
in hunger, and in thirst, and  
in nakedness, and in want  
of all thingand he shall  
put a yoke of iron upon thy  
neck, until he have destroy- 
ed thee. The LORD shall 
bring a nation against thee  
from far, from the end of the 
earth, as swift as the eagle 
flieth; a nation whose tongue  
thou shalt not understand ;  
A nation of fierce counte- 
nance, which shall not re- 
gard the person of the old,  
nor shew favor to the young :  
And he shall eat the fruit of 
thy cattlo, and the fruit of 
thy land, until thou be de- 
stroyed: which also shall 
not leave thee either corn,  
wine, or oil, or the increase  
of thy kine, or flocks of thy  
sheep, until he have de- 
stroyed thee.  
5. The fierce countenanced king was to stand up  
against the Prince of princes; or reign in opposition  
to the PRINCE of PRINCES. Antiochus died 1G4 years  
before he was born. Rome has been emphatically  
Anti-Christ.  
6. Antiochus died of disease, a  natural death, but  
Rome is to be broken in pieces by the stone cut out of  
the mountain without hand. Rome came up into no- 
tice, and became united with the people of God, by  
league, 161 B. C., in the latter time of the four king- 
doms of Greece. It became great by the gifts be- 
stowed on it by kings who died and left their king-
doms by will, to ROME  
THE LENGTH OF THE VISION.  
Daniel heard the question, verse 15, " How long the  
vision," " to give both the sanctuary and host to be  
trodden under foot?" " Two thousand three hundred 
days. Then shall the sanctuary be JUSTIFIED."* SO  
the margin reads.  
The powers mentioned in verse 13, to tread down  
the sanctuary and host were, " the daily (or continual)  
and transgression of desolation." The one is what  
Paul calls " the mystery of iniquity;" the other " that  
wicked, that man of sin." The one hindered till he 
should be taken out of the way, then that wicked was  
to be revealed. The first was paganism, the second,  
popery. The one gave way to the other. But both  
were abominations, and crushed the Church of God.  
Daniel wished to know the import of his vision, and  
sought for the meaning; and Gabriel was sent to make  
him understand the vision. He began the execution  
of his commission by saying, " Understand,!) son-of  
|man, for at 'the time of the  end' shall be the vision.  

m  f  
I!  
f I °  
W  
M °| I  
E- i f  
*f!\


That is, the vision is to be understood "at the time ot  
the end." " But," he continued, "I will make thee 
know what shall be in THE LAST END OF THE, INDIG- 
I NATION: for at the time appointed, (2300 days,) the  
end shall be." The " indignation" is the cause of  
Jerusalem's desolation; and it will continue desolate 
until the " indignation" ceases, or " her iniquity is par- 
doned." Isa. 10: 5. "0 Assyrian, the rod of mine 
anger; 'the staff' in 'their' hand 'is mine' INDIGNA- 
TION." " And it shall come to pass when the Lord  
shall have accomplished his ' whole' work on ' Mount  
Zion' and 'Jerusalem,' I will punish the fruit of the  
proud heart of the king of Assyria, and" the glory of  
his high looks." " For yet a very little while and I  
will cause the ' indignation' to cease, and mine anger  
in their destruction." This passage shows that the  
" indignation" is the cause of the desolation of Jeru- 
salem and Mount Zion. The 2300 days reach to the  
LAST END of the indignation; that is, until the people  
of God are delivered from their dispersion, and the 
wicked city is pardoned. The vision begins with the  
ram with two horns; Media and Persia. The " in- 
dignation" has not yet ceased; for the people are yet  
scattered and Jerusalem is yet desolated and trodden 
down of the Gentiles. Then the days cannot mean  
literal days, but symbolical. To say they were ful- 
filled literally, in Antiochus Epiphanes, is to throw  
.away a great part of the vision—the whole of the ram  
and goat. And then they must show that the " last 
end" ofthe "indignation" came then; which they  
cannot, for it yet continues.—Then the days must be  
symbolical and mean years.—That the sanctuary sig- 
nifies Jerusalem and Mount Zion, see Exodus 15 : 17.  
Ps. 78: 54, 67—G9, &c.  
The date of the 2300 years is the next thing in order.  
It begins with Media and Persia, when both horns 
were high and one was higher than the other, and the 
last that came up was the highest. It was also when 
no beast or government could stand before the ram, but 
at what point the chapter does not say. That Daniel  
was no more than an amanuensis, and wrote without  
understanding the import of the instruction, is clear 
from the concluding remark of Daniel, and Gabriel's  
closing instruction. Gabriel said, "The vision  ofthe  
! evening and morning which was told is true, (2300  
'evening-morning,') wherefore shut thou up the vision,  
for it shall be for many days. And I Daniel fainted,  
and was sick certain days, and afterward I rose up and 
did the king's business; and I was 'astonished at the 
vision,' but none understood it."  
From this confession of Daniel, we learn that he,  
and all else, were in the dark on the subject of its im- 
port. Daniel, of course, was left to make up his judg- 
ment on the time of the justification of the sanctuary, 
front other data. This he did, for in the first year of  
Darius, as he informs in the 9th chapter, he learned by  
books the number of the years whereof the word of the  
Lord came to Jeremiah, the prophet, that he would ac- 
complish 70 years in the desolations of Jerusalem. 
That 70 years, beginning in the first year of Nebu- 
i chadnezzar, ended with the death of Belshazzar.  
Daniel had been a captive during that period. In the  
first year of Darius, the Mede, he concluded that the  
; 70 years being ended, the time for the deliverance of  
the city and people had arrived. Accordingly he began  
to pray and confess his sins and the sins of his people,  
j on account of which they were desolate, according to  
' what was written in the law of Moses. He prayed  
! that God would then turn away his wrath from his  
city and people, and cause his face to shine on his  
SANCTUARY, which was desolate. The great theme  
which occupied Daniel's mind in this prayer, was the 
desolation of the sanctuary and host, or people, and 
their forgiveness. Reader, look at the prayer, and say  
what it was, if not that. But he mistook the time of  
justification, and Gabriel was sent again to stop him  
in the midst of his prayer, and give him understanding  
on the subject of his pTayer. " He informed me and 
talked with me," &c. " Understand the matter and  
Vmsider the vision. Seventy weeks are determined.'1''  

literally ^cutoff." The Hebraists all admit that fee 
word determined, in our English version does'signify  
" CUT OFF." Not one has disputed it.  
But from what are " seventy-sevens," or weeks, " cut  
off?" For clearly we cannot " cut off" a period from  
nothing, nor yet "cut off" a period without a remnant.  
What then is the period from which they are cut? The  
answer must be, some period relating to the subject  
of Daniel's prayer and Gabriel's conversation. That  
subject was the "forgiveness of the sanctuary and 
host, city and people. Gabriel directed him to under- 
stand the matter in hand, and to do it effectually, to 
consider the vision. What vision? The vision, to be  
sure, which gives the length of time to the cleansing  
of the sanctuary. Now, Daniel, seventy weeks are cut 
from the vision, for thy city and thy people, " sanc- 
tuary and host," to finish the transgression, and make 
an end of sins; or, to fill up the rebellion of the Jews  
and Jerusalem, that their national doom might be seal- 
ed. This they did when Christ was rejected. Then  
he proceeds to divide the seventy weeks. " From the  
commandment to restore and build Jerusalem to Mes-
siah the Prince, there will be seven weeks, and 62  
weeks. And the street shall be built again, and the  
wall, even in troublous times." That is, although there  
would be a rebuilding of the street and wall of Jerusa-
lem before Messiah came, and the iniquity filled up,  
yet it would not be the end of " the indignation." But  
it should be built even in troublous times, while the 
people were'yet in bondage to the Persians. So Nehe- 
miah, 9th chapter, declares they were when it was  
built. They were still servants in the land God gave  
to their fathers, and they were so because of their sins, 
the sins of their fathers, kings, princes, priests, pro- 
phets, &c. The sin was not pardoned then. " After  
three-score and two weeks Messiah shall be ' cut off,'  
but not for himself; and the people of the prince that  
shall come," after the sin of the people and city is full,  
"shall destroy the city," the lower city, "and the  
sanctuary," the city of David, Mount Zion itself.  
" And the end thereof shall be with a flood; and unto  
the end of the war desolations arc determined." Or,  
in the margin, unto the end of the war it shall " be cut |  
off by desolations." The war is the one begun by the  
Assyrians, renewed by the Babylonians, carried on by  
the "Medo-Persians, and Grecians, until finally the  
Romans came up and destroyed the city, and carried  
the people into captivity. It is to be cut off by DESO- 
LATIONS to the end of the war. Christ expressed the 
same thing by saying, " there shall not be left one  
stone on another," &c., and "Jerusalem shall be  
trodden down"—'.' till the times of the Gentiles be ful- 
filled."  
" He shall confirm the covenant with many for one  
week, and in the midst of the week (or half part) he 
shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease, and for  
the overspreading of abomination he shall make it de- 
solate, even to the CONSUMMATION ; and that determined,  
shall be poured upon the desolate," or DESOLATOII.  
The desolator was Rome. The desolation to be  
poured on it, is, it shall be broken to pieces. Dan. 2. 
It is to be destroyed and given to the burning flame.  
Dan. 7. It is to be broken without hand. Dan. 8.  
J Could Gabriel more distinctly go ever the events  
of the desolation cf the sanctuary, and show how long 
it was to be desolate? I cannot conceive how he could. 
This being settled, that the 9th chapter relates to the  
self-same subject with the 8th, only is more definite; 
and the seventy weeks being " cut off"—they must be  
" cut off" from the full period of the sanctuary's deso- 
lation, which is 2300 days, at the end of which the  
" last end" of the indignation comes, and the sanctuary 
will be JUSTIFIED. Will it be said, the vision from- 
which the seventy weeks are " cut off," is " the seventy  
weeks vision?" It is replied, there is no seventy weeks 
vision; but an open communication made to Daniel.  
Besides, if it were a vision, seventy \yeeks could not  
be cut off from seventy weeks—it would be a whole 
without cutting. But it can be cut from the events of  
the 9th chapter, says one. Indeed! Can time be cut  

I froyj matter ? must' nolTlurie be cut from time, and  
jnuttter Worn matter? 
I days. 7X70=490.  
Cut seventy weeks from 2300 Paraphrase.—And when Alexander shall reign his  
2300—490=1810. kingdom shall be broken, and divided toward the four  ,„ m, Kingdom snail oe oroKen, ano oiviaea luwaru nit: IUUI  
But were those weeks fulfilled as predicted? They winds . [n[o Syria, Egypt, Macedon, and Thrace. Not  
, were. The command to restore and build Jerusalem to hjs posterity nor according to his dominion which he _  
! was given by Artaxerxes, kingof Persia. Seven weeks ^^ V5nm,„m hp nliu.w lin fnr nthRra :  
and sixty-two weeks to Messiah  

vk \  
He came and de- 
clared it fulfilled, when he entered his ministry. Mark  
1: 14, 15, when he was about 30 years of age. Luke  
3d.  
If Christ was correct in declaring the " time is ful- 
filled," when he entered his ministry, then one week 
more makes up the 70 weeks.  
The remaining question, then, to be settled is, did  
Christ continue his ministry for one week of years? 
Let us appeal to the chronology in the margin of our  
reference Bibles. In the margin opposite the 2d chap-
ter of Matthew, where Christ's birth is recorded, we 
have the following chronological note : 4th year before 
the account commonly called Jlnno Domini." Turn we  
l now to "Matt. 28th chapter, and in the margin we have  
A. D. 33. Now put A. D. 33 to B. C. 4, and we have  
37, as the age of Christ at his death. This fact is de- 
monstrated by astronomical calculation. Then such as  
| j was the last week of the 70, such were all of them—  
ii j weeks of years—490 years. Then such as were those  
I! cut off, such must be the nature of the remainder, and  
< the 1810 after Christ's death, are years. A. D. 33  
) \ Christ's death, 1810 added to it 1843. Then the times 
i 1 and seasons for the restoration of the kingdom to Israel 
* I expires in A. D. 1843. And 1 believe Christ will then  
come.  
"It is not for you to know the times and seasons  
which the Father hath put in his own power." So  
SAID the Saviour, and he SAID it because it was true.  
It was* not for those disciples to know. But he did no't  
mean to contradict himself where he had said to his  
| disciples who should live to see the signs of his com- 
i ing, " THEN KNOW that it is near, even at the  
door." But had he meant that it would never be 
known, he would have contradicted both himself and  
\ Daniel, who declares that at the time of the end, " the  
' wise shall understand." And Paul to the church, " Ye,  
brethren, are not in darkness, that that day should  
f overtake you as a thief." Christ, then, cannot come  
f till his humble watchful people know it. Reader, pre- 
t pare and watch. Amen.  
I A PARAPHRASE ON THE 11TH CHAPTER  
OF DANIEL.  
Instead of going into an argument on the 11 th of  
Daniel, I shall simply give a paraphrase of it, giving  
my own view of its import, by substituting such words  
as will convey my ideas, in the place of the text. 1  
shall give first the authorized text, and then the para- 
^ Verse 2. And now will I shew thee the truth. Behold,  
there shall stand up yet three kings in Persia; and the  
fourth shall be far richer than they all: and by fas  
strength through bis riches he shall stir up all against the 
realm of Grecia.  
Paraphrase.—And now I will show thee the truth:  
Behold, there shall yet reign in Persia three kings,  
after Cyrus, who is now reigning. Cambyces, bmer- 
dis, Darius Hystaspes; and Xerxes the Great the  
fourth lriug, shall be far richer than they all: and by  
his strength through his riches, he shall stir up all  against the realm of Grecia. .  
Verse 3. And a mighty king shall stand up, that shall  
rule with great dominion, and do according to his will.  
Paraphrase.—And Alexander the Great shall reign;  
that shall rule with great dominion; and do according  
' 10 It,If And when he shall stand up,his  kingdom shall  
be broken, and shall be divided toward the four winds of  
heaven: and not to his posterity, nor according to his  
dominion which he ruled : for his kingdom shall be plucked  
up, even for others besides those. _  

ruled. His kingdom shall be plucked up for others  
besides those.  
Verse 5. And the king of the south shall be strong, and  
one of his princes ; and he shall be strong above him, and 
have dominion ; his dominion shall be a great dominion.  
Paraphrase.—And the King of Egypt shall be strong,  
and one of Alexander^princes shall be strong above  
the King of Egypt, and have dominion: his dominion  
shall be a great dominion.  
Verse 6. And in the end of years they shall join them- 
selves together ; for the king's daughter of the south shall  
come to the king of the north to make an agreement: but  
she shall not retain the power of the arm ; neither shall he j  
stand, nor his arm : but she shall be given up, and they that  
brought her, and he that begat her, and he that strengthened 
her in these times. |  
Paraphrase.—And in the end of years, Egypt and  
Syria shall join themselves together. For Bernice,, 
the daughter of Ptolemy Philadelphus, the King of  
Egypt, shall come to Antiochus Theus, the King of ,  
Syria, to make an agreement or alliance by marriage: 
but she shall not succeed in retaining the favour of the  
King of Syria, and the power of the government: nei- 
ther°shall he stand or retain his strength afforded by 
his alliance with Egypt. But she shall be given up to  
Leodice, the wife who was put away to make room  
for her at the court of Syria.  
Verse 7. But out of a branch of her roots shall one stand  
up in his estate, which shall come with an army, and shall 
enter into the fortress of the king of the north, and shall  
deal against them, and shall prevail  
Paraphrase.—Ptolemy Euergetes, the brother of  
Bernice, who sprang from the same root with herself, 
no sooner succeeded to the throne of Egypt in place of 
his father, than he came into Syria with a great army,  
to avenge the injuries and murder of his sister Bernice; 
he prevailed against Syria so far as to take Syria Cili- 
cia, and the upper parts beyond the Euphrates, and  
almost all Asia. . .  
Verse 8. And shall also carry captives into hgypt their  
gods, with their princes, and with their precious vessels of  
silver and of gold ; and he shall continue more years than  
the king of the north.  
Paraph rase.—Ptolemy plundered the kingdom ot  
Seleucus and took 40,000 talents of silver and precious 
metals, and images of gods 2500. ,  
Verse 9. So the king of the south shall come into his  
kingdom, and shall return into his own land.  
Paraphrase.—So Ptolemy, King of Egypt, came,in to  
Syria, and then returned to his own land, beieucus  
Callinicus, » exile, fell from his horse and died; but  
Ptolemy lived about five years after his death.  
Verse10. But his sons shall be stirred up, and shall  
assemble a multitude of great forces: and one shall ccr- j  
tainly come, and overflow, and pass through ; then shall he 
return, and be stirred up, even to his fortress.  
Paraphrase.—But the sons of Seleucus Callnucus,  
were Seleucus and Antiochus. Seleucus Ceraunus, the  
eldest, succeeded his father, stirred up and assembled  
a multitude of forces, to recover his father's dominions;  
but being unable to keep his army in obedience, he  
was poisoned: and his brother Antiochus succeeded  
him, and came and retook Selucia, and recovered Syria  
And the  king of the south shall be moved with  
choler, and shall come forth and fight with him, even  with  
the king of the north : and he shall set forth a great multi- 
tude ; but the multitude shall be given into his hand.  
Paraphrase.—Ptolemy Philopater, who succeeded to  
the crown of Egypt after his father Euergetes' death.  
He was excited against Syria for the losses Egypt had  
sustained, and in a great battle near Raphia, Antiochus  
was conquered. There were slain of the army of An- 
tiochus, not fewer than 10,000 foot, and more than  
3000 horse. And Antiochus sent to Ptolemy to solicit  
oeacc.  

I


1 Verse 12. And when he hath taken away the multitude,  
his heart shall be lifted up; and he shall cast down many  
ten thousands : but he shall not be strengthened by it.  
Paraphrase.—Ptolemy was so lifted up with his suc- 
cesses, that instead of following up his victories, he  
gave himself up to debaucheries. Visiting his pro-
vinces, he came to Jerusalem and offered sacrifices,  
and was with difficulty restrained from entering the  
Holy of Holies. After his return to Egypt he com- 
menced a furious war on the Jews, and slew 40,000.  
But he was not strengthened by it.  
Verse 13. For the king of the north shall return, and  
shall set forth a multitude greater than the former, and  
shall certainly come after certain years with a great army  
and with much riches.  
Paraphrase.—After 14 years peace, a new war broke  
out between Egypt and Syria. Ptolemy died and left  
his throne to Ptolemy Epiphanes, a child of 4 or 5  
years of age. Antiochus conceiving this to be a  
favourable opportunity to take Egypt, raised a large 
army for the conquest of the infant king.  
Verse 14. And in those times there shall many stand up  
against the king of the south : also the robbers of thy  
people shall exalt themselves to establish the vision ; but 
they shall fall.  
Paraphrase.—Just at that juncture Egypt itself re- \  
belled, and Philip, King of Macedon, entered into a |  
league with Antiochus to divide Egypt between them. ,  
{Thus far I have followed, Bishop Nciotoris Dissertations.  
The historical facts which follow, are for the most part .  
from Eollin.)  
The Romans also at this point shall for the first time \<  
appear on the stage to take a prominent part in the  
affairs of the east, to establish the vision of the little 
horn, which waxed EXCEEDING GREAT,.in Dan.  
8th chapter: and which was to destroy the mighty and  
holy people. But Antiochus and Philip, through the  
interference of Rome, shall fall.  
Verse 15. So the king of the north shall come, and cast  
up a mount, and take the  most fenced cities ; and the arms  
of the south shall not withstand, neither his chosen people, 
neither shall there be any strength to withstand.  
Paraphrase.—Antiochus shall take some of the  
Egyptian provinces, and Egypt shall have no power to 
stand.  
Verse 16. But he that cometh against him shall do ac- 
cording to his own will,  and none shall stand before him ;  
and he shall stand in the glorious land, which by his hand 
shall be  consumed.  
Paraphrase.—But Rome,  who shall take the part of  
Egypt, shall come against Macedon, Syria, and even  
Palestine, and finally will consume the people of God  
and their land, according to both Moses and Daniel.  
Verse 17. He shall also set his face to enter with the  
strength of his whole kingdom, and upright ones with him ;  
thus shall he do ; and he shall give him the daughter of 
women, corrupting her 5 but she shall not stand on his  
side, neither be for him.  
Paraphrase.—Rome shall, from the first time it is  
introduced to the affairs of Egypt, set his face, as Newton  
renders the text, " to enter by force, the whole king- 
dom" of Alexander the Great. He will attempt Egypt,  
as the last of the provinces, and gain possession of it  
by the assistance of the Jews. Egypt shall give to  
Julius Caesar, the Roman consul and general who  
invades Egypt, the Qu6en of Egypt, whom he will 
corrupt, and by her have a son.  
Verse 18. After this shall he turn his face unto the isles,  
and shall take many ; but a prince for his own behalf shall 
cause the reproach offered by him to ccase; without his  
own reproach lie shall cause it to turn upon him.  
Paraphrase.—Then Julius Caesar will leave Egypt,  
and make war on the king of the Camerion Bospho- 
rus, where his victories will be most rapid, so that the  
history of them is thus recorded — " 1 came, I saw, 1 
conquered."  
Verse 19. Then he shall turn his face toward the fort  
of his own land : but lie shall stumble and fall, and not 
be found.  

Paraphrase.—Then Caesar shall turn his face to  
Rome, and be murdered in the senate chamber just as  
he is on the point of gaining imperial honors and 
power.  
Verse 20. Then shall stand up in his estate a raiser of  
taxes in the glory of the kingdom : but within few days  
he shall be destroyed, neither in anger, nor in battle.  
Paraphrase.—Then shall reign in his estate  Augustus  
Caesar, (Luke 2: 1.) a raiser of taxes, in the height of  
Rome's glory, just when it gains universal dominion.  
He shall die peaceably.  
Verse 21. And in his estate shall stand up avile person,  
to whom they shall not give the honour of the kingdom ;  
but he shall come in peaceably, and obtain the kingdom  
by flatterie's.  
Paraphrase.—Then shall reign in his estate Tiberius  
Caesar, (Luke 3: 1.) whom Augustus woflld have  
adopted as his successor, had he not vehemently re- 
fused it. But after the death of Augustus, he suc- 
ceeded by his characteristic dissimulation, peaceably,  
to the empire, after being repeatedly solicited by the  
servile senate. His character was so vile, that Seneca,  
the historian, Temarks concerning him, that he never  
was drunk but once; and that was from the time he  
first took to drinking until his death.  
Verse 22. And with the arms of a flood shall they be  
overflown from before him, and shall be broken ; yea, also 
the prince of the covenant.  
Paraphrase.—Bishop Newton's rendering is as fol- 
lows:—"And the arms of the overflower shall be  
overflown from before him and shall be broken." Ti- 
berius shall have a violent death. He was suffocated 
with pillows on the 16th of March; and the Prince 01  
the covenant was broken or crucified on the 3d of April 
following. So that while Herod the Tetrarch of Gal- 
lilee was at Jerusalem at the passover at which Christ  
was crucified, when he and his men of war set Christ  
at nought, he heard of the death of Tiberius.—See Jo-
sephus.  
Verse 23. And after the league made with him he shall  
work deceitfully : for he shall come up, and shall become  
strong with a small people.  
Paraphrase—And after the league between Rome,  
the king of fierce countenance, and the people of God, 
the Jews, as given 1 Macc. 8, and also by Josephus'  
Ant. B. 12, chap. x. He shall work deceitfully with  
the nations, by professing the most gentle and unas- 
suming disposition and flatter them into obedience and  
subjection, and from a little handful of people become  
the strongest monarchy on earth.  
Verse 24. He shall enter peaceably even upon the fattest  
places of the province; and he shall do that which his  
fathers have not done, nor his fathers' fathers ; he shall  
scatter among them the prey, and spoil, and riches ; yea,  
and he shall forecast his devices against the strong holds, 
even for a time.  
Paraphrase.—Rome will have left by will, many im- 
portant and strong kingdoms, and have them under her 
power without a blow or effort. And secure the good  
will of those they conquer by restoring the spoils of  
I war and seeming to let them have their liberty, and  
old governments.  
He shall forecast his devices or hold the seat of his  
empire in Rome, even for a prophetic time, or 360 
years.  
Verse 25. And he shall stir up his power and his cour- 
age against the king of the south with a great army ; and 
the king of the south shall be stirred up to battle with a 
very great and mighty army ; but he shall not stand : for  
they shall forecast devices against him.  
Paraphrase.—The date of the TIME, is, when Rome  
shall stir up his power and courage against Egypt, 
who shall espouse the interests of Mark Antony the 
Roman general, and paramour of Cleopatra, Queen of 
Ecrypt. And Egypt shall be stirred up to battle with 
a very great and°mighty army at the battle of Actium.  
But Egypt shall be conquered and fall into the hand 
of the Romans. For Cleopatra will forsake Antony  
in the battle, and he follow her, and the army go over 
to the interests of Caesar.  

Verse 26. Yea; they that "feed of the portion of his meat  
shall destroy him, and his army shall overflow : and many 
shalHall down slain.  
Paraphrase.—The Egyptian army after the shameful  
flight both of Cleopatra and Antony, both by  sea and  
land, shall go over and join the Romans, and many of  
them will be destroyed in battle.  
Verse 27. And both these kings' hearts shall be to do  
mischief, and they shall speak lies at one table ; but it shall 
not prosper: for yet the end shall be at the time appointed.  
Paraphrase.—Both Caesar and the Queen of Egypt  
shall be determined to do mischief. Caesar will lay a  
snare to take Cleopatra; and profess to treat her with 
great kindness; and she in turn shall profess a great  
regard for him; but to prevent his carrying out his pur-
poses, she shall poison herself by the bite of an asp,  
and thus escape his hand.  
T erse 28. Then shall he return into his land with great  
riches ; and his heart shall be against the holy covenant;  
and he shall do exploits, and return to his own land.  
Paraphrase.—Then Caesarr shall return to Rome con- 
queror of the world. And the next great exploit in  
which Rome will engage, will be the death of Christ,  
the persecution under Nero, and the destruction of Je-
rusalem. He shall destroy the Holy City and return 
again to Rome in triumph.  
Verse 29. At the time appointed he shall return, and  
come toward the south ; but it shall not be as the former,  
or as the latter.  
Paraphrase.—At the time appointed in the 21th  
verse, 360 years from the battle of Actium, which was  
in the autumn of 31 B.C., Rome shall return toward Jeru-
salem and Egypt, by a land route; and plant the seat 
of the empire at Constantinople. It shall not be as 
when Caesar went into Egypt to conquer it, nor as  
when Titus went to Jerusalem and destroyed it. But 
it shall be Rome's ruin.  
The seat of empire was founded at Constantinople  
in A. D. 329, Nov. 25; 360 years from the conquest 
of Egypt by Rome.  
, Verse 30. For the ships of Chittim shall come against 
, him : therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and have  
j indignation against the holy covenant: so shall he do ; he  
shall even return, and have intelligence with them  that for- 
1 sake the holy covenant.  
I Paraphrase.—After the seat of empire is removed  
I to Constantinople, and Rome vacated, the empire will  
be conquered by the barbarians. And Genseric, the  
Vandal king, will come against Rome with a lar^e  
naval force, take the city, and for 14 days and nights  
give it up to the pillage of his soldiers. Therefore the 
Roman emperor of the east will take measures to give  
, [the church over into the hands of the papal power, for  
the purpose of facilitating the overthrow of the Arian  
governments of the west.  
Verse 31. And arms shall stand on his part, and they  
shall pollute the sanctuary of strength, and shall take away  
the daily sacrifice, and they shall place the abomination 
that niaketh desolate.  
Paraphrase.—The imperial government will still  
exist in splendour in the east; and the barbarians of  
the west will pollute the old capital of the empire by  
robbing it of its treasures and glory, carrying off all  
the sp endid spoils of the nations who have been con- 
quered by Rome, and stored in the pantheon. And shall  
take away the daily abomination, paganism, and shall  
place the abomination that maketh desolate, or Catho-
licism Coristantine first abolished paganism; it was  
restored under the barbarians, and continued until their  
conversion to Christianity. Clovis, king of France,  
was converted to the faith A.D. 496, and embraced the  
oathohe faith, and obtained the title of" Most Christian 
king, and "eldest son of the church." The other 
kings were converted soon after—some to the Catholic,  
some to the Arian faith. The Ostrogoths of Rome era-
j the Anan faith, as also the Vandals of Africa, 
in connection with this Arian government, the old Ro- 
man government still retained a hold in Rome under 
the consular dignity and power. Clovis, from the time  
ot his conversion, devoted his time and energies to the  
extension of the Catholic faith; and carried forward  

his wars to that end. Ilis last greaFbat  
in the conquest of the Visgoths and their subjection to 
the faith in 508, and on his return home, he was met  
at the city of Tours, by the embassadors of Anastatius,  
emperor of Constantinople, conferring on Clovis the  
insignia and titles of consul of Rome and patrician. In  
the same year Arthur, king of the Britons, was crown-
ed by a Catholic bishop; so that a Catholic king of the  
west, for the first time, became the supreme Roman  
power in 508, A. D. This was the supremacy of Catho- 
lics, not of popery; the supremacy of the pope was 538.  
Verse 32. And such as do wickedly against the covenant  
shall be corrupt by flatteries: but the people that do know 
their God shall be strong, and do exploits.  
Paraphrase.—Such as neglect God's word and put  
confidence in man, shall the Catholic church corrupt  
by flatteries. But the true believers will resist these 
corruptions.  
Verse 33. And they that understand among the people  
shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by the sword, and 
by flame, by captivity, and by spoil, many days.  
Paraphrase.—The true people of God will be faith- 
ful in testifying the true gospel; but popery will wage  
a war of extermination against the saints, and persecute  
thousands to death.  
Verse 34. Now when they shall fall, they shall beholpen  
with a little help: but many shall cleave to them with 
flatteries.  
Paraphrase.—During this period of darkness and  
persecution, the Reformation under Luther will dawn, 
and the persecutions in some measure subside; but the 
reformed church will soon be again corrupted by wicked  
and designing men.  
Verse 35. And some of them of understanding shall fall,  
to try them, and to purge, and to make them white, even 
to the time of the end: because it is yet for a time ap-
pointed.  
Paraphrase.—Although persecutions will abate at  
that time, the papal power will not be broken entirely,  
but persecution will be permitted to continue for the  
purpose of keeping designing men out of it, to the time  
of the end or fall of the papal government. Because  
the period of its fall is yet for a time appointed, viz: the  
time, times, and a half, which shall not end with the  
Reformation.  
Verse 36. And the king shall do according to his will;  
and he shall exalt himself, and magnify himself above every  
god, and shall speak marvellous things against the God of  
gods, and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished:  
for that that is determined shall be done.  
Paraphrase Before the time of the end comes,  
and subsequently to the reformation, a government en- 
tirely different from any other which ever existed will  
exalt itself above all government, and above God him-
self. And this government shall speak marvqllou3  
things against the God of Gods, just as the Atheistical  
government of France, which began in 1789, did.  
Verse 37. Neither shall he regard the God of his fathers,  
nor the desire of women, nor regard any god: for he shall 
magnify, himself above all.  
Paraphrase.—He shall not regard the papal religion  
which his fathers embraced, but utterly abolish it. He  
shall abolish the marriage vow, and introduce a system  
of universal concubinage, and deny the existence of a 
supreme being.  
Verse 38. But in his estate shall he honour the God of  
forces: and a god whom his fathers knew not shall he ho- 
nour with gold, and silver, and with precious stones, and 
pleasant things.  
Paraphrase.—He shall honour the God of forces, or  
liberty and the country, and deny the existence of a 
supreme being. Another change will take place in his  
religious system, and he will worship the Goddess of 
Reason, and confer all the honours of the nation on a 
vile woman, the. object of their worship.  
Verse 39. Thus shall he do in the most strong holds  
with a strange god, whom he shall acknowledge and in- 
* crease with glory: and he shall cause them to rule over  
many, and shall divide the land for gain.


Paraphrase.—Thus shall he do in most of the cities  
of France, with a strange God, whom he shall acknow- 
ledge and increase with glory; and he shall cause them  
to rule over many and divide the land for gain.  
Verse 40. And at the time, of the end shall the king of  
the south push at him: and the king of the north shall  
come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with  
horsemen, and with many ships ; and he  shall enter into  
the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.  
Paraphrase.—And at the time of the fall of the papal  
government, called in verse 35th " the time of the end,"  
until which, some of them of understanding shall fall,  
the government of Egypt shall push at the French re- 
volutionary government, in the person of Napoleon  
Buonaparte, their commander-in-chief. He sailed from  
France in May 1799, and landed in Egypt July 1st, 
and was resisted by the whole strength of Egypt, in the 
battle of the Pyramids. He was left master of the 
field. It was, on the part of Egypt, a feeble push. But 
Syria came against him like a whirlwind. With modern  
chariots, field-pieces, horsemen, a large body of which  
were in the mountains without the city of Acre, and  
a British and Turkish fleet. Buonaparte left Egypt in 
the spring of A799, with an army of 10,000 men, march- 
ed through Palestine to St. Jean de Acre, in Syria,  
where he met resistance, and was finally defeated and  
driven back by the means above specified. He entered  
the countries overflowed and passed over.  
Verse 41. He shall enter also into the glorious land, and  
many countries shall be overthrown: but these shall escape 
out of his hand, even Edom, and Moab, and the chief of  
the children of Ammon.  
Paraphrase.—Buonaparte shall stand in Palestine,  
take the city of Jaffa, and put several hundred to death.  
Edom, Moab, and the chief ofthe children of Ammon, by 
his defeat in Syria, will escape his power.  
Verses 42, 43. He shall stretch forth his hand also upon  
the countries: and the land of Egypt shall not escape. But  
he shall have power over the treasures of gold and of silver, 
and over all the precious things of Egypt: and the Lybians  
and the Ethiopians shall be at his steps.  
Paraphrase.—He will retain his power in E°ypt,  
and have all its treasures at the disposal of his army  
of Savans, who enriched themselves, their general, and 
their country, by the spoils of Egypt. He will pass the 
borders of Lybia and Ethiopia, but shall not conquer 
them.  
Verse 44. But tidings out of the east and out of the  
north shall trouble him: therefore he shall go forth with 
great fury to destroy, and utterly to make away many.  
Paraphrase.—After his return from Syria, in his  
negotiation with Smith, the British admiral, he shall 
receive a file of newspapers, giving him the first ac- 
count of French affairs on the Continent, which he shall  
receive after his departure from Europe. He shall be 
so moved that he will desert his Egyptian army, and  
return with two small frigates to France, where he will  
commence his  career of conquest and blood. And mil- 
lions of lives will be sacrificed at the shrine of his vain  
ambition. Europe was desolated by him.  
Verse 45. And he shall plant the tabernacles of his  
palace between the seas in the glorious holy mountain :  
yet he shall come to his end, and none shall help him.  
Paraphrase.—He will have a palace, but he will  
dwell in tabernacles or tents, and plant those imperial  
tents m every country on the continent of Europe and  
witlun the circle of the great inland seas, which sur-
round Europe except Turkey. «/„ the Mountain of  
/Might of Holiness." The land where more martyrs 
have bled and died than in all other countries. Yet  
after becoming the conqueror of Europe and the terror  
ot the world ; after having gained the summit of human 
power and glory, he shall come to his end on a lonely  
isle, in the midst of the Atlantic, "AND NONF 
fjHALL HELP HIM." ] .  

PARAPHRASE ON DANIEL 12TH CHAPTER.  
[Continued from page 7.]  
Ferscs 1,2. And at that time shall Michael stand up,  
the great prince which standeth for the children of thy 
people ; and there shall be a time of trouble, such as never 
was since there was a nation even to that same time : and 
at that time thy people shall be delivered, every one that  
shall be found written in the book.  
2. And many of them that sleep in the dust ofthe earth  
shall awake, some to everlasting life, and some to shame 
and everlasting contempt.  
Paraphrase—And at the same time named in the  
40th verse of chapter 11th, viz.: »the time ofthe end,"  
which is a period, beginning in 1798, and continuing  
tp the end itself; shall Jesus Christ begin his reign :  
and there will be a time of trouble On account of °the 
pouring out the seven last plagues in which is filled 
up the wrath of God. And at that time Daniel's peo- 
ple, the Jews, shall be delivered from their dispersion  
and bondage, and even from death, "every one that  
shall be found written in the book," and none others. 
It is not the whole Jewish race, even among the living,  
that will be delivered then. " And many" Jews who  
" sleep in the dust of the earth will awake," not all of  
them then. For some will come forth to everlasting  
life, at the first resurrection: "some to shame and  
everlasting ..contempt," at the last resurrection. So  
will God gather all his true Israel then. It is the  
same deliverance spoken of in Ezek. 37th chapter.  
Verse 3. And they that be wise shall shine as the bright- 
ness of the firmament; and they that turn many to right- 
eousness, as the stars, for ever and ever.  
Paraphrase—They that are wise, the true children  
of God, and they tljat turn many to righteousness, shall 
shine in glory as the Saviour did, on the Mount of  
Transfiguration, " FOR EVER AND EVER."  
" Oh glorious hour, O blest abode,  
I shall be near anil like my God,  
And sin and flesh no more control,  
The sacred pleasures of the soul."  
Verse 4. But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and  
seal the book, even to the time of the end : many shall run 
to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased.  
Paraphrase—But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words,  
and seal the book, until the overthrow of Popery; then 
many will turn to and fro through the book, and light  
will gradually increase until the matter is understood.  
Verses 5, 6. Then I, Daniel, looked, and, behold, there  
stood other two, the one on this side of the bank of the  
river, and the  other on that side of the bank of the river.  
6. And one said to the man clothed in linen, which was  
upon the waters of the river, How long shall it be to the  
end of these wonders ?  
Paraphrase—One said to the man clothed in linen,  
How long shall it be to the reign of Christ, the gather- 
ing of the saints, and resurrection of the just?  
Verse 7. And I heard the man clothed in linen, which  
was upon the waters of the river, when he held up his 
right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by  
him that Iiveth forever and ever, that it shall be for a time,  
i times, and a half; and when he shall have accomplished  
to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things 
shall be finished.  
Paraphrase—And I heard the answer of the man  
clothed in linen, given under the sanction of a most  
solemn oath. " That it shall be for a time, times, and 
a half;" until the 1260 years of papal authority is out. 
And then a period more to complete the 2520 years 
scattering of the power of the holy people, all these  
j things will be finished. Those 2520  years go on 45  
years after the end of the 1260.  
Ftrses 8, 9. And I heard, but 1 understood not: then  
said I, O my Lord, what shall be the end of these things ?  
9. And he said, Go thy way, Daniel; for the words are  
closed up and sealed till the time of the end.  

I Paraphrase.—I heard his answer, but I did not nn- 
( derstand its meaning. Then I said, O my Lord, what  
I shall happen in that terminating period, " when he  
shall have accomplished to scatter the power of the  
holy people ?" And he told me, go thy way, Daniel; 
the words are closed and sealed until the fall of popery, 
the end of the 1260 years; after that the seal will be  
broken.  
Verse 10. Many shall be purified, and made white, and  
tried ; but  the wicked shall  do wickedly : and none ofthe  
wicked shall understand ; but the wise shall understand.  
Paraphrase.—When the time of the end comes,  
rnanv shall be converted, trreat revivals of rplicri™  
will prevail; but wickedness corresponding with this 
remarkable grace will prevail. None of those who 
scoff at God's word, and trust in man's wisdom, shall 
understand; but the wise shall understand. Those 
who make God's word the rule of their faith, and bow  
implicitly to it, regardless of men's opinions, will have 
the light, when " the time of the end " comes.  
Verse 11. And from the time that the daily sacrifice shall  
be taken away, and the abomination that maketh desolate  
set up, there shall be a thousand two hundred and ninety 
days.  
Paraphrase.—From the time the " Mystery of ini- 
quity,," (2 Thess. 2,) " the daily," (Dan. 11 : 31) the  
pagan abomination, shall be taken away, and " that  
man of sin," "that wicked," (2 Thess. 2,) the abomi- 
V nation that maketh desolate set up, (see paraphrase on  
11th ch., v. 31,) there shall be 1290 years. That  
abomination which maketh desolate, was set up or 
gained supremacy in Rome, in 508. Then 1290 years  
comes to 1798, and popery fell.  
Verse 12. Blessed is he that waiteth, and cometh to the  
thousand three hundred and five and thirty  days.  
Paraphrase.—Blessed is he that gets all ready and  
waits and comes to the 1335 years from the setting up  
of the abomination which maketh desolate. But none  
can wait, who are not ready.  
Verse 13. But go thou thy way till the end be : for thou  
shalt rest, and stand in thy lot at the end of the days.  
Paraphrase.—You will rest in death, Daniel, but  
stand up in the resurrection for your inheritance in the 
promised possession at the end of the 1335 years, which  
begin at the same point as the 1290, in 508, and in  
1843.  
I have given what I conceive to be the simple mean- 
ing of the 11th and 12th chapters of Daniel, not so  
| much for the benefit of the quibbler, as for the edifica- 
, , j tion of the humble followers of Christ, and sincere  
I inquirers after the truth. I have merely thrown out as  
I suggestions, an outline, for the reader to fill up. The  
history is principally from Rollin, Gibbon, Scott's  
French Revolution and Life of Napoleon, with some  
other authors. Reader, ponder the matter well—the  
Lord is at the door.  
JOM'S VISIONS.  
THE PROPHETIC SYMBOLS.  
wilhf grCalr0f! dra?on of Revelation, 12th chapter, with seven heads and ten horns, is the great presiding  
Eh 1r thrC kingd°mS Wh0 have crushed the  
jenurch of God. It stood before the church when Christ  
was born. Rev. 12: 2_5. Ps. 2 : 8, 9. Rev. 19 :15.  
• bee no' Matlth' 2 : 1C- The seven have  
rnl. T8 ,^ as the sevcn forms of Roman govern- 
ment. I would suggest a different view. The Drawn,  
, LPVPof'!iUo nWer l)e^nningwith the seven times.  
head a ' 2 Chr,- 33 : 11; 077 1}' C- The 1st  
Ba L'l oTl * Babylon; 2d head, CHALDEA, in  
PPD • 3T1d,h?d' Media' in Babylon; 4th head, 
J ERSIA ,u Babylon; 5th head, GRECIA, in Babylon;  
' hf:ad'and whlch existed when John wrote, ROME  
mperial, in Babylon Mystery. The first five had fallen;  
ne other was then in existence.. One had not come;  
line kingly government of Rome, on the extinction of  
empn-e in 476 When it came, it endured a short  

time, from 476 to 538, When it was subverted by the  
Greeks. Rev. 17 : 10. The kingly government of  
Rome was the seventh head. The church was in bon- 
dage under the royal powers, or the dragon, from 677  
B. C. to 538 A. D., 1215 years. Then the dragon  
gave his power, seat, and great authority to the beast.  
Popery followed the royal power of Rome. The Greek  
emperor conquered Rome and gave it to the pope, with 
power over " all the holy churches," from 533 to 538. 
The beast has all the attributes and powers of the dra-
gon. He has seven heads and ten horns, and a face  
like a. lion, feet like a bear, body like a leopard. Rev.  
13. All the characteristics of Daniel's beasts are  
found in this beast. He is the 8th head of the great  
system of abomination. Power was given to him to  
continue 42 months. Beginning in 538, when the  
beast was seated in Rome, he continued to 1798, when 
Rome fell by the French, the pope was carried into  
captivity, and the Roman republic proclaimed. Then 
he was not, and yet he is; his deadly wound is healed,  
and all the  world wonders after the beast.  
Seven heads of the dragon—1. Assyria; 2. Chaldea;  
3. Media; 4. Persia; 5. Greece; 6. Rome imperial; 
7. Rome kingly, Heruli and Ostrogoths. The 8th head 
is the beast. Then 45 years after the fall of popery,  
for the civil powers to govern the church, and the dra- 
gon will be cast out, and salvation and the kingdom 
of our God and the power of his Christ will come.  
Rev. 12:10. This will give the dragon 1260 years;  
1215 before and 45 after the beast; and the beast 42  
months or 1260 years, making the bondage of tho 
church 2520 years, ending in 1843.  
THE TWO HORNED BEAST FROM THE EARTH.  
" And I beheld another beast coming out of the earth,  
and he had  two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a  
dragon. And he exerciseth all the power of the first  
beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which 
dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly  
wound was healed." Rev. 13 : 11, 12.  
This evidently refers to the infidel French govern- 
ment under Buonaparte, which came up out of the  
earth [the ten kingdoms,] and had two horns [France  
and Italy.] By comparing the history of Buonaparte  
with this prophecy there will be seen a most striking  
fulfilment.  
THE THREE WOE TRUMPETS.  
The seven trumpets cover part of the time marked  
in Daniel. After the*four had been sounded, an angel  
flying through the midst of heaven said, with a loud 
voice, " WOE! WOE!! WOE!!!  to the inhabiters  
of the earth, by reason of the other voices of the tram- 
pet of the three angels which are yet to sound." Rev.  
8; 13.  
And the  fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall  
from heaven to the earth, and to him was given the 
key ofthe bottomless pit. And there came out locusts  
upon the earth. And the shape of the locusts were  
like horses prepared for battle. . And their power was 
to hurt men five months, [150 prophetic days.] See  
Rev. 9 : 1—11. This star was undoubtedly the Ara- 
bian imposter Mahomet: a fallen star being a false 
teacher.  
FIFTH TRUMPET.—1299 to 1449.  
And they, (the locusts,) had a king over them, whose  
name is Destroyer.  
The fifth trumpet commenced July 27, 1299, when  
Othman, the founder of the Turkish empire, made his 
first attack on the Greeks. When the fifth angel ceased,  
it was said, " One woe is past, and behold there come  
two woes more hereafter."  
" And the sixth angel sounded, and I heard a voice  
saying to the sixth angel, Loose the four angels which  
are bound at the great river Euphrates. And the four 
angels were loosed which were prepared for an hour  
and a day and a month and a year to slay the third  
part of men," [or to blot out from among the nations  
the Greek division of the Roman empire.]  
SIXTH TRUMPET 1449 to 1840.


Out of their Mouths issued Fire.  
Fire-arms were first used on horseback by the Turks  
at this period. [A well-known historical fact.]  
The sixth trumpet commenced July 27, 1449, when  
the 150 years ended, and continued,.  
1 One day, that is, 1 prophetic day, 1 year.  
One month, 30 prophetic days, 30 years.  
1 year 12 months, 360 " " 360  "  
And one hour, l-24th of a prophetic day, 15 days.  
This period ended August 11, 1810, WHEN THE OT- 
TOMAN SUPREMACY CEASED. Thus the Lord has most  
plainly Showed us that wre are living in the days of  
the voice of the seventh angel!  
SEVENTH TRUMPET.  
Comes Quickly.  
And the seventh angel sounded, and there wert  
voices in heaven saying: "The kingdoms of thi;  
world are become THE KINGDOM of our Lord, am 
of his Christ; and he shall reign forever and ever."  
This sound of the last trump, at which the dead wil  
rise, (1 Cor. 15:52,)  and BE JUDGED, (Rev. 11:18  
we now expect to hear. Reader, slight not the Lord'  
warnings. Improve the present moment. PREPAR3 
TO MEET THY GOD.  
THE WOE TRUMPETS. *  
Revelation, 9th Chapter.  
THE SEVEN TRUMPETS—The revelator, unlike Da-)  
niel, lived when three of the great anti-Christian mo- 
narchies of the world had passed by, and the fourth was  
in the height of its glory. He, of course, only had to 
look forward, as a prophet, to the fall of that which yet. 
remained, the Roman empire. The instrumentalities  
by which that government was to be brought to ruin, 
were predicted under -the symbols of the sounding of  
seven trumpets. The first four of the trumpets seem  
to have been appropriated to the overthrow of the west- 
ern empire, by the hordes of barbarians who overran  
and conquered Europe. The Turks and Saracens were 
reserved as the agents of Providence, by which the 
eastern empire was to fall. The seventh trumpet sig-
nalizes the overthrow of Babylon the great, when, like 
a mighty mill-stone, she shall sink in the deep to rise 
no more at all.  
The sounding of the fifth and sixth trumpets are  
those we shall particularly  notice. Rev. 9th chapter.  
"And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall  
from heaven unto the earth; and to him was given the  
key of the bottomless pit. And he opened the bottom- 
less pit; and there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the  
smoke of a great furnace; and the sun and the air were 
darkened by reason of the smoke of the pit. And there 
came locusts out of the smoke of the  earth; and unto  
them was given power, ;as the scorpions of the earth 
have power. And it was commanded that they should  
not hurt the grass of the earth, neither any green thing, 
neither any tree; but only those men which have not  
the seal of God in their foreheads. And to them it was  
given that they should not kill them,  b«t that they  
should be tormented FIVE MONTHS."  
There is a very general agreement at the present  
day, among prophetic expositors, that the subject of  
this prophecy is Mahommedism. I shall not, therefore,  
enter into a particular explanation of the various figures 
used in the prophecy, but take it for granted that those 
who thus apply it are correct, and confine myself prin- 
cipally to the examination of the prophetic periods  
mentioned in the chapter, and endeavour to show their  
fulfilment. If this can be done, it is in itself the strong-
est evidence that a righ't application is made of the  
prophecy, when it is applied to Mahommedism.  
The first prophetic period which occurs in the chap- 
ter, is in the 5th verse; " that they should be tormented 
Jive months." A prophetic month consists of 30 days,  
as in Rev. 13, and each day represents a year. Five  

months will amount to 150 years. During 150 years  
the locusts (or warlike armies of horsemen,) which 
came out of the smoke, (the Mahommedan errors,) for  
i the propagation of his religion, were to torment a cer- 
tain nation of men. But what nation1? And when  
were they to begin the work ? These are questions to 
be settled.  
I shall endeavour to determine the first question by  
settling the second. When, then, were the Mahomme- 
dan armies to commence their torment on a certain  
people for 150 years ?  
Verse 10, the period is again referred to, " And their  
power was to hurt men five months." The 11th verse 
pointed out the time when those months were to com- 
mence. "And they had a king over them, which is 
the angel of the bottomless pit, whose name in the He-
brew tongue is Abaddon, (that is, a destroyer,) but in  
the Greek tongue he hath his name Apollyon," (de- 
stroyer.)  
The beginning of the five months, then, is when  
these armies have ONE king over them, of the charac-
ter above described.  
After the death of Mahomet, his followers were  
divided into various factions, under several leaders. In  
this state they continued until the close of the 13th 
century. They were then united under one govern- 
ment, under Othman, the founder of the Ottoman or 
Turkish empire. The founder of the goverment, as  
well as the government itself, was truly described when 
called  Abaddon, or Apollyon, a destroyer.  
But this king was to be the angel, or chief minister,  
of the bottomless pit, or of the religion which arose  
from thence under Mahomet. 'Such was Othman;  and  
such have been his successors. Like the Pope of Rome,  
the Turkish Sultan has exercised supreme power, both 
civil and ecclesiastical, throughout his dominions. This  
empire was established A. D. 1299. " And on the 27th  
day of July, 1299, Othman first invaded the territory  
of Nicomedia," to commence his attack on the Greek  
empire. (See Gibbon's History of the Decline and Fall  
of the Roman Empire.)  
Beginning in 1299, the 150 years would end A. D.  
1449. In that year, Palealogus, the Greek emperor,  
died, and left no children to succeed him in the throne;  
and his brother, Constantine Deacozes, was to succeed 
him. But, from some cause or other, although it was a  
time of peace, before he dared to ascend his brother's 
throne, he sent ambassadors to Amurath, the Turkish 
Sultan, to ask his permission; and having obtained it, 
he assumed the government of the empire. Thus, for 
150 years, from 1299 to 1449, although the two powers 
were almost continually engaged in broils and conten- 
tions, yet the Turks could not prevail against the  
Greeks. "Their power was to torment," by sudden 
excursions. Thus far they might go, but no farther.  
The 150 years ended, and with it virtually ended the  
Greek empire; because from that time the Greek em- 
peror only reigned by permission of his deadly foe.  
Thus closed the sounding of the fifth angel, and thus 
ended the first woe. The men, then, which they were 
to torment, were the Greeks.  
Sounding of the Sixth Angel. "  
Verses 12—15. " One woe is past, and behold there  
j comc two woes more hereafter. And the sixth angel  
sounded, and I heard a voice from the four horns of the 
golden altar which is before God, saying to the sixth 
angel which had the trumpet, loose the four angels  
which are bound in the great river Euphrates. And  
the four angels were loosed, which were prepared for  
an hour, and a day, and a month, and a year, to slay 
the third part of men."  
One woe ended with  the 5 months or 150 years, and  
two more were to succeed it. The second woe began 
when the sixth angel began to sound. The same power  
which had restrained the Ottomans to the work of tor- 
menting  men five months, on the sounding of the sixth  
angel, commanded that restraint to be taken off. " Loose 
the four angels which are boxtnd in the great river  

'uphrates. And the four angels were loosed."  
% angels" are the four principal nations of  
.vhiCh the Ottoman empire is composed, located in the  
neighbourhood of the Euphrates. They had hitherto  
been confined to the work of tormenting the Greeks, 
without politically putting them to death. But from  
this time they were to slay, politically kill, that nation.  
Accordingly, when the 150 years ended, the Turks  
were loosed, and the independence of the Greeks ceas- 
ed, by their voluntarily acknowledging that they only 
existed politically by the permission of the Turkish  
Sultan.  
But the duration of their dominion over the Greek  
empire is limited to " an hour," 15 days; " and a day,"  
one year; " and a month," 30 years; " and a year," 
360 years; the whole amounting to 391 years and 15 
days. Both periods, the 150 years, and 391 years and  
15 days, are 541 years and 15 days. Tiie first period 
was fulfilled, and the four angels were loosed. Hence,  
we may expect that when the second period closes, 
with it will close the reign of the Ottomans in Con- 
stantinople. If the time for commencing the periods  
was at the time of the first onset of the Ottomans upon  
the Greeks, July 27th, 1299, THEN THE WHOLE PERIOD  
WILL END IN AUGUST, 1840.  
Accomplishment of the foregoing calculations.  
When the above was written, the result was in fu- 
turity, and was purely a matter of calculation; but  
now, however, the time is passed, and it is proper that  
•we should inquire whether the event has answered the  
calculations.  
1. HAS, THEN, THE OTTOMAN SUPREMACY IN CON- 
STANTINOPLE BEEN BROKEN, OR HAS IT BEEN LOST ?  
1st Testimony. The London Morning Herald, after  
the capture of St. Jean d'Acre, speaking of the state  
of things in the Ottoman empire, says; " We (the  
allies) have conquered St. Jean d'Acre. We have dis-
sipated into thin air the prestige that till lately invested  
as with a halo the name of Mehemet Ali. We have,  
in all probability, destroyed forever the power of that 
hitherto successful ruler. But have we done aught to  
restore strength to the Ottoman empire? WE FEAR NOT.  
WE FEAR THAT THE SULTAN HAS BEEN REDUCED TO THE  
RANK OF A PUPPET; AND THAT THE SOURCES Of.' THE j  
TURKISH EMPIRE'S STRENGTH are ENTIRELY DESTROY- 
ED."  
" If the supremacy of the Sultan is hereafter to be  
maintained in Egypt, it must be maintained, we fear,  
by the unceasing intervention of England and Russia."  
What the London Morning Herald of Nov., 1840,  
feared, has since been realized. The Sultan has been  
entirely, in all the great questions which have come  
up, under the dictation of the christian kingdoms of  
lijurope: and on them he has been dependent for sup- 
port against Mehemet.  
2d Testimony. The following is from Rev. Mr.  
Goodell, missionary of the American Board at Cen- 
1 stantinople, addressed to the Board, and by them pub- 
Ushedm the Missionary Herald, for April, 1841, page  
"The power of Is^mism is broken forever; and  
were is no concealing the fact, even from themselves.  
I i hey exist now by mere sufferance. And though  
there is a mighty effort made by the christian govern- 
ments to sustain them, yet at every step they sink  
ower and lower with fearful velocity. And though  
uiere is a great  endeavour made  to graft the institutions  
ot civilized and christian countries upon the decayed  
punk, yet the very root itself is fast wasting away by 
f JJe venom  of its own poison. How wonderful it is,  
tnat, when all Christendom combined  together to check  
tne progress of Mohammedan power, it waxed exceed-
lnpy great in spite of every opposition; and now, 
when all the mighty potentates of Christian Europe,  
who feel fully competent to settle all the quarrels, and  
grange all the affairs of the Whole world, are leagued  
tV^ether for its protection and defence, down it comes,  
'> spite of all their fostering care."  

This, let it be remembered, is the clear, positive tes- 
timony of an eye-witness, a man who is on the "spot,  
and who knows whereof he affirms. For truth and 
veracity, he has the confidence of the American Board 
of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, and they, in  
their official organ, have given publicity to the  testi- 
mony. Reader, please review this witness's testimo-
ny, and mark its point and strength.  
3d Testimony. The following is an extract from a  
London paper; the article is headed, " The Waning  
of the Ottoman Empire-." It has been copied into  
most of the leading journals of this country, without  
one word of dissent on the part of any. Thus the  
whole editorial corps in this country have given it  
their official  sanction.  
The object of the writer is to show the relative con- 
dition of the Turkish and Christian powers of Europe.  
In former times the Turkish empire exceeded in power  
every kingdom in Europe. But the scene is changed; 
the Turks are weakened and the Christian nations  
strengthened. The article concludes thus : " The day  
thzy (the nations of Europe) counted their numbers, 
was to be the last of Constantinople; AND THAT DAY HAS 
EVERYWHERE COME."  
So, according to all our leading periodicals, the last  
of Constantinople has come.  
4th Testimony. Dr. Bond, editor of the Christian  
Advocate and Journal, N. York, in one of the May(1841)  
numbers of that paper, concludes his account of* East- 
ern  affairs thus: " The Mohammedan nations are effectu- 
ally in the hands and at the mercy of the Christian go- 
vernments!"  
This is granting all we ask. Turkish supremacy is  
gone, and is in the hands of Christian powers. With  
one more, 1 shall close the testimony on this point.  
5th Testimony.—Rev. Mr. Balch, of Providence, R.  
I., in an attack on Mr. Miller, for saying the Ottoman  
empire fell in 1840, says, " How can an honest man  
have the hardihood to stand up before an intelligent 
audience, and make such an assertion, when the most  
authentic version of the change of the Ottoman empire  
is, that it has not been on a better foundation in fifty 
years; for it is now reorganised by the European king-
doms, and is honourably treated as such."  
Christian Europe REORGANISED the government!! And  
treats it honourably as their creature! This is the 
strongest argument ever attempted against the view 
above given.  
The empire now exists, by sufferance of Europe, as  
the Greek empire did by the sufferance of the Turks 
from 1149 to 1453.  
2d. WHEN DID THE OTTOMAN INDEPENDENCE DE- 
PART 1  
Perhaps it maybe said in reply, "it has been decay- 
ing for years." True, it has. But if its power "is 
broken for ever, as Mr. Goodell declares, there must 
have been a point when it was broken. If it is dead,  
there was a moment when it ceased to be alive, and  
became dead. When was that crisis i To answer  
this question understanding^ and clearly, it  will be  
necessary to take a view of the eastern difficulty, and  
the means adopted for its settlement.  
For some years Mehemet Ali, Pacha of Egypt, had  
manifested a disposition to throw off  the Turkish yoke  
and maintain an independent government. He gradu- 
ally increased in power and extended his conquests,  
wresting one province after another from the Sultan,  
adding it to his own dominions. In 1839, a war broke 
out between Mehemet and the Sultan, in which the 
Sultan's army was cut up, and his fleet taken by Me-
hemet, and carried to Egypt, which he refused to sur- 
render and return to the Sultan; threatening to burn it, 
if an attempt should be made to take it.  
The following extracts from the translation of an  
official document, which appeared in the " Moniteur  
Ottoman," of Aug. 22, 1840, will show the turn of the  
affair at this juncture.  
" Subsequent to the occurrence of the disputes  
alluded to, and after the reverses experienced, as  
known to all the world, the ambassadors of the great  
owers at Constantinople, in a collective official note,


declared, that their governments were unanimously 
agreed upon taking measures to arrange said differ-'  
ences, and the sublime Porte, with a view of putting 
a stop to the effusion of Musselman blood, ana to the ; 
various evils which would arise from a renewal of hos- •  
tilities, accepted the intervention of the great powers. |  
His Excellency, Shekih Effendi, the Bey likgis, was  
therefore despatched as plenipotentiary, to represent the  
sublime Porte, at the conference which took place in  
London (July 15, 1840), for the purpose in question."  
The conference was composed of England, Russia,  
Austria, and Prussia, together with the Sultan's am-
bassador. The following extract from the same official 
document above quoted, shows the decision of that]! 
conference.  
" It having been felt that all the zealous labours of  
the conferences of London in the settlement of the  
Pacha's pretensions were useless, and that the only  
public way was to have recourse to coercive measures  
to reduce him to obedience in case he persisted in not  
listening to pacific overtures, the powers have, together 
with the Ottoman Plenipotentiary, drawn up and signed 
a treaty, whereby the Sultan offers the Pacha the 
hereditary government of Egypt, and of all that part  
of Syria extending from the Gulf of Suez to the Lake  
of Tiberias, together with the Province of Acre, for  
life; the Pacha, on his part, evacuating all other parts 
of the Sultan's dominions now occupied by him, and  
returning the Ottoman fleet. A certain space of time  
has been granted him to accede to these terms, and as 
the proposals of the Sultan and his allies, the four  
powers, do not admit of any change or qualification, if 
the Pacha refuse to accede to them, it is evident that the  
evil consequences to fall upon him will be attributable 
solely to his own fault. His Excellency, RIFAT BEV,  
Musteshar for foreign affairs, has been despatched to  
Alexandria in a government steamer, to communicate 
their ultimatum to the Pacha."  
_ The reason why the Sultan thus submitted the de- 
cision of the question to the Christian powers is inti-
mated in a manifesto which he issued about the 20th  
of August, and caused to be read in the mosques, day  
after day. It was because he felt his weakness and  
the danger of his throne.  
"The Porte, in order to counteract this, (the preten- 
sions of Mehemet), has deemed it necessary to publish  
a manifesto, laying before its subjects a statement of  
affairs from the commencement of the quarrel up to  
the present time, and proving to them, by the clearest  
arguments, that the Pacha himself is the enemy of 
their religion, and that^he object he is aiming at is to  
dethrone the Sultan."—Corres. Land. Morn. Chronicle.  
It we can place any confidence in the declaration of  
the sultan, he did feel his throne to be  in danger: and  
this was his reason for throwing himself on his allies  
tor support.  
The ultimatum of the London conference, it seeffts,  
was put into the hands of the Sultan, to treat with Me-
hemet, and, if possible, settle the difficulty without the  
further intervention of his allies. But if Mehemet  
refused to accede to the terms, which admitted of no  
change or qualification, the great powers were pledged  
^?!LCOe,rc,Ve moasures- While> therefore, the Sultan  
held the ultimatum in his own hands, his independence 
was maintained; but the question once submitted to 
Mehemet, and it was beyond his control. Tiue if 
Mehemet accepted the ultimatum, the Ottoman inde- 
pendence would remain; but if he rejected  it, there  
was no alternative but for the Christian powers to  
interpose and put him down.  
Rifat Bey left Constantinople for Egypt, with the  
ultimatum, August 5th, 1840.  
"He arrived at Alexandria on the 11th of August,  
X»ilT v^n'8 °rderS Placed in quarantine  until the 16th." Thus on the 11th of August the  
question of war or peace was taken from the Sultan's  
hands and placed in Mehemet's, so that the Sultan  
could no longer control the affair.  
The 511 years' 15 days, commencing July 27th, |  

1299, would end on tfre 11th of August; just the day  
Rifat Bey arrived at Alexandria.  
Mehemet gave his answer to the Sultan in the fol- 
lowing note:—  
v" Wallah, hillah, tillali," (an oath, by God.) "I  
will not yield a span of the land I possess, and if war  
is made against me, I will turn the empire upside 
down and be buried in its ruins.  
MEHEMET  ALI."  
This was the decisive stroke, and under it the Otto- 
man power was thrown into the hands of the Christian 
nations of Europe. And the very next day, the consuls 
of the four powers took up the affair, and remonstrated 
with him for his course, and threatened him if he did 
not submit. Since then, the Sultan has been under  
the necessity of submitting to the dictation of the  
European powers in all the affairs of his empire.  
Did the Mahomedan independence of CONSTANTINOPLE  
cease on the lllhof August, 1840 ? The following fact  
will answer the question. A correspondent of the  
London Morning Chronicle, in a letter dated Con- 
stantinople, August 12th, 1840, after giving an account  
of the ultimatum, says, "The manner, however, of 
applying the force, should he (Mehemet) refuse to  
comply with these terms,—whether a simple blockade  
is to be established on the  coast, or whether his capital  
is to be bombarded, and his armies to be attacked in  
the Syrian Provinces,—is the point which still remains  
to be learned. Nor does a note delivered yesterday in 
answer to a question put to them by the Porte (Sultan), 
as to the plan to be adopted in such an event, throw  
the least light on the subject. It simply states that  
provision has been made, and there is no necessity for 
the Divan alarming itself about any contingency which  
might afterwards arise."  
Thus the Sultan was as good as told, in his own  
capital, in an official document, from Christian Europe,  
that a matter involving all the interests of his vast  
dominions, was none of his business, — and that, on  
August llth, 1840. READER, THINK!  
The second woe, then, or 6th trumpet, passed, in  
August, 1840. The third woe, and 7th and last trump, 
when the dead shall be raised and the kingdoms of  
this world become Christ's, cometh QUICKLY, Rev. 11:  
14, 15.  
Reader, keep your garment, and watch unto prayer.  
THE SEVEN LAST PLAGUES.  
The first question to be settled in reference to the  
seven last plagues, is, are they, any or all of them,  
past, or are they all future ? It is the opinion of most 
expositors of the Apocalypse, that there are at least six 
of them already executed. The time has been when I  
was disposed to fall in with the prevailing opinion; but 
more recently have been constrained to dissent from  
that view, and consider them what they are emphati-
cally said to be—"THE SEVEN LAST PLAGUES," in 
which " IS FILLED UP THE WRATH OF GOD." The 
chronology of their execution seems to me to be in the  
future, and after the second advent. Some  of the rea- 
sons for this opinion are the following:  
1. They are introduced after the Son of man comes  
on a white cloud to " reap the harvest of the earth,"—  
the saints,—for they are the wheat. Then the vintage 
will come, and the vine be cast into the great wine- 
nress of the wrath of God. Rev. xiv. 14—20.  
2. The redeemed u.^ represented as standing on the  
sea of glass, having the harps of God, and singing the 
song of Moses and the Lamb, before the vials are pour-
ed out. But the song of Moses is the song of triumph 
and deliverance. See Ex. xv. So also is the song  of  
the Lamb. " Thy judgments are made manifest." See  
Rev. xv.  
3. Another reason for considering them all future, is  
analogy. In the destruction of the  old world, God se- 
cured Noah in the ark, before the flood came on the  
ungodly. Before the storm of fire came on Sodom,  
God, by a special interposition, and the ministry of his  

WIL;. . . . " mmm  
angels, brought righteous Lot out of the devoted city,  
f to a place of safety.  
i j When destruction was to come on Jerusalem, the  
Saviour took care to deliver those that trusted in him,  
j and they were led to a place of safety  before the dread- 
ful siege began, and not a Christian perished there.  
4. Yet again, the very first vial, when it is  poured  
out upon the earth, will affect the men who have the  
j mark of the beast, and them that have WORSHIPPED HIS  
IMAGE. Rev. xvi. 2. The image  of the beast did not  
exist until the present century, and could not be wor-
shipped before it existed. And also those  who gain the  
victory over the IMAGE of the beast are to stand on the  
sea of glass before the vials are poured out.  
Although the saints are to stand on the sea of glass,  
as it were mingled with fire, before the vials are poured 
out, no man can enter the temple of heaven until all 
the plagues are fulfilled. Rev. xv. 5—8. The saints '  
will be caught up to meet the Lord in the air, to be  
forever with him, in a moment, at the last trump. But 
the New Jerusalem will not come down and the saints  
enter it, until the earth is desolated, and the new hea-
vens and earth appear, and the New Jerusalem comes  
down. Then the saints shall have right to the tree of 
life, and enter in through the gates into the city,  
j The vials, I must regard, as producing the same  
literal effects ascribed to them in the 16th chapter of  
Revelation. The plagues are almost identical with  
those which came on Egypt when God delivered his 
people, and I can see no reason why these will not be  
as literal as those. '•- 
THE VIALS AND THEIR EFFECTS.  
Rev. xvi. 2: " The first went, and poured out his  
vial upon the earth; and there fell a noisome and  
grievous sore upon the men who had the mark of the  
beast, and upon them which worshipped his image."  
Some of those will be alive who HAD the mark of the  
beast in his day; and those will be alive who "wor- 
shipped his image." The beast will have passed and  
the image be alive.  
" Noisome and grievous sore." This will be best  
illustrated by referring to Ex. ix. 8—11: "And the  
Lord said unto Moses and unto Aaron, Take to you  
handfule of ashes of the furnace, and let Moses sprinkle  
it toward the heaven in the sight of Pharaoh. And it  
shall become small dust in all the land of Egypt, and  
shall be 
a boil breaking forth 'with blains upon man,  
and upon beast, throughout all the land of Egypt. And  
they took ashes of the furnace, and stood before Pharaoh,  
and Moses sprinkled it up toward heaven; and it be-
came a boil breaking forth with blains upon man and 
•ipon beast. And the magicians could not stand before  
Toses because of  the boil; for the boil was upon the  
igicians, and upon all the Egyptians." -Why will  
the antitype be as real and literal ?  
/erses 3—7: "And the second angel poured out his  
upon the Sea; and it became as the blood of a dead  
i; and every living soul died in the sea. And the  
d angel poured out his vial upon the rivers and  
itains of waters: and they became blood. And I  
ard the angel of the waters say, Thou art righteous,  
Lord, which  
art, and wast, and shalt be, because  
u hast judged thus. For they have shed the blood  
saints and prophets,  and thou hast given them blood  
rink; for they are worthy. And I heard another 
of the altar say, Even so, Lord God Almighty, true  
righteous are thy judgments."  
in illustration of these two vials, read Ex. vii, 17—  
: "Thus saith the Lord, In this thou shalt know  
at I am the Lord: behold, I will smite with the rod  
Mch is in mine hand upon the waters which are in  
•e river, and they shall be turned to blood. And the  
-sh that is in the river shall die, and the river shall  
stink; and the Egyptians shall loathe to drink of the  
water of the river. And the Lord spake unto Moses, 
Say unto Aaron, Take thy rod, and stretch out thine  
aand upon the waters of Egypt, upon their streams,  
upon their rivers, and upon their ponds, and upon all  
their pools of water, that they may become blood; and  
thit there may be blood throughout the land of Egypt,  
™Jth in vessels of wood, and in vessels of stone. And  
"osee and Aaron did so, as the Lord commanded: and  

fry  

he lifted up the rod, and smote the waters that were in  
the river, in the sight of Pharaoh, and in the sight of  
his servants; and all the waters that were in the river  
were turned to blood. And the fish that was in the  
river died; and the river stank, and the Egyptians 
could not drink of the water of the river: and there was 
blood throughout all the land of Egypt." This judgment  
will be a retribution for " the blood of the saints."  
Verses8—11: "And the fourth angel poured out  
his vial upon the sun; and power was given unto him 
to scorch men with fire. And men were scorched with  
great heat, and blasphemed the name of God, which 
hath power over these plagues: and they repented not 
to give him glory. And the fifth angel poured out his  
vial upon the seat of the beast; and his kingdom was  
full of darkness; and they gnawed their tongues for  
pain, and blasphemed the God of heaven, because of  
their pains and sores, and repented not of their deeds."  
The scorching of fire in the midst of their trouble, will 
be terrible in the extreme.  
Ex. x. 21—23, will illustrate the fifth vial: "And  
the Lord said unto Moses, Stretch out  thy hand toward  
heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of  
Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses  
stretched forth his hand toward heaven; and there was  
a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three da^s:  
they saw not  one another, neither rose any from his  
place for three days: but all the children of Israel had 
light in their dwellings." What a terrible scene! with  
all their grievous sores, blood to drink—stagnant blood  
—and putrid fish filling the waters, scorched with  
burning heat; and then, to crown the whole, the whole 
kingdom of Anti-Christ is to be full of darkness. O,  
what a picture of wo! Reader, make haste to escape  
it. " Watch ye, and pray always, that ye may be ac- 
counted worthy to escape all these things, and to stand  
before the Son of man."  
Verses 12—16: "And the sixth angel poured out  
his vial upon the great  river Euphrates; and the water  
thereof was dried up, that the way of the kings of the  
east might be prepared. And I saw three unclean 
spirits like frogs come out of the mouth of the dragog, 
and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth 
ofthe false prophet. For they are the spirits of devils,  
working miracles, which go  forth unto the kings of the  
earth, and of the whole world, to gather them to the, 
battle of that great day of God Almighty. Behold, I  
come as a thief! Blessed is he that watcheth, and  
keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked, and they  
see his shame. And he gathered them together into a  
place called in the Hebrew tongue Armageddon." The  
sixth vial is to prepare the way for the battle of that 
great day of God Almighty. The three unclean spirits  
like frogs, go forth from the beast, popery; the dragon,  
Mahomedism, (for the Mahomedans now possess the  
imperial power of the east;) and the false prophet,  
infidelity. These all are the spirits of devils, working  
miracles, or prodigies, like the magicians of Egypt, by 
which Pharaoh was  deceived and fought against God  
and his hosts, even to the last. So the world of the  
ungodly will be deceived, and gathered against him  
that sitteth on the horse and his army, with the vain  
hope of triumph. They will go to gather the kings of  
the earth, and of the whole world, to the battle of that  
great day of GOD ALMIGHTY The great river 
Euphrates will  be as literally dried up, to make a high- 
way for the nations to come to that battle, as the Red  
Sea was for the Israelites to pass over dry-shod.  
That the kings of the earth and of the whole world  
will be gathered together to battle against Christ when  
he'shall appear in his glory, appears to many to be ex- 
ceedingly incredible; because they must know, it is  
said, that they cannot prevail. So might Pharaoh have  
known that he could not conquer Israel, after all the 
manifestations of God's power which he had witnessed;  
but yet he rushed madly on, with his eyes open, time 
after time, into  ruin. Why did he do it? I answer,  
" the spirits of devils" in his magicians, deceived him.  
" The magicians did so with their enchantments." So  
" the  spirits of devils," with their miracles and prodi- 
gies, will deceive the kings of the earth and of the


•• II • "I 1*..  
whole world, not to pursue the saints into the Red Sea,  
but to go up to battle with the great KING OF KINGS, 
AND LORD OF LORDS, HIMSELF.  
The Lord has declared this gathering of the nations  
by the mouth of his prophets. Joel iii. 1, 2: " For be- 
hold, in those days, and in that time, when I shall bring 
again the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem, I will also  
gather all nations, and will bring them down into the  
valley of Jehoshaphat, and will plead with them there  
for my people, and for my heritage Israel, whom they  
have scattered among the nations, and parted my land."  
Also, verses9—16, of the same chapter: "Proclaim 
ye this among the Gentiles: Prepare war, wake up  
the mighty men, let all the men of war draw near: let  
them come up: beat your ploughshares into swords, 
and your pruning-hooks into spears, let the weak say,  
I am strong. Assemble yourselves, and come, all ye 
heathen, and gather yourselves together round about;  
thither cause thy mighty ones to come down, 0 Lord.  
Let the heathen be wakened, and come up to the valley  
of Jehoshaphat: for there will I sit to judge all the  
heathen round about Put ye in the sickle; for the 
harvest is ripe: come, get you down; for the press is  
full, the vats overflow; for, their wickedness is great.  
Multitudes, multitudes in the valley of decision: for  
the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision. 
The sun and the moon shall be darkened, and the stars  
shall withdraw their shining. The Lord also shall roar 
out of Zion, and utter his voice from Jerusalem; and  
the heavens and the earth shall shake: but the Lord  
will be the hope of his people, and the strength of the  
children of Israel." The same great event is likewise  
predicted by Zephaniah, iii. 8: "Therefore wait ye  
upon me, saith the Lord, until the day that I rise up to  
the prey; for my determination is to gather the nations,  
that I may assemble the kingdoms, to pour upon them  
mine indignation, even all my fierce anger: for all the  
earth shall be devoured with the fire of my jealousy."  
From these, and many  other passages which might  
be quoted, it is clear that God wil gather all the na-
tions of the earth together to the battle of the great  
day. The kings of the earth and their armies, will  
be "gathered together, to make war against him that 
sat on the horse, and against his army. Rev. xix. 19.  
" The great river Euphrates" will be as literally  
dried up to make way for the kings of the eastern world  
to come up to Jerusalem and Palestine to that battle,  
as the same river was dried up before Cyrus, when he  
entered and took the city of Babylon; or as the Red  
Sea and river Jordan were dried up to make a highway  
for Israel through their bed. The effects of the sixth  
vial will be, first, to dry up the waters of the river, to 
make a highway; and, secondly, to send forth the  
spirits.of devils to deceive, by miracles, the kings of 
the whole earth, and their armies, and gather them.  
Being gathered by the sixth vial, under the seventh  
vial the battle will be fought.  
Verses 17—21: " And the seventh angel poured out  
his vial into the air; and there came a great voice out  
of the temple of heaven, from the throne, saying, It is  
done. And there were voices, and thunders, and light- 
nings ; and there was a great earthquake, such as was  
not'since men were upon the earth, so mighty an earth-
quake, and so great. And the great city was divided 
into three parts, and the cities of the nations fell: and  
great Babylon came in remembrance before God, to  
give unto her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of  
his wrath. And every island fled away, and the moun- 
tains were not found. And there fell upon men a great 
hail out of heaven, every stone about the weight of a  
talent: and men blasphemed God because of the plague  
of the hail; for the plague thereof was exceeding  
great."  
Let us now carefully mark the instrumentalities by  
which the battle will be fought, on the part of the Lord  
and his saints.  
" Into the airy Denoting an all-pervading and uni  
ve.rsal iudjrnient. I  
The  

" Saying, It is done." It is the last vial, and under  
it all the judgments of God are to be consummated,—  
tire wicked be swept from the earth, and the conflagra-
tion of the world take place.  
" There were voices." The voice of the Lord is to  
be heard in that day, declaring his wrath upon his  
enemies. Joel iii. 16: "The Lord also shall roar out  
of Zion, and utter his voice from Jerusalem; and the  
heavens and the earth shall shake: but the Lord will 
be the hope of his people, and the strength of the chil- 
dren of Israel." Jer. xxv. 30, 31: "Therefore pro-
phesy thou against them all these words, and say unto  
them, The Lord shall roar from on high, and utter his  
voice from his holy habitation; he shall mightily roar  
upon his habitation: he shall give a shout, as they 
that tread the grapes, against all the inhabitants of the 
earth. A noise  shall come, even to the ends of the  
earth; for the Lord hath a controversy with the nations;  
he will plead with all flesh; he will give them that are  
wicked to the sword, saith the Lord."  
" And thunders, and lightnings." Ex. ix. 23: " And  
Moses stretched forth his rod toward heaven: and the 
Lord sent thunder and hail, and the fire ran along upon  
the ground." As truly as the thunders and lightnings  
of Jehovah came on Egypt, and destroyed the Egyp- 
tians and the produce of the field, so truly it will come 
on the ungodly world, when God fills up the cup of 
his fury.  
" A great earthquake such as  never was since men were  
upon the earth, so mighty an earthquake, and so great"  
The terrors of an earthquake are more easily expe- 
rienced than described. The account given of the 
earthquake at Aleppo will afford some faint idea of its 
tenors. What can exceed the terrors of such a scene 1  
But 0, when it shall not desolate a single city only, 
but desolate the globe!!! For " ihe GREAT CITY,"  
Rome, " was divided into three parts, and ihe CITIES 
OF THE NATIONS FELL." They were laid in a 
heap of ruins. Think of ten thousand human beings 
buried in the ruins of the earthquake of St. Domingo  
last spring! But what is that to the time when all the 
cities of the earth are destroyed at a stroke, by the  
power of Omnipotence; when " every island shall flee  
away and the mountains are not found!" What a pic-
ture is presented of this scene of destruction in Ezek. 
xxxviii. 19, 20: " For in my jealousy, and  in the fire  
of my wrath, have I spoken, Surely in that day there  
shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel; so that 
the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and  
the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that  
creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon  
the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence; and 
the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep  
places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the  
ground." It is at that time God will fulfil his pro-
mise, to " shake not the earth only, but also heaven;" 
that what can be shaken maybe removed;'and that 
the things which cannot be shaken may remain, even 
the kingdom of the saints, which cannot be removed, 
but must endure forever and ever.  
find there fell on men a great hail out of heaven."  
This is the most dreadful of all God's judgments.  
After the cities fall, the  islands flep away, the moun- 
tains, walls, fences, and steep places are all thrown  
down, and no place of refuge is found; then the over-
flowing hail-storm follows on the naked heads of a  
guilty race. Think, reader, for a moment, of this ter- 
rible scene. Think of Egypt again. Ex. ix. 22—25 :  
"And the Lord said unto Moses, Stretch forth thine hand  
toward heaven, that there may be hail in all the land  
of Egypt, upon man,  and upon beast, and upon every  
herb of the field, throughout the land of Egypt. And  
Moses stretched forth his rod toward heaven : and the 
Lord sent thunder and hail, and the fire ran along upon  
the ground ; and the Lord rained hail upon the land  
of Egypt. So there was hail, and fire mingled with  
the hail, very grievous, such as there was none like it  
in all the land of Egypt since it became a nation.  
And the hail smote throughout all the land of Egypt,  
all that was in the field, both man and beast; and the  

I * 
i il smote every herb of the field, and  brake every tree  
the field." And is God less faithful to fulfil his  
ireatened judgments now than in the days of old 1  
Or he is he less able to do it 1 No, in no wise. For  
the treasures of the hail are still his. And to the  
wicked God has given the assurance (Isa. xxviii. 17)  
that he " will lay judgment to the line and righteous- 
ness to the plummet, arid ihe hail shall sweep away  
your refuge of lies." It will satisfy you that God is  
in earnest in his denunciations of wrath. How awful 
too, the view given of the same scene, Ezek. xxxviii.  
22 : " And. I will plead against him with pestilence  
and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon 
his bands, and upon the many people that  are with  
him, an overflowing rain, and great hail-stones, fire, 
and brimstone."  
11 Every stone about the weight of a talent." Richard  
Watson, in his Bible Dictionary, says a talent is a  
hundred and twenty-five pounds. Others say ninety- 
six pounds, "and some sixty pounds. Whichever it  
may be, nothing could stand before such a shower. A 
hailstone falTing from heaven, would produce all the 
effect of a lead or iron ball of the same weight. What 
could endure a shower of cannon-balls falling from 
heaven, each one weighing one hundred and twenty- 
five, or even sixty pounds 1 Yet God's mouth hath 
spoken this word. The following account from Fisk's  
i Travels in Europe, will give the reader some faint idea  
of the power of such a storm; and how perfectly easy  
it will be for the Almighty to prepare such an engine  
of destruction:—  
" The University of Padua once had 18,000 scholars,  
but like all the other universities of Italy, it is greatly  
fallen. It has able professors, however, and lectures  
in the various departments, with a library of 100,000  
volumes. The most prominent department is that of 
medicine.  
" There is a beautiful public square in this city, sur- 
rounded with statuary, all of which is now, from an  
extraordinary cause, in a very mutilated state. In  
1835, there was a violent hail-storm of stones as large  
as cannon-balls, which fell, in twenty-seven minutes, 
to the depth of one foot and a half. It broke in the  
1 tiles of the roofs of a great many edifices, and made  
great havoc of the trees, and broke off the fingers, arms,  
noses, &c., of this extensive company of statues."  
Such a storm of hail as this must be dreadful: the  
stones the size of cannon-balls. But what are such  
hailstones when compared with those spoken of under 
the seventh vial 1 Reader, have you found a refuge  
from such a storm 1 The only place of refuge is the 
name of the Lord of hosts.  
" The battle of that great day of GOD ALMIGHTY."  
It is not man's battle; but God's. Let us look again| 
at its terrors, as described by Jeremiah, xxv. 15—17,  
26, 30—33: " For thus saith the Lord God of Israel  
unto me, Take the wine-cup of this fury at my hand,  
and cause all the nations, to whom I send thee, to  
drink it. And they shall drink, and be moved, and bel  
mad, because of the sword that I will send among  
them. Then I took the cup at the Lord's hand, and 
made all the nations to drink, unto whom the Lord had  
sent me. And all the kings of the north, far and near, 
one with another, and all the kingdoms of the world,  
which are upon the face of the earth: and the king of 
Sheshach shall drink after them. Therefore prophesy  
thou against them all these words, and say unto them,  
The Lord shall roar from on high, and utter his voice  
I from his holy habitation; he shall mightily roar upon  
his habitation; he shall give a shout, as they that  
tread the grapes, against all the inhabitants of the 
earth. A noise shall come even to the ends of the  
earth; for the Lord hath a controversy with the na- 
tions; he will plead with all flesh; he will give them  
I that are wicked to the sword, saith the Lord. Thus  
K saith the Lord of hosts, Behold, evil shall go forth from  
f nation to nation, and a great whirlwind shall be raised  
A up from the coasts of the earth. And the slain of the 
<\ Lord shall be at that day from one end of the earth  

' ~ - •!»••'•»n 111 »'!i,iW mutinU:il^  
even unto the other end" of the earth: they shall not  
be lamented, neither gathered nor buried: they shall  
be dung upon the ground." Such a war of extermina-
tion God has declared; and he will accomplish it. 
There will be no refuge then left. It is the day de- 
scribed in Proverbs i. 24—33, when the wicked shall  
call, but God will not answer, but will laugh at their  
calamity, and mock when their fear cometh; when  
their fear cometh as a desolation, and their destruction  
as a whirlwind; when distress and anguish cometh 
upon them. The Lord have mercy on the impenitent 
now, and save them before the terrible day overtake  
them !  
The same great battle is described in the 38th and  
39th chapters of Ezekiel. God and Magog are all the 
devii's armies, whether before or after the second or  
final resurrection. After the Lord has taken his people  
out from the earth, all who are left constitute Gog and  
Magog.  
The 37th chapter describes the first resurrection, the  
gathering of the whole house of Israel from their 
graves, bringing flesh and sinews upon them, covering  
them with ski n^ putting his  spirit within them, as the  
vital principle, and bringing them into the land of  
Israel. Then David, or Christ, the heir of David's  
throne, is to be-king over them for ever. They shall  
never more be dispersed or plucked up out of the land 
of the saints.  
Then follows, after thus harvesting the wheat by  
Christ in the resurrection of the just, the vintage, when  
the wicked are to be destroyed. In a moment, in the  
twinkling of an eye, at the last trump, the dead shall 
be raised'incorruptible, and we be changed. See 1 Cor.  
xv. All these will be caught up to meet the Lord in  
the air. See 1 Thess. iv. They are to stand on the  
sea of glass mingled with fire; having the harps of  
God, and sing the"song of victory and deliverance, as  
did the Israef of God, when they stood on the eastern  
bank of the Red Sea, and their enemies were for ever  
left behind, overwhelmed in ruin. It was not until  
they had passed the sea that the tribes were marshalled 
according to their tribes, and their government organized  
undeT Moses. So now; our prophet, like Moses, will  
bring his people from their enemies' land, to a place of  
safely; then organize his kingdom on the sea of glass. 
This kingdom, thus organized, will smite the image of  
Dan. ii., on his feet, and grind the whole to powder.  
First, it is said the stone will do it; then that the God  
of heaven will set up a kingdom which shall do it.  
The stone and kingdom then are identical. The king- 
dom of Christ, thus organized, will come down, accord- 
ing to the prediction of Enoch, the seventh from Adam.  
Jude's Epistle: " Behold, the Lord cometh with ten 
thousand of his saints, to execute judgment upon, all, 
and to convince all that are ungodly among them of all  
their ungodly deeds, and hard speeches," &c.  
Then,°too, the second Psalm will be fulfilled, where  
it is promised Christ that he " shall break" the kings |  
of the earth, the  rulers, the Gentiles or heathen, together  
with the unbelieving people of the Jews who rejected 
him, " with a rod of iron, and shall dash them in pieces 
like a potter's vessel."  
He will then, also, as he has promised in Rev. ii.,  
give to them that overcome, power over the nations, to 
rule and break them with a rod of iron, as he has 
received of his Father. The saints are to be joined in  
judging the world, with Christ. " This honour have  
ALL his saints." They will not sit to try and pass sen- 
tence on the world; this is not their prerogative, but  
the Lord's; but to execute ihe judgment written, is the 
prerogative of the saints. Ps. cxlix. 5—9 : " Let the  
saints be joyful in glory; let them sing aloud upon  
their beds. Let the high praises of God be in their  
mouth, and a two-edged sword in their hand, to execute 
vengeance upon the heathen, and punishments upon 
the people; to bind their kings with chains, and their 
nobles with fetters of iron; to execute upon them the  
judgment written; this honour have all his saints.  
Praise ve the Lord."


The Lord, and all his sainls with him, is to come  
down on the Mount of Olives to fight the battle and  
drive out all the wicked from Jerusalem, and take pos- 
session of the place and fight the battle spoken of by  
Ezek. xxxviii. and xxxix. The scenes of the last day  
will not be filled up instantaneously, as we have been  
accustomed to think. The old Israelites were seven  
years, after entering the land, in subduing their ene- 
mies^, before they enjoyed their sabbath, or year of rest. 
So Ezekiel tells us, that the whole house of Israel will  
be seven years (literal years) in burning up the weapons 
of their enemies; and seven months after the battle in  
burying the dead bodies of the wicked, on which both 
beasts and fowls have feasted at the supper of the  
great God; and then men of continual employment  
will be appointed to cleanse the land of dead bodies  
and bones.  
But, says an objector, you do not suppose the glori- 
fied saints will be set at work to bury the wicked ?  
That is too absurd and humiliating a thought! In-1  
deed ! why so 1 If God has thought that " it shall be 
to them a RENOWN," as he has declared it shall be,  
(Ezek. xxxix. 13), why shall we be displeased ? We  
can know nothing of the future, except what is  
revealed ; and if God has revealed that Israel, when 
brought back from their graves to eternal life, shall 
bury the dead bodies of the wicked, it will be so. 
That it is revealed, cannot be denied, until we deny 
the word of God.  
If the saints are to remain on the earth until the  
judgments are all executed, it is more reasonable that  
they should bury the dead, than that they should be 
left upon the earth to pollute it a long time.  
The same great battle is described in Rev. xix. 11—  
21. The two scenes, as described by Ezekiel and  
John, are so nearly alike, that we cannot fail to per- 
ceive that they refer to one and the same event.  
A SYNOPSIS OF EZEKIEL, THIRTY-SEVENTH, THIRTY  
EIGHTH, AND THIRTY-NINTH CHAPTERS.  
1. The 37th chapter, from the 1st to the 10th verse,  
presents Ezekiel's vision of the dry bones.  
.. The'11th to the l4th verse, is an explanation, in 
literal terms, of the import of the emblems of the vision, 
showing it to be the resurrection of the bodies of the  
whole house of Israel:—not of all the Jews; nor yet  
of a11 the believing Jews alone. For they are not  
f "all Israel," that is, do not constitute "all Israel,"  
f who are descended from Israel, or "are of Israel."  
" But the children of the promise are accounted for the 
seed." "If ye be Christ's, ye are Abraham's seed,  
I and heirs according to promise." They will be raised 
I up and brought into the land of promise.  
\f -3' Fr°m verSe 15th' through the chapter, follows a  
- 'view of the unity of all the saints in the house of  
I David, under Messiah's reign, for evermore; also the 
J V perfection and immutability of their holiness, and the  
f glory and happiness which shall for ever attend them.  
4. Then follows, chapter xxxviii. 1—7, an enumera- 
tion of the company of Gog and Magog,  
j i 5- From verse 8—13, the time of the gathering of 
J Gog, and the motive by which he will be induced to  
go up%aiiM^ie land of Israel.  
| 1 FIRST, «/„ the latter years." " When th  
f i mountains of Israel are brought back from the sword.y  
[ j! When those who are brought back from out of the nations,  
all dwell safely—all of them dwelling without wall ant  
gates or bars.  
Under these circumstances, the army of Goo- wil)  
come like a storm to cover the land. °  
^ SECONDLY, the native. « Things shall come into thj  
ina, ana t/j0Q tninK an evil inougni.— me  
evil thought js t0 g0 Up and take a spoil and prey and  
riches, gold, silvCTj cattle, and goods. Sheba, Dedan  
and the merchants of Tarsliigh, will be inspired with  
such a thought to join the company, together with all  
the voung lions thereof.  

6." Then, from verse 14th, to the 20th verse "of the  
39th chapter, follow a description of the great battle,  
the means by which they shall be destroyed,  
together with the time to be occupied by Israel in de- 
stroying their enemies, burning up their instruments  
of waT, not for culinary purposes, but to destroy them; 
and also the supper of the great God, prepared for the  
beasts and fowls.  
7. From verse 21 to 29, we have the effect which  
this battle and its accompanying scene will have on  
both the saints and the heathen.  
FIRST, the heathen shall see God's glory, and know  
why the house of Israel went into captivity; that it  
was for the abuse of peace and independence when 
they enjoyed it, that God hid his face from them and 
gave them into the hand of their enemies.  
SECONDLY, Israel is to learn by it that the Lord is  
their God, from that time forward. All God's mercies 
hitherto have been insufficient to convince the church 
effectually that God is their helper and deliverer. The 
Jewish church went after idols, even amidst the thun-
ders of Sinai; and while the meat God gave them was  
in their mouths, they murmured. The disciples rose 
from the feast of the loaves and fishes, while the 
Saviour was with them, and were troubled because 
they had taken no bread. But they will now be con- 
vinced, and never more forget, that the ALMIGHTY  
GOD is theirs. They shall know too, that their God  
has gathered them from among the heathen into their  
! own land and has poured out his spirit upon the whole 
, house of Israel, and constituted them glorious and  
immortal.  
THE CLOSE OF THE PLAGUES.  
The conflagration of the heavens and the earth, will  
close the dreadful scenes of judgment. The heavens 
being on fire shall be dissolved, and  the elements melt  
with fervent heat; the earth  and the works that are  
therein shall be burned up. But is the conflagration 
the conclusion of the plagues? Certainly. " For in  
them is filed up the wrath of God." But " the earth is 
defied under the inhabitants thererf, because they have 
transgressed the laws, changed the ordinances, and broken 
the everlasting covenant. Therefore hath the curse de- 
voured the earth, and they that dwell therein are desolate.  
Therefore the inhabitants of the earth are burned, and  
few men left." "The earth is utterly broken down; 
the earth is clean dissolved; the earth is moved ex- 
ceedingly. The earth shall reel to and fro like a  
drunkard, and be removed like a cottage; and the 
transgression shall be. heavy upon it; and it shall fall  
and not rise again. Isa. xxiv. Until the earth falls,  
therefore, the wrath of God is not filled up."  
Then we look for a new heaven and a new earth;  
and for Jerusalem a rejoicing. When the new earth 
appears, and not before, the new Jerusalem will come  
down from God out of heaven, and the saints enter  
into it. But we are taught, in Rev. xv., that no man 
will be able to enter the temple until the seven plagues  
are fulfilled. When they are fulfilled, then the para-
disical earth will come, and the bride appear, the  
guests enter her gates, and the marriage-feast be cele-
brated for a thousand years.  
In view of these dreadful plagues, well might the  
prophet Daniel say, " there shall be a time of trouble,  
such as never was since there was a nation to that  
same time. God is in earnest in these declarations  
of wrath; and they are made in mercy to a perishing 
world. But if men will not believe and be moved to  
• seek a refuge from the stormy blast and the windy  
tempest that will Sweep over the earth, they must suffer 
the consequences. No doubt, to many, the writer of  
this will seem as one that mocks! So, also, seemed 
Lot to his friends in Sodom, in the day of their ruin •  
but their unbelief did not disannul the word of Jehovah'  
r nor will it now. Cod's judgments will surely come,'  
( perishing mortal, whether you believe or not. 0 come  
to Christ, and seek a refuge without delay. Can vou  
still determine to resist God's proffered grace untill.is  

day of vengeance comes, and his wrath is poured out  
without mixture? Think of that scene of anguish 
which has been but feebly portrayed in these pages.  
My heart yearns over you, dear reader. If you °are  
still resisting God's grace, casting off fear, and restrain- 
ing prayer, I tremble for your fate! 0, forsake your 
sins, that your soul may live. Like the wise man,  
build on the rock.  
THE MILLENNIUM AFTER THE RESURREO-,  
TION OF THE JUST.  
The doctrine of the universal triumph of the gospel j  
for a thousand years before the second advent of the 
Saviour, thus making the reign of Christ on earth as I 
king of saints, purely spiritual, and saying that the 
Lord delayeth his coming for at least a thousand years,  
next demands our attention.  
1. I object to the doctrine of a universal triumph of  
the church of God,.because it contradicts the express 
declaration of God's word.  
That word teaches us that the servant is not above  
his master. " If they have not heard me they will not  
hear you; if they have kept my sayings they will 
keep yours also." The time never was in Christ's  
ministry when all the people heard him and received  
> h!s instructions. Although at times, as in modern re- 
vivals, under some strong influences the multitude  
; were moved, and it seemed for the time they were all  
Jf ab°ut t0 embrace him, yet how soon the same multi- 
- tude were ready to stone him!  
? This is a fair sample of human nature, according to  
the experience of six thousand years. It is all ^de- 
pendence which can be placed on it. If the Master  
himself succeeded no better, how can his servants  
hope to ?  
i 11 contradicts the parable of the sower in Matt. xiii.  
j there were four kinds of ground on which the seed,  
• he word of the kingdom, fell. And from only one of  
j those grounds was fruit received. Universal experi- 
j enee has shown how true the parable is to the facts in  
the case. Christ has nowhere told us that it will ever 
be otherwise while the "word of the kingdom" is  
preached. 5  
The parable of the tares of the field teaches also the  
same doctrine. The field is the world, the globe with  
f us human inhabitants, where the tares and wheat will  
grow together until the harvest, or end of thisVrld, 
{age,) the Christian age which  began with John and  
1 wai end with the second advent of the Saviour. Then,  
not before, » he will gather out of his (territorial) king- 
dom (the world) all things which offend, and them  
w nich do iniquity, and cast them into a furnace of fire;  
mere  shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth. Then  
• snail the righteous shine forth as the sun in the king- 
dom of their Father." 8  
2. I object, secondly, to the doctrine of the universal  
conversion of the world as the introduction to the mil- 
ennium, because the Bible throughout represents the  
universal kingdom of Christ as to be introduced by  
he violent destruction of the wicked, and the everlast- 
ing reward of the righteous. 
I .The SeC°?d Ps'dlm k one of the Phages often  
quoted to prove the conversion of the world, as the in-
duction of the glorious spiritual reign of Christ.  
Ask of me and I shall give thee the heathen for thine  
inheritance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for  
thy possession." And here they stop and infer the 
world s conversion. Why do they not go on through  
, Passage, and read what he is to do with them when  
Jhey are given up to him ? » Thou shalt break them  
1 ^ a ro(1  of iron ; and shalt dash them in pieces like  
a potter's vessel." Is this a promise of the conver- 
I lon of the heafhen? What then would be the lan- 
'aore ln which their destruction could be exnressed 1  

i>lished. under >'  
B~7g\ ''.M'kl/uw kw .  
(2.) The stone is to smite the image ffrind it"to  
powder, and the wind sweep it 
kingdom fills the whole earthf  
t. ft) I" J® ,vision of the four beasts, of Daniel vii 
the beast the last of the four, is to be slain, his bodv 
destroyed and given to the burning flame ; and £  
he Son of man come in the clouds of heaven and  

S&jss?*dominbn' * ^ *  
(4.) Anti-Christ, that wicked, that man of sin  
spoken of by Paul,  (2 Thess. ii.,) is only to he de- 
stroyed by the brightness of Christ's coming! Until  
Christ comes, Anti-Christ will reign and oppose the  
(5.) The kingdom of Christ is not to be universal  
until the seventh trumpet sounds. Rcv.xL 15 Thl  
seventh is the last trump, and at it the dead will be  
-ed incorruptible, and the living saints be chlnged?  
ratW? f fUCh La State c°ntradicte the decla-
ration of Christ, to his church, that in the world she  
shall have tribulation; as also the doctrine that through  
much tribulation we must enter into the kingdom^  
God. I would disqualify those who enjoyed the state  
to join the innumerable company of the redeemed whcl  
will have come up out of great tribulation.  
(7.) I object to such a view of the millennium, be- 
cause the onlv ScriDtural aeennnt tW, jo A...  
| sand years' reign ot the saints with Christ, is, that it 
J will be—  

1  
THE FIRST RESURRECTION.  
' .The only passage in the Bible which speaks directly  
of the thousand years, is in Rev. xx., where it is said, 
" 1 saw thrones, and they sat upon them, and judg- 
ment was given unto them; and I saw the souls of  
them that were beheaded for the witness of Jesus and  
tor the word of God, and which had not worshipped  
the beast, neither his image, neither had received his  
mark in their foreheads or in their hands; and they 
lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years. But 
the rest of the dead lived not again until the thousand  
years were finished. This is the first resurrection.  
Uiessed and holy is he which hath part in the first  
resurrection: on such the second death hath no power; 
but they shall be priests of God and of Christ, and  
shall reign with him a thousand years."  
This is the true millennium, and the only one found  
in the word of God.  
From this we learn that the "blessed and holy" will  
be raised a thousand years before the rest of the dead.  
No doctrine is more distinctly taught in the Bible  
than that of two distinct resurrections of the dead. 
Some of the numerous passages where it is either di- 
rectly or indirectly taught, will be noticed.  
1. The conditional promises of Christ, John sixth  
chapter, of "raising up at the last day" those who  
comnlv with thnoo . 1„ : I ' .  mising up ai me last day those wn  
comply with those conditions; clearly implyiJBfcat  
if they did not do so, he would not then raise them!  
2. The promise of the Saviour to those who should,  
in making a feast, call in the poor, who could not re- 
compense them, that they should be recompensed at  
the resurrection of the just. Luke xiv. 13, 14. If 
there is to be but one resurrection, why name the resur- 
rection of the just? Why not say, as is generally  
said at this day, "At the resurrection ?"  
3. Jesus Christ has said, (John v. 28, 29,) " The  
HOUR is coming when all that are in the graves shall 
hear his voice, and shall come forth; they that have  
done good unto the resurrection of life, and they  that  
have done evU unto the resurrection of damnation."  
1 here are in this text, two distinct resurrections recog- 
nised  : " of life;" " of damnation." Thev that have  

TO  
if j?  if  
• i  
I'  
H  
•  
%  
4 I


i:  

—~ i  
done gc^d will enjoy .the former; they that have done  
evil, endure tiie latter. It 'is objected, the whole is 
said to take place in the same literal "hour." "The 
hour eometh." To this, it is replied, that the term  
"hour" merely signifies, the time will come when all  
will hear his voice, and live or come forth from the  
grave; but each in his own time. The word is mani- 
festly used thus, in John v. 25, where it is said " The 
hour is coming and now is, when the dead shall hear  
the voice of the Son of God, and they that  hear shall  
live."  
. Even while Christ was on earth, the time was com- 
ing, yea, had come, that the dead, Lazarus, the wi- 
dow's son, &c., should, and did hear his voice, and 
those that heard, lived. Were all these instances in  
one literal hour, <jr at one time] Clearly not. But, 
says the objector, it does not mean the dead in a literal  
but spiritual sense. Very well, we will look at its  
meaning then. The hour is coming and now is when  
the dead in trespasses and sins shall hear the voice of  
the Son of God, and the/that hear shall live. Was  
this true, 1 ask, only that very hour in which he spoke;  
or is it true of all subsequent time to the end of the 
world? The latter is true, most clearly. Then the  
hour signifies, in verse twenty-five, the whole gospel 
dispensation; why, then, may it not, by the same rule,  
signify, in the twenty-eighth verse, a thousand years ?  
j It°must be understood, in the twenty-fifth- verse, in  
some other than its literal acceptation; then why not  
I in the twenty-eighth verse ? It is not necessary to go  
beyond the fifth chapter of John to settle the contro- 
versy, on the import of the term hour, as used in refer- 
ence to the time of the resurrection.  
The true millennium of Revelation, 20th chapter, is  
not until the first resurrection, or the resurrection of the  
just. Rev. xx. 4—6. The classes enumerated in this  
text who live and reign a thousand years before the  
rest of the dead live again, include the " blessed and  
holy."  
| There is no such thing as a conversion of the world  
taught in the 20th of Revelation, but only the thou-
sand years between the two resurrections. The term  
f r urrection is never used in the Bible iiwapy othei  
than its proper sense of bringing to life^kewodies of  
the dead. I would dwell longer on this point, but so  
; much has been said upon it that the fable of the spi- 
ritual reign is well nigh dissipated from the mind of  
the great mass of the church. The clergy and theolo- 
gical professors, it is true, still hold on upon it. But  
Jit will not go; the  people are opening their eyes to  
1 look for themselves.  

GOG AND MAGOG.  
Who are Gog and Magog, says one, whom Satan is  
to deceive at the end of the thousand years, if  there  
are to be none but the raised and glorified salfits on  
earth during that time? I answer, the same men- 
tioned in verse 5,  who are not to live again until the  
thousand years are finished; clearly implying they 
will live again then. If they are raised then, and Sa- 
tan is loosed at the same time, he will find a great 
abundance of subjects of his deceptive pretence of a 
battle with Christ and his saints. And'this is the only 
point of deception. There is no battle between the  
devil and the saints; but " fire came down from God  
out of heaven and devoured them." The fire of God's  
wrath will sweep them from the earth into the lake of  
fire.  
GOG AND MAGOG  IN THE NEW EARTH.  
But it is asked, do you suppose Gog and  Magog, or  
the wicked dead, will rise out of the new earth, and  
come upon it and defile it! I do suppose they will be  
raised out of the new earth, 1. Because they are to be 
burned up (Mai- iv.) at the great day when God makes  
up his jewels, and burns the earth; and be ashes under  
the saints' feet. So, if they come up at all, as they  
assuredly will, it must be from the new earth. 2. It  
is in the new earth they are raised, because they will 
come around the camp of the saints and the beloved city.  
But the New Jerusalem is only to come with the new  
earth. Rev. xxi.; Isai. lxv. 17, 18.  
"How can these things be?" is only an infidel in- 
quiry, and shows the same error of which the Saddu- 
cees were guilty, " not knowing the Scriptures nor the  
power of God." I do not suppose they will .defile the 
earth by treading on it, any more than the devil defiles  
the human mind by throwing in an involuntary wicked  
thought, which is instantly rejected. We have only 
to believe God's testimony, and all difficulties vanish.  
What he has promised, he is able also to perform.  
C/  tfofM'L  til*  

BIBLE EX % MINI  
When this paper is sent without being ordered, no charge  
is.m.ide (nr it. The person receiving it is requested to read  
and circulate. For the most part, the design is lo give them  
awayj if any are disposed to aid by donations, or otherwise,  
they can do so. (t will be published as often as the judgment  
of tne editor shall dictate.  
Its main design is to examine the Scriptures, independently,  
on the subject of Christ's second coming; but other points of  
Scripture doctrine will be investigated.  
The article which fills the Examiner this week, is one upon  
which the editor has thought much, and examined with prayer. 
He- believes the interpretation usually given to the 24th of 
Matthew, has been dictated by Papal corruptions of God's  
word, and adopted by Protestants to the great injury of the  
cause of God and truth, as it has tended to bolster up Univer-
salism, and turn off men's eyes from the revelation of the  
Lord Jesus ChrLit in the clouds of heaven.  
To those who wish to pay for a quantity to give away, or  
sell again, this number can be had, for cash, at one dollar per  
hundred, by addressing " BIBLE EXAMINER," 36 PARK ROW. 
NEW YORK CITV.  
EXPOSITION OF MATrHEW, XXIV. CHAP.  
BY GEO. STORRS.  
IN contemplating this chapter our minds are apt to be  
biased by our previous modes of thinking. We seem to  
suppose that the disciples, in their inquiry, in the third  
verse, understood that Jerusalem was to be destroyed before  
the end of the world, as much as though it was an historical fact  
at the time. To my mind, it is clear that they had no idea  
that " the temple" was to be destroyed prior to the coming 
ofChri st at the end of the world. The previous chapter  
closes by our Saviour proclaiming his future coming; and 
as tie departed out of the temple, his disciples called his at- 
tention lo the buildings of the . temple. He tells them—  
" There shall not be left one stone upon another, that shall  
not be thrown down." This expression could convey no 
idea to the minds of the disciples of what we call " the  
destruction of Jerusalem," as an event disconnected with  
his second coming. Let us consider—he had, just before 
leaving the temple, spoken of his coming; as he leaves  
the temple, lie speaks of its utter demolition. The most  
natural idea to the minds of the disciples, must be that 
their Master spoke of the overthrow of those buildings  
at the end of the world, when he would come again. In  
this view it appears to me, the question (for I consider the  
question one) was asked, " When shall these things be, 
and what shalt be the sign of thy coming, and of the end  
of the world ?"  
" These things"—what THINGS 1 Christ's coming and  
the end of the world ; to which time, it seems to me, they  
supposed our Saviour referred, in speaking of the destruc- 
tion of the temple.  
The point, therefore, on which they wanted information  
was about their Lord's coming and the end of the world. 
Our Saviour commences a connected chain of events which 
were to reach from that generation to his coming in the 
clouds of heaven. From the fourth to the fourteenth verse 
he gives them a kind of general description, or synopsis" of 
events to take place, at no very distant period after his  
leaving them.  
Verne 4. " Jesus said unto them, Take heed that no man  
deceive you." He would have them on their guard against 
deception: knowing the temptations they would have, from  
t?ie tribulations they were to pass through, to accept of  
some deliverer who might profess to come in Christ's name,  
to lead them out of their troubles.  
Verse 5. " For many shall come in my name, saying, I  
3m Christ, and shall deceive many." Many such did 
ari>!p.  
Verses 6 and 7. Here our Lord tells his followers of  
wars, &c., and cautions them against being "  troubled."  
These wars did come—Jerusalem was destroyed in one of  
the first, if not the very first of those wars; and by these 
wars the Roman empire itself was divided into ten king- 
doms, according to Daniel's prophecy, chap. vii. 24; " The  
ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kines [kingdoms] 
that shall arise." All this took place before "the end 
come" to paganism, or the "daily," as Daniel calls it.  
Verse 9. "Then shall they deliver you up to be afflicted,  
and shall kill you," See. " Then"—when ? While these  
commotions are going on in the Roman empire.  
Verse 10. "Then shall many be offended, [stumbled,  
apostatize,] and shall betray one another, and shall hate  
one another."  

t does not come wrrrrrn mv aesitffi ittsnow pt'OUcuh'n j/  
how this prophecy was fully accomplished . under heathen,  
or pagan Rome. All acquainted with history know it was  
fulfilled to the very letter; and il is supposed that not less  
than three millions of Christians suffered death under that  
persecuting power.  
Verse 11. "And many false prophets [teachers] shall  
arise, and shall deceive many." The history of the chi.ch  
shows that many such teachers did arise at the period here 
indicated.  
Verse 12 "And because iniquity shall abound, the love JJmm  
of many shall wax cold." When Christianity became, by  
profession, the religion of the Roman empire, then the  
church was corrupted by a worldly policy, and the intro-
duction of heathen customs into their religious services, so 
that iniquity abounded, and the love of many waxed cold; ' 
then came the " falling away," spoken of by Paul, 2 Thess.  
ii. 3: thus preparing the way for the appearing of the  
" man of sin."  
Verse 13. "But he  that shall endure unto the end  
[death —see Rev. ii. 10,] the same shall be saved." The  
trials of those days should be severe, but faithfulness "unto 
death" should be rewarded with "a crown of life."  
Verse 14. "And this gospel of the kingdom shall be  
preached in all the world for a witness unto  all nations;  
and then shall the end come."  
The inquiry arises—The end of what? Some say, the  
end of the Jewish economy, or of their nationality; others •  
say, the end of the world. I cannot adopt the first posi-
tion ; because, it appears to me, our Saviour was speaking  
of an end that was to come after a bloody persecution of his ',  
followers, and a falling away in consequence of the abound-
ing of iniquity, [v. 12,] and not that only, but also of 
many wars. These things did not all take place before - 
the destruction of Jerusalem. If I am not much mistaken, s 
the first war, of any importance, after our Saviour, was ' 
that in which Jerusalem was destroyed j and the Saviour  
told his disciples that the end was " not yet" when those  
wars commenced. See v. 6.  
I cannot adopt the interpretation, that the end spoken  
of in the 14th verse is the end of the world. Not that that  
interpretation is ah objection to the end of the world being  
now at hand, as some suppose, but because, if that con- 
struction is true, the world should have come to an end 
long ago. The apostle, in his Epistle to the Romans, x.  
16, says, "They have not all obeyed the gospel;" and  
adds, 18th v., " I say, Have they not heard ? Yes, verily,  
their sound v/ent into all the earth, and their words unto the  
ends of the world." And again, in Colossians i. 5, 6, " The  
truth of the gospel, which is come unto you, as it is in all  
the world." And again, at the 23d verse, "If ye continue  
in the faith grounded and settled, and be not moved away  
from the hope of the gospel, which ye have heard, and 
which was preached to every creature under heaven ; where- •• 
of I, Paul, am made a minister." To my mind, it seems dj 
next to impossible to reconcile this testimony of the apostle |  
with the idea that the gospel has not, hundreds of years - 
ago, been " preached in all the world for a witness lyito all 
nations." Hence, I am compelled to look for some other 
interpretation of the 14th verse. The " end" of something 
is spoken of, in that verse, which, it would seem, was \  
brought  about by the agency of the gospel. By the preach- 
ing of the gospel of the kingdom in all the world for a wit- > 
ness, or testimony, some kind of a. change, or revolution was  
to be effected that should bring an "end" to something.  
The inquiry returns—what is that something? In my 
opinion, it was that persecuting power of which the Saviour ,  
had spoken in the previous verses; in other words, it was  
Pagan Rome, paganism, or the same power, called by  
Daniel, " THE DAILY." "TOgHS  
Let us see if we can determine what we are to understand  
by the " daily sacrifice," spoken of in Daniel 8th, 11th, and,  
12th. It will be seen by a reference to those chapters, that '  
the word " sacrifice," connected with " daily," is in italics, and ,  
therefore is not in the original text, but has been supplied by -||S  
our translators. The expression in those texts is perfect with- s| 
out the supplied word, and the sense much clearer. The text, "v•';  
Dan. viii. 13, is simply " the daily, and the transgression of  
desolation:" and in the 11th cnap.. 31st verse.it is: "They® 
shall take away the daily, and they shall place the abomination  
thai maketh desolate." This language shows that " the daily"  
is a daily, or continual abomination, or desolating power, that  
should desolate the people and church of God till it was taken 
"away," and, that then should come up another abomination  
to take its place, still more desolating: then, in the 12th chap.  
11th verse, the time is given us from the taking away of the  
daily "to setup [as the margin has it] the abomination that |  
malceth desolate." and that time carries us to the taking "away £  
the dominion" [Dan. vii. 26] oi'this last ahquunatkm. "" J~  

'M


/'a C'1US Epiphanes, is certain from the fact that" Antiocfius died  
u*'ryj 164 years before our Lord's birth, and Christ directed his fol- 
-f/T'owers t0 for the " abomination of desolation, spoken of  
/ jj b>' Daniel," as still future.  
Some tell us the "  daily" is the daily sacrifice of the Jews,  
«lls wl"ch  was taken away at the destruction of Jerusalem. If so,  
can they tell what event took place answering to the 1290 
days, which, if understood as literal days, can be made to agree 
with no event? Then it is added, " Blessed is he that waiteth 
and cometh to the 1335 days." What took place then ? Nothing 
that marks that as a peculiar period. It was at the end of those 
days that Daniel was to stand in his lot, or have his resurrection. -L  
Did he have it 1335 days after the destruction of Jerusalem? 
If the 8ays stand for years, what event, answering to the pro- 
phecy, took place 1290 years from the cessation of the Jewish j 
sacrifices? It was in the darkness of Papal Rome. Did Daniel " 
have his resurrection under the dark reign of Papacy ? We  
have nothing in history to show that anything took place at  
the end of those days, if reckoned from Jerusalem's destruc-
tion.  
We are now led to inquire wtyat " daily" it was that was  
" taken away." I answer, it appears to me, clearly, it was  
the daily or continual abomination of paganism, which op- 
pressed the people and church of God till it was " taken out of  
the way;" which event, it seems, from Gibbon's History of 
Rome, took place about A. D. 508, when " Vitalian, a Gothic  
chieftain, with an army of Huns and Bulgarians, declared them-
selves the champions ofthe Catholic faith." Thus an end came  
to pagan sacrifices at Rome, or paganism was " taken out of  
the way" and no longer " hindered" the revelation of the " man  
of sin,or " abomination that maketh desolate," i. e., Papacy. 
What event transpired 1290 days from the taking away of pa-
ganism, or the " daily," in 508 ? 1290 years from that time, 
viz., in 1798, Berthier, a French General, entered Rome, de-
posed the Pope, abolished the Justinian code of laws, under  
which the Pope had carried on his " war with the saints" for  
1260 years, and gave to Italy a republican form of government,  
carried the Pope captive to France, where he died in 1799 :—  
thus was the " dominion" of Papacy taken " away, to consume  
and destroy unto the end." See Dan. vii. 26. The 1335 days, 
or years, from the taking away of " the daily" in 508, carry us  
down to 1843, when Daniel,  with all the saints, will stand in  
their lot, i. e., will be raised from the dead.  
" The daily," then, and " the abomination of desolation,"  
are two desolating powers acting against the people and church 
of God. An end comes to one, and then the other comes up 
in its place.  
The gospel of the kingdom, Mark says, xiii. 10, " must  
first be published among all nations." This was done in  
the apostles'days, as we have already seen, but the influ- 
ence of it did not at once work the revolution by which 
paganism fell: but it began to work its fall, and at length  
^produced that change, by which Constantine declared in 
r .avor of Christianity in the fourth century; but paganism  
had its temple and altar at Rome still, and was not utterly  
thrown down, or " taken away," till about A. D. 508, when 
" Vitalian, with an army of Huns and Bulgarians, mostly  
idolaters, declared themselves the champions ofthe Catholic 
faith." That mighty revolution caused the taking away of  
the pagan rites at Rome, as we have seen, and thus " the  
end come'' to the pagan persecuting power. But, observe,  
this was not till after " a falling away," as Paul calls it, 
and " the love of many" waxing " cold," as our Saviour 
saith. This took place from the time the Roman Emperors 
espoused the cause of the church,  and Christianity became  
the religion of the empire. This prepared the way for the  
revelation ofthe "man of sin," or "the abomination that 
maketh desolate." " The end come" to one abomination, 
or persecuting power " spoken of by Daniel," viz.: " the 
daily;" then, in the 15th verse, our Saviour speaks ofthe  
coming up ofthe other " abomination," and of its standing  
" in the holy place," viz., the church; or as Paul saith, 
" sitting in the temple of God." See 2d Thess. ii. 4. The  
mode of persecution is nowchanged; before, it was heathen,  
or pagan; now it is professedly Christian. Christians  
who lived previous to the coming up of this latter  
power, foresaw its rise, and were filled with terror at the 
thought. R. Fleming, of Rotterdam, writing previous to  
1693, on "The fulfilling of Scripture," says, on 2d Thess.  
2d chap., " The mystery of iniquity, even in the times 
of the apostles, did begin to work, and what for a time  
withheld his coming, the heathen empire of Rome, hath 
long since been taken out of the way, which caused some  
Christians, in those days, to wish the standing and continu-
ance of that empire, from the terror they had of that ad- 
versary, who, according to the word, they knew was to fill  
his room,''  
The end, then, spoken of by our Saviour, was the end of the  
"aailyor pagan abomination, under which the wars and per- 
secutions had been carried on, spoken of in the previous verses.  
Let me now show you the pcrfect agreement and harmony  
there is between Daniel, our Lord, and Paul. See Dan. xi. 30.  

f: 3  

" He shall return, and have intelligence  with them  
the holy covenant." Compare this with Matth. xxiv. 12, " Be-
cause iniquity shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold:" 
also 2d Thess., 2, " There shall come a falling away first." b  
Now, see again Dan. xi. 31, " They shall take away the daily." | 
Matth. xxiv. 14, " Then shall the end come." 2d Thess. ii. 7, M  
"He who now letteth [hindereth,] will let, until he betaken 
out of the way." See again Dan. xi. 31." They shall place the |  
abomination that maketh desolate." Matth. xxiv. 15, " When j  
ye therefore, shall see the abomination of desolation spoken of 
by'Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place." 2d Thess. ii. ; kf  
3, 4, 8—after the faUing away " that man  of sin" shall " be '  
revealed, so that he, as God, sitteth in the temple of God. Then  
shall that Wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume  
.with the spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the u  
I. ightness of his coming."  
Can there be any doubt here of the identity of the times, and  
of the characters represented by these three witnesses, our Lord, ,  
Daniel, and Paul? The harmony is too perfect to be over- • :  
looked. It seems  to me there can be no mistake—the agree- 
ment is complete. They are each, evidently, looking to the 
same events, and each explains and confirms the other.  
The way is now prepared for an examination of  
Verses 15 to 28. Our Lord here calls attention particu- 
larly to a desolation which was to extend down to, and be 
connected with the sians of his immediate appearance; and 
notices this desolating power particularly, because it would  
have a more important bearing on the interests of his church  
than any othft- matter that was to transpire before his com- 
ing. From the application of this part of the chapter to  
the destruction of Jerusalem, I am compelled to dissent;  
because, I have never been able to make such an interpre- 
tation harmonize with what appears to me to be truth.  
1st. Our Saviour calls attention expressly to the " abom  
ination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet;" 
and adds, " Whoso readeth, Id him understand." Under-
stand whit ? Why, that the abomination I speak of is not  
the " daily," but the " abomination of desolation." What 
is the abomination of desolation spoken of by Daniel ? 
Clearly, not the pagan abomination, as our opponents 
would have us think, under Antioehus Epiphanes, who  
died 200 years before our Saviour directed his followers to  
look for that abomination as still future; nor was it the 
« daily abomination," as most second advent folks hold;  
nor does a reference to the ninth chapter of Daniel prove  
that it is; for that chapter speaks of abominaHons,plural;  
whereas our Lord speaks of a particular abomination, sin- 
gular, and cautions against a misunderstanding. It has  
often enough been shown that the " daily," spoken of by  
Daniel, is not the Jewish sacrifices, but that it is the pagan,  
or continual abomination, and relates to a desolating power  
that should desolate the people and church of God till it  
should be " taken away," and there should come up, in its  
place, another power called the " transgression of desola- 
tion" [chap. viii. 13], and " the abomination that maketh  
desolate" [chapters xi. 31, and xii. 11.] Though they were  
both desolating powers, they are designated by different  
->ames, as we have seen.  
Now Jerusalem was not destroyed by the " transgression  
/ desolation," or the "abomina/ion of desolation spoken  
of by Daniel," but under the reign of the " daily" or pagan  
abomination. Then, the desolation, spoken of by bur Sa- 
viour, was not the destruction of Jerusalem.  
2d. The abomination of desolation was to be a " sign'  
to Christians; but it was to be so only when they should 
«see" it "stand IN the holy place." Where was the holy 
place at Jerusalem ? Certainly it was not outside the city;  
for that is nowhere called, in the Scriptures, " THE holy  
place." The holy place was not only in the city, bat in the  
> temple at Jerusalem. But that was not the holy place at 
i the time that wicked city was destroyed; for God had de- 
: parted from that wicked people,—Christ had ascended into 
| the true holy of holies, and the sacrifices which the  Jews  
I continued to offer in the temple were no better than the 
I heathen sacrifices; because the very offering of them, after 
1 the death of Christ, was a daily denial and rejection of the  
Lord of glory. But admitting that within the temple was  
I he holy place at the time of Jerusalem's destruction, the  
i Christians did not see the Roman or pagan abomination  
" stand in" it at the time they fled out of the city—the  
Romans had not yet entered the city ; besides, the Roman  
i or " daily" abomination never did " stand in the holy  
| place," for that was destroyed, immediately on the taking  
of the city, by the burning of the temple. How then  
! could that be a sign which in fact never took place, either  
before or after the Christians left Jerusalem 7  
' 3d. The connexion shows that the fleeing was of timore  

serif rat character than ofthose in the cityT "Neither  
him that is in the field return back to take his clothes,"  
v. 10. It looks like a general time of trouble to the  
church.  
4th. Apply this description to the destruction of Jerusa- 
lem, and it appears impossible to reconcile it with what is  
said in verse 21: "Then shall be great tribulation, such as  
was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no,  
nor ever shall be." How can this be true, if our Saviour  
was speaking of the TestructmroT Jerusalem? Surely  
the destruction of the old world by a flood was a greater  
tribulation, and also the overthrow of Sodom and Gomor-
rah ; and a greater one is still to come, when " the ele-
ments shall melt with fervent heat, and the earth also;  
and the works that are  therein shall be burned up;" when  
" all the proud, and all that do  wickedly, shall be stubble,  
and the day that cometh shall bum them up."  
5th. If Jerusalem's destruction is the subject of dis- 
course^^ fljjjflflygfcth* trnth or th* 99,1 verse. « Except  
[ Jlood" is one of the signs given us by Joel, to precede ' 
) " terrible day of the Lord." Has this sign appeared ?  
Tias. In addition to the bloody appearance of the moon,  
j-eady spoken of, in February, 1837, the whole face of 
,e earth seemed as though covered with blood, the snow  
aving exactly that appearance. And it is but two or three  
ears since the newspapers gave us an account of a shower  
>f blood that passed over some parts of Kentucky, which  
was the cause of much speculation at the time, and some  
! of our modern " magicians" pretend to account for it—at  
least enough so to turn off the eyes of men from seeing that  
' it was one of the SIGNS of " the great and terrible day of  
i the Lord," now at hand.  
" Pestilences" were to " be in divers places," Luke tells  
I us. Who has forgotten the terrible and desolating cholera,  

i  

Verse 23. " Then if any man shall say unto you, Lo,  
here is Christ, or there; believe it not."—" Then." When ?  
Under this Papal abomination. The Pope has claimed to  
be Christ's vicegerent, i. e., to be intrusted with Christ's 
power to pardon sins, and has "exalted himself above all  
that is called God." See 2 Thess. ii. 4.  
Verse 24. " For there shall arise false Christs, and false  
prophets, and shall show great signs and wonders; inso- 
much, that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very  
elect." Compare this with the Papal Beast, Rev. xiii. 13 : 
" He doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come  
down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men,«nd 
deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by those miracles  
. which he had power to do." See also Rev. xvii. 8: " They  
that dwell on the earth shall wonder [whose names were  
not written in the book of life." not"  the elect,"] when  
they behold " the beast," &c. Papacy has shown, or pre- 
tended to show, " great signs and wonders," so that some  
Tfiis p "elect" have been deceived by it, I have no doubt;  
fulfilled!must be true that there have been true Christians in  
The vicked church, though they would not have remained  
class or if they had not been deceived, any more than they 
is in th i remain in any other church that lords it over God's  
30; xx  
1 It is  
"O ge  
Our 

Vge.  
se 26. " Wherefore, if they shall say nnto you, Be- 
he is in the desert"—in places of seclusion from the i  
I xxiii. —" n°t forth : Behold, he is in the secret cham- '—convents—nunneries—" believe it not."  
S that has passed over almost the entire world within the past  
I twenty years ? If that is not a fulfilment of that prophecy, 
I it is difficult to see how it could be fulfilled.  
' " Earthquakes in divers places" was to be another SIGN.  
J Not to  mention the many shocks which have more or less  
affected various places, look at the one felt at St. Domingo  
[ the past year, in which a whole city, of some ten or twelve 
J thousand inhabitants, is swallowed up, and a mere handful 
I of souls saved from the ruin.  
All the signs our Saviour spoke of as preceding his com- 
I ing have appeared, and the next thing to be loohed for is 
| the « COMING" of the " Son of Man in the clouds of heaven I  
I with power and great glory." This appearance, it is true, 
1 is to be  preceded by its " sign," v. 30. But what is that  
| sign ? I pretend not to know with certainty, but perhaps 
2 we may get a clew to it from Numbers xxiv. 17: " There 
| shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a SCRPTRE shall sPok 
| arise out of Israel, and shall smite the corners [or, as the " si?n 
| margin has it, 'through the princes'] of Moab, and de-
| stroy all the children of Sheth," or the wicked.  
A " Star" was the SIGN to the wise men of the East at  
our Saviour's birth: may not the " Sceptre," or sign of  
Royalty, be the forerunner of his second coming ? He  
Jcomes to set up his everlasting kingdom, having been into  
a far country to receive" it, and is now to " return," when  
his " enemies, who would not that" he " should reign over  
them," shall be SLAIN " before" him.  
What is the sign of Royalty ? One sign would be a mul- 
Ititude of attendants; and we should expect to see them 
roc/ore the Prince appeared in sight. The Lord Jesus is  
to be " revealed from heaven with his MIGHTY ANGELS"—  
they are his attendants, and the SIGN  of his Royalty; and  

they si e 27th verse teaches us that when Christ comes, it will 
when ; such a manner we shall none of us have occasion to 
an eVr on the subject, for his coming will be as  the light- 
peared —sudden, and visible to all. 
should™ 28. "For wheresoever the carcass is, there will  
air," e :agles be gathered together." This verse may refer to  
dignai doodthirsty character ofthe Papal power. See Job  
19-2127-30. Papacy, like the eagle, " seeketh her prey,  
But her eyes behold afar off;" her devotees " suck up" the  
>od" of the saints ; and " where the slain are there is  
' carrying on bloody persecutions,  
this interpretation does not satisfy, take another. The  
e is led to her prey by her appetite; so when Ckrist  
es, as the lightning,  men will be divided according as  
signilr affections are on things above or things on earth. If  
r hearts are on Christ, they will fly up to meet him, as  
prophet Isaiah saith, xl. 31: " They that whit upon  
Lord shall mount up with wings as eagles," while the 
ced shall remain to be burned up with the objects of 
r affections, i. e., earthly things,  
o the interpretation I have given of the 15th to the  
verse, the 21st of Luke, 20th-24th verses, may be  
d as an objection. It will be seen that Mark uses  
ly the same language as Matthew. Luke wrote after, 
his gospel records points omitted by the other evangel- 
Now, admitting that our Lord did speak of Jerusa- 
ljoil 's destruction, as recorded by Luke xxi. 20,1 conceive  
jj s >es not affect my argument on Matthew; for it will be  
,l> that the language differs from both Matthew and  
j.1 k : the latter having called attention to the " abomina- 
w of desolation," which is no other than the papal abom- 
. ion. My own opinion is, that Luke records an ex- 
r,a ! ;sion of  our Lord omitted by the other evangelists,  
hallraay refer t0 Jerusalem or il maJ' I01 > it does>  f "th only by glancing over it to the main object, the deso- 
, >ns of his church under the abomination of desolation ;  
I ' ihe testimony of TWO WITNESSES settles the point that  
r?.!°.U1as THAT abomination, and not the "daily" abomina- 

1 in the  
• word  
; New 
j trans!  
I gressi  
away  
their  
Oi  
eratii}' 
conn  
shou  
are  
clow  
V<:  
«!,_„__„ a i , • , , v , as THAT anominauon, anu not ine -nmj  
aPP-"r' «°TKING VHANTH,F LU0RD .?f Gl0/y is [Son; nor yet are BOTH abominations included;  for our Lord  
r : s5a"aJ1 lhet"b" ^e 1 uses the singular, abomina/t'oTi, and designates which one  
I and 1 i ft "p " h ei r head s," wh fclTd^n ot es Vy'oiclng, fort h eh' ^ * ^ ^ " ^  
" redemption draweth nigh." Blessed day to them ; they 
have passed through " great tribulation;" the end of their  
sorrows has now come: but the wicked will "mourn"— § 
the day of mercy now is over—their scoffing is now at an  
end—their wicked, insulting language to high Heaven, say-
ing, " Where is the promise of his coming ?" &c., is now  
turned to lamentation; for the insulted Son of God has  
come in his own glory, and the glory of the Father, with 
his holy angels. "The great day of his wrath has come"  
to his enemies, and the enemies of his people.  
Verse 31. "He shall send his angels with a great  
sound of a trumpet [see 1 Cor. xv. 52], and they shall 
gather together his elect from the four winds, from one g  
end of heaven to the other." What a glorious meeting  

readeth, let him understand." By Jerusalem, then, in Lake, 
" understand the same that Paul in 2 Thess. ii. 4, calls  
e.temple of God," i. e., the church of God. By its be-
"compassed about with armies" [not army], I under- 

m ias  
s V.temple of God,"  
T, "compassed about _ ...  
id the civil power, in the hands of Papacy, wielding  the . - 
"°nn rd, hunting the church, the true children of God, to put ; 
„nv, m to death. As though our Lord had said, " The abom- .-f 
,,,/ tion of desolation will stand up in the church and pos- ^  
s power to command kings and their armies; and when £  
P i see him thus stand in the church, know that the deso- ' -tj , >  
on thereof is nigh—then fee—yea, depart out of it, for  
eth has then become Babylon; then come out of her, my 
W*ple, and»let none enter into it." 1  
IfjTThe " wrath upon this people," I understand not the 
!'lath of God," for the wrath was upon the fleeing people,  
Jhd of course was the wrath of the persecuting power, or ^ . f  
he abomination of desolation, Papacy; j^e thisjwwer *


away  
mrnmm\mmm  
Of the treading under foot spec.nea; the j Tuesday evenin,r of^ various papers  
exactly corresponds with Luke,'tnai » JT h Gen. '! western part ot Newjom, ana i same wlth  
cording to Luke—the church w as^^^ , ^ What ances in the IdvoSe aBd To^mal of Sept. 13.]  
u Kon»fitPd hv the  directions to flee, if of Sept. 4th, and Christian Aavocaw^ ^ ^ onjcI.I  0 De Deiieilicu j Ci.»al« Yiiit s> H  

h-C' ftii«"by the sword, and" were " le 
TJ This exactly agrees with what we  
T33 should befall Christians under the  
tion, i. e, « They shall fall ^ weTee Luke seen, and especially within "aiuLpMar, of  
captivity, and by spod many day^ Tims we ^^ ^ lQ the propheCy of fire m* p  
and Daniel agree perfectly. Again. J** J » jm0fce." „ v.. ... ,nd  
j lem shall be « o ^e Rev ator says, Rev. xi. The foUow5ng article is in  
of the Gentiles be F™ g®„u,es] TREAD UNDER 'BE seen in the New York ttisLoXarticle  
2: "The holy city snail J IWE J,AVE the TIME 22D, 1S39. " The phenomenonflesc I  " and on the same  
FOOT FORTY AND TWO MONTHS^ HERE ^ $Q , ^ BY TY, ,Y,;  H,NRYJO3*S,F « ^^ ^  
^Xco^svZ*  w!S T3E the one explainsthe  j ^^^^X/S^StJ^  by various  papers  
3'ther, and without this 
tiles," in Luke, would 
Further, Christians w  
cording to Luke—the 
ness," according to t  
Chris,tians were to ^^oFdi^ouTse ? Surelybuta 
old Jerusalem was the subject oi oi ^^ ^ that time. £  
mere moiety of the whole c^— and but of  
We know not that any ofthe objector,«lie  
comparatively few Christians. it ^ de- m  
irrJ^^ ** TS 3  
Why, " Joseph us." And how did |pwphns know that"all  
the Christians fled" al that time ? Strange that Jwepbus  
| j had so much knowledge as to know every vdiriwdCtoa- 
tian in Jerusalem, and know they all fled ! -he must have  
i been almost I strongly suspect it was the ut- 
• TLB HORN THAT HAD EYES," « spoken of by Daniel the  
! prophet," that ^ all the Chnsti^s^^fleemgoutofJeru-
\ Ijaleiii : and that it SAW THAT just as it has seen Anl.o  
h Epiphanes" as the LITTLEHOUN ; i.e.. Papacy must  
fini shing to which to apply the "abomination of  
desolation" of which our Saviour spake, Matt, xxiv., ana  
3 it conjured up old Jerusalem, and Christians fleeing out of  
to urn off eyes from itself; and Protestants have been  
} deceived by it, just as they have about Antiochus, and with  
just as good evidence, in my judgment.  
Vene 26. " Immediately after the tribulation of those  
I Mn " Mark says, «In those days, after that tr.bu- 
latLn " &C„ " shall the sun be darkened," &c. I under- 
stand 'this to be a literal event, or sign of Christ's coming.  
Jiow elaCh does the history agree with the prophecy!  
I those da; s," i. e., the 1260  allotted to the « abomina- 
; ! tion of desolation," and yet after the tribulation tf t e 
I church, from that 'power, had passed, the sun was Me al y  
| darkened. In 1780, May 19, the  sun rose clear-at ten  
o'clock, the horizon began to be darkened, and at twelve,  
I people 'had to light candles to dine-laborers kft he fields 
I: -the fowls retired to roost-and a feeling that the judg-
F1 me ill day had come rested upon many minds.  
: i he mom shall not give her light." The darkness not  
| only continued through the day, but the night fbl owing 
| till "past midnight, though the moon was at the full. Such 
• was .he darkness, that a sheet of white paper, held within 
| a few inches of the eyes, was equally invisible as the black- 
1 est velvet." An eye-witness says, that when the moon first  
I : became visible.it had precisely the appearance of blood. .  
The prophet Joel, ii. 30, 31, says: "I will show wonder  
. J3 in the heavens and in the earth, blood, and fire, and pillars , 
k:L - of smoke. The sun shall be turned into darkness and the ; 
1$: moon into blood, before the great and ternble ^V of the, 
Wm Lord come." We have seen that this prophecy has been r 
W fulfilled so far as the sun and moon are concerned i ,  
« be said, " This darkness can be accounted for upon natura .  
m nrin . es'' I reply-it never has beendone; but if it cou d .a.  
piiuui'its,  ' 3 ., P _ caul it should mc  

The way is now prepared for an examination of  
Verses 15 to 28. Our Lord here calls attention particu  
larly to a desolation which was to extend down to, and be  
9 connected with the sizns of his immediate  appearance; and  
notices this desolating power particularly,  because it would  
have a more important bearing on the interests of his church  
than any othCT matter that was to transpire before his com- 
ing. From the application of this part of the chapter to  
the destruction of Jerusalem, I am compelled to dissent;  
because, I have never been able to make such an interpre- 
tation harmonize with what appears to me to be truth.  
1st. Our Saviour calls attention expressly to the " abom- 
ination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet;"  
and adds, " Whoso readeth, let him understand." Under-
stand what ? Why, that the abomination I speak of is not  
the " daily," but the " abomination of desolation." What 
is the abomination of desolation spoken of by Daniel ? 
Clearly, not the pagan abomination, as our opponents 
would have us think, under Antiochus Epiphanes, who  
died 200 years before our Saviour directed his followers to  
look lor that abomination as still future; nor was it the  
" daily abomination," as most second advent folks hold;  
nor does a reference to the ninth chapter of Daniel prove  
that it is; for that chapter speaks of abomina/iorw,plural;  
whereas our Lord speaks of a particular abomina/ion, sin-
gular, and cautions against a misunderstanding. It has 
often enough been shown that the " daily," spoken of by  
Daniel, is not the Jewish sacrifices, but that it is the pagan,  
or continual abomination, and relates to a desolating power  
that should desolate the people and church of God till it  
should be " taken away," and there should come up, in its  
place, another power called the " transgression of desola- 
tion" [chap. viii. 13], and " the abomination that maketh  
desolate" [chapters xi. 31, and xii. 11.] Though they were  
both desolating powers, they are  designated by different  
->ames, as we have  seen.  
Now Jerusalem was not destroyed by the " transgression  
/ desolation," or the "abomination of desolation spoken  
of by Daniel," but under the reign of the " daily" or pagan  
abomination. Then, the desolation, spoken of by our Sa- 
viour, was not the destruction of Jerusalem.  
2d. The abomination of desolation was to be a " sign"  
to Christians; but it was to be so only when they should  
" see" it " stand IN the holy place." Where was the holy 
place at Jerusalem ? Certainly it was not outside the city;  
for that is nowhere called, in the Scriptures, " THE holy  
place." The holy place was not only in the city, but in the  
temple at Jerusalem. But that was not the holy place at  icioles I reply—it never has beendone; DUI H « ICMYIZ UI JC.US«ICM. - 
; IC'!,es' thp fHct Our Saviour said it should mos the  time that wicked city was destroyed; for God had &  
>7 11 f** 11 J ,1 nS sav it could i be accounted for tha parted from that wicked people,-Christ had ascended into  
e r Ithasaken place as he said; ling: the true holy of holies, and the sacrifices which the Jews  
upon natural pnncipus. ii nas imcn . , , . :„ ,„or« ™ Wtor than the 
nor is there any evidence that such an event ever transpired  
before, since the crucifixion,  till 1780.  
« Fire and pillars of smoke," says the prophet Joel.  
Has this sign been seen? It has LukecaHj.it 'fear- 
ful .sights and great signs from heavm." Jte  
Borealis, or Northern LigMs, are a perfect fulfilment <A this  
nrophecv. But it is said, " They are no sign of the  end of  
the world, for they have always been." But where, I ask,  
is the proof that they have always been t Who can find a  
particle of ancient history in support of tiiat idea ? It is 
true that some modern writers have asserted that there is ,  
but have they been able to put their finger on such ancient- 
ZiMu history? If so, where is it? Till they produce - e , before or after the Christians left Jerusalem 1  
' weshali'dcnv'that there is any such history in existence. 3d  i r jwj, • •'•>* "'  

continued to offer in the temple were no better than the  
heathen sacrifices; because the very offering of them, after 
the death of Christ, was a daily denial and rejection of the  
Lord of glory. But admitting that within the temple was  
I he holy place at the time of Jerusalem's destruction, the 
Christians did not see the Roman or pagan abomination  
" stand in" it at the time they fled out of the city—the  
Romans had not yet entered the city; besides, the Roman 
or " daily" abomination never did " stand in the holy  
place," for that was destroyed, immediately on the taking  
of the ciiy, by the burning of the temple. How then 
could that be a sign which in fact never took place, either  
or after the Christians left Jerusalem 1  
The connexion shows that the fleeing was of &more  

tfthe great God is gi 
fiend of the world. GodwHlnever give such men signs that  
Jthey cannot scoff at, till the last sign,  that of the Son of  
IMan coming in the clouds of heaven ; but then it will be 
Itoo late, and they are lost for ever.  
] " The stars shall fall from heaven." This is another  
Jsign of the near approach of Christ and the end of the 
| world. The Revelator says, chap. vi. 13: " The stars of 
[heaven fell unto the earth, even as a fig-tree casteth her un- 
timely figs, when she is shaken of a mighty wind." Has  
|this sign been seen ? It has. Nov. 13th, 1833, was seen 
J precisely such an appearance as the Revelator describes. 
(Though " shooting stars" have been seen at other times, 
|so far as known, nothing of this kind was ever seen before  
11779. The atmosphere was literally filled with falling stars, 
| shooting in every direction, answering exactly to the  de- 
scription in Rev. vi. 13. If that was not a fulfilment of 
the prophecy, it will be difficult for any man to show how  
I it ever can be fulfilled.  
" Blood" is one of the signs given us by Joel, to precede  
I the " terrible day of the Lord." Has this sign appeared ? 
| It has.  In addition to the bloody appearance of the moon,  
I already spoken of, in February, 1837, the whole face of  
the earth seemed as though covered with blood, the snow  
having exactly that appearance. And it is but two or three 
years since the newspapers gave us an account of a shower 
of blood that passed over some parts of Kentucky, which  
was the  cause of much speculation at the time, and some  
of our modern " magicians" pretend to account for it—at  
least enough so to turn off the eyes of men from seeing that  
it was one of the SIGNS of " the great and terrible day of  
| the Lord," now at hand  
"Pestilences" were to "be in divers places," Luke tells  
_s. Who has forgotten the terrible and desolating cholera,  
j that has passed over almost the entire world within the past  
twenty years ? If that is not a fulfilment of that prophecy,  
! it is difficult to see how it could be fulfilled.  
" Earthquakes in divers places" was to be another SIGN.  
! Not to mention the many shocks which have more or less  
affected various places, look at the one felt at St. Domingo  
the past year, in which a whole city, of some ten or twelve  
} thousand inhabitants, is swallowed up, and a mere handful 
i;of souls saved from the ruin.  
All the signs onr Saviour spoke of as preceding his com- 
ing have appeared, and the next thing to be looked for is  
I the COMING" of the " Son of Man in the clouds of heaven  
with power and great glory." This appearance, it is true  
is to be pffceded by its " sign," v. 30. But what is that  
sign ? I pretend not to know with certainty, but perhaps  
we may get a clew to it from Numbers xxiv. 17 : « There  
shall come a Star out of Jacob, and a SCEPTRE shall spoken of wer  
arise out of Israel, and shall smite the corners [or, as the 
margin has it, ' through the princes'] of Moab, and de- 
|i/ro?/ all the children  of Sheth," or the wicked.  
A " Star" was the SIGN  to the wise men of the East at  
our Saviour's birth: may not the " Sceptre," or sign of  

ot the children of God !—they meet to part no more—nif 
to share the purchased inheritance with their ONCE SUFFER-
ING but vow GLORIFIED Lord and Saviour. O blessed 
state ! O glorious hour ! Reader, would you have a part 
in it ? Hasten, then; make no delay to be reconciled to 
God—"kiss the Son," lest you "perish from the way" 
when his "wrath" shall be kindled by your obstinate  
slighting his mercy.  
Verses 32, 33. " Now learn a parable of the fig-tree :  
When his branch is yet tender, and putteth forth leaves,  
ye know that summer is nigh: so likewise ye, when 
ye shall see all these things, know that it is near, at the 
door." wa^^^^^Kmmm  
Just as certain as we can know the approach of summer  
by the putting forth of leaves, just so certain we may know  
that the coming of Christ is now at the door.  
Verse 34. This verse is supposed to form an objection  
to the foregoing application, and to fix the meaning of our  
Lord to events to transpire in that age, because he says, i  
" This generation shall not pass till all these things be <  
• 'fulfilled."  
The term generation is applied not only to an age, but a  
: class or race. First, to the righteous, see Ps. xiv. 5 : " God  
is in the generation of the righteous." See also Ps. xxii. 
30; xxiv. 6; and lxxiii.  15; also 1 Pet. ii. 9.  
It is also applied to the wicked as a class. Matt. iii. 7:  
"O generation of vipers." See also Matt. xii. 24; and j 
xxiii. 33 ; and Mark viii. 38; and Luke xvi. 8.  
Our Lord was speaking to his children,  and telling them  
they should be gathered unto him in the clouds of heaven | 
when he should come, but tells them not to look for such  
'an event till all the signs he had given them had first ap- f7  
peared; then, and not till then, ihe generation of saints  
should be " caught up together, to meet the Lord in the  
C' air," and thus " pass away" from earth, while the last in- 
' donation is poured out upon 'he wicked. See Isaiah xxvi.  
19-21.  
But after all, the difficulty in this text is not so much  
in the term generation as in the word "fulfilled."  The  
j word translated fulfilled  occurs forty-eight times in the  
I New Testament, and ia only one other connexion is rt  
| translated fulfilled,  but is a word which signifies "pro- j  
• gression"—" accomplishing"—" not completed." A nd here  
1 signifies that before that age or generation should pass  
away, the chain of events spoken of should commence  
; their'accomplishment. .  
Once more': the expression may signify, that the gen- 
eration living when the last mentioned signs, viz., those |  
j connected with the sun, moon, stars, &c., should begin, .  
should not pass away till the whole of the signs there |  
n of were fulfilled and Christ should come. Those;,  
signs commenced in 1780, and are now all fulfilled. ^ hatM^  
are we to look for next ? The Lord Jesus Christ « tn  the*W"  clouds of heaven." |H  Verse 26 This verse is supposed to form another objec- |  _ : "  lion ; aniTwe not unfretpiently hear persons say, " Christ  
What is the sign of Royalty ? One sign would be a mul  
I titude of attendants; and we should expect to see them  
before the Prince appeared in sight. The Lord Jesus is 
to be " revealed from heaven with his MIGHTY ANGELS"— 
they are his attendants, and the SIGN of his Royalty; and  
they may first appear, showing that the Lord of Glory is 
at hand, now coming: " Then shall all the tribes of the 
earth mourn:" not the saints;—for thej are to "look up, 
and lift up their heads," which denotes rejoicivg, for their  
" redemption draweth nigh." Blessed day to them ; they  
have passed through " great tribulation ;" the end of their 
sorrows has now come: but the wicked will "mourn"— 
the  day of mercy now is over—their scoffing is now at an  
end—their wicked, insulting language to high Heaven, say-
ing, " Where is the  promise of his coming ?" &c., is now  
turned to lamentation;  for the insulted Son of God has  
come in his own glory, and the glory of the Father, with 
his holy angels. "The great day of his wrath has come"  
to his enemies, and the enemies of his people.  
Verse 31. "He shall send his angels with a great  
sound of a trumpet [see 1 Cor. xv. 52], and they shall 
gather together his elect from the four winds, from one  
end of heaven to the other." What a glorious meeting  

day and hour knoweth [in' the present time; not ' never 
shall know'] no man," &c. Of what day and hour ? Clear- 
ly the day and hour when the'Soii of Man will be revealed.  
Well, I know of no man that pretends to know the day or 
hour of Christ's appearing ; I am sure I do not. " But, do  
1 you not believe the world will come to an end in 1843 ?" Cer- 
tainly, I do : but I believe also that our Lord will appear  
before the end of the world; for there must be Some time  
after the Bridegroom comes for the wicked to cry for mercy  
. and find none, before the final conflagration of the world.  
Hence Christ may appear now any hour—I know not how  
, I soon.  
But again : let the objector be true to his principles  j do  
no't let him flinch when he is tried; he says: " Our Lord's 
words authorize him in saying that no man shall ever know  
anything about Christ's appearing till he actually comes as  
the lightning." Very well; now let him carry out his 
principles, and he proves that Christ himself will never  
know anything about it till he finds himself here.'! For 
our Lord says, Mark xiii. 32: " Of that day and hour know- 
eth no man, no, not the  angels in heaven, NEITHER THE  
SON." If the objector is now afraid to follow out his  
principles,  let him acknowledge he is mistaken in his in- 
Si' 
•Hi  mmmtn  

terpretation of the words "no man knoweth j" for, if it is  
\ ' • r •'  \ - -. „ „  _ _ „


/C that no man ever shall know, it is equally true that  
i (he " Son" never shall know. Nor can he escape from the  
difficulty by saying, « Christ did not know it as man, for it  
is e «Son of Man" that is to appear « in the clouds of  
eaven and I as* again, if he is never to know any hmg  
ZTthe time of his appearing, till he finds himself hen ?  
The fact is, the time was given of the end of the world [in  
the book of Daniel, but Daniel was comman ed hap^u. 
4, "Shut up the words, and seal the book to the itmeo/  
ithe end » and at the 9th verse Daniel is told, « The words  
are closed up and sealed till the time oftheend i" and ton  
ik is added verse 10th, "Many shall be purified and made  
white and tried; but the wicked shall do w.ckedly; and  
C ofte wicked  shall understand .- but the wisesnaU«n- 
Eir-when ? In " the time of the end.' Thattime  
•has come And, besides, our Saviour says: "When ye  
lee «U these things [viz. the signs he had given them],  
PSOW that it is near, at the doors." Now whe, gwes  
4 "Christ the lie," we, who have seen all the s gns, and  
Renc be ieve our Lord's words, and -know it is a he  
•doo" or our opponents, who declare we can know nothing  
ffi^^ -SiWdays of Noe were, so also 
BLhah the coming of the Son of Man be. For as in to days  
1 that were before the flood, they were eatm§ anddnnkin  
I uiarrvins and giving in marriage, until the day Noe en  
Ie J o the ark, and knew not until the flood came, and  
Eookthem alf awa'y; so also shall the coming of the Son of  
MTWhJ'" knew not ?» Not Noe : for he was "warned of  
ILtf'120 rears before, and being "moved with fear, pre- 
| pared ™£Z to saving of his house," becausehe be  
t lieved God. But why did not the wicked world taww  
Rot because they had not been warned, but because they  
EiSSf Noe had warned them, and done it prach- 
•rrbT u ding the ark; but they doubtless counted  
Wi l faliy fk a madman—called his notions all  
»'molE" and a « humbug:>' and the philosophers,  
| doXS reasoned wisely, at leastin their own elation  
Band made it dear as the  sun that there ^s not wate  
; enough in the world to " cover the tops of 1to» htfMjj  
g mountains;" and Noe was an «ignoramus,' or he would  
I Z talk such "nonsense :" and then they would laugh at  
I E m when the time had passed by Thus men were dek  
Kbed-the flood came and took them aU  
Mewew it not till it was upon them; so will it be when Christ  
h. Piled. Alas! deluded mortals, you will be undone ad 
W r La will not know it till it is too late for help. Your teach 
llC cannot save you in that day ! No, they themselves wil  
I Jcry in vain, « Lord, Lord, open unto usbut toy, too, cry  
\Z late All is lost—and their eyes are open only to see  
if -?eir niin and the ruin of their deluded hearers. That  
f(j 1 Cl day'will surely come-laugh and scoff as you may- 
R 1/ it will overtake unbelievers as a thief.  
||t F ,e 40 and 41. « Then shall two be in thefield; to  
m one shall be taken, and the other left. Two, shal be, grind- 
I in- at the mill; the one shall be taken, and the other left.  
If * Luke xvTi 34-36. It is said: " I tell you, in that night  
1 there shall be two in one bed, the one shall be taken, and  
the other left :-Two shall be in the FIELD ; the one shall  
Ku. bp taken, and the other left."  
M Thus it appears it will be night in some parts of to 
Hi ieartb and day in others. There, a pious wife, who has  
•Sued the scotrs of a wicked husband, will be taken, and  
Bjte'will be  left; or a pious husband'will be taken, and a  
ft persecuting wife will be left .—there, a pious brother is  
\ 1 taken and a wicked sister left-or a pious sister is taken  
> and a scoffing brother left .—there, a godly parent,  
I whose prayers, counsels, and entreaties have all been  
disregarded, is taken, and the wicked child left-or pious  
children are taken and ungodly parents left .—there, the  
1 little babes,—Ior they will all go up in that day,—are  
U ® taken from their wicked parents' arms, and those parents  
, 1 Hire left /-LEFT !! LEFT!!! Left to what ? Not to the 
t _„., i^in that will ever run for glory,  
\ left to the burning day: " For behold the day cometh  
that shall bum as an oven; and all the proud, yea, aU  
that do wickedly shall be stubble : and the day that cometh  
shall burn them up, saith the Lord of fcorfi, that it shall  
leave them neither  root nor branch." Yea, " The slain o  
i the Lord shall be at that day from one end of the earth 
\ 5 even unto the other end of the earth: they shall not be la-
A ' mented, neither  gathered.  nor buried ; thev shall be dung  P'V  
t;  

toSki day, wh, will you '"»?!? I /II  
of the call of God! « Prep.ro to.m. £ tk• "g K 
persist i. .in, I  &S;JS™2i.—«MKNED,N  |  
THE FIRE." an exhortation to I  
' Verses 42 to 44. inf e verb ^ t0 Hg|M  
duty-to«watch —to " be ready. J»m« |  
« Christ's coming at death.' But )Ae ttnpi } flf tw0 |  
speak ofChnst conung a death Theyjea^ y  ^  
us to look for no other coming of Christ than tms.  
Ki! we are exhorted to watch and be ready. . . 1  
faithful servanus se for He is . ^ I  
warded': ^erifrAf^K you, that he shall make him 11  
^i^rterc the evil servant is described. •11  
" MyrL°;d Can t'come yet"-« Must be a |  
ise of his commg ? c ^ a temporai;  0r ;  
gathering ^J^^Ifcan't  come these thousand years  
spiritual millennium  — ^ _ <( N choiarin the .  
y6t-; AUetveStPi^^woridSco^toanend next "J  world can believe maimc AL- ' V  
April. It is utterly KVB M  
Sn, as reported in  
UTTERED!" L»eeijr.what nextBegin  
1 the New York Herald Novembe,^ ™ f J  
to smite fellow-servants; i- hiimbu"." &c. Then I ?j|  they are preaching « moons nne numo g, ^ |  
nhaM"  I  m  
ungodly men love ; and they eea on , ex. M  
wicked crowd to hejnjjJ —J^J be giJa f M  fng P must Suffice: A minister in Massachusetts, by H  this; one mustsuffice^A^ ^ ^^ ^ a teaiperanc, |  
the name of u. a , instChrist's coming and ^  
lecturer, was invited to ^^Chh.a^e universalists. After ;•  
J6 e"d loughte;twe^,SSywerpyeased,one  of them •  
'he gT- Iten dollar bill; another, after praising the nun-\W  
gave l^ a tejdoUar bni, ^ tQ give, but lf you |  
ister, said to mm. I wilt TREAT  YOU JUST AS •  
Wlll go to to tavern W.II^EAT ^^ ^ I  
r°fr nd for wkkedVrum-drinking men, and as truly t |  
T /di wUh the Sunken as though they sipped the  
eat and drink with tne a sinner awakened f  
intoxicating bowl. You never Chrjst,s com. »|  
But many who had |  
ing and the end ot the wo by the «terror' of ;|  
been aroused from their smmis by If  
(he Lord's coming, .^Vt ikelv sleep on till the I  
these evil servants, wd wdl most^ii^y to see that they W  
thunders of the las trump wU1 because »  
I have " be luveda It«^Shey miShtbe saved," but §  
they received«not the truth uiat ) 10-12. -f  
hadpleasurein unngl^^J?^* the doom of •  
r^ilSSw for Wicked men, and®  
those evu servants wno ((T, L d f that servant shall ^  
hour that he is not aware of, and shall cut him asunder, m  I 

and appoint him HIS PORTION with the HYPOCRITES; g  
there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth."  
Now, reader, this is perhaps the last address I shall ever  
give you. I feel that our Lord standeth at the door. Be- 
yond a doubt, in my mind, the NEXT great prophetic event ^  
is the sounding of the LAST TRUMPET, the coming of Christ 
to raise his sleeping saints, change his living ones, " melt the elements with fervent heat, the earth also;" and BURN ||  jup THE WORKS THEREIN. That will be " the DAY OF  •(JUDGMENT AND PERDITION OK UNGODLY MEN !"  

' i  
iiiSferl4  
D  

END OF THE WORLD THIS YEAR 1! N  
/y |  
• SOME TIME in the course of this year, being one thousand  
Kjeight hundred and forty-three years from the birth of our  
ggSSaviour, one thousand eight hundred and ten years from  
phis crucifixion,  and two thousand three hundred years from  
||1 t"e going forth of  the commandment to restore and build  
f RJerusalem, I expect to see what Daniel saw, viz., " One  
l^like the Son of Man," who "came with the clouds of  
: ; heaven'and came to the Ancient of Days, and they brought  
him near before him. And there was given him dominion, '  
gjand glory, and a kingdom, that all people, nations, and  
I- languages, should serve him: his dominion is an everlast- 
mg dominion,  which shall not pass away, and his kingdom  
»_Uiat which  shall not be destroyed." Daniel vii. 13, 14.  
fPThis year I expect to see that day come, spoken of by Mal- 
»|achi the prophet, « That shall burn as an oven ; and all 
I the  proud, yea, and all that do wickedly, shall be stubble;  
Hpand the day that cometh shall burn them up, saith the Lord 
gof hosts, that it shall leave them neither root nor branch."  I 

This year I believe all the saints of God will hear the last 
trump; that trump whose unearthly sound shall rend the 
heavens and penetrate the lowest caverns of the earth; 
that trump which shall awaken into everlasting life the 
sleeping dust of every righteous son and daughter of Adam 
that has ever lived, and change, instantly, the mortal body 
of each living Christian, and clothe and crown him and 
them [the raised ones] with immortality and eternal life. 
This year I believe will "be brought to pass the saying 
that is written, Death is swallowed up in victory. 0 death, 
where is thy sting ? 0 grave, where is thy victory ?" .  
I believe these events will  transpire this year, because  
aniel's vision, which embraced all the important events in  
;he world's history, from its commencement down to the 
;nd of time, terminates this year; and the angel Gabriel  
iiold Daniel that all the wonders which he had "seen in the  
P: vision would be consummated in 2300 day?, or years.  
And I reckon days as years, because that was a common  
method of reckoning prophetic time among the Jews; and,  
moreover, we find, by pursuing this mode of reckoning,"  
that all the intermediate events which were to transpire  
between the commencement and termination of Daniel's  
vision, were fulfilled  in precisely the same number of years 1  
as Gabriel said there would be days in their accomplish-
ment. The streets of Jerusalem were to be built in trou- &  
blous times, and t« be finished during the first seven weeks ^  I 

of the vision. Well, we find that in just 49 years, the &  
exact number of days that there are in seven weeks, the ^  
walls of Jerusalem were completed,—having been com- | 
menced by Ezra, and finished by Nehemiah. Then the fc 
next portion of the vision mentioned by the angel, to wit, 
the threescore and two weeks unto Messiah the Prince, S  
were fulfilled  in just the number of years that there are £  
days in 62 weeks, at the baptism of'our Lord by John, fej  
when his Messiahship was distinctly announced by an au- 
dible voice from heaven, and by the descent of the Holy  I 

Ghost in the bodily shape of a dove, and lighting upon him.  
But the grand event—that event which the angel informed  
Daniel was to fix God's everlasting seal to the whole vision, :' 
and make it sure beyond the power of man to gainsay—  
that event, the angel said, it was determined should be fnl- %  
filled in seventy weeks "from the going forth of the com- It.  
mandment to restore and to build Jerusalem." That  
event, Daniel was informed, would be the cutting off' of y  
the Messiah the Prince. Accordingly,  I commence at that .  
f event, which,  remember, was to seal the vision and make it  
sure, not only in its great whole, but  in all its parts and ^  
.; divisions—I begin, I say, at the crucifixion,  and Teckon 1  
back 70 weeks, in which there are just 490 days, and what |  
do I find ? I find the identical thing which the angel lold % 
Daniel should form the starting point of the vision, viz., |9  
the decree of Artaxerxes to restore and to build Jerusalem. tJS  
Here, then, is the sealing event of Danel's vision fulfilled, xjSH  
according to the chronology  of the Bible, in just 490 fears, H  
reckoning a year a day. From this, I think, we are fully sfl  
authorized to reckon the whole vision by the same rule: He  
and therefore, just as surely as that Christ was crucifiedyB 
490 years from the going forth of the commandment toH  
build Jerusalem, just so surely will tlie whole vision be ful-H  
filled in 2300 vears from  the same period. Those 2300 years®  
will expire THIS YEAR, 1843 ! [—[Voice of Warning.] H  

.. .'' \  4 - dis place to make thy md desolate -, ani  
I  
25 therefore is the anger of the' LORD kindled %  
against his people, and he hath stretched forth hk $!-,  
Jjjv hand aaainst them,and hath smitten them: and the  
hills did tremble, and tieir carcasses were torn in the -fe,  
midst of the streets. For all this his anaer is not j N 
turned away, tmUiis JwatHs-stretelied cut still. M  
Hi 26 IT And he will  lift up an ensign to the nations j£v  
•from far, and will hiss unto tnem iroin the end ot  
t)»e eat,h; and heboid, they shall come wiUi speed O  
'} 29 Their roaring i/iaii'  ™ liie si Ifon/tiifey'srSi '  
roar like young lions: yea, they shall roar, and lay r 1  
hold of tlie prey, and shall carry it away safe, and r" 1 
none shall deliver it.  
i - w, u.u»i. Vj kiiVt>u,u  bw^reo, ^, . .. ; v  
A ND the word of tlie LoRDcame unto me, saying,  
2 Son of man, put forth a riddle, and speak h '  s  
parable unto tlie house of Israel; v  
3 And say, Thus saith the Lord GOD ; A great eai •!  
g wings, long-winged,  full of feaUiere, J  
which had divers colours, came unto Lebanon, and  
took Uie highest branch of the cedar:  
4 lie cropped otf the top of his youne twigs, and v  
earned it into a land of traffic; he set it in a city uf *  
merchants. jB  
5 He took also of the seed of the land, and planted i'l  
it in a fruitful field; he placed ie by great waters  
and eet it as a wiltow-tiee.  
HGr'oKn^. Tralse up Uie Chaldeans, that bitter Wi  
hasty nation, which shall march through tlie breadthi)®  
i: ! of Uie land to possess the dwelling-places  t.'iat ai-c*j  
i 7 They art terrible and dreadt'id: their judgment®!  
and their dignity shall proceed of themselves. 9  
8 Their horses also are swifter than the Icopard.s.aH  
and are more fierce than the evening wolves : and|H 
their horsemen siu> 1 spread therruelves, and tlicirSH 
horsemen shall come from  lar; they aiiali fly as tlie3£a  • that liaste'.li to eat.  

N  
48 I hen the heaven and tlie earth, and all that  
therein, shall sing for Babylon: for the spoiJerssiiaj 1  
come Unto iier from toe north, saith the LORD *  
49 As Babylon hutk, caujjetftheslain of Israel tofcivjl  
so at Babylon shall fell the slain of all the earth B  
50 Ye that have escaped the eword, go away, stare*  
not still: remember the LORD alar off and let JE-AIL  
salem come into your mind.  
51 We are confounded, because we have heard re-1  
proadi: shame hath covered our faces, for strangers V  
we come into the sanctuaries of the LOAI/'A house  
^ VV herefore behold, the dayscome^aidithe LORD'  
that I wdl do judgment uponher graven imaijes: an if  
through ;UI her land the wounded shall groan. I  
AS Though Babylon should mount up to heaven, and $  
tnougli she should fortify tlie height of hei strength S  
yet tromine shall spoilers com* unto her, saith ti® 8  
LORD. *• i  
54 A sound of a cry comethpom Babylon, 'md era: ii  
destruction from tbe land ofUie Chaldeans: 1  
55 Because the LORD hath spoiled Babylon, and de ri  
stroyedoutof herth«great voice: whei;berwa\ea do f1  
'ike great waters, a noise of their voice is uttered- ?<  
56 Because tbe spoiler is come upon her, <n>«i upoii P  
eabylun, and her mighty men are taken, every one 13  
olthejr bows is broken: for the LORD God of recotn- ii 
penses shall surely requite.  
N

OW it caAie to pafs, in the days  
of Alnfi-t ras, /this is A'nafuenis 
xvliifli  reiijnrd from India even ^jS  
untc Ethiopia; ever an luindred  
and leven and twenty proviiK t",)  
5 rh.it in iltofe davs, when the kinc A- 
ifnerus lat on the throne of his kinga<  
A- 
,0111,  . .  
which -witi in SliUlhan the palace,  
! 3 1 n "he tli'rd year of his reii;i\_, he made a  
-itc \ft ttirro ail liis prinrfs, and Ins fervanrs:  
• "'.the powvrcf I'eHfa and Media,the nobles and  
nrini.es of rhr*firovinces,  bcl ' r — ' '  ],$,•. i - $: a® -:  

m  
' he&reJiim:  
- m •  
w  
• >K.  
sHS  HBBbdi  iHHHi  
Wr


that no lmn ever shall know, it is equally true that  
fc' t Crshall know. Nor can he escape  from the  
Jffiaultv by"ring, « Christ did not know it a. man," font  
pfeiiitl  The fact is, the time was given of the end ot the worm  
-xfKNOW that it is near, at the doois «oj 5 
f B«rhnst the lie," we, who have seen all the si3ns, anu  
•lenSe ieve our Lord's words, and -know it is a he  
or our opponents, who declare we can know noteg  
of Noe ,ere SO also  
I Lhall the coming of the Son of Man be. For as; ini Ae days  
Hiha were before the flood, they were eating anddnnkmg,  
feSSSS&ts  
Not Noe: ^ h« ms « wned »f  
f%od» l'O ve.rs before, and being «,moved «'h  
Krlkr tSSS^ 
•fetSL fctad ..W, but because the,  
too b, build,ng the h„ nolions ,U  
(Ann . —^ ,he philosophers,  
]j i •»•' Tt'M tQ6" cover the tops of the highest  p enough in thejorld_to c ; „ „r he „ouM  
Ilb™  
t I HC.-V in vain, " Lord, Lord, open unto us;" but they, too cry  t  A €1 ", ' a 11 is ]0st—and their eyes are open only to see t  iff; >okte. All is MM " hearers. That ,  
if ted^Cu -d/ re-laugh and scoff as you may- ,  

VIM  will «TfltV?e,«SnaSshaaS two be in the field; the '  
r on Xu be'ten/and thither left. Two.shalllb.grind- j!  
11hereshall'be twotn ILT the one shall be taken and  
111 the other leftTwo shall be ia the FIELD; the one shall 
illl) he taken, and the other left." f , 
M Thus t appears it will be night m some parts of the  
t|f Ae'will be left; or a pious husband will be taken and a  
fl I persecuting wife will be left:-there, a P'ous bother is  
I 9 taken and a wicked sister left-or a pious sister is taken  
I •• and a scoffing brother left .-there, a godly parent  
1 whose prayers, counsels, and entreaties have all been 
I disregarded, is taken, and  the wicked ch. d /^-or p.ous  
1 children are taken and ungodly parents^.•-here, the  
1 n- little, babes- for they will all go up in that  
1 , fttakea from their wicked parents' arms, and those parent  
f pre left /—LEFT !! LEFT!!! Left to what ? Not to the  
I I mxt cars, for the last train, that will ever run for glory,  
H Ihas gone—GOBE—GONE for ever!! I Left to what ?- 
I STthe burning day • '< For behold the day cometh  
I fha Id bum as an oven; and all the proui yeai M  
I) hat do wickedly shall be Rubble and the day hat cometh 
j i shall burn them up, saith the lerd o/ Ao^ ih hall  
J 1 leave them neither root nor branch." Yea «The slain ot  
I \ the Lord shall be at that day from one end of the earth  
, even unto the other end of the earth: teyshallnotbela  
men ted, neither gathered, nor buried: thevshal be dung  

•upon t , a m  
*< Left®  
LrthaMfl  
of the  
persist  
of lim< I  
THE  
' Fen  
duty^J  
" Chri  
jjspeakpj  

$ •• ':'/• if .  
H - v  
wise s  
know';f,  
« hear- 
him. a  
comet],  
warde  
ruler 1  rerl  
jFirst fe  
« MY  
!jise ofjjp  
gathei  
spirit^ 
yet."J  
world  
i April11"  
IMIGF  

4 ! - 
EMMANUEL MISSIONARY  
COLLEGE  
MEAL CHECK  
mm  

V1 .»•- J  

r„ 1 • ^ ra In  
P&f }•:• V ; • I  
•  
Verse 4.  
THE FIRST WAS LIKE A  
LION, and had eagle's wings;  
beheld till the wings thereof  
were plucked, and it was lifted  
up from the earth, and made to ,  
stand upon the feet as a man, g| 
and a man's heart was given to  
m  

m -ifi  
7 The lion is :ome up from his tlucket,and\  
(lestrnyer of the Gentiles is on his way ; he is gone  
, rorth from his place to make thy land desolate; and  
Sy_cltleii s6a11 ,ai't waste, without an inhabitant.  
m  •m  
REMARKS.  
The lion represents the firs  
.ingdomof the four. No other  
.ipplicatioa is ever made of it 
but to Babylon, the same king- 
dom that is represented by the 
head of gold in the image. Its  
connection with the people of  
God commenced B. C. 677.  
f  
Verse 5.  
AND BEHOLD ANOTHER I  
BEAST, A SECOND, LIKE TO  
A BEAR, and it raised up itselft  
on one side, and it had three! 
ribs in the mouth of it between'  
the teeth of it; and they said^ 
thus unto it, Arise, cfevourr  
I much flesh.  

25 therefore is the anger of the LORD ^.,. ...,.1  
against his people, and he hath stretched forth his  
hand against them, anil hath smitten them: and the •  
hills did tremble, and their carcasses were torn in the •  
midst of Uie streets. For all this his anger is r 
lumed away, but 1MSstfetehedml still.  
26 IT And lie will lift up an ensign to the nations  
from far, and will hiss unto tnem '.roiii the end ot  
, the earth; and behold, they shall come with speed  -> :8wifttjr: , m  
MB 29 'Tlieir roaring ^oir^tiSe a I«ih; tliey'sriail  !'•  
• roar like young lions: vea, they sliall roar, and lay  
hold of Hie prey, and shall carry it away safe, and E  
Mi none shall deliver it.  jSjl 4 " mi MW-VJ tnVHWO tugHM, • • 1 •  
\ ND Uie word of the LORD came unto me, saying. •  
2 Son of man, put forth a riddle, and speak a8|  
parable unto the house of Israel;  
3 And say, Thus saith the Lord GOD ; A great e&  
gle with great wings, long-winged,  full of feathere,  
which had divers colours, came unto Lebanon, and  
took the highest branch of the cedar:  
4 He cropped off the top of his young twigs, and  
carried it into a land of traffic; he set it in a city uf 
merchants.  
5 He took also of the seed of the land, and planted  
it in a fruitful field ; he placed it by great watere,  
and set it os a willow-tree.  
- li l or lo, 1 raise up the Chaldeans, that bitter andX  
hasty nation, which shall march through the breadth 'F 
of the land to possess the dwelling-places  t.'iat arctf  
not theirs.  
7 They are terrible and dreadful: their judgment  
and their dignity shall proceed of themselves. "  
8 Their horses also are swifter than the leopards.:  
and are more fierce than the evening wolves : and 
their horsemen sh? I spread thenuelves, and ihnir 
horsemen shall come from far ; they shall rty as the.  
I eagle ihat Miteth to eat. 
•MMBMUMMMI  
1  
The bear corresponds with  
•j the breast and arms of silver in  
1 the image, and represents the  
kingdom of  the Medes and Per- 
.1 sians. Persia superseded Bab- 
ylon, and became connected  
I with the people of God before .  
1 Christ about 538.  

I i-fv  • ' j  

48 Then Uie heaven and the earth, and all that is J  
therein, shall sing for Babylon: for the spoilerssliaii  
come unto Iter from Uie north, saith the LORD •  
49 As Babylon hath, caused the slain of Israel to£&&  
so at Babylon sliall &H the slain of ail the earth.  
50 Ye Uiat have escaped the sword, go away, star)  
not still: remember the LORD afar utT, and let Jer  
salem come into your mind.  
51 We are confounded, because we have heard re- 
proach : shame hath covered our faces, for stran°ere  
are come into the sanctuaries of the Load's house  
52 Wherefore behold, the days comeysa itli the I KJRS* jjf}  
thattwilldo judgment nponher graven images: and i'* thrtM|hdl^heHand the wounded shall |roan. ™  
though she should fortify the h«ightof herstreng^ 
yet from me shall spuileis come.u;ito her, saith the  
54 A sound ofa try cometh from Babylon, and »r-at;  
desuuetion from the land ofthe Clialueans: ° "  
55 Because thel,oRD hath spoiled Babylon, and de- 
stroyedoutof her the great voice: when her waves da 
roar like great waters, a noise of tlieir voice is uttered:  
56 Because the spoiler is come upon her, e«c«. upon  
Babylon,and her mighty men are taken, every ono  
™ tlieir bows is broken: for Uie LORD God of re'coin- 
, penses shall surely requite.  
0\V it i.^ne ti> pafs, in the d.iys  
of A*iinfix  rus (this ii ffiafuerus  
which teijjned from India even  
un:c Etliiopia', over an hundred  
and f't-ven  and twenty provinces,)  
? Thtl in tliufe (Iv s, when the kint, A- 
Iiafuerus fat on the throne of  his kingdom,  
which -.Mi in Slmilian the palace,  
^ In ihe third year uf liis reii;n, be made a  
ifi- ifl unto all his princes, and lus'fervali»:  
(•the jKiverofl'erffa and Media,the nobles and  
•H-irn.es of tWe^rovinces, hcjlttt before livp:  
II


I is the « Son of Man" that is to appear in t  
,4, "Shut up the words, and seal ^e book to t^e Umc /  
thi end ;» and at the 9th ™ ^hen  
are closed up and sealed jU thetoy tf and mad  
it is added verse 10 h, Ma J P wicke(]ly; and  
white, and tried; but the wicKeu s  
•KNOW that it is near, at  the doors. now, s  H-wAi • . lip "we who have seen all me signs, mm K« Christ the lie, we, ™ . . t the  
RUif  
- p e» asiJtfE^  
•God" 120 years before, and being mov be.  
I rt Gof Bet wh?dK* the wTcke'd world know it?  
•fL no/ believe. Noe hadwarned them^^^  
too, by building the ark butjhey .ons aU  
Rf» V^^- toSS^Sd the philosophers,  
1 " moonshine, and a JMrmrog estimation,  
• doubtless, reasoned wisely, at least m he nQt water  
K and made it clear as thesun that mere  
K enough in the world to «,eove^g^JS *»te Jould  
& mountains;" and Noe was an ujwwewe^ ^  
i not talk such "nonsense :" and then they wo *  I 

1 ?e O/ tiJ i was upon them; so will it be when Christ  
be *ftt in some parts of the  Thus it appears «win g who has  ^edtJeS 6 ^ 
fe'wlll be left; or a pious husband will be taken and a 
lersecutine wife will be left .-there, a p.ou,.brother a  
aken and. a wicked sister /e/*-or a pious sister is taken  
ind a scoffing brother left:-there a «odly parent  
jwhose prayers, counsels, and entreaties have all been  
| : -iLegarded, is taken, and the wicked ^''^/^rp.ous  
. US:- children are taken and ungodly parents V  
mUtle babes,-for they will all go up in that day are  
\ • taken from their wicked parents' arms, and those parents  
If1 wkwt left /-LEFT !! LEFT !!! Left to what ? Not to the  
1 Zi JL, for the last train, that will ever run for• gJory,  
has eone—GONE—GONE /or tvtr!!! Left to what!  
I : • teftTthe burning day : « For behold the day cometh  
' that shall bum as an oven; and all the proud, yea, all  
) , that to My shall be rffce: a^d the day that come h  
shall burn them up, saith the hall  
1 leave them neither root nor  branch." Yea, Jeja  i \ the r 0, j shall be at that day from one end ot the earin \ \l ~ evetfunto the other end of the earth : they sbaJ notbe£  jnented, neither gathered, nor buried : tfati shall be aun„  

persist  
it, Isa. . ;  
"of limi K  
THE iWijliNp^ i  Vert '  

St' P  
ofthe:  
persist, I  
iit Isa :.'v- >I ^H |. (i ' I . ; ^  
luty- • I 
« ChVlJl 
speak  

I wMKWuw  
if ,  ^ :. - 
m v. m  
Hp  '  
E wiSi  

'•Cj,':- 
/ . 
m;  m,  
him. v f  
comet •; '-ii  
warde ;  
ruler HH  
Vtrm  
First E^m  
|ise ot':-. ,  
spirit!, g 
yet.", (  

M M  
' Si  
worlj ^  
AprilH  
MIGft  
UTTE:  
the N  
to smi 'j  
they \ ,  
whatf;  
literal 5  
to do 1  
ungof  
i wick | 
I tollial  
J this ||  
the ri |  
lectuijT „ . «  
W  
gave v  
Iter :  
d i  

W. wf m  • . • • •• •  
Mr®? i  
Wtg&m  •1  MM  
£ pi  

PKH  
Verse 4.  
THE FIRST WAS LIKE AM  
LION, and had eagle's wings; 1 j®  
beheld till the wings thereof •  
were plucked, and it was lifted .  
up from the eai tb,  and made to ^ |H8wB  
stand upon the feet as a man, M  
and a man's heart was given to I  

7  
REMARKS.  
The lion represents the first I  
kingdom of the four. No other t  
| application is ever made of it I  
but to Babylon, the same king- I  
dom that is represented by the | 
head of gold in the image. Its i.  
connection with the people of|  
God commenced B. C. 677.  
Verse 5.  
AND BEHOLD ANOTHER -I  
J BEAST, A SECOND, LIKE TO FJ  
A BE AR, and it raised up itself 1  
Ion one side, and it had three!  
,j ribs iu the mouth of it between 1  
the teeth of it; and they said8 
thus unto it, Arise, devour!  
much flesh.  

ZJ Uon 13 c°me up from his thicket, and .  
ileatroyer of die Gentiles is on his way ; he is gone  
torth from his place to make thy (and desolate; and  
inhabitant  
25 Therefore is the anger of the LORD kindled  
S - against hi? people, and he hath stretched forth hi»  
,"t hand against them, anil hath smitten them: and the •  
hills did tremble, and their carcasses were torn in the "  
midst of the streets. For all this his anger is not  
turned away, hut lis -haHd-itf-gtretehedtfuf still.  
26 IF And he will lift up an ensign to the nations  
from far, and will hiss unto tnem irom the end ot  
j. • the earth; and behold, tliey shall come with speed  
- v swiftly:  
29 Their roar'ing shall be like a lion, tliey'siiali  
roar like young lions: yea, they shall roar, mid lay if  
hold of tlie prey, and shall carry U away safe, anil! 
none shall deliver it.  
___ - — vj SAFNWTOJIW,  
A ^UUie word of the LORD came unto me. saying,  
-r* 2 Son of man, put forth a riddle, and speak h  
parable unto Uie house of Israel;  
3 And say, Thus saith the Lord GOD ; A great ea  
gle with great wings, long-winged,  full of feathere,  
which had divers colours, came unto Lebanon, and  
took the highest branch of the cedar:  
4 He cropped off the top of his young twigs, and  
carried it into a land of traffic; he set it in a city of  
merchants.  
5 He took also of the seed of the land, and planted  
it in a fruitful field; he placed it by great waters,  
anil set it as a willow-tree.  
: ti' K)no"l raise up the Chaldeans, that bitter and^SH  
hasty nation, which shall march through the breadth'];'  
' of Uie land to possess the dwelling-places  that aj-e|5  
; ! not theirs.  
1 7 They are terrible and dreadful: their judgments  
and Uieir dignity shall proceed of themselves. '''R9J  
8 Their horses also are swifter than the leonards,5®|  
and are more fierce than the evening wolves: andffiS''  
their horsemen slip 1 spread themselves, and UieirjM 
horsemen shall come from far; they shall tiy as the.jgj  
:!e \:kal hasteth to eat  
I  
m  L  
48 I hen the heaven and tlie earth, and all that is FT  
therein, shall sing for Babylon: for the spoilersBliaJ St i1'"  
comemito iier frum Uie north, saith the Loan. * 1  
49 As Babylon h ath cuused the slain of Israel  
to at Babylon shall fhH the s)«m ofoii „„.,u  
50 Ye that have escaped tht  
lot still: remember the LOR  
salem come into your mind.  

— j "" • • ^utwcuiucajiimoi  Israel to[t til l  
so at Babylon shall fhH the slain of all the earth. Wl ,  
50 Ve that have escaped the sword, go away, star ' 4  
; not still: remember the LORD alar otf, and let Jenifll  saleui come into your mind.  
51 We are confounded, because we have heard re-H'W"  
proach: shame hath covered out faces. for strangers ® " 
arr««??» inw the sanctuaries ofthe Umn house. . 8  
52 Wherefore behold, the dayscome^aiUithe  Lona  
that I will do judgment upon her graven images: and' ¥ H 
through ;ilI her land the wounded shall groan. -  r:  
.53 Though Babylon should mount up to heaven, and vii  
tnough she should fortify Uie height of her strength "  
yet Irom me shall spoilers come unto her, saith tl» ^ 1 
LORD. 1  
54 A sound of a cry comethbom Babylon, and er-Mi I  
destruction from the land ofthe Chalueaii's: 1  
55 Because theL,oRD  bath spoiled Babylon, and de- 1  
stroyedoutof her tlie great voice: when her waves da 4 
n^rljkeg^at waters, anoise of their voice muttered-1  
56 Because the spoUer is come upon her, cuen upon  
Babylon, and ber mighty men are taken, ever, una ffl.  
ofthe/r bows is Broken: for the LORD God of rt?coin- -a^li  
penses shall surely requite.  
.  
•>\v it came to pafs, in tlie (lays _  
of Aiiafiu-rus,  (this is Ahafuerus f-jj  
OgHMHB  
The bear corresponds withl  
=! the breast and arms of silver in J  
j the image, and represents the ;  
; kingdom of the Medes and Per-1  
sians. Persia superseded Bab- 
ylon, and became connected!  
with the people qf'God before  
Christ about 538.  

•I muui'rrus, ^LIUS IJ NNMW IUJ  
vlikli reigned from India even  jl. H unto Ethiopia; ever an hrnid'-ed  and lrven and twenty proVinres)  ? Ttut in iliofe ila; when tlir king A- liafniTUs fat on tlie throne of his kingdom, which IT';!! in 51iuflian the palace,  
n I iv the tli5rd year of his reign, he made a  
tc ift unto ad his pfinres, and hi. fervaiii i*.  
• die pnv-erotTcrlb and Med;a,the nobles and  
winces of br^rovinces, bcjyt liefore-iiim: ,  
v  
Mfc*


Verse 6.  
After this, I beheld, and lo, i  
KG ANOTHER, LIKE A LEOPARD, j  
®, which had upon the hack of it  
(g 'bur wings of a fowl ; the beast  
had also four heads; and do- 
W minion was given to it.  

Verse 7. |  
And after this I saw in the night vis- 
ions, and behold A FOURTH BEAST,  
J DREADFUL AND TERRIBLE, AND  
I STRONG EXCEEDINGLY; AND IT  
1 HAD GREAT IRON TEETH ; it devoured  
! and brake in pieces, and stamped the  
|residue with the feet of it: and it was  
tj diverse from all the beasts that were be-
| fore it; and it had ten horns.  
I The leopard corresponds with  
j the belly aud thighs of brass in  
J the image, and represents '* the 
j third" or Grecian kingdom. 
| The four heads and wings de- 
note the four parts into which  
: -:... the kingdom was divided after  
U, the, death of Alexander. The  
gff Grecians conquered the Per- 
ffc 3'ai3, and were connected with  
11 f'le People of God about  331  
' B. C.  
gg  n  /  
i  

23. Thus he said, THE FOURTH BEAST SHALL  BE THE FOURTTH KINGDOM]  
[UPON EARTH,which shall be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the]  
.whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces  
B 1. The fourth kingdom oj JLfaniel.  This I  
I we claim to be the Roman. In this view we j  
I have the support of the ablest and most 1  
Hji judicious expositors of every age. William ]  
I Cunninghame, Esq., of England, an eminent i  
II expositor, in speaking of the four parts of the m  
| great image of the dream of Nebuchadnezzar, 1  
| says, that they " are respectively applied by i  
flj Daniel himself to four Kingdoms, which have, 1  
1 by the unanimous voice of the Jewish and §5  
1 Christian churches, for more than eighteen 1  
m,-- centuries, been identified with the empires of i  
j Babylon, Persia, Greece, and Rome." Should H  
| this be questioned, the witnesses are abun- 
dant. In the Jewish Church, we have theT&r- 
9 And they sung a new songj 4S  
saying, Thou art worthy to take || 
the book/ and to open the seated ' ;  
, thereof; for thou wast slain, and  
deemed us to God by thy ||  
of every kindred, and*pl  
ition; i.{'  
V  
iii u  
/  

; <)i c J  { ri KfU^^  
m\- , - .fitaiSBI l  O^TFFRS ^FMFIF^PARE TEN ^KINGS^HAT SHALL G T^ER «  ARISE ;  
T.—Yes, this is a clear undisputed fact in L  
history, and for authority I would refer to Mich-' 
avel, Mede, Bp. Lloyd, Dr. Hales, Sir Isaac 
Newton, Bp. Newton, and Dr. Scolt. They wet e  
established as follows,viz : 1. The Huns, in Hun-
gary, A. D. 356. 2. The Ostrogoths, in Mysia.  A.  
D. 356. 3. The Visigoths, in Paimonia, A.'D. 378.  
4. The Franks, in France, A. 1). 407. 5. The  
Vandals in Africa. A. D. 407. 6. 'ihe Sueves, 
ana Alans, in Gascoigne and Spain, A. D. 407. 
7. The Burgundians, in Burgundy, A. D. 407.  
8. The Heruli, in Italy, A. D. 476. 9. The 
Saxons and Angles, in Britain, A. D. 476. 10. 
The Lombards, in Germany, 483.  

The Pope has assumed fifuTftgffi to depose  
and set up kings at his pleasure: sethis loot on  
the neck of one: made another  hold his stir- 
Ac.  
• • :•„ •.  
The monster, so dreadful and terrible  
that nothing could be found in the whole 
domain of nature to express its charac-
ter, corresponds with the legs of iron in  
the image, and represents the fourth or 
Roman kingdom. The conquest  
Macedonia, the first division of Greece  
conquered by the Romans, took place B.  
C. 168, a few years after which Ro- 
mans became connected with the people  
of God. The most generally received  
date (for the division of the Roman Em-
pire is A. D. 476.  
Verse 8.  
I considered the horns, and behold,  
THERE CAME UP AMONG THEM AN- 
OTHER LITTLE HORN, before whom  
there were THREE OF THE FIRST  
HORNS PLUCKED UP BY THE ROOTS;  
and behold, IN THIS HORN WERE  
EYES LIKE THE EYE9 OF MAN, AND 
A MOUTH SPEAKING GREAT THINGS.  

T ,n {the kingdoms remained undisturbed until '|  
I t», } - 'A. D. 493, which was ten years from the time  
j C i of the establishment of the last of the ten, when  
J'jl* I"' t.' -j the Heruli, in Rome and Italy, were conquered  
L hv the Ostrogoths. Then in A. D. 534, the  
:Uv k  

by the Ostrogoths  
Vandals were conquered by the Gredfcs, for  
the purpose of aiding the Romish church. In  
A.D. 538, in the month of March, the Greeks  
conquered the Ostrogoths, in Rome and Italy,  
and immediately after this, the supremacy of  
the Bishop of Rome was established.  
ANOTHER SHAI  
p  
BHr • :  

m  ft* I'-fi  
t,»»7 '.%tr  
2. The little horn of 'ihe seventh. This Ave .  
•— hold to be Papacy. This is no novel view of ;  
^11* 9 / sy^ol, being, as it is, the view of then  
r'j '' whole Protestant world. See Dr. Clarke's 
'JuPL ' Jl, Notes on 2 Thess. ii. chap., Croly on  the  
• gj Apoc., pp. 113—117, Home's Int., vol. A., p.2  
191, Watson's Theol. Die., p. 62, G. T. Noel.  
Prospects of the Church of Christ, p. 100,  
i William Cunninghame, Esq., Political Dest.  
P jof the Earth, p. 28, Mede, Newton,  Scott.  
/ Daubuz, Hurd, Jurieu, Yitringa, Fleming,  
^ Lowman, and numerous others of our best  
j standard _exnosj toes- • 
HHB


A  
-Cy  t-0 ( t; at.- <••>• n:  t*  
V  

Uf" TT T 
w*fm.1  
</U  
.. This youta™ learn from tne JustinianH  
code, which you will find in almost every law- 
yer's office, where Justinian delivered, or sub- 
jected to the authority of the Bishop of Rome,  
J 'all the priests of the whole east," A. D. 533.  
* and in 538 subdued the Ostrogoths in Rome,  
$| when his decree of the first named date took!  
[affect. i _____ 
'(•jMKHHHHHIHHa  

ay, in prophecy, is used as the repre-l  
sentative of a year: for example, see Numbers 
14: 34, Ezekiel 4: 6. And in the place in|«  
question, the time, times and an half, must be-- 
>nken as the sy nbol of 1260 years, from the?  
very nature of the events foretold, as the most *  
I able commentators are agreed. The fulfillment  
of the predictior  
that amount of  

""•'•""""'"I.VIO <  
the predictions, applying to Papacy in* ,'list  
time, m connexion with the  
ch  
:-a< V  
fart  
T. Thus the prediction has been faithhilly  
rJ  fulfilled;  for in the month of February, 3798,  
land 1260 years from the time the Bishop oi  
1 \Rome came into power under the Justinian  
JL-de, General Berthier, by order of the French  
^public, entered Rome, took the Pope a pnso- 
' Iner overthrew the above named code of laws,  
Ustablished a republic, carried the Pope a cap- 
®>e to France, where he died, a prisoner and  
in exile.  
Jr. d^rke  refers to the same period thus :  
" In 1798, the French republican army, under General  
Berthier. took possession of the city of Rome, and EN- 
TIRELY SUPERSEDED THE WHOLE PAPAL  
POWER. This was a DEADLY WOUND, though at  
present it appears to be healed, but it is hut skinned 
over, and a dreadful cicatrice remains."—.See Note on  
Dan. 7 : 25.  
In a chronological  table, at the end of" General His- 
tory, Ancient and Modern," by Alexander F. Tytler, we 
find the following items :—  
i 1798. The Papal Government SUPPRESSED by  
the French. The Pope quits Homo Feb. 2fi.  
1799. Death of Pope Pius VI.  
? 1800. The new Pope Pius VII. restored to his govern- 
j ment, by the Emperor [Napoleon]. July 25.  
1804 The Pope arrives at Fo'ntainbleau, and has an  
interview with Bonaparte. November,  
i 1808. The French troops enter Rome, and seize the  
Pope's dominions. February.  
1810. A decree was issued, uniting  Rome to France.  
'Feb. 17.' .  
1813. A decree of the Spanish Cortes, lor abolishing  
the inquisition  in Spain, was carried into effect. April.  
•Rev. George Croly, of England, a learned and accur  
ate writer, in his work on the Ap.calypse, published in  
11827, says:  
"On the 10th of  February, 1798, the French army under  
Berthier; entered Rome ; took'possession of the city, and  
made the Pope and the cardinal prisoners. Within a  
i week Pius VI. was deposed ; Rome was declared a  lie- 
I public : the tree of liberty was planted ; amUhe city and  
the states were delivered up to a long series^)! the deep  
. ^•C"  

, ••• win) tne  
ggabove examples, should be considered clear  
11 proof. Indeed, it would be skepticism to reject  
such eviden ce as this.  
.t is the scriptural mode of reckoning;  
..n Gen. 7: 11, and Gen. 8: 4, you will seel  
that it wa* five months from the time the flood 
commenced till the ark rested. This time is 
called 150 days in Gen. 7, 24, and Gen. 8, 3,  
that is 30 days to the month. We might give  
other proofs, but this will answer. A time is  
12 months of 30 days each, or 360 days; times,  
or two times, (as is here made out,) is 720 days; 
half a time is 180 days: in all, 42 months, or 1260  
davs, so that John and Daniel perfectly agree.  
^stmlS^requ^nt^miTitary murders' ana tne gener  
al injury and degradation of the feelings and property ot  
all classes of the people. Pius VI. died in captivity.  
Pius VII„ was dragged across the Alps to crown Napoleon,  
was held in duress, and was finally restored only on the 
fall of the Prench Empire. The papal independence was  
abolished by France, and the son of Napoleon was de- 
clared King of Rome." See also Thiers' French Revo- 
lution, Vol. 4. p. 246.  
We have not room to refer to the multitude of other  
writers who give the same date, but will simply glance at 
a few illustrations of the /ocUhatthe dominion is gone.  
The following is the language of Pope Pius VII. in his  
instruction to the papal nuncio at Vienna, issued 1S05. |  
We copy it from " Tracts on Romanism," publiShe'd by j 
the American Tract Society, p. 53, of the series, and p. j  
33. of "Romanism contradictory to the Bible," Tract No. j 
255:  
The pope there declares that the church had establish- 
ed, as the penalty of the crime of heresy, the confiscation  
and the loss of all property possessed by heretics. " rl o  
be sure," his holiness goes on to say. "we are fallen into  
a such calamitous times, that it IS NOT POSSIBLE tor I he  
1 spouse of Jesus Christ TO PRACTICE, nor even expe- 
' 'dient for her to recall HER HOLY MAXIMS OF JUST ,  
RIGOR against the enemies of the faith , but although 
SHE CANNOT EXERCISE HER RIGHT of deposing  
heretics from their principalities,  and declaring thtm de-1  
prived of their property," &c. &c. &c.  
Here we have the Pope's owp testimony that the do- f  
minion had departed in 1805.  
Another striking testimony i JSn a volume entitled "An ,  
Introduction to Christianity." by J. Sutcliffe. It'.wasj  
published in this country " by J. Soule [ now Bishop] Mid \  
T. Mason, for the Methodist Episcopal Church in the  
gt>- - r'ftffMttStfirSsrW'• •j 'fj  

{SPJWffl^. •.'r'JPH'Tr.ll  
united States." We copy from the edition of 1817, "Se^; - 
cond American from the secondj(impiovedj English' 1  
Edition," p> 151.  It had, therefore, been exposed to j j  
rigid examination.  
'The two theusand three hundred days; that is, |  
years, of Daniel, for the God of heaven to set up an If  
everlasting kingdom, and cleanse the sanctuary, are  ex-1  
pired, or nearly so, Dan. 8 : 13, 14. Likewise,'the fall of H  
the tenth part of the city by a great earthquake, and the |  
slaughter of the seven thousand men, seems to have 9  
been STRIKINGLY  ACCOMPLISHED by the French revolution, A  
Their bidding defiance to the powers of the pontificate Jffi  
was sudden and unexpected as an earthquake, and at- -M  
tended with the slaughierof more than a million  men. I  
The aggrandizement of this empire, and the titles assum-fB '  
,ed by Bonaparte, emperor of France, and king of Italy, |  
are declarations to the world, that THE TEMPORAL H  
POWERS OF THE POPE  EXIST NO MORE. There  
need he no more disputes about the doctrine of the two 
swords. His holiness, now, is of little more consequence  
to the church, than that of a degraded priest granting  
absolution to the crimes of France. The reformed  
hurches have uniformly considered this empire as that  
enth part ot the city, aba it is sufficiently evideiTTEev  
were not mistaken, for none of the Protestant nations  
were emancipated with suOli  
tions."  

HiiBi  
IMS  IIS  
.•'••"•a  
- 

^Hpr ...  
nnnHnHr  
Wf/M*.  ^  
.1 I I - 
J- ?  
great political cornrno-'  
The author's introductory address was dated 1808.  
As an index to the present position of the Pope, read  
he following,anecdote  from the Liverpool Albion.  
of ih« -Wh" had bepn stl0cked at ^e desecration 
ot tlie Sabbath in France, mentioned the subject to "His 
Holiness." The Pope assured the Quaker that he w as  
no ignorant ot the open violation of the Sabbath in  
SSKS tXUp!"ply anXi0US that il shfluld he< ^ ought/Tcept holy. I he time was when the Dersnn 
WS,!?$T°fSt P,i"r' °°"ld ^interfere 
KINCS £L f0re,gn Slates> and vvhen EMPERORS, IVLNGS, AND ! KLNCES, ATTKNNKD TO THE BUK8T* OF THE  
VATICAN ; bui the times had changed ; he could not now  
SffiS AOTfioWT* to&Z  
\See also th" PoPe'* letter dated Sept. 18,1840, publish.  
:n the last Midnight Cry, in which he says :  
'You well know, Venerable Brothers, how great are  
sfdcTTUkwhlChthe Cath0lk  CM " ^set on  afflicted." ^ SOrrowfulaS'> ^how pitifully she  
..I,'h6^*not <°t> shameful!) compelled to  
Sto'SS fnem,CS 01 the and  
vie knin?  ,acts' Venerable Brethren, which not  
but you are witnesses;  
^ >ou as your pastora  
£llcrX i y n° means S,Ienf- are >'et ^veiled 
t^nz^ these propagators of  

mmlmi ^  
ift  
*  
t P  
: 1 - '  
yf  
.vi-l^v  
,, • • pBNH^^HKerm i n a ted his existence, on  
•jjB 29th of August, 1799, in the 82d year of his age, and  
of his Pontificate."—Book II. Chap. 4. pp. 222 223  
I f  
......  ><<


. /  

m .3- propUafcETclearly- reveal that after the rlomi- 
°vtr 1,K: tolits, of the Papal kingdom should be  
tafcen away, according to the proof above, it would  
then, through policy an! craft pfcfcper, (Dm. viii.  25,)  
or prevail against tli ; saints until the Ancient of (lay(  
c,"» 'j Vii. 21. 22.) aud would in its last »  
iii"iit.s, before, it final destruction, minify itself h '  
-leart, (Dmi. viii. -j}.) <lr say in heart, I sit a queen, an:'  
'am uo widow,  and shall see no sorrow. Then shall h •  
plagues come, in one day death, and mourning, and fa  
mine; anl she shall be utterly burued with'fire: Foi  
strong LS the Lord G >.1 that j ulgeth h«r. Rev. xviii. 7, 8  
Under the long and bloody reign of l\ipay. until'it  
Loinimou over th?? «:iiuts was taken away, it made wa- 
igaiusc an.I put tit;* sauitaJrf drith. by virtue of its civi  
IH'wer; but since {he loss of that power it ha* onlv 'pn- 
against the saints W pdlicy craft.  This i  
If,11!" «"ode of wnrfiire, to be .carried on liy the lam  
HH > Ivii.g'l-'ui.  agtui.,? r-i ana i! i^nly to cease will.  
B'»e "naf destnGijoifnl- this km-dom. at the  coming o  
B8fjAncient of days. Dan. vii. 21"22. An 1 2 Thess: if. 8.  
•V,; ll"w caadirfty ask every observing mind, have these  
M :,r 'phecies. concerning this las', state of the Papal kius;- 
I-4T their 'hllihnent/ Stubborn facts say" the"  
t;:| rjBve, excepting those which relate to its destruction a  
|:s fjf actual coming of the Lord. In proof we offer tht' 
K&gfj toUswiug filets.  ( 

>It is only about fifty years sineejho first Papal Set  
wuS created by the Pope in these United States.  
It is now estimated lint there arc in this country  
2,0:19.009 of Papists under the government of the Pope.  
@H| and.that the annual increase is about 150,000,  
lucre is now mi Archbishop of Baltimore, twenty-1  
Hone Bishops, sixteca Sees, and eight hundred mil oiu '  
HHH Pnests and Clergymen. The number of elmwhes is six j  
•WdtDdred and six; .Missionary Stations, five hundred-am. jU  
Ecclesiastical Seminaries, twenty-one; Fem.ih  
^PMf1®^ forty-six; Colleges and Literary Institu- 
tions, twenty-one; i'em;i!e Convents. thirty-three; lie- 
sit^js one hundred a d sixty-five other Institutions. sue! 
as schools for the testers of Charity, day schools ami  
Asylums, with about 15,000 pupils."  
The Popish AlmanacBUYS; "we count Canada*, with  
two Btshopricks, eight Bishops, one hundred and tbirty-
ihree Priests, aud five, hundred thousand Catholics;  
French Colonies, two hundred and forty thousand Cath- 
olics; three Spanish Colonies, with one thousand; Mex  
ioo, Guatemala an J Soith America, . with forty-four  
Bishopricks, and 23JW0.080 of Catholics. Total fortli!  
new world, seventy-four Bishopricks, aud 20,541,000| 
Catholics."  
In the Rhenish provinces, the Roman Catholic popu- 
lation amounts to 1,678,74"). In the whole grftesiau  
dominions, inclusive of those provinces, the number i.  
• (i.000,00!). In N assies, they form nearly three-full* o  
||| the population. In Austria, they constitute the mass o'  
|§ the community. Such, also, is the case in France  
H Spain, Portugal, Italv, Belgium, IM md, Sicily, Sardinia,  
350 Sou'li America, Maderia, parts of Greece, Inland, the  
E Azores, the Cape de Verd Islands, the Philippine  I: - 
H lan Is, Martinique, Islo of France, &c. &-,c. The nam  
her of Papists in the world, is not less than loo,000,- 
IgOOO; the number of Bishops is about 818 ; the number  
ii-i J. Priests 400,000; the number of Monks and Friars,  
>00.(MQ. TIIUJ in every part of the world, popery is  
• j) irsJnug its triumphant course, is trampling on the cou- 
gjfo?cienees of minkla 1, rendering wholecouutrics desolate  
J )f the Word of Clod.  
The same elements which are at vvSrk in other coun- 
tries, giving Popcrv such victories, are at work in this  
lew world. The Priests are equally diligent; tho pahr  
lie press is, to a vrrv great extent, in tlus hands of the  
• Papisti; men in high offices in our land are disposed to  
• assist them. Modern Liberalism. Infidelity, ultra Hijih  
ii Church doctrines, the principles  of Expediency—<all  
these things have  joined to help popery'forward in its  
irosjwrous aud "triumphant career. There are other  
symptoms of extraordinary zeal aud activity,' money  
Vom the Leopoldiue Institutions of Austria, and from  
.he l)u Propaganda.  
In I'ill,'tht* subscriptions collected by the Associa- 
•ionliTovthe propagation of the Initial faith throughout 
L'hristeu'hnn, amounted to  1,75:2,214 francs:—viz. in  
/rauce, 1,479,434 freiics; Bavaria, 210,000; Ireland,  
;}. 195,0111); Behdnm. 1.30,ti()0 ;. England. 33.0M ; l'ortii-„  
•  

00 ^aples, 61 000; Switzerland, 33.AJ0;  
M0: Tuscany, 41,000; and finally il,rt ,J  
iroiu other countries ^f E,lnS ? 
Arnica amounted together J X10 000 !  
The last appropriation of money for this new world.  
Ifchkran.. .Dr" Lef0Ve' Bidiopof  
^J^Dr. Jurcelrt^"^^  
RiphiaR!I; B^op of Philadcl- 
Rght Rev Dr". BiVhoj,' ofEich/nond,  
°n nsti  
24,f;0f>'  
05,000  
40,428  
15.000  
25,000  

Congregations and Missions  
The cn„,regati()fis of the Fudites in the diocesn  
of V mcenmv la. - .  
rile missions of thl;'T stjr-rs of MeVcy.  
The missions of the Lay.ari-ts, ..."  
The missions of the Jesuits, iu .Missouri  
| The missions of the Jesuits, in ivmtuckv 
?! file missions of the Lazarists, in Texas, '" " » , J§  
Besides the following given to the missions of British  
iijro-i^m &c-) —190,080—34,440—  
Fellow citizens and Christian brethren! What are  
vve doieg to check these  invaders of our civil and reli- 
gions liberties '~~na.pt. Recur !.  
With ,1,-se facts before us., and they are only a sketch  
of wh-.t m,d,t be given, who can doubt that the Sv  
last predictions concerning the Papal kin-rha; oxcent- 
mgi's destruction, have not been strictly fulffled ? It  
bliiiduess. nay madness to be unbelieving on a point  
so-clear Add to the above facts, the tri.mipbmV£ 
Veer of thrCathohcs under O'Conuell in Irelaud; the  
spread ol Peusyism, by policy aud craft, in England fed  
\in mca; toeir supremacy iu many parts of die wDrid  
and daring assumptions in others; their wealth tale'11'  
science intrigue and vvithall unexample,] perseverence'  
and a 1 but the bhnd mii-t see that within ten yea S 
Dr. Beacher predicts, "they will conquer tie world  
unless hey meet with some unforeseen cllcck n 11  S  
unparalleled success." Protestants, where is your mi  
lenium on tins principle  ? it most b3 , Catholic o e, 1'  
ZjttSt1^; -script^  
Nothing but the actual coming of Christ*vill ston  
prevailing iuHueuoe of the Catholics; and t at Sit  
soon; for they ha^eounted their numbers, haveK 
J, ..i their streu|ffii and zeal-will  U(>t retS E  
steps-then; object is the conqaest 0/the world- and  
some of their own number haveiuWed that w AinSj  
years they will obtain the victory. Then havo 1 I  
uot prevailed through policy W(l enfi * St S  
iiovver now mMod in heart, and iu heart sai l  
^•ta queen and am no widow and shall see no S!  
Rev Xviu,7. None can reasonably deny this. WhvXn  
lot believe that it will at this ver,, sta-, of ex lV io  
be .destroyed immediately as the word of £ Lo"  
clearly predicts ? R-v. xvai. 8. I 1„ lieve that it will »  
that too, within a very few months at loVS  i  
^



•